As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 20, 2012

Registration No. 333-           

811- 06032

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549

FORM N-4

REGISTRATION STATEMENT

UNDER

THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933	x
Pre-Effective Amendment No.	¨
Post-Effective Amendment No.	¨

and

REGISTRATION STATEMENT

UNDER

THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940

Amendment No. 99

SEPARATE ACCOUNT VA B

(Exact Name of Registrant)

TRANSAMERICA LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY

(Name of Depositor)

4333 Edgewood Road N.E.

Cedar Rapids, IA 52499-0001

(Address of Depositor’s Principal Executive Offices)

Depositor’s Telephone Number: (319) 355-8330

Darin D. Smith, Esq.

Transamerica Life Insurance Company

4333 Edgewood Road, N.E.

Cedar Rapids, IA 52499-4240

(Name and Address of Agent for Service)

Title of Securities Being Registered: Flexible Premium Variable Annuity Policies

Approximate Date of Proposed Public Offering:

As soon as practicable after the effective date of the Registration statement.

Registrant hereby amends this registration statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until Registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this registration statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933, or until the registration statement shall become effective on such date as the Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.

The information in this Prospectus is not complete and may be changed. This Prospectus is contained in a registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and we may not sell these securities until that registration statement is effective. This Prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any state where the offer or sale is not permitted.

PROSPECTUS (Subject to Completion             , 2013)

TRANSAMERICA VARIABLE ANNUITY SERIES

Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company
Separate Account B (EST. 1/19/1990)	Separate Account BNY (EST. 9/27/1994)
4333 Edgewood Road NE	4333 Edgewood Road NE
Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001	Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001
(800)525-6205	(800)525-6205
www.transamericaannuities.com	www.transamericaannuities.com

This prospectus describes information you should know before you purchase a Transamerica Variable Annuity Series variable annuity. The prospectus describes a contract between each owner and joint owner (“you”) and Transamerica Life Insurance Company or Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company (“us,” “we,” “our” or “Company”). This is an individual, deferred, flexible premium variable annuity. This variable annuity allows you to allocate your premium payments among the fixed account (if available) and the following portfolio companies:

AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. • American Funds Insurance Series • Fidelity^® Variable Insurance Products Fund • GE Investments Funds, Inc. • Transamerica Series Trust

This prospectus also refers to the following share classes: B-Share, C-Share, L-Share and X-Share. A share class will be selected on your application and identified in your policy.

This prospectus and the underlying fund prospectuses give you important information about the policies and the underlying fund portfolios. Please read them carefully before you invest and keep them for future reference. You can also contact us to get a Statement of Additional Information (SAI) free of charge. The SAI contains more information about this policy. A registration statement, including the SAI, has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and the SAI is incorporated herein by reference. The prospectus and SAI can also be obtained from the SEC’s website (www.sec.gov). The table of contents of the SAI is included at the end of this prospectus. The Securities and Exchange Commission has not approved or disapproved these securities, or passed upon the adequacy of this prospectus. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

If you elect the X-Share, we will add a credit to your policy value for each premium payment that you make. Generally, an annuity with a premium enhancement will have higher overall expenses than a similar annuity without a premium enhancement; the amount credited under the premium enhancement may be more than offset by the additional fees and charges associated with the premium enhancement. You should always consider the expenses along with the features and enhancements to be sure that any annuity meets your financial needs and goals.

This variable annuity may not be suitable for everyone. This variable annuity may not be appropriate for people who do not have a long investment time horizon and is not appropriate for people who intend to engage in market timing. You will get no additional tax advantage from this variable annuity if you are investing in a variable annuity through a tax-advantaged retirement plan (such as a 401(k) plan or Individual Retirement Account (“IRA”)). This prospectus is not intended to provide tax, accounting or legal advice.

We are not an investment adviser nor are we registered as such with the SEC or any state securities regulatory authority. We are not acting in any fiduciary capacity with respect to your investment nor are we acting for any tax-advantaged retirement plan. This information does not constitute personalized investment advice or financial planning advice.

Prospectus Date: May 1, 2013

Statement of Additional Information Date: May 1, 2013

2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION	5
FEE TABLE AND EXPENSE EXAMPLES	6
THE ANNUITY	11
PURCHASE	11
Policy Issue Requirements	11
Premium Payments	12
Policy Value	13
INVESTMENT OPTIONS	14
Selection of Underlying Portfolios	15
Addition, Deletion, or Substitution of Investments	16
The Fixed Account.	17
Transfers	18
Market Timing and Disruptive Trading	19
EXPENSES	22
Surrender Charges	22
Excess Interest Adjustment	23
Mortality and Expense Risk Fees	24
Premium Taxes	24
Federal, State and Local Taxes	24
Special Service Fees	24
Transfer Fee	24
Administrative Charges	24
Fund Facilitation Fee	25
Optional Benefits	25
Portfolio Fees and Expenses	25
Reduced Fees and Charges	25
Revenue We Receive	25
ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY	28
Surrenders	28
Delay of Payment and Transfers	28
Excess Interest Adjustment	29
Signature Guarantee	30
ANNUITY PAYMENTS (THE INCOME PHASE)	31
Annuity Payment Options	31
DEATH BENEFIT	33
When We Pay A Death Benefit	33
When We Do Not Pay A Death Benefit	34
Deaths After the Annuity Commencement Date	34

Succession of Ownership	34
Amount of Death Benefit	35
Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit	35
Adjusted Partial Surrender	37
TAX INFORMATION	38
ADDITIONAL FEATURES	49
Systematic Payout Option	49
Liquidity Rider	49
Additional Death Distribution	50
Additional Death Distribution+	52
Nursing Care and Terminal Condition Withdrawal Option	53
Unemployment Waiver	53
Telephone Transactions	54
Dollar Cost Averaging Program	54
Asset Rebalancing	56
Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefits	56
Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM Rider	56
Income LinkSM Rider	65
Retirement Income MaxSM Rider	73
Retirement Income ChoiceSM 1.6 Rider	81
OTHER INFORMATION	92
State Variations	92
Ownership	93
Beneficiary	93
Right to Cancel Period	93
Assignment	94
Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order	94
Regulatory Modifications to Policy	94
Certain Offers	94
Mixed and Shared Funding	95
Exchanges and Reinstatements	95
Voting Rights	95
Legal Proceedings	96
Information About Us	96
Financial Condition	96
The Separate Account	97
The Funds	98
Distribution of the Policies	98

3

TABLE OF CONTENTS continued

TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION	101
GLOSSARY OF TERMS	102
APPENDIX
PORTFOLIOS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SUBACCOUNTS	104
APPENDIX
EXCESS INTEREST ADJUSTMENT EXAMPLES	108
APPENDIX
DEATH BENEFIT	112
APPENDIX
ADDITIONAL DEATH DISTRIBUTION RIDER	115
APPENDIX
ADDITIONAL DEATH DISTRIBUTION+ RIDER	116
APPENDIX
GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT COMPARISON TABLE	117
APPENDIX
GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTIONSM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS	122

APPENDIX
PAM METHOD TRANSFERS	129
APPENDIX
GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT ADJUSTED PARTIAL SURRENDERS - INCOME LINKSM RIDER	132
APPENDIX
GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT ADJUSTED PARTIAL SURRENDERS - RETIREMENT INCOME MAXSM RIDER	134
APPENDIX
HYPOTHETICAL EXAMPLE OF THE WITHDRAWAL BASE CALCULATION - RETIREMENT INCOME MAXSM RIDER	137
APPENDIX
GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT ADJUSTED PARTIAL SURRENDERS - RETIREMENT INCOME CHOICESM 1.6 RIDER	139

4

INTRODUCTION

How to buy this variable annuity

ü CHOOSE A SHARE CLASS

	Qualified Policy* Minimum Initial Deposit	Non-Qualified Policy Minimum Initial Deposit	Surrender Charge Period	Mortality & Expense Risk and Administrative Charges
B-Share	$1,000	$5,000	7 years	1.15%
C-Share	$1,000	$5,000	none	1.55%
L-Share	$1,000	$5,000	4 years	1.50%
X-Share	$1,000	$5,000	9 years	1.50%

* We currently issue new policies to the following qualified plans: Traditional IRAs, Roth IRAs, SEP-IRAs, 457(f) plans (in certain circumstances) and Section 401(a) plans (including profit sharing plans, defined benefit pension plans, defined contribution pension plans, 401(k) plans, combination defined benefit/contribution plans).

This table does not show underlying fund portfolio expenses, annual service charge and optional rider fees. Each share class has its own minimum policy value requirements. Not all share classes may be available through your Financial Intermediary.

ü CHOOSE INVESTMENT OPTIONS

• Subaccounts - Funds representing a range of investment strategies, objectives and asset classes

• Fixed Account - A fixed interest account (if available).

Subject to limitations, you may move your investment among each of these investment options.

ü CHOOSE OPTIONAL GUARANTEED BENEFITS (IF DESIRED)

Lifetime Withdrawal Benefits	Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM*
	Income LinkSM*
	Retirement Income MaxSM*
	Retirement Income ChoiceSM 1.6*
Death Benefits	Return of Premium*
	Annual Step-Up*
	Additional Death Distribution*
	Additional Death Distribution +*
L-Share Rider (only with B-Share Class)	Liquidity Rider

* Investment restrictions apply

Optional benefits may not be available through your Financial intermediary or in all states.

ü COMPLETE OUR APPLICATION OR ORDER FORM

ü PAY THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM INITIAL DEPOSIT

5

FEE TABLE AND EXPENSE EXAMPLES

The following describes the fees and expenses that you will pay when buying, owning, and surrendering the policy. Please be certain to review the notes following the fee table and expense examples for further information about the fees and charges presented. The order of the notes follows the order in which the fees and charges under the policy are presented in the fee tables and the expense examples.

The fee table applies only to the accumulation phase and reflects the maximum charges unless otherwise noted. During the income phase the fees may be different than those described in the Fee Table. See EXPENSES.

The first section describes the fees and expenses that you will pay at the time that you buy the policy, surrender the policy, or transfer cash value between investment options. State premium taxes may also be deducted. Excess interest adjustments may be made to amounts surrendered or applied to annuity payment options from cash value from the fixed account. (All fees are maximum for purchases made while this prospectus is effective unless otherwise noted.)

Policy Owner Transaction Expenses:

	B-Share	C-Share	L-Share	X-Share
Front-End Sales Load On Purchase Payments	0%	0%	0%	0%
Contingent Deferred Surrender Charges (as a percentage of premium surrendered)
Number of Years Since Premium Payment Date
1	8%	0%	8%	9%
2	8%	0%	8%	8%
3	7%	0%	7%	7%
4	6%	0%	6%	6%
5	5%	0%	0%	5%
6	4%	0%	0%	4%
7	3%	0%	0%	3%
8	0%	0%	0%	2%
9	0%	0%	0%	1%
10+	0%	0%	0%	0%
Transfer Fee	$0-$10	$0-$10	$0-$10	$0-$10
Special Service Fee	$0-$25	$0-$25	$0-$25	$0-$25

The next section describes the fees and expenses that you will pay periodically during the time that you own the policy, not including portfolio fees and expenses. (All fees are maximum for purchases made while this prospectus is effective unless otherwise noted.)

6

Classes	B-Share	C-Share	L-Share	X-Share
Annual Service Charge	$0 - $50	$0 - $50	$0 - 50	$0 - $50
Separate Account Annual Expenses (as a percentage, annually, of average separate account value):
Mortality and Expense Risk Fee	1.00%	1.40%	1.35%	1.35%
Administrative Charge	0.15%	0.15%	0.15%	0.15%
Total Base Separate Account Annual Expenses	1.15%	1.55%	1.50%	1.50%
Optional Separate Account Expenses:
Return of Premium Death Benefit	0.15%	0.15%	0.15%	0.15%
Annual Step-Up Death Benefit	0.35%	0.35%	0.35%	0.35%
Fund Facilitation Fee	0.30%	0.30%	0.30%	0.30%
Liquidity Rider (only available with B-Share)	0.50%	——	——	——
Optional Rider Charges:
Additional Death Distribution (annual charge based on policy value)	0.25%	0.25%	0.25%	0.25%
Additional Death Distribution + (annual charge based on policy value)	0.55%	0.55%	0.55%	0.55%

Optional Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Rider Charges:	Maximum	Current
Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM (aka Living Benefits Rider) (annual charge - % of Total Withdrawal Base)	0.90%	0.90%
Income LinkSM (annual charge - % of Withdrawal Base)	1.65%	0.90%
Retirement Income MaxSM (annual charge - % of Withdrawal Base)	2.00%	1.25%
Retirement Income ChoiceSM 1.6 (annual charge - % of Withdrawal Base)
Base Benefit Designated Allocation Group A	2.30%	1.55%
Base Benefit Designated Allocation Group B	1.85%	1.10%
Base Benefit Designated Allocation Group C	1.45%	0.70%
Additional Benefits available with Retirement Income ChoiceSM 1.6 rider:
Death Benefit - (Single Life Option)	0.40%	0.40%
Death Benefit - (Joint Life Option)	0.35%	0.35%
Income EnhancementSM - (Single Life Option - Not available in NY)	0.30%	0.30%
Income EnhancementSM - (Joint Life Option - Not available in NY)	0.50%	0.50%

The next section shows the lowest and highest total operating expenses charged by the underlying fund portfolios for the year ended December 31, 2012 (before any fee waiver or expense reimbursements). Expenses may be higher or lower in future years. More detail concerning each portfolio’s fees and expenses is contained in the prospectus for each portfolio.

Total Portfolio Annual Operating Expenses (Expenses that are deducted from portfolio assets, including management fees, distribution and/or service 12b-1 fees, and other expenses):

7

Lowest Gross	0.53	%
Highest Gross	1.52	%

The following Example is intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the policy with the cost of investing in other variable annuity policies. These costs include policy owner transaction expenses, policy fees, separate account annual expenses, and portfolio fees and expenses.

The Example assumes that you invest $10,000 in the policy for the time periods indicated. The Example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year, the highest fees and expenses of any of the portfolios for the year ended December 31, 2012, and the base policy with the combination of available optional features or riders with the highest fees and expenses, including the Highest Fund Facilitation Fee, Annual Step-Up Death Benefit, Additional Death Distribution+ Rider, and Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider - Joint Life with additional Death Benefit and Income Enhancement^SM options. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs would be:

Expense Examples:

If the policy is surrendered at the end of the applicable time period:

	B-Share	B-Share	C-Share	L-Share	X-Share
		w/Liquidity
1 Year	$1368	$1417	$687	$1402	$1492
3 Years	$2595	$2733	$2075	$2691	$2691

If the policy is annuitized at the end of the applicable time period or if you do not surrender your policy:

	B-Share	B-Share	C-Share	L-Share	X-Share
		w/Liquidity
1 Year	$648	$697	$687	$682	$682
3 Years	$1965	$2103	$2075	$2061	$2061

Please remember that the Example is an illustration and does not represent past or future expenses. Your actual expenses may be lower or higher than those reflected in the Example. Similarly, your rate of return may be more or less than the 5% assumed in the Example.

For information concerning compensation paid for the sale of the policies, see OTHER INFORMATION - Distributor of the Policies.

NOTES TO FEE TABLE AND EXPENSE EXAMPLES

Annual Service Charge:

The current annual service charge is $35. If your policy value or the sum of all premium payments less all partial surrenders is at least $50,000 the entire annual service charge is waived.

8

Policy Owner Transaction Expenses:

Maximum Surrender Charge: The surrender charge, if any is imposed, applies to each premium, regardless of how policy value is allocated among the investment options. The surrender charge decreases based on the number of years since the premium payment was made.

Transfer Fee: The transfer fee, if any is imposed, applies to each policy, regardless of how policy value is allocated among the investment options. There is no fee for the first 12 transfers per policy year. For additional transfers, we may charge a fee of $10 per transfer.

Special Service Fees: We may deduct a charge for special services, such as overnight delivery.

Separate Account Annual Expenses:

Mortality and Expense Risk Fee: The mortality and expense risk fee shown is for the accumulation phase with the base death benefit. During the income phase, the mortality and expense risk fee is at an annual rate of 1.25%.

Optional Separate Account Expenses: Any optional separate account expense is in addition to the mortality and expense risk and administrative fees.

Fund Facilitation Fee: This daily fee is applied only to policy value in the subaccounts invested in:

Fund	Fee %
American Funds - Asset Allocation Fund - Class 2; American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2;	0.30%
American Funds - Growth Fund - Class 2; American Funds Growth-Income Fund - Class 2;
American Funds International Fund - Class 2
AllianceBernstein Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio - Class B; GE Investments Total Return	0.20%
Fund - Class 2
Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund - Class 4	0.15%
TA BlackRock Global Allocation - Service Class	0.10%

See EXPENSES for additional information.

Total Separate Account Annual Expenses with Highest Optional Separate Account Expenses: This reflects the base separate account expenses, the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit fee, plus the Fund Facilitation fee, but does not include any annual optional rider fees. The death benefits are mutually exclusive.

Optional Rider Fees:

In some cases, riders to the policy are available that provide optional benefits. There are additional fees (each year)for those riders.

Income Link^SM Rider and Retirement Income Max^SM Rider Fees:

Maximum Total Fees with Highest Combination of Benefits: This fee total reflects the maximum fee increase resulting from an automatic step-up of the Withdrawal Base while the rider is in effect.

9

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider:

Maximum Total Fees with Highest Combination of Benefits: These fee totals reflect the maximum fee increase resulting from an automatic step-up of the Withdrawal Base while the rider is in effect.

Maximum Total Fees (Joint Life) with Highest Combination of Benefits: This reflects the Base Benefit Designated Allocation Group A (Maximum), the Death Benefit (Joint Life Option), plus the Income Enhancement^SM Benefit (Joint Life Option).

Current Total Fees (Joint Life) with Highest Combination of Benefits: This reflects the Base Benefit Designated Allocation Group A (Current), the Death Benefit (Joint Life Option), plus the Income Enhancement^SM Benefit (Joint Life Option).

Total Portfolio Annual Operating Expenses:

The fee table information relating to the underlying fund portfolios was provided to us by the underlying fund portfolios, their investment advisers or managers, and we have not and cannot independently verify the accuracy or completeness of such information. Actual future expenses of the portfolios may be greater or less than those shown in the Table. “Gross” expense figures do not reflect any fee waivers or expense reimbursements. Actual expenses may have been lower than those shown in the Table.

Expense Examples:

The Example does not reflect premium tax charges or transfer fees. Different fees and expenses not reflected in the Example may be assessed during the income phase of the policy.

10

THE ANNUITY

This prospectus describes information you should know before you purchase the Transamerica Variable Annuity Series. This prospectus generally describes policies issued on or after the date of this prospectus.

An annuity is a contract between you, the owner, and an insurance company (in this case us), where the insurance company promises to pay you an income in the form of annuity payments. These payments begin on a designated date, referred to as the annuity commencement date. Until the annuity commencement date, your annuity is in the accumulation phase and the earnings (if any) are tax deferred. Tax deferral means you generally are generally not taxed until you take money out of your annuity. After you annuitize, your annuity switches to the income phase.

The policy is a “deferred” annuity. You can use the policy to accumulate funds for retirement or other long-term financial planning purposes. Your individual investment and your rights are determined primarily by your own policy.

The policy is a “flexible premium” annuity because after you purchase it, you can generally make additional investments of at least $50 (but not more than the stated maximum premium addition amount) until the annuity commencement date. You are not required to make any additional investments.

The policy is a “variable” annuity because the value of your investments can go up or down based on the performance of your investment options. If you invest in the separate account, the amount of money you are able to accumulate in your policy during the accumulation phase depends upon the performance of your investment options. You could lose the amount you allocate to the separate account. The amount of annuity payments you receive during the income phase from the separate account also depends upon the investment performance of your investment options for the income phase.

The policy may also contain a fixed account. If the fixed account is offered it will offer interest at a rate(s) that we guarantee will not decrease during the selected guaranteed period. There may be different interest rates for each different guaranteed period that we may offer and that you select.

Do not purchase this policy if you plan to use it, or any of its riders, for resale, speculation, arbitrage, viatication, or any other type of collective investment scheme. Your policy is not intended or designed to be traded on any stock exchange or secondary market. By purchasing this policy, you represent and warrant that you are not using the policy, or any of its riders for resale, speculation, arbitrage, viatication, or any other type of collective investment scheme.

PURCHASE

Policy Issue Requirements

We will not issue a policy unless:

• we receive in good order (See OTHER INFORMATION - Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order) all information needed to issue the policy;

• we receive in good order (at our Administrative and Service Office) a minimum initial premium payment; and

11

• the annuitant, owner, and any joint owner are age 89 or younger (the limit may be lower for qualified policies).

We reserve the right to reject any application or premium payment.

Premium Payments

General. You should make checks for premium payments payable to Transamerica Life Insurance Company or Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company, as applicable, and send them to the Administrative and Service Office. Your check must be honored in order for us to pay any associated payments and benefits due under the policy.

We do not accept cash. We reserve the right to not accept third party checks. A third party check is a check that is made payable to one person who endorses it and offers it as payment to a second person. Checks should normally be payable to us, however, in some circumstances, at our discretion we may accept third party checks that are from a rollover or transfer from other financial institutions. Any third party checks not accepted by us will be returned.

We reserve the right to reject or accept any form of payment. Any unacceptable forms of payment will be returned.

Initial Premium Requirements. The initial premium payment for nonqualified policies must be at least $5,000, and at least $1,000 for qualified policies. You must obtain our prior approval to purchase a policy with an amount less than the stated minimum. There is generally no minimum initial premium payment for policies issued under section 403(b) of the Internal Revenue Code; however, your premium must be received within 90 days of the policy date or your policy will be canceled. We will credit your initial premium payment to your policy within two business days after the day we receive it and your complete policy information in good order. If we are unable to credit your initial premium payment, we will contact you within five business days and explain why. We will also return your initial premium payment at that time unless you let us keep it and credit it as soon as possible.

The date on which we credit your initial premium payment to your policy is generally the policy date. The policy date is used to determine policy years, policy months and policy anniversaries.

There may be lengthy delays in our receipt of applications that are outside of our control (for example, because of the failure of the selling broker/dealer or sales agent to forward the application to us promptly, or because of delays in determining whether the policy is suitable for you). Any such delays will affect when your policy can be issued and your premium allocated among your investment choices.

Additional Premium Payments. You are not required to make any additional premium payments. However, you can generally make additional premium payments during the accumulation phase. Additional premium payments must be at least $50. After the first policy year, additional premium payments each policy year cannot, in the aggregate, exceed $25,000 for nonqualified policies and the lesser of (1) the IRS maximum annual contribution limit or (2) $60,000 for qualified policies. We will credit additional premium payments to your policy as of the market day we receive your premium and required information in good order at our Administrative and Service Office. Additional premium payments must be received before the close of the New York Stock Exchange (usually 4:00 p.m. Eastern time) to get same-day pricing of the additional premium payment.

12

Maximum Total Premium Payments. For issue ages 0-80, we reserve the right to reject cumulative premium payments over $1,000,000 (this includes subsequent premium payments) for policies with the same owner or same annuitant issued by us or an affiliate. For issue ages over 80, we reserve the right to reject cumulative premium payments over $500,000 (this includes subsequent premium payments) for policies with the same owner or same annuitant issued by us or an affiliate.

Allocation of Premium Payments. When you purchase a policy, we will allocate your premium payment to the investment choices you select. Your allocation must be in whole percentages and must total 100%. We will allocate additional premium payments the same way, unless you request a different allocation. You could lose the amount you allocate to the variable subaccounts.

If you allocate premium payments to the Dollar Cost Averaging program (if it is available), you must give us instructions regarding the subaccount(s) to which transfers are to be made or we cannot accept your premium payment.

You may change allocations for future additional premium payments by sending written instructions to our Administrative and Service Office, or by telephone, subject to the limitations described in ADDITIONAL FEATURES - Telephone Transactions. The allocation change will apply to premium payments received on or after the date we receive the change request in good order.

We reserve the right to restrict or refuse any premium payment.

Policy Value

You should expect your policy value to change from valuation period to valuation period. A valuation period begins at the close of trading on the New York Stock Exchange on each market day and ends at the close of trading on the next succeeding market day. A market day is each day that the New York Stock Exchange is open for business. The New York Stock Exchange generally closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time. Holidays are generally not market days.

Premium Enhancement (X-Share). If you elect the X-share, an amount equal to the applicable premium enhancement percentage (as set forth below) of the initial premium payment will be added to the policy value. The amount of the premium enhancement is not considered a premium payment and therefore may not be included in the calculation of certain policy features (such as certain death benefits or living benefits) or in the calculation of fees and charges that are based on premium payments made. The premium enhancement percentage may vary from premium to premium on subsequent premium payments, but will never be less than 0.25% nor more than 7%. A confirmation will be sent advising the owner of the amount of premium enhancement applicable to each subsequent premium payment. No premium enhancement will apply if the policy is canceled pursuant to the right to cancel provision.

The premium enhancement percentage is determined by the annuitant’s age at the time of each premium payment. The percentage will decrease as the annuitant’s attained age increases. The following schedule shows the current premium enhancement percentages:

13

Annuitant’s Age	Premium Enhancement Percentage
0-59	5.5%
60-69	5.0%
70-79	4.0%
80+	2.0%

The current premium enhancement percentages are not guaranteed and, as noted above, may change to as little as 0.25%.

Generally, an annuity with a premium enhancement may have higher expenses than a similar annuity without a premium enhancement. Accordingly, you should always consider the expenses along with the features and enhancements to be sure any annuity meets your financial needs and goals.

There is no specific charge for the premium enhancement. We expect to use a portion of the mortality and expense risk fee, administrative charge and/or the surrender charge to pay the premium enhancement.

Once we have received all necessary regulatory approvals, we may take back or “recapture” the full dollar amount of any premium enhancement upon the occurrence of any of the following events: (1) exercise of the right to cancel option; (2) exercise of the Nursing Care and Terminal Condition Withdrawal Option or the Unemployment Waiver within one year from the time we apply the premium enhancement; (3) a death benefit is payable within one year from the time we apply the premium enhancement; or (4) annuitization within one year from the time we apply the premium enhancement. In certain unusual circumstances, you might be worse off because of the premium enhancement. This could happen if we recapture the dollar amount of the premium enhancement and the overall investment performance of your policy was negative (if the overall investment performance of your policy was positive you would be better off).

The Internal Revenue Code generally requires that interests in a qualified policy be nonforfeitable, and it is unclear whether the premium enhancement feature is consistent with those requirements. Consult a tax adviser before purchasing the X-share as a qualified policy.

The premium enhancement may vary for certain policies and may not be available for all policies.

INVESTMENT OPTIONS

This policy offers you a means of investing in various underlying fund portfolios offered by different investment companies (by investing in the corresponding subaccounts). The companies that provide investment advice and administrative services for the underlying fund portfolios offered through this policy are listed in the “Appendix -Portfolios Associated with the Subaccounts”.

The general public may not purchase shares of any of these underlying fund portfolios. The names and investment objectives and policies may be similar to other portfolios managed by the same investment adviser or manager that are sold directly to the public. You should not expect the investment results of the underlying fund portfolios to be the same as those of other portfolios.

14

More detailed information, including an explanation of the portfolios’ fees and investment objectives, may be found in the current prospectuses for the underlying fund portfolios, which accompany this prospectus. You should read the prospectuses for the underlying fund portfolios carefully before you invest.

Note: If you received a summary prospectus for any of the portfolios listed in “Appendix - Portfolios Associated with the Subaccounts”, please follow the instructions on the first page of the summary prospectus to obtain a copy of the full fund prospectus.

Selection of Underlying Portfolios

The underlying fund portfolios offered through this variable annuity are selected by us, and we may consider various factors, including, but not limited to, asset class coverage, the strength of the adviser’s or sub-adviser’s reputation and tenure, brand recognition, performance, volatility, hedgeability, and the capability and qualification of each investment firm. Another factor that we may consider is whether the underlying fund portfolio or its service providers (e.g., the investment adviser or sub-advisers) or its affiliates will make payments to us or our affiliates. For additional information about these arrangements, see EXPENSES - Revenue We Receive. We review the portfolios periodically and may remove a portfolio, or limit its availability to new premiums and/or transfers of cash value if we determine that a portfolio no longer satisfies one or more of the selection criteria, and/or if the portfolio has not attracted significant allocations from owners. We have included the Transamerica Series Trust (“TST”) underlying fund portfolios at least in part because they are managed by one of our affiliates, Transamerica Asset Management, Inc. (“TAM”).

We have developed this variable annuity in cooperation with one or more distributors, and have included certain underlying fund portfolios based on their recommendations; their selection criteria may differ from our selection criteria.

You are responsible for choosing the subaccounts which invest in the underlying fund portfolios, and the amounts allocated to each, that are appropriate for your own individual circumstances and your investment goals, financial situation, and risk tolerance. Because investment risk is borne by you, decisions regarding investment allocations should be carefully considered. We do not recommend or endorse any particular underlying fund portfolio and we do not provide investment advice.

In making your investment selections, we encourage you to thoroughly investigate all of the information regarding the underlying fund portfolios that are available to you, including each underlying fund portfolio’s prospectus, statement of additional information and annual and semi-annual reports. Other sources such as the Fund’s website or newspapers and financial and other magazines provide more current information, including information about any regulatory actions or investigations relating to a Fund or underlying fund portfolio. After you select underlying fund portfolios for your initial premium, you should monitor and periodically re-evaluate your allocations to determine if they are still appropriate.

You bear the risk of any decline in the cash value of your policy resulting from the performance of the underlying fund portfolios you have chosen.

15

We do not guarantee that any of the subaccounts will always be available for premium payments, allocations, or transfers. We will not add, delete or substitute any underlying fund portfolio shares attributable to your interest in a subaccount without notice to you and prior approval of the SEC, to the extent required by the 1940 Act or other applicable law.

We reserve the right to limit the number of subaccounts you are invested in at any one time.

Addition, Deletion, or Substitution of Investments

We cannot and do not guarantee that any of the subaccounts will always be available for premium payments, allocations, or transfers. We retain the right, subject to any applicable law, to make certain changes to the separate account and its investments. We reserve the right to add new portfolios (or portfolio classes) or close existing portfolios (or portfolio classes). We also reserve the right to eliminate the shares of any portfolio held by a subaccount and to substitute shares of another portfolio of the underlying fund portfolios, or of another registered open-end management investment company for the shares of any portfolio, if the shares of the portfolio are no longer available for investment or if, in our judgment, investment in any portfolio would be inappropriate in view of the purposes of the separate account. To the extent required by the 1940 Act, as amended, substitutions of shares attributable to your interest in a subaccount will not be made without prior notice to you and the prior approval of the SEC. Nothing contained herein shall prevent the separate account from purchasing other securities for other series or classes of variable annuity policies, or from affecting an exchange between series or classes of variable annuity policies on the basis of your requests.

New subaccounts may be established when, in our sole discretion, marketing, tax, investment or other conditions warrant. Any new subaccounts may be made available to existing owners on a basis to be determined by us. Each additional subaccount will purchase shares in a mutual fund portfolio, or other investment vehicle. We may also eliminate one or more subaccounts if, in our sole discretion, marketing, tax, investment or other conditions warrant such change. In the event any subaccount is eliminated, we will notify you and request a reallocation of the amounts invested in the eliminated subaccount.

Similarly, we may, at our discretion, close a subaccount to new investment. Any subsequent premium payments, asset rebalance programs or dollar cost averaging transactions into a closed subaccount will be re-allocated to the remaining available investment options according to the investment allocation instructions you previously provided. Under asset rebalance programs the value remaining in the closed fund will be excluded from any future rebalancing. The value of the closed fund will continue to fluctuate due to portfolio performance, and may exceed the original rebalance percentages you requested. As you consider your overall investment strategy within your policy, you should also consider whether or not to re-allocate the value remaining in the closed fund to another investment choice. If you decide to re-allocate the value of the closed fund, you will need to provide us with instructions to achieve your goal.

If you allocate premium to a subaccount that is closed to new investment, we will require new instructions. If we do not receive new instructions, the requested transaction will be canceled and the premium will be returned.

16

In the event of any such substitution or change, we may, by appropriate endorsement, make such changes in the policies as may be necessary or appropriate to reflect such substitution or change. Furthermore, if deemed to be in the best interests of persons having voting rights under the policies, the separate account may be (1) operated as a management company under the 1940 Act or any other form permitted by law, (2) deregistered under the 1940 Act in the event such registration is no longer required or (3) combined with one or more other separate accounts. To the extent permitted by applicable law, we also may (1) transfer the assets of the separate account associated with the policies to another account or accounts, (2) restrict or eliminate any voting rights of owners or other persons who have voting rights as to the separate account, (3) create new separate accounts, (4) add new subaccounts to or remove existing subaccounts from the separate account, or combine subaccounts or (5) add new underlying fund portfolios, or substitute a new fund for an existing fund.

The Fixed Account.

The fixed account may, but will not always, be available. If available, premium payments allocated and amounts transferred to the fixed account become part of our general account. Interests in the general account have not been registered under the Securities Act of 1933 (the “1933 Act”), nor is the general account registered as an investment company under the 1940 Act. Accordingly, neither the general account nor any interests therein are generally subject to the provisions of the 1933 or 1940 Acts. Disclosures relating to interests in the general account may, however, be subject to certain generally applicable provisions of the federal securities laws relating to the accuracy of statements made in a registration statement.

While we do not guarantee that the fixed account will always be available for investment, we do guarantee that the interest credited to the fixed account when available will not be less than the guaranteed minimum effective annual interest rate shown on your policy (the “guaranteed minimum”). We determine credited rates, which are guaranteed for at least one year, in our sole discretion. You bear the risk that we will not credit interest greater than the guaranteed minimum. At the end of the guaranteed period option you selected, the value in that guaranteed period option will automatically be transferred into the money market subaccount or if a money market subaccount is unavailable to a new guaranteed period option of the same length (or the next shorter period if the same period is no longer offered) at the current interest rate for that period. You can transfer to another investment option by giving us notice within 30 days before the end of the expiring guaranteed period.

Full and partial surrenders and transfers from a guaranteed period option of the fixed account prior to the end of the guaranteed period are generally subject to an excess interest adjustment (except for policies issued in New York by Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company). See ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY - Excess Interest Adjustment for more information about when an excess interest adjustment applies. This adjustment will also be made to amounts that you apply to an annuity payment option. This adjustment may increase or decrease the amount of interest credited to your policy. The excess interest adjustment will not decrease the interest credited to your policy below the guaranteed minimum.

We also guarantee that upon full surrender your cash value attributable to the fixed account will not be less than the amount required by the applicable nonforfeiture law at the time the policy is issued.

17

If you select the fixed account, when it is available, your money will be placed with our other general assets. The amount of money you are able to accumulate in the fixed account during the accumulation phase depends upon the total interest credited. The amount of each annuity payment you receive during the income phase from the fixed portion of your policy will remain level for the entire income phase. The interest credited as well as principal invested in the fixed account is based on the claims-paying ability of Transamerica.

We reserve the right to refuse any premium payment or transfer to the fixed account.

Transfers

During the accumulation phase, you may make transfers to or from any investment option within certain limitations. Transfers out of a guaranteed period option of the fixed account are limited to the following:

• Transfers at the end of a guaranteed period.

• Transfers of amounts equal to interest credited. This may affect your overall interest-crediting rate, because transfers are deemed to come from the oldest premium payment first.

• Other than at the end of a guaranteed period, transfers of amounts from the guaranteed period option in excess of amounts equal to interest credited, are subject to an excess interest adjustment. If it is a negative adjustment, the maximum amount you can transfer in any one policy year is 25% of the amount in that guaranteed period option, less any previous transfers during the current policy year. If it is a positive adjustment, we do not limit the amount that you can transfer. (Note: This restriction may prolong the period of time it takes to transfer the full amount in the guaranteed period option of the fixed account. You should carefully consider whether investment in the fixed account meets your needs and investment criteria.)

Each transfer must be at least $500, or the entire subaccount value. Transfers of interest from a guaranteed period option of the fixed account must be at least $50. If less than $500 remains as a result of the transfer, then we reserve the right to include that amount in the transfer. Transfer requests must be received in good order while the New York Stock Exchange is open to get same-day pricing of the transaction. See OTHER INFORMATION - Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order.

The number of transfers permitted may be limited and a $10 charge for each transfer in excess of 12 in any policy year may apply. We reserve the right to prohibit transfers to the fixed account.

During the income phase, you may transfer values out of any subaccount; however, you cannot transfer values out of the fixed account. The minimum amount that can be transferred during this phase is the lesser of $10 of monthly income, or the entire monthly income of the annuity units in the subaccount from which the transfer is being made.

Transfers made by telephone are subject to the limitations described in ADDITIONAL FEATURES - Telephone Transactions.

18

Market Timing and Disruptive Trading

Statement of Policy. This variable annuity was not designed for the use of market timers or frequent or disruptive traders. (Frequent transfers are considered to be disruptive.) Such transfers may be harmful to the underlying fund portfolios and increase transaction costs.

Market timing and disruptive trading among the subaccounts or between the subaccounts and the fixed account can cause risks with adverse effects for other policy owners (and beneficiaries and underlying fund portfolios). These risks and harmful effects include:

(1) dilution of the interests of long-term investors in a subaccount if purchases or transfers into or out of an underlying fund portfolio are made at prices that do not reflect an accurate value for the underlying fund portfolio’s investments (some market timers attempt to do this through methods known as “time-zone arbitrage” and “liquidity arbitrage”);

(2) an adverse effect on portfolio management, such as:

(a) impeding a portfolio manager’s ability to sustain an investment objective;

(b) causing the underlying fund portfolio to maintain a higher level of cash than would otherwise be the case; or

(c) causing an underlying fund portfolio to liquidate investments prematurely (or otherwise at an inopportune time) in order to pay withdrawals or transfers out of the underlying fund portfolio; and

(3) increased brokerage and administrative expenses.

These costs are borne by all policy owners invested in those subaccounts, not just those making the transfers.

We have developed policies and procedures with respect to market timing and disruptive trading (which vary for certain subaccounts at the request of the corresponding underlying fund portfolios) and we do not make special arrangements or grant exceptions to accommodate market timing or potentially disruptive trading. As discussed herein, we cannot detect or deter all market timing or potentially disruptive trading. Do not invest with us if you intend to conduct market timing or potentially disruptive trading.

Detection. We employ various means in an attempt to detect and deter market timing and disruptive trading. However, despite our monitoring we may not be able to detect nor halt all harmful trading. In addition, because other insurance companies (and retirement plans) with different policies and procedures may invest in the underlying fund portfolios, we cannot guarantee that all harmful trading will be detected or that an underlying fund portfolio will not suffer harm from market timing and disruptive trading among subaccounts of variable products issued by these other insurance companies or retirement plans.

Deterrence. If we determine you are engaged in market timing or disruptive trading, we may take one or more actions in an attempt to halt such trading. Your ability to make transfers is subject to modification or restriction if we determine, in our sole opinion, that your exercise of the transfer privilege may disadvantage or potentially harm the rights or interests of other policy owners (or others having an interest in the variable insurance products). As described below, restrictions may take various forms, but under our current policies and procedures will include loss of expedited transfer privileges. We consider transfers by telephone, fax, overnight mail, or the Internet to be

19

“expedited” transfers. This means that we would accept only written transfer requests with an original signature transmitted to us only by U.S. mail. We may also restrict the transfer privileges of others acting on your behalf, including your registered representative or an asset allocation or investment advisory service.

We reserve the right to reject any premium payment or transfer request from any person without prior notice, if, in our judgment, (1) the payment or transfer, or series of transfers, would have a negative impact on an underlying fund portfolio’s operations, or (2) if an underlying fund portfolio would reject or has rejected our purchase order or has instructed us not to allow that purchase or transfer, or (3) because of a history of market timing or disruptive trading. We may impose other restrictions on transfers, or even prohibit transfers for any owner who, in our view, has abused, or appears likely to abuse, the transfer privilege on a case-by-case basis. We may, at any time and without prior notice, discontinue transfer privileges, modify our procedures, impose holding period requirements or limit the number, size, frequency, manner, or timing of transfers we permit. Because determining whether to impose any such special restrictions depends on our judgment and discretion, it is possible that some policy owners could engage in disruptive trading that is not permitted for others. We also reserve the right to reverse a potentially harmful transfer if an underlying fund portfolio refuses or reverses our order; in such instances some policy owners may be treated differently than others in that some transfers may be reversed and others allowed. For all of these purposes, we may aggregate two or more variable insurance products that we believe are connected.

In addition, transfers for multiple policies invested in the Transamerica Series Trust underlying fund portfolios which are submitted together may be disruptive at certain levels. At the present time, such aggregated transactions likely will not cause disruption if less than one million dollars total is being transferred with respect to any one underlying fund portfolio (a smaller amount may apply to smaller portfolios). Please note that transfers of less than one million dollars may be disruptive in some circumstances and this general amount may change quickly.

For policies with Portfolio Asset Management, the effect of transfers pursuant thereto may be considered disruptive for certain underlying fund portfolios. As a result, policy owners using Portfolio Asset Management may have to change their selected underlying fund portfolios.

Please note: If you engage a third party investment adviser for asset allocation services, then you may be subject to these transfer restrictions because of the actions of your investment adviser in providing these services.

In addition to our internal policies and procedures, we will administer your variable annuity to comply with any applicable state, federal, and other regulatory requirements concerning transfers. We reserve the right to implement, administer, and charge you for any fee or restriction, including redemption fees, imposed by any underlying fund portfolio. To the extent permitted by law, we also reserve the right to defer the transfer privilege at any time that we are unable to purchase or redeem shares of any of the underlying fund portfolios.

Under our current policies and procedures, we do not:

• impose redemption fees on transfers; or

• expressly limit the number or size of transfers in a given period except for certain subaccounts where an underlying fund portfolio has advised us to prohibit certain transfers that exceed a certain size; or

• provide a certain number of allowable transfers in a given period.

20

Redemption fees, transfer limits, and other procedures or restrictions may be more or less successful than ours in deterring market timing or other disruptive trading and in preventing or limiting harm from such trading.

In the absence of a prophylactic transfer restriction (e.g., expressly limiting the number of trades within a given period or limiting trades by their size), it is likely that some level of market timing and disruptive trading will occur before it is detected and steps taken to deter it (although some level of market timing and disruptive trading can occur with a prophylactic transfer restriction). As noted above, we do not impose a prophylactic transfer restriction and, therefore, it is likely that some level of market timing and disruptive trading will occur before we are able to detect it and take steps in an attempt to deter it.

Please note that the limits and restrictions described herein are subject to our ability to monitor transfer activity. Our ability to detect market timing or disruptive trading may be limited by operational and technological systems, as well as by our ability to predict strategies employed by policy owners (or those acting on their behalf) to avoid detection. As a result, despite our efforts to prevent harmful trading activity among the variable investment options available under this variable insurance product, there is no assurance that we will be able to detect or deter market timing or disruptive trading by such policy owners or intermediaries acting on their behalf. Moreover, our ability to discourage and restrict market timing or disruptive trading may be limited by decisions of state regulatory bodies and court orders that we cannot predict.

Furthermore, we may revise our policies and procedures in our sole discretion at any time and without prior notice, as we deem necessary or appropriate (1) to better detect and deter harmful trading that may adversely affect other policy owners, other persons with material rights under the variable insurance products, or underlying fund shareholders generally, (2) to comply with state or federal regulatory requirements, or (3) to impose additional or alternative restrictions on owners engaging in market timing or disruptive trading among the investment options under the variable insurance product. In addition, we may not honor transfer requests if any variable investment choice that would be affected by the transfer is unable to purchase or redeem shares of its corresponding underlying fund portfolio.

Underlying Fund Portfolio Frequent Trading Policies. The underlying fund portfolios may have adopted their own policies and procedures with respect to frequent purchases and redemptions of their respective shares. Underlying fund portfolios may, for example, assess a redemption fee (which we reserve the right to collect) on shares held for less than a certain period of time. The prospectuses for the underlying fund portfolios describe any such policies and procedures. The frequent trading policies and procedures of an underlying fund portfolio may be different, and more or less restrictive, than the frequent trading policies and procedures of other underlying fund portfolios and the policies and procedures we have adopted for our variable insurance products to discourage market timing and disruptive trading. Policy owners should be aware that we may not have the contractual ability or the operational capacity to monitor policy owners’ transfer requests and apply the frequent trading policies and procedures of the respective underlying funds that would be affected by the transfers. Accordingly, policy owners and other persons who have material rights under our variable insurance products should assume that any protection they may have against potential harm from market timing and disruptive trading is the protection, if any, provided by the policies and procedures we have adopted for our variable insurance products to discourage market timing and disruptive trading in certain subaccounts.

21

Policy owners should be aware that we are required to provide to an underlying fund portfolio or its designee, promptly upon request, certain information about the trading activity of individual policy owners, and to restrict or prohibit further purchases or transfers by specific policy owners identified by an underlying fund portfolio as violating the frequent trading policies established for the portfolio.

Omnibus Orders. Policy owners and other persons with material rights under the variable insurance products also should be aware that the purchase and redemption orders received by the underlying fund portfolios generally are “omnibus” orders from intermediaries such as retirement plans and separate accounts funding variable insurance products. The omnibus orders reflect the aggregation and netting of multiple orders from individual retirement plan participants and individual owners of variable insurance products. The omnibus nature of these orders may limit the underlying fund portfolios’ ability to apply their respective frequent trading policies and procedures. We cannot guarantee that the underlying fund portfolios will not be harmed by transfer activity relating to the retirement plans or other insurance companies that may invest in the underlying fund portfolios. These other insurance companies are responsible for their own policies and procedures regarding frequent transfer activity. If their policies and procedures fail to successfully discourage harmful transfer activity, it will affect other owners of underlying fund portfolio shares, as well as the owners of all of the variable annuity or life insurance policies, including ours, whose variable investment choices correspond to the affected underlying fund portfolios. In addition, if an underlying fund portfolio believes that an omnibus order we submit may reflect one or more transfer requests from owners engaged in market timing and disruptive trading, the underlying fund portfolio may reject the entire omnibus order and thereby delay or prevent us from implementing your request.

EXPENSES

There are charges and expenses associated with your policy that reduce the return on your investment in the policy. In addition to the following charges, there are optional benefits that if selected, assess additional charges. Please see ADDITIONAL FEATURES for more information.

Surrender Charges

During the accumulation phase, you can surrender part or all of the cash value (restrictions may apply to qualified policies). We may apply a surrender charge to compensate us for start-up expenses of the policy relating to sales, including commissions to registered representatives and other promotional expenses.

You can surrender up to 10% of your premium payments each year free of surrender charges. This amount is referred to as the surrender charge free amount and is determined at the time of surrender. (This amount is not cumulative, so not surrendering anything in one year does not increase the surrender charge free amount in subsequent years.) If the surrender is in excess of the surrender charge free amount, you might have to pay a surrender charge, which is a contingent deferred sales charge, on the excess amount.

22

For example, assume you selected the B-share and your premium is $100,000 and your policy value is $106,000 at the beginning of the second policy year and you surrender $30,000. Since that amount is more than your free amount ($10,000), you would pay a surrender charge of $1,600 on the remaining $20,000 [8% of ($30,000 - $10,000)]. Likewise, assume you selected the B-share and your policy value is $80,000 (premium payments $100,000) at the beginning of the second policy year and you surrender your policy. You would pay a surrender charge of $7,200 [8% of ($100,000 - ($100,000 x 10%))].

You can generally choose to receive the full amount of a requested partial surrender by directing us to deduct any applicable surrender charge (and any applicable excess interest adjustment) from your remaining policy value. You receive your cash value upon full surrender.

Surrender charges are waived if you surrender money under the Nursing Care and Terminal Condition Withdrawal Option or the Unemployment Waiver.

For surrender charge purposes, earnings are considered to be surrendered first, then the oldest premium is considered to be surrendered next. Please note, while there is no surrender charge on the withdrawal of earnings, withdrawing earnings will reduce (possibly to zero) your surrender charge free amount for that year.

Keep in mind that surrenders may be taxable and, if made before age 59 ¹/₂, may be subject to a 10% federal penalty tax. For tax purposes, surrenders from nonqualified policies are considered to come from taxable earnings first.

We may elect to reduce or eliminate the amount of the surrender charge when the policy is sold under circumstances which reduce our sales or other expenses or when required to by regulation or regulatory authority.

Liquidity Rider Surrender Charge Schedule. The optional Liquidity Rider (only available with the B-share) reduces the number of years each premium payment is subject to surrender charges from seven years to four years. The surrender charge schedule is the same as the B-share during the first four years for each premium payment. There is an extra charge for this rider.

Excess Interest Adjustment

Surrenders and transfers from the fixed account may be subject to an excess interest adjustment. This adjustment could retroactively reduce the interest credited in the fixed account to the guaranteed minimum or increase the amount credited. This adjustment may also apply to amounts applied to an annuity payment option. Please see “Appendix - Excess Interest Adjustment Examples” for an example showing the effect of a hypothetical excess interest adjustment calculation. The excess interest adjustment plays a role in calculating the total interest credited to the fixed account.

23

Mortality and Expense Risk Fees

We charge a fee as compensation for bearing certain mortality and expense risks under the policy. This fee is assessed daily based on the net asset value of each subaccount. Examples of such risks include a guarantee of annuity rates, the death benefit, certain expenses of the policy (including distribution related expenses), and assuming the risk that the current charges will be insufficient in the future to cover costs of selling, distributing and administering the policy.

If this charge does not cover our actual costs, we absorb the loss. Conversely, if the charge more than covers actual costs, the excess is added to our surplus. We expect to profit from this charge. We may use any profit for any proper purpose, including distribution expenses.

Premium Taxes

A deduction is also made for premium taxes, if any, imposed on us by a state, municipality or other government agency. The tax, currently ranging from 0% to 4%, is assessed at the time premium payments are made or when annuity payments begin. We pay the premium tax at the time it is imposed. We will, at our discretion, deduct the total amount of premium taxes, if any, from the policy value when such taxes are due to the applicable taxing authority, you begin receiving annuity payments, you surrender the policy or a death benefit is paid.

Federal, State and Local Taxes

We may in the future deduct charges from the policy for any taxes we incur because of the policy. However, no deductions are being made at the present time.

Special Service Fees

We will deduct a charge for special services, such as overnight delivery.

Transfer Fee

You are generally allowed to make 12 free transfers per policy year before the annuity commencement date. If you make more than 12 transfers per policy year, we reserve the right to charge for each additional transfer. Premium payments, Asset Rebalancing, and Dollar Cost Averaging transfers do not count as one of your free transfers. All transfer requests made at the same time are treated as a single transfer.

Administrative Charges

We deduct a daily administrative charge to cover the costs of supporting and administering the policy (including certain distribution-related expenses). This charge is equal to a percentage of the daily net asset value of each subaccount during both the accumulation phase and the income phase.

24

We reserve the right to increase the annual service charge up to the maximum. A portion of the service charge may be waived, but is not guaranteed to always be waived. We reserve the right to vary the amount of any waiver and the circumstances in which any waiver or waivers apply.

Fund Facilitation Fee

We charge a fund facilitation fee in order to make certain funds available as investment options under the policies. We apply the fee to funds that do not provide us with the amount of revenue we require in order for us to meet our expenses and revenue targets. This fee is assessed daily based on the net asset value of subaccounts that we specify.

Optional Benefits

If you elect to purchase optional benefits, we will deduct an additional fee. For some optional benefits the fee is assessed against the daily net asset value and for others it is deducted from each investment choice in proportion to the amount of policy value in each investment choice. Please refer to the ANNUITY POLICY FEE TABLE AND EXPENSE EXAMPLES for the list of fees for each optional benefit and ADDITIONAL FEATURES for more information.

Portfolio Fees and Expenses

The value of the assets in each subaccount will reflect the fees and expenses paid by the underlying fund portfolios. The lowest and highest fund expenses for the previous calendar year are found in ANNUITY POLICY FEE TABLE AND EXPENSE EXAMPLES in this prospectus. See the prospectuses for the underlying fund portfolios for more information.

Reduced Fees and Charges

We may, at our discretion, reduce or eliminate certain fees and charges for certain policies (including employer-sponsored savings plans) which may result in decreased costs and expenses.

Revenue We Receive

This prospectus describes generally the payments that we (and/or our affiliates) may directly or indirectly receive from the underlying fund portfolios, their advisers, subadvisers, distributors or affiliates thereof, in connection with certain administrative, marketing and other support services we (and/or our affiliates) provide and expenses we incur in offering and selling our variable insurance products. These arrangements are sometimes referred to as “revenue sharing” arrangements and are described further below. While only certain of the types of payments described below may be made in connection with your particular policy, all such payments may nonetheless influence or impact actions we (and/or our affiliates) take, and recommendations we (and our affiliates) make, regarding each of the variable insurance products that we (and our affiliates) offer, including your policy.

We (and/or our affiliates) may receive some or all of the following types of payments:

• Rule 12b-1 Fees. We and/or our affiliate, Transamerica Capital, Inc. (“TCI”) who is the principal underwriter for the policies, indirectly receive 12b-1 fees from the funds available as investment choices under our variable

25

insurance products. Any 12b-1 fees received by TCI that are attributable to our variable insurance products are then credited to us. These fees range from 0.00% to 0.45% of the average daily assets of the certain underlying fund portfolios attributable to the policies and to certain other variable insurance products that we and our affiliates issue.

• Administrative, Marketing and Support Service Fees (“Support Fees”). As noted above, an investment adviser, subadviser, administrator and/or distributor (or affiliates thereof) of the underlying fund portfolios may make payments to us and/or our affiliates, including TCI. These payments may be derived, in whole or in part, from the profits the investment adviser or subadviser realized on the advisory fee deducted from underlying fund portfolio assets. Policy owners, through their indirect investment in the underlying fund portfolios, bear the costs of these advisory fees (see the prospectuses for the underlying funds for more information). The amount of the payments we (or our affiliates) receive is generally based on a percentage of the assets of the particular underlying fund portfolios attributable to the policy and to certain other variable insurance products that our affiliates and we issue. These percentages differ and the amounts may be significant. Some advisers or sub-advisers (or other affiliates) pay us more than others.

The following chart provides the maximum combined percentages of 12b-1 fees and Support Fees that we anticipate will be paid to us on an annual basis. Please note: Some of the underlying funds listed in the chart below may not currently be available under your policy:

Incoming Payments to US and/or TCI
Fund	Maximum Fee % of assets
TRANSAMERICA SERIES TRUST	0.25%
AIM VARIABLE INSURANCE FUNDS
(INVESCO VARIABLE INSURANCE
FUNDS)	0.50%
ALLIANCEBERNSTEIN VARIABLE
PRODUCTS SERIES FUND, INC.	0.45%
AMERICAN FUNDS INSURANCE
SERIES ® TRUST	0.25%
FIDELITY ® VARIABLE INSURANCE
PRODUCTS FUND	0.39%
FRANKLIN TEMPLETON VARIABLE
INSURANCE PRODUCTS TRUST	0.50%
GE INVESTMENTS FUNDS, INC.	0.45%
JANUS ASPEN SERIES	0.35%
MFS ® VARIABLE INSURANCE
TRUST	0.45%

NOTES TO INCOMING PAYMENTS TABLE:

Maximum Fee % of assets: Payments are based on a percentage of the average assets of each underlying fund portfolio owned by the subaccounts available under this policy and under certain other variable insurance products offered by our affiliates and us. We and/or TCI may continue to receive 12b-1 fees and administrative fees on subaccounts that are closed to new investments, depending on the terms of the agreements supporting those payments and on the services provided.

Transamerica Series Trust (“TST”): Because TST is managed by Transamerica Asset Management, Inc. (“TAM”), an affiliate of ours, there are additional benefits to us and our affiliates for amounts you allocate to the TST underlying fund portfolios, in terms of our and our affiliates’ overall profitability. These additional benefits may be significant. Payments or other benefits may be received from TAM. Such payments or benefits may be entered into for a variety of purposes, such as to allocate resources to us to provide administrative services to the policyholders who invest in the TST underlying fund portfolios. These payments or

26

benefits may take the form of internal credits, recognition, or cash payments. A variety of financial and accounting methods may be used to allocate resources and profits to us. Additionally, if a TST portfolio is subadvised by an entity that is affiliated with us, we may retain more revenue than on those TST portfolios that are subadvised by non-affiliated entities. During 2012 we received $89,306,110.22 in benefits from TAM pursuant to these arrangements. This includes the 0.25% amount in the above chart. We anticipate receiving comparable amounts in the future.

Fidelity^® Variable Insurance Products Fund: We receive this percentage once $100 million in fund shares are held by the subaccounts of ours and our affiliates.

• Other Payments. TCI also serves as the wholesale distributor for the policies, and in that capacity directly or indirectly receives additional amounts or different percentages of assets under management from certain advisers and subadvisers to the underlying fund portfolios (or their affiliates) with regard to variable insurance products and/or mutual funds that are issued by us and our affiliates. These amounts may be derived, in whole or in part, from the profits the investment adviser or subadviser receives from the advisory fee deducted from underlying fund portfolio assets. Policy owners, through their indirect investment in the underlying fund portfolios, bear the costs of these advisory fees. Certain advisers and subadvisers of the underlying fund portfolios (or their affiliates):

• may each directly or indirectly pay TCI amounts up to $75,000 per year to participate in a “preferred sponsor” program that provides such advisers and subadvisers with access to TCI’s wholesalers at TCI’s national and regional sales conferences as well as internal and external meetings and events that are attended by TCI’s wholesalers and/or other TCI employees.

• may provide our affiliates and/or selling firms with wholesaling services to assist us in the distribution of the policies.

• may provide us and/or certain affiliates and/or selling firms with occasional gifts, meals, tickets or other compensation as an incentive to market the underlying fund portfolios and to assist with their promotional efforts. The amounts may be significant and these arrangements provide the adviser or subadviser (or other affiliates) with increased access to us and to our affiliates involved in the distribution of the policies.

For the calendar year ended December 31, 2012, TCI or its affiliates received total revenue sharing payments in the amount of $                 from the following Fund managers and/or subadvisers to participate in TCI’s events: AEGON USA Investment Management, Alliance Bernstein Investments, BlackRock Investment Management, LLC., Fidelity Investments, Franklin Templeton Investments, GE Asset Management, Hanlon Investment Management Inc., ING Clarion Real Estate Securities, Invesco AIM, Janus Capital, Jennison Associates, JPMorgan Investment Management, Logan Circle Investment Partners, Loomis, Sayles & Company, MFS Investment Management, Madison Asset Management, Morgan Stanley Investment Management, Neuberger Berman Management, Oppenheimer Funds, Pacific Investment Management Company, Schroder Investment Management North America, Systematic Financial Management LP, Thompson, Siegel and Walmsley LLC, Vanguard, Wellington Management Company. Please note some of the aforementioned managers and/or subadvisers may not be associated with underlying fund portfolios currently available in this product.

Proceeds from certain of these payments by the underlying fund portfolios, the advisers, the subadvisers and/or their affiliates may be used for any corporate purpose, including payment of expenses (1) that we and our affiliates incur in promoting, marketing, and administering the policy, and (2) that we incur, in our role as intermediary, in promoting, marketing, and administering the underlying fund portfolios. We and our affiliates may profit from these payments.

27

For further details about the compensation payments we make in connection with the sale of the policies, see OTHER INFORMATION - Distribution of the Policies in this prospectus.

ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY

During the accumulation phase, you can have access to the money in your policy in the following ways:

• by making a surrender (either a full or partial surrender); or

• by taking systematic payouts (See ADDITIONAL FEATURES - Systematic Payout Option for more details).

Surrenders

During the accumulation phase, if you take a full surrender you will receive your cash value. If you want to take a partial surrender, in most cases it must be for at least $500. Unless you tell us otherwise, we will take the surrender from each of the investment options in proportion to the policy value. Surrenders may be referred to as withdrawals on your policy statement and other documents.

You may elect to take up to the free amount each policy year without incurring a surrender charge. Remember that any surrender you take will reduce the policy value, and the amount of the death benefit. See DEATH BENEFIT, for more details. A partial surrender also may have a negative impact on certain other benefits and guarantees of your policy. See ADDITIONAL FEATURES, for more details.

Surrenders in excess of the surrender charge free amount may be subject to a surrender charge. Surrenders from the fixed account may be subject to an excess interest adjustment. Income taxes, federal tax penalties and certain restrictions may apply to any surrenders you make.

Surrenders from qualified policies may be restricted or prohibited. If your policy was issued pursuant to a 403(b) plan, we generally are required to confirm, with your 403(b) plan sponsor or otherwise, that surrenders, loans or transfers you request comply with applicable tax requirements and to decline requests that are not in compliance. We will defer such payments you request until all information required under the tax law has been received. By requesting a surrender, loan or transfer, you consent to the sharing of confidential information about you, the policy, and transactions under the policy and any other 403(b) contracts or accounts you have under the 403(b) plan among us, your employer or plan sponsor, any plan administrator or record keeper, and other product providers.

During the income phase, you will receive annuity payments under the annuity payment option you select; however, you generally may not take any other surrenders, either full or partial.

Delay of Payment and Transfers

Payment of any amount due from the separate account for a surrender, a death benefit, or the death of the owner of a nonqualified policy, will generally occur within seven days from the date we receive in good order all required information at our Administrative and Service Office. We may defer such payment from the separate account if:

• the New York Stock Exchange is closed other than for usual weekends or holidays or trading on the Exchange is otherwise restricted;

• an emergency exists as defined by the SEC or the SEC requires that trading be restricted; or

28

• the SEC permits a delay for the protection of owners.

Transfers of amounts from the subaccounts also may be deferred under these circumstances. In addition, if, pursuant to SEC rules, the Transamerica AEGON Money Market VP portfolio suspends payment of redemption proceeds in connection with a liquidation of the portfolio, then we may delay payment of any transfer, partial withdrawal, surrender, loan, or death benefit from the TA AEGON Money Market subaccount until the portfolio is liquidated.

Any payment or transfer request which is not in good order will cause a delay. See OTHER INFORMATION - Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order.

Federal laws designed to counter terrorism and prevent money laundering by criminals might in certain circumstances require us to reject a premium payment and/or “freeze” a policy owner’s account. If these laws apply in a particular situation, we would not be allowed to pay any request for withdrawals, surrenders, or death benefits, make transfers, or continue making annuity payments absent instructions from the appropriate federal regulator. We may also be required to provide information about you and your policy to government agencies or departments.

Pursuant to the requirements of certain state laws, we reserve the right to defer payment of the cash value from the fixed account for up to six months. We may defer payment of any amount until your premium payment check has cleared your bank.

Excess Interest Adjustment

Money that you transfer out of or surrender from a guaranteed period option of the fixed account before the end of its guaranteed period (the number of years you specified the money would remain in the guaranteed period option) may be subject to an excess interest adjustment. At the time you request a transfer or surrender (either full or partial), if interest rates set by us have risen since the date of the initial guarantee, the excess interest adjustment will result in a lower cash value on surrender or transfer (but not below the excess interest adjustment floor described in “Appendix - Excess Interest Adjustment Examples”). However, if interest rates have fallen since the date of the initial guarantee, the excess interest adjustment will result in a higher cash value on surrender or transfer. Please see “Appendix - Excess Interest Adjustment Examples” to see how the excess interest adjustment is calculated and illustrative examples using hypothetical values.

Any amount surrendered in excess of the cumulative interest credited is generally subject to an excess interest adjustment. An excess interest adjustment may also be made on amounts applied to an annuity payment option.

The formula that will be used to determine the excess interest adjustment is:

S* (G-C)* (M/12)

S = Is the amount (before surrender charges, premium taxes and the application of any Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefits, if any) being surrendered, withdrawn, transferred, paid upon death, or applied to an income option that is subject to the excess interest adjustment;

G = Is the guaranteed interest rate for the guaranteed period applicable to “S”;

29

C = Is the current guaranteed interest rate then being offered on new premium payments for the next longer option period than “M”. If this policy form or such an option period is no longer offered, “C” will be the U.S. Treasury rate for the next longer maturity (in whole years) than “M” on the 25th day of the previous calendar month, plus up to 0.25%; and

M = Number of months remaining in the current option period for “S”, rounded up to the next higher whole number of months.

* = multiplication

There will be no excess interest adjustment on any of the following:

• surrenders of cumulative interest credited;

• Nursing Care and Terminal Condition Withdrawal Option surrenders;

• Unemployment Waiver surrenders;

• transfers from a Dollar Cost Averaging fixed source;

• surrenders to satisfy any minimum distribution requirements; and

• Systematic Payout Option payments, which do not exceed cumulative interest credited at the time of payment.

Please note that in these circumstances you will not receive a higher cash value if interest rates have fallen nor will you receive a lower cash value if interest rates have risen.

The excess interest adjustment may vary for certain policies and may not be applicable for all policies.

Signature Guarantee

As a protection against fraud, we require a signature guarantee (i.e., Medallion Signature Guarantee as required by us) for the following transaction requests:

• Any surrenders over $250,000;

• Certain surrenders on or within 15 days of an address change;

• Any disbursement request made on or within 15 days of an ownership change;

• Any surrender when we have been directed to send proceeds to a different personal address from the address of record for that contract owner’s account. PLEASE NOTE: This requirement will not apply to requests made in connection with exchanges of one annuity for another with the same owner in a “tax-free exchange”;

• Any surrender when we do not have an originating or guaranteed signature on file;

• Any other transaction where we require.

We may change the specific requirements listed above, or add signature guarantees in other circumstances, at our discretion if we deem it necessary or appropriate to help protect against fraud. For current requirements, please refer to the requirements listed on the appropriate form or call us at (800)525-6205.

You can obtain a Medallion signature guarantee from more than 7,000 financial institutions across the United States and Canada that participate in a Medallion signature guarantee program.

The best source of a Medallion signature guarantee is a bank, savings and loan association, brokerage firm, or credit union with which you do business.

30

A notary public cannot provide a Medallion signature guarantee. Notarization will not substitute for a Medallion signature guarantee.

ANNUITY PAYMENTS (THE INCOME PHASE)

You can change the annuity commencement date. You can change this date by giving us 30 days notice with the information we need. The latest maximum annuity commencement date generally cannot be later than the last day of the month following the month in which the annuitant attains age 99 (earlier if required by state law). In no event can this date be earlier than the third policy anniversary.

Before the annuity commencement date, if the annuitant is alive, you may choose an annuity payment option or change your election. If the annuitant dies before the annuity commencement date, the death benefit is payable in a lump sum or under one of the annuity payment options (unless the surviving spouse continues the policy).

Unless you specify otherwise, the annuitant will receive the annuity payments. After the annuitant’s death, the beneficiary you designate at annuitization will receive any remaining guaranteed payments.

Annuity Payment Options

The policy provides several annuity payment options that are described below. You may choose any combination of annuity payment options. We will use your adjusted policy value to provide these annuity payments. If the adjusted policy value on the annuity commencement date is less than $2,000, we reserve the right to pay it in one lump sum in lieu of applying it under an annuity payment option. You can receive annuity payments monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, or annually. (We reserve the right to change the frequency if payments would be less than $50.)

In deciding on which annuity payment option to elect, you must decide if fixed or variable payments are better for you. If you choose to receive fixed payments, then the amount of each payment will be set on the annuity commencement date and will not change. You may, however, choose to receive variable payments. The dollar amount of the first variable payment will be determined in accordance with the annuity payment rates set forth in the applicable table contained in the policy. The dollar amount of additional variable payments will vary based on the investment performance of the subaccount(s) you select. The dollar amount of each variable payment after the first may increase, decrease, or remain constant. If the actual investment performance (net of fees and expenses) exactly matched the assumed investment return of 3% at all times, the amount of each variable annuity payment would remain constant. If actual investment performance (net of fees and expenses) exceeds the assumed investment return, the amount of the variable annuity payments would increase. Conversely, if actual investment performance (net of fees and expenses) is lower than the assumed investment return, the amount of the variable annuity payments would decrease.

You must also decide if you want your annuity payments to be guaranteed for the annuitant’s lifetime, a period certain, or a combination thereof. Generally, payments will be lower if you combine a period certain, guaranteed amount, or liquidity with a lifetime guarantee (e.g., Life Income with 10 years Certain and Life with Guaranteed Return of Policy proceeds). Likewise, payments will also generally be lower the longer the period certain (because you are guaranteed payments for a longer time).

31

A charge for premium taxes and an excess interest adjustment may be made when annuity payments begin.

The annuity payment options are explained below. Some options are fixed only and some can be fixed or variable.

Income for a Specified Period (fixed only). We will make level payments only for a fixed period. No funds will remain at the end of the period. If your policy is a qualified policy, this payment option may not satisfy minimum required distribution rules. Consult a tax adviser before electing this option.

Income of a Specified Amount (fixed only). Payments are made for any specified amount until the amount applied to this option, with interest, is exhausted. This will be a series of level payments followed by a smaller final payment. If your policy is a qualified policy, this payment option may not satisfy minimum required distribution rules. Consult a tax adviser before electing this option.

Life Income (not available for adjusted ages greater than 85). You may choose between:

• No Period Certain (fixed or variable)-Payments will be made only during the annuitant’s lifetime. The last payment will be the payment immediately before the annuitant’s death.

• 10 Years Certain (fixed or variable)-Payments will be made for the longer of the annuitant’s lifetime or ten years.

• Guaranteed Return of Policy Proceeds (fixed only)-Payments will be made for the longer of the annuitant’s lifetime or until the total dollar amount of payments we made to you equals the annuitized amount (i.e., the adjusted policy value).

Joint and Survivor Annuity (not available for adjusted ages greater than 85). You may choose:

• No Period Certain (fixed or variable)-Payments are made during the joint lifetime of the annuitant and a joint annuitant of your selection. Payments will be made as long as either person is living.

Other annuity payment options may be arranged by agreement with us. Some annuity payment options may not be available for all policies.

NOTE CAREFULLY

IF:

• you choose Life Income with No Period Certain or a Joint and Survivor Annuity with No Period Certain; and

• the annuitant dies (or both joint annuitants die) before the due date of the second (third, fourth, etc.) annuity payment;

THEN:

• we may make only one (two, three, etc.) annuity payments.

IF:

• you choose Income for a Specified Period, Life Income with 10 Years Certain, Life Income with Guaranteed Return of Policy Proceeds, or Income of a Specified Amount; and

• the person receiving payments dies prior to the end of the guaranteed period;

32

THEN:

• the remaining guaranteed payments will be continued to a new payee, or their present value may be paid in a single sum.

We will not pay interest on amounts represented by uncashed annuity payment checks if the postal or other delivery service is unable to deliver checks to the payee’s address of record. The person receiving payments is responsible for keeping us informed of his/her current address.

You must annuitize your policy no later than the maximum annuity commencement date specified in your policy (earlier for certain distribution channels). If you do not elect an annuity payment option, the default option will be Life with 10 Years Certain option. Please note, all optional benefits (including guaranteed minimum death benefits and living benefits) terminate upon annuitization.

DEATH BENEFIT

We will pay a death benefit to your beneficiary, under certain circumstances, if the annuitant dies during the accumulation phase. If there is a surviving owner(s) when the annuitant dies, the surviving owner(s) will receive the death benefit instead of the listed beneficiary. The person receiving the death benefit may choose an annuity payment option (if you pick a variable annuity payment option fees and expenses will apply), or may choose to receive the death benefit via partial withdrawals, or lump sum withdrawal. The guarantees of these death benefits are based on our claims-paying ability.

We will determine the amount of and pay the death benefit proceeds, if any are payable on a policy, upon receipt at our Administrative and Service Office of satisfactory proof of the annuitant’s death, written directions from each eligible recipient of death benefit proceeds regarding how to pay the death benefit, and any other documents, forms and information that we need (collectively referred to as “due proof of death”). Please Note: Such due proof of death must be submitted in good order to avoid a delay in processing the death benefit claim. Due proof requires selecting a payment option. See OTHER INFORMATION - Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order.

The death benefit proceeds remain invested in the separate account in accordance with the allocations made by the policy owner until the beneficiary has provided us with due proof of death. Once we receive due proof of death, investments in the separate account may be reallocated in accordance with the beneficiary’s instructions.

We may permit the beneficiary to give a “one-time” written instruction to reallocate the investments in the separate account to the money market subaccount after the death of the annuitant. If there is more than one beneficiary, all beneficiaries must agree to the reallocation instructions. This one-time reallocation will be permitted if the beneficiary provides satisfactory evidence of the annuitant’s death (satisfactory evidence may include a certified death certificate).

When We Pay A Death Benefit

We will pay a death benefit IF:

• you are both the annuitant and sole owner of the policy; and

33

• you die before the annuity commencement date.

We will pay a death benefit to you (owner) IF:

• you are not the annuitant; and

• the annuitant dies before the annuity commencement date.

If the only person receiving the death benefit is the surviving spouse, then he or she may elect to continue the policy as the new annuitant and owner, instead of receiving the death benefit. See TAX INFORMATION - Tax Status of the Policy - Distribution Requirements. All currently existing surrender charges will be waived.

When We Do Not Pay A Death Benefit

We will not pay a death benefit IF:

• you are the owner but not the annuitant; and

• you die prior to the annuity commencement date.

Please note: Distribution requirements apply upon the death of any owner. Generally, upon the owner’s death (who is not the annuitant) the entire interest must be distributed within five years. See TAX INFORMATION for a more detailed discussion of the distribution requirements under the Code.

Deaths After the Annuity Commencement Date

The death benefit payable, if any, on or after the annuity commencement date depends on the annuity payment option selected.

IF:

• you are not the annuitant; and

• you die on or after the annuity commencement date; and

• the entire guaranteed interest in the policy has not been paid;

THEN:

• the remaining portion of such guaranteed interest in the policy will continue to be distributed at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution being used as of the date of your death.

IF:

• you are the owner and annuitant; and

• you die after the annuity commencement date; and

• the annuity payment option you selected did not or no longer has a guaranteed period;

THEN:

• no additional payments will be made (there is no death benefit).

Succession of Ownership

If an owner dies during the accumulation phase, the person or entity first listed below who is alive or in existence on the date of that death will become the new owner:

34

• any surviving owner;

• primary beneficiary;

• contingent beneficiary; or

• owner’s estate.

Amount of Death Benefit

Death benefit provisions may differ from state to state. The death benefit may be paid as a lump sum, partial withdrawals or as annuity payments. The amount of the death benefit depends on the guaranteed minimum death benefit option, if any, you choose when you buy the policy. The “base policy” death benefit will generally be the greatest of:

• the policy value on the date we receive the required information in good order at our Administrative and Service Office;

• the cash value on the date we receive in good order the required information at our Administrative and Service Office (this will be more than the policy value if there is a positive excess interest adjustment that exceeds the surrender charge);

• and the guaranteed minimum death benefit (if one was elected); plus premium payments, less adjusted partial surrender, from the date of death to the date the death benefit is paid. Please see “Appendix - Death Benefit’ for illustrative examples regarding death benefit calculations.

Please note, the death benefit terminates upon annuitization and there is a maximum annuity commencement date.

Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit

On the policy application, you may generally choose a guaranteed minimum death benefit (age limitations may apply) for an additional fee. After the policy is issued, you cannot make an election and the death benefit cannot be changed.

Annual Step-Up Death Benefit

Under this option, on each policy anniversary prior to your 81st birthday, a new “stepped-up” death benefit is determined and becomes the guaranteed minimum death benefit for that policy year. This “step-up” death benefit is equal to:

• the largest policy value on the policy date or on any policy anniversary prior to the earlier of the annuitant’s date of death or the annuitant’s 81st birthday; plus

• any premium payments since the date of any policy anniversary with the largest policy value; minus

• any adjusted partial surrenders since the date of the policy anniversary with the largest policy value.

The Annual Step-Up Death Benefit is not available if you or the annuitant is 76 or older on the policy date. There is an extra charge for this death benefit.

35

Designated Investment Options. If you elected the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit, you must allocate 100% of your policy value to one or more of the following “designated investment options:”

AllianceBernstein Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio - Class B

American Funds - Asset Allocation Fund - Class 2

American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2

Fidelity VIP Balanced Portfolio - Service Class 2

GE Investments Total Return Fund - Class 3

TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Conservative - Service Class

TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class

TA AllianceBernstein Dynamic Allocation - Service Class

TA Asset Allocation - Conservative - Service Class

TA Asset Allocation - Moderate - Service Class

TA Asset Allocation - Moderate Growth - Service Class

TA Efficient Markets - Service Class TA

International Moderate Growth - Service Class

TA Multi-Managed Balanced - Service Class

TA PIMCO Total Return - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Balanced - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Conservative - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Growth - Service Class

Fixed Account

Please note:

• All policy value must be allocated to one or more designated investment options.

• You may transfer amounts among the designated investment options; however, you cannot transfer any amount to any other subaccount if you elect this death benefit.

Return of Premium Death Benefit

The Return of Premium Death Benefit is equal to:

• total premium payments; less

• any adjusted partial surrenders as of the date of death.

This benefit is not available if you or the annuitant is 86 or older on the policy date. There is an extra charge for this death benefit.

Designated Investment Options. If you elected the Return of Premium Death Benefit, you must allocate 100% of your policy value to one or more of the following “designated investment options:”

36

AllianceBernstein Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio - Class B

American Funds - Asset Allocation Fund - Class 2

American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2

Fidelity VIP Balanced Portfolio - Service Class 2

GE Investments Total Return Fund - Class 3

TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Conservative - Service Class

TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class

TA AllianceBernstein Dynamic Allocation - Service Class

TA Asset Allocation - Conservative - Service Class

TA Asset Allocation - Moderate - Service Class

TA Asset Allocation - Moderate Growth - Service Class

TA Efficient Markets - Service Class

TA International Moderate Growth - Service Class

TA Multi-Managed Balanced - Service Class

TA PIMCO Total Return - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Balanced - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Conservative - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Growth - Service Class

Fixed Account

Please note:

• All policy value must be allocated to one or more designated investment options.

• You may transfer amounts among the designated investment options; however, you cannot transfer any amount to any other subaccount if you elect this death benefit.

Please note: You will not receive an optional guaranteed minimum death benefit if you do not choose one when you purchase your policy.

The Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit may vary for certain policies and may not be available for all policies. This disclosure explains the material features of the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. The application and operation of the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit are governed by the terms and conditions of the policy form and riders.

Adjusted Partial Surrender

When you request a partial surrender, your guaranteed minimum death benefit will be reduced by an amount called the adjusted partial surrender. Under certain circumstances, the adjusted partial surrender may be more than the dollar amount of your surrender request. This will generally be the case if the guaranteed minimum death benefit exceeds the policy value at the time of surrender. It is also possible that if a death benefit is paid after you have made a partial surrender, then the total amount paid could be less than the total premium payments.

37

The formula used to calculate the adjusted partial surrender amount, for the guaranteed minimum death benefit offered in this prospectus, is: adjusted partial surrender = (amount gross partial surrender * value of the current death proceeds immediately prior to the gross partial surrender ) / policy value immediately prior to the gross surrender.

We have included a detailed explanation of this adjustment with examples in the “Appendix - Death Benefit.” This is referred to as “adjusted partial surrender” in your policy. If you have a qualified policy, minimum required distributions rules may require you to request a partial surrender.

TAX INFORMATION

NOTE: We have prepared the following information on federal income taxes as a general discussion of the subject. It is not intended as tax advice to any individual. The federal income tax consequences discussed herein reflects our understanding of current law, and the law may change. No representation is made regarding the likelihood of continuation of the present federal income tax law or of the current interpretations by the Internal Revenue Service. No attempt is made to consider any applicable state or other income tax laws, any state and local estate or inheritance tax, or other tax consequences of ownership or receipt of distributions under the policy. You should consult your own tax adviser about your own circumstances.

Introduction

Deferred annuity policies are a way of setting aside money for future needs like retirement. Congress recognized how important saving for retirement is and provided special rules in the Internal Revenue Code (the “Code”) for annuities. Simply stated, these rules generally provide that individuals will not be taxed on the earnings, if any, on the money held in an annuity policy until withdrawn. This is referred to as tax deferral. When a non-natural person (e.g., corporation or certain other entities other than tax-qualified trusts) owns a nonqualified policy, the policy will generally not be treated as an annuity for tax purposes. Thus, the owner must generally include in income any increase in the account value over the investment in the policy during each taxable year.

There are different rules as to how you will be taxed depending on how you take the money out and the type of policy-qualified or nonqualified.

If you purchase the policy as an individual retirement annuity or as a part of a 403(b) plan, 457 plan, a pension plan, a profit sharing plan (including a 401(k) plan), or an employer sponsored retirement program, your policy is referred to as a qualified policy. There is no additional tax deferral benefit derived from placing qualified funds into a variable annuity. Features other than tax deferral should be considered in the purchase of a qualified policy. There are limits on the amount of contributions you can make to a qualified policy. Other restrictions may apply including terms of the plan in which you participate. To the extent there is a conflict between a plan’s provisions and a policy’s provisions, the plan’s provisions will control.

If you purchase the policy other than as part of any arrangement described in the preceding paragraph, the policy is referred to as a nonqualified policy.

38

You will generally not be taxed on increases in the value of your policy, whether qualified or nonqualified, until a distribution occurs (either as a surrender, withdrawal, or as annuity payments). Under certain circumstances, however, you may be subject to current taxation if you assign or pledge or enter into an agreement to assign or pledge any portion of the policy.

The Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) has not reviewed the policy for qualification as an IRA annuity, and has not addressed in a ruling of general applicability whether the death benefit options and riders available, with the policy, if any, comport with IRA qualification requirements.

The value of death benefit options and riders elected may need to be considered in calculating minimum required distributions from a qualified plan/or policy.

Taxation of Us

We at present are taxed as a life insurance company under part I of Subchapter L of the Code. The separate account is treated as a part of us and, accordingly, will not be taxed separately as a “regulated investment company” under Subchapter M of the Code. We do not expect to incur any federal income tax liability with respect to investment income and net capital gains arising from the activities of the separate account retained as part of the reserves under the policy. Based on this expectation, it is anticipated that no charges will be made against the separate account for federal income taxes. If in future years, any federal income taxes are incurred by us with respect to the separate account, we may make a charge to that account. We may benefit from any dividends received or foreign tax credits attributable to taxes paid by certain underlying funds to foreign jurisdictions to the extent permitted under federal tax law.

Tax Status of the Policy

Diversification Requirements. In order for a nonqualified variable policy which is based on a segregated asset account to qualify as an annuity policy under Section 817(h) of the Code, the investments made by such account must be “adequately diversified” in accordance with Treasury Regulations. The Regulations apply a diversification requirement to each of the subaccounts. Each separate account, through its underlying fund portfolios and their portfolios, intends to comply with the diversification requirements of the Regulations. We have entered into agreements with each underlying fund portfolio company that require the portfolios to be operated in compliance with the Regulations but we do not have control over the underlying fund portfolio companies. The policy owners bear the risk that the entire contract could be disqualified as an annuity policy under the Code due to the failure of a subaccount to be deemed to be “adequately diversified.”

Owner Control. In some circumstances, owners of variable policies who retain excessive control over the investment of the underlying separate account assets may be treated as the owners of those assets and may be subject to tax on income produced by those assets. In Revenue Ruling 2003-91, the IRS stated that whether the owner of a variable contract is to be treated as the owner of the assets held by the insurance company under the contract will depend on all of the facts and circumstances.

39

Revenue Ruling 2003-91 also gave an example of circumstances under which the owner of a variable contract would not possess sufficient control over the assets underlying the contract to be treated as the owner of those assets for federal income tax purposes. To the extent the circumstances relating to the issuance and ownership of a policy vary from those described in Revenue Ruling 2003-91, owners bear the risk that they will be treated as the owner of Separate Account assets and taxed accordingly.

We believe that the owner of a policy should not be treated as the owner of the underlying assets. We reserve the right to modify the policies to bring them into conformity with applicable standards should such modification be necessary to prevent owners of the policies from being treated as the owners of the underlying separate account assets. Concerned owners should consult their own tax advisers regarding the tax matter discussed above.

Distribution Requirements. The Code requires that nonqualified policies contain specific provisions for distribution of policy proceeds upon the death of any owner. In order to be treated as an annuity policy for federal income tax purposes, the Code requires that such policies provide that if any owner dies on or after the annuity starting dated and before the entire interest in the policy has been distributed, the remaining portion must be distributed at least as rapidly as under the method in effect on such owner’s death. If any owner dies before the annuity starting date, the entire interest in the policy must generally be distributed within 5 years after such owner’s date of death or be used to provide payments to a designated beneficiary beginning within one year of such owner’s death that will be made for the life of the beneficiary or for a period not extending beyond the life expectancy of the beneficiary. However, if upon such owner’s death prior to the annuity starting date, such owner’s surviving spouse is the sole beneficiary, under the nonqualified policy, then the policy may be continued with the surviving spouse as the new owner. If any owner is a non-natural person, then for purposes of these distribution requirements, the primary annuitant shall be treated as an owner and any death or change of such primary annuitant shall be treated as the death of an owner.

The nonqualified policies contain provisions intended to comply with these requirements of the Code. No regulations interpreting these requirements of the Code have yet been issued and thus no assurance can be given that the provisions contained in the policies satisfy all such Code requirements. The provisions contained in the policies will be reviewed and modified if necessary to assure that they comply with the Code requirements when clarified by regulation or otherwise.

The Federal Defense of Marriage Act currently does not recognize same-sex marriages or civil unions, even those that are permitted under individual state laws. Therefore, exercise of the spousal continuation provisions of this policy or any riders by persons who do not meet the definition of “spouse” under federal law - e.g., civil union partners and same-sex marriage spouses - may have adverse tax consequences. Consult a tax adviser for more information on this subject.

Taxation of Annuities

The following discussion assumes the policy qualifies as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes.

40

In General. Code Section 72 governs taxation of annuities in general. We believe that an owner who is an individual will not be taxed on increases in the value of a policy until such amounts are surrendered or distributed. For this purpose, the assignment, pledge, or agreement to assign or pledge any portion of the policy value, and in the case of a qualified policy, any portion of an interest in the plan, generally will be treated as a distribution. The taxable portion of a distribution is taxable as ordinary income.

Non-Natural Persons. Pursuant to Section 72(u) of the Code, a nonqualified policy held by a taxpayer other than a natural person generally will not be treated as an annuity policy under the Code; accordingly, an owner who is not a natural person will recognize as ordinary income for a taxable year the excess, if any, of the policy value over the “investment in the contract”. There are some exceptions to this rule and a prospective purchaser of the policy that is not a natural person should discuss these with a competent tax adviser. A policy owned by a trust using the grantor’s social security number as its taxpayer identification number will be treated as owned by the grantor (natural person) for the purposes of our application of Section 72 of the Code. Consult a tax adviser for more information on how this may impact your policy.

Different Individual Owner and Annuitant

If the owner and annuitant on the policy are different individuals, there may be negative tax consequences to the owner and/or beneficiaries under the policy if the annuitant predeceases the owner including, but not limited, to the assessment of penalty tax and the loss of certain death benefit distribution options. You may wish to consult your legal counsel or tax adviser if you are considering designating a different individual as the annuitant on your policy to determine the potential tax ramifications of such a designation.

Annuity Starting Date

This section makes reference to the annuity starting date as defined in Section 72 of the Code and the applicable regulations. Generally, the definition of annuity starting date will correspond with the definition of annuity commencement date used in your policy and the dates will be the same. However, in certain circumstances, your annuity starting date and annuity commencement date will not be the same date. If there is a conflict between the definitions, we will interpret and apply the definitions in order to ensure your policy maintains its status as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. You may wish to consult a tax adviser for more information on when this issue may arise.

Taxation of Annuity Payments

Although the tax consequences may vary depending on the annuity payment option you select, in general, for nonqualified and certain qualified policies, only a portion of the annuity payments you receive will be includable in your gross income.

In general, the excludable portion of each annuity payment you receive will be determined as follows:

• Fixed payments-by dividing the “investment in the contract” on the annuity starting date by the total expected return under the policy (determined under Treasury regulations) for the term of the payments. This is the percentage of each annuity payment that is excludable.

41

• Variable payments-by dividing the “investment in the contract” on the annuity starting date by the total number of expected periodic payments. This is the amount of each annuity payment that is excludable.

The remainder of each annuity payment is includable in gross income. Once the “investment in the contract” has been fully recovered, the full amount of any additional annuity payments is includable in gross income and taxed as ordinary income.

If you select more than one annuity payment option, special rules govern the allocation of the policy’s entire “investment in the contract” to each such option, for purposes of determining the excludable amount of each payment received under that option. We advise you to consult a competent tax adviser as to the potential tax effects of allocating amounts to any particular annuity payment option.

If, after the annuity starting date, annuity payments stop because an annuitant died, the excess (if any) of the “investment in the contract” as of the annuity starting date over the aggregate amount of annuity payments received that was excluded from gross income may possibly be allowable as a deduction in your tax return.

Taxation of Surrenders and Partial Withdrawals - Nonqualified Policies

When you surrender your policy, you are generally taxed on the amount that your surrender proceeds exceeds the “investment in the contract,” which is generally your premiums paid (adjusted for any prior surrenders or portions thereof that were not taxable). Partial withdrawals are generally treated first as taxable income to the extent of the excess in the policy over the “investment in the contract.” In general, loans, pledges, and assignments are taxed in the same manner as partial withdrawals and surrenders. All taxable amounts received under a policy are subject to tax at ordinary rather than capital gain tax rates.

If your policy contains an excess interest adjustment feature (also known as a market value adjustment), then your account value immediately before the surrender may have to be increased by any positive excess interest adjustments that result from the surrender. There is, however, no definitive guidance on the proper tax treatment of excess interest adjustments, and you may want to discuss the potential tax consequences of an excess interest adjustment with your tax adviser.

The Code also provides that surrendered earnings may be subject to a penalty tax. The amount of the penalty tax is equal to 10% of the amount that is includable in income. Some surrender withdrawals will be exempt from the penalty tax. They include, among other, any amounts: (1) paid on or after the taxpayer reaches age 59 ¹/₂; (2) paid after an owner dies; (3) paid if the taxpayer becomes disabled (as that term is defined in the Code); (4) paid in a series of substantially equal payments made annually (or more frequently) over the life of the taxpayer or the joint life of the taxpayer and the taxpayer’s designated beneficiary; (5) paid under an immediate annuity; or (6) which come from premium payments made prior to August 14, 1982.

Other exceptions may be applicable under certain circumstances and special rules may be applicable in connection with the exceptions enumerated above. You may wish to consult a tax adviser for more information regarding the imposition of penalty tax.

42

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefits

We may make available, as options under the policy, certain guaranteed lifetime withdrawal and other optional benefits. If your policy contains a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit rider the application of certain tax rules, particularly those rules relating to distributions from your policy, are not entirely clear. The tax rules for qualified policies may impact the value of these optional benefits. Additionally, the actions of the qualified plan as contract holder may cause the qualified plan participant to lose the benefit of the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit. In view of this uncertainty, you should consult a tax adviser before purchasing a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit rider for a qualified policy.

Aggregation

All nonqualified deferred annuity policies that are issued by us (or our affiliates) to the same owner (policyholder) during any calendar year are treated as one annuity for purposes of determining the amount includable in the owner’s income when a taxable distribution occurs. If you are considering purchasing multiple policies from us (or our affiliates) during the same calendar year, you may wish to consult with your tax adviser regarding how aggregation will apply to your policies.

Partial Annuitization

Under a new tax provision enacted in 2010, if part of an annuity policy’s value is applied to an annuity option that provides payments for one or more lives and for a period of at least ten years, those payments may be taxed as annuity payments instead of withdrawals. None of the payment options under the policy is intended to qualify for this “partial annuitization” treatment and, if you apply only part of the value of the policy to a payment option, we will treat those payments as withdrawals for tax purposes.

Tax-Free Exchanges

Section 1035 of the Code provides that no gain or loss shall be recognized on the exchange of one annuity contract for another. Generally, an annuity contract issued in an exchange for another annuity contract is treated as new for purposes of the penalty and distribution at death rules.

If the initial contribution is made as a result of an exchange or surrender of another annuity contract, we may require that you provide information relating to the federal income tax status of the previous annuity contract to us.

Revenue Procedure 2011-38 significantly ease the restrictions on partial transfers previously adopted by the IRS. Under Rev. Proc. 2011-38, a partial exchange will be treated as tax-free under Section 1035 of the Code if there are no distributions, from either annuity, within 180 days of the partial 1035 exchange and annuity payments that satisfy the newly enacted partial annuitization rule of Section 72(a)(2) of the code will not be treated as a distribution from either the old or new contract. Please discuss any tax consequences concerning any contemplated transaction with a competent tax adviser.

43

Medicare Tax

Beginning in 2013, distributions from nonqualified annuity policies will be considered “investment income” for purposes of the newly enacted Medicare tax on investment income. Thus, in certain circumstances, a 3.8% tax may be applied to some or all of the taxable portion of distributions (e.g. earnings) to individuals, trusts, and estates whose income exceeds certain threshold amounts. Please consult a tax adviser for more information.

Taxation of Surrenders and Partial Withdrawals - Qualified Policies

In the case of a withdrawal under a qualified policy (other than from a deferred compensation plan under Section 457 of the Code), a pro rata portion of the amount you receive is taxable, generally based on the ratio of your “investment in the contract” to your total account balance or accrued benefit under the retirement plan. Your “investment in the contract” generally equals the amount of any non-deductible purchase payments made by you or on your behalf. If you do not have any non-deductible purchase payments, your investment in the contract will be treated as zero.

The IRS has not reviewed this policy for qualification as an IRA, and has not addressed in a ruling of general applicability whether any death benefits available under the policy comport with qualification requirements. The actuarial present value of death and/or living benefit options and riders elected may need to be considered in calculating minimum required distributions. Consult a competent tax adviser before purchasing an optional death benefit.

In addition, a penalty tax may be assessed on amounts surrendered from the policy prior to the date you reach age 59 ¹/₂, unless you meet one of the exceptions to this rule which are similar to the penalty exceptions for distributions from nonqualified policies discussed above. You may also be required to begin taking minimum distributions from the policy by a certain date. The terms of the plan may limit the rights otherwise available to you under the policy.

Taxation of Death Benefit Proceeds

Amounts may be distributed from the policy because of the death of the annuitant. Generally, such amounts should be includable in the income of the recipient: (1) if distributed in a lump sum, these amounts are taxed in the same manner as a surrender; (2) if distributed via partial withdrawals, these amounts are taxed in the same manner as partial surrender; (3) or if distributed under an annuity payment option, these amounts are taxed in the same manner as annuity payments.

Transfers, Assignments or Exchanges of Policies

A transfer of ownership or assignment of a policy, the designation of an annuitant or payee or other beneficiary who is not also the owner, the selection of certain annuity starting dates, the exchange of a policy and certain other transactions, or a change of annuitant other than the owner, may result in certain income or gift tax consequences to the owner that are beyond the scope of this discussion. An owner contemplating any such transfer, assignment, selection, exchange or change should contact a competent tax adviser with respect to the potential tax effects of such a transaction.

44

Separate Account Charges

It is possible that the IRS may take a position that fees for certain optional benefits (e.g., death benefits other than the Return of Premium death benefit) are deemed to be taxable distributions to you. In particular, the IRS may treat fees associated with certain optional benefits as a taxable surrender, which might also be subject to a tax penalty if the surrender occurs prior to age 59 ¹/₂. Although we do not believe that the fees associated with any optional benefit provided under the policy should be treated as taxable surrenders, the tax rules associated with these benefits are unclear, and we advise that you consult your tax adviser prior to selecting any optional benefit under the policy.

Withholding

The portion of any distribution under a policy that is includable in gross income will be subject to federal income tax withholding unless the recipient of such distribution elects not to have federal income tax withheld. Election forms will be provided at the time distributions are requested or made. The amount of withholding varies according to the type of distribution. For qualified policies taxable, “eligible rollover distributions” from Section 401(a) plans, Section 403(a) annuities, Section 403(b) tax-sheltered annuities, and governmental 457 plans are subject to a mandatory federal income tax withholding of 20%. An eligible rollover distribution is any distribution from such a plan, other than specified distributions such as distributions required by the Code, distributions in a specified annuity form or hardship distributions. The 20% withholding does not apply, however, to nontaxable distributions or if (i) the employee (or employee’s spouse or former spouse as beneficiary or alternate payee) chooses a “direct rollover” from the plan to a tax-qualified plan, IRA, Roth IRA or 403(b) tax-sheltered annuity or to a governmental 457 plan that agrees to separately account for rollover contributions; or (ii) a non-spouse beneficiary chooses a “direct rollover” from the plan to an IRA established by the direct rollover.

Federal Estate, Gift and Generation-Skipping Transfer Taxes

Beginning in 2013, in the absence of legislative action, the federal estate tax, gift tax and generation-skipping transfer (“GST”) tax exemptions and maximum rates will return to their 2001 levels (with inflation adjustments for the GST tax exemption but not for the estate or gift tax exemptions). The federal estate tax and gift tax exemptions and minimum rates will be $1,000,000 and 55%, respectively. The federal GTS tax exemptions and maximum rates will be $1,430,000 and 55%, respectively.

The uncertainty as to how the current law might be modified in coming years underscores the importance of seeking guidance from a competent adviser to help ensure that your estate plan adequately addresses your needs and that of your beneficiaries under all possible scenarios.

Federal Estate Taxes. While no attempt is being made to discuss the Federal estate tax implications of the policy in detail, a purchaser should keep in mind that the value of an annuity policy owned by a decedent and payable to a beneficiary by virtue of surviving the decedent is included in the decedent’s gross estate. Depending on the terms of the annuity policy, the value of the annuity included in the gross estate may be the value of the lump sum payment payable to the designated beneficiary or the actuarial value of the payments to be received by the beneficiary. Consult an estate planning adviser for more information.

45

Generation-Skipping Transfer Tax. Under certain circumstances, the Code may impose a “generation skipping transfer tax” when all or part of an annuity policy is transferred to, or a death benefit is paid to, an individual two or more generations younger than the Owner. Regulations issued under the Code may require us to deduct the tax from your policy, or from any applicable payment, and pay it directly to the IRS.

Annuity Purchases by Residents of Puerto Rico

The IRS recently announced that income received by residents of Puerto Rico under life insurance or annuity policies issued by a Puerto Rico branch of a United States life insurance company is U.S.-source income that is generally subject to United States federal income tax.

Annuity Policies Purchased by Nonresident Aliens and Foreign Corporations

The discussion above provided general information (but not tax advice) regarding U.S. federal income tax consequences to annuity owners that are U.S. persons. Taxable distributions made to owners who are not U.S. persons will generally be subject to U.S. federal income tax withholding at a 30% rate, unless a lower treaty rate applies. In addition, distributions may be subject to state and/or municipal taxes and taxes that may be imposed by the owner’s country of citizenship or residence. Prospective foreign owners are advised to consult with a qualified tax adviser regarding U.S., state, and foreign taxation for any annuity policy purchase.

Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act (“FATCA”)

Beginning in 2014, we may be required to withhold at a rate of 30% under FATCA on certain distributions to foreign financial institutions and non-financial foreign entities holding accounts on behalf of and/or the assets of U.S. persons unless the foreign entities provide us with certain certifications regarding their status under FATCA on the applicable IRS forms. Prospective foreign entities are advised to consult with a competent tax adviser regarding the application of FATCA to their particular situation.

Qualified Policies

The qualified policy is designed for use with several types of tax-qualified retirement plans which are briefly described below. The tax rules applicable to participants and beneficiaries in tax-qualified retirement plans vary according to the type of plan and the terms and conditions of the plan. Special favorable tax treatment may be available for certain types of contributions and distributions. Adverse tax consequences may result from contributions in excess of specified limits, distributions prior to age 59 ¹/₂ (subject to certain exceptions), distributions that do not conform to specified commencement and minimum distribution rules, and in other specified circumstances. The distribution rules under Section 72(s) of the Code do not apply to annuities provided under a plan described in Sections 401(a), 403(a), 403(b), 408 or 408A of the Code or to an annuity that is qualified funding asset as defined in the Code Section 130(d) of the Code. Some retirement plans are subject to distribution and other requirements that are not incorporated into the policies or our policy administration procedures. Owners, participants, and beneficiaries are responsible for determining that contributions, distributions, and other transactions with respect to the policies comply with applicable law.

46

Traditional Individual Retirement Annuities. In order to qualify as a traditional individual retirement annuity under Section 408(b) of the Code, a policy must satisfy certain conditions: (i) the owner must be the annuitant; (ii) the policy generally is not transferable by the owner, e.g., the owner may not designate a new owner, designate a contingent owner or assign the policy as collateral security; (iii) subject to special rules, the total premium payments for any calendar year may not exceed the amount specified in the Code for the year, except in the case of a rollover amount or contribution under Section 402(c), 402(e)(6), 403(a)(4), 403(b)(8), 403(b)(10), 408(d)(3) or 457(e)(16) of the Code; (iv) annuity payments or partial surrenders according to the requirements in the IRS regulations must begin no later than April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the annuitant attains age 70 ¹/₂; (v) an annuity payment option with a period certain that will guarantee annuity payments beyond the life expectancy of the annuitant and the beneficiary may not be selected; (vi) certain payments of death benefits must be made in the event the annuitant dies prior to the distribution of the policy value; (vii) the entire interest of the owner is non-forfeitable; and (viii) the premiums must not be fixed. Policies intended to qualify as traditional individual retirement annuities under Section 408(b) of the Code contain such provisions. Amounts in the IRA (other than nondeductible contributions) are taxed when distributed from the IRA. Distributions prior to age 59 ¹/₂ (unless certain exceptions apply) are subject to a 10% penalty tax.

Roth Individual Retirement Annuities (Roth IRA). The Roth IRA, under Section 408A of the Code, contains many of the same provisions as a traditional IRA. However, there are some differences. First, the contributions are not deductible and must be made in cash or as a rollover or transfer from another Roth IRA, a traditional IRA or other allowed qualified plan. A rollover from or conversion of an IRA to a Roth IRA may be subject to tax. The ability to make cash contributions to Roth IRAs is available to individuals with earned income and whose modified adjusted gross income is under a specified dollar amount for the year. Subject to special rules, the amount per individual that may be contributed to all IRAs (Roth and traditional) is the deductible amount specified in the Code for the year. Secondly, the distributions are taxed differently. The Roth IRA offers tax-free distributions when made 5 tax years after the first contribution to any Roth IRA of the individual and made after one of the following attaining age 59 ¹/₂, to pay for qualified first time home buyer expenses (lifetime maximum of $10,000), or due to death or disability. All other distributions are subject to income tax when made from earnings and may be subject to a penalty tax unless an exception applies. Please note that specific tax ordering rules apply to Roth IRA distributions. Unlike the traditional IRA, there are no minimum required distributions during the owner’s lifetime; however, minimum required distributions at death are generally the same as for traditional IRAs.

Section 403(b) Plans. Under Section 403(b) of the Code, payments made by public school systems and certain tax exempt organizations to purchase policies for their employees are generally excludable from the gross income of the employee, subject to certain limitations. However, such payments may be subject to FICA (Social Security) taxes. The policy includes a death benefit that in some cases may exceed the greater of the premium payments or the policy value. Additionally, in accordance with the requirements of the Code, Section 403(b) annuities generally may not permit distribution of (i) elective contributions made in years beginning after December 31, 1988, and (ii) earnings on those contributions, and (iii) earnings on amounts attributed to elective contributions held as of the end of the last year beginning before January 1, 1989. Distributions of such amounts will be allowed only upon the death of the employee, on or after attainment of age 59 ¹/₂, severance from employment, disability, or financial hardship, except that income attributable to elective contributions may not be distributed in the case of hardship. These rules may prevent the payment of guaranteed withdrawals under a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit

47

prior to age 59 ¹/₂. For policies issued after 2008, amounts attributable to non-elective contributions may be subject to distribution restrictions specified in the employer’s section 403(b) plan. Employers using the policy in connection with Section 403(b) plans may wish to consult with their tax adviser.

Pursuant to new tax regulations, we generally are required to confirm, with your 403(b) plan sponsor or otherwise, that surrenders you request from a 403(b) policy comply with applicable tax requirements before we process your request. We will defer such payments you request until all information required under the tax law has been received. By requesting a surrender or transfer, you consent to the sharing of confidential information about you, the policy, and transactions under the policy and any other 403(b) policies or accounts you have under the 403(b) plan among us, your employer or plan sponsor, any plan administrator or record keeper, and other product providers.

Corporate Pension and Profit-Sharing Plans and H.R. 10 Plans. Sections 401(a) and 403(a) of the Code permit corporate employers to establish various types of retirement plans for employees and self-employed individuals to establish qualified plans for themselves and their employees. Such retirement plans may permit the purchase of the policies to accumulate retirement savings. Adverse tax consequences to the plan, the participant or both may result if the policy is assigned or transferred to any individual as a means to provide benefit payments. Contributions to and distributions from such plans are limited by the Code and may be subject to penalties.

Deferred Compensation Plans. Section 457 of the Code, while not actually providing for a qualified plan as that term is normally used, provides for certain deferred compensation plans with respect to service for state governments, local governments, political subdivisions, agencies, instrumentalities, and certain affiliates of such entities, and tax exempt organizations. Under such plans a participant may specify the form of investment in which his or her participation will be made. For non-governmental Section 457 plans, all such investments, however, are owned by, and are subject to, the claims of the general creditors of the sponsoring employer. Depending on the terms of the particular plan, a non-government employer may be entitled to draw on deferred amounts for purposes unrelated to its Section 457 plan obligations. In general, all amounts received under a non-governmental Section 457 plan are taxable and are subject to federal income tax withholding as wages. Contributions to and distributions from such plans are limited by the Code and may be subject to penalties.

Ineligible Owners-Qualified

We currently will not issue new policies to/or for the following plans: 403(a), 403(b), 412(i)/412(e)(3), 419, 457 (we will in certain limited circumstances accept 457(f) plans), employee stock ownership plans, Keogh/HR-10 plans and any other types of plans at our sole discretion.

Qualified Plan Distribution

For qualified plans under Section 401(a), 403(a), 403(b), and 457, the Code requires that distributions generally must commence no later than the later of April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the owner (or plan participant) (i) reaches age 70 ¹/₂ or (ii) retires, and must be made in a specified form or manner. If a participant is a “5 percent owner” (as defined in the Code), or in the case of an IRA (other than a Roth IRA which is not subject to the lifetime required minimum distribution rules), distributions generally must begin no later than April 1 of the year following the calendar year in which the owner (or plan participant) reaches age 70 ¹/₂. Each owner is responsible for requesting distributions under the policy that satisfy applicable tax rules. We do not attempt

48

to provide more than general information about the use of the policy with the various types of retirement plans. Purchasers of policies for use with any retirement plan should consult their legal counsel and tax adviser regarding the suitability of the policy.

The Code generally requires that interest in a qualified policy be non-forfeitable. If your policy contains a bonus rider with a recapture, forfeiture, or “vesting” feature, it may not be consistent with those requirements. Consult a tax adviser before purchasing a bonus rider as part of a qualified policy.

You should consult your legal counsel or tax adviser if you are considering purchasing an enhanced death benefit or other optional rider, or if you are considering purchasing a policy for use with any qualified retirement plan or arrangement.

Possible Tax Law Changes

Although the likelihood of legislative or regulatory changes is uncertain, there is always the possibility that the tax treatment of the policy could change by legislation, regulation, or otherwise. You should consult a tax adviser with respect to legal or regulatory developments and their effect on the policy.

We have the right to modify the policy to meet the requirements of any applicable laws or regulations, including legislative changes that could otherwise diminish the favorable tax treatment that annuity policy owners currently receive.

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

Systematic Payout Option

You can select at any time during the accumulation phase to receive regular withdrawals (i.e., partial surrenders) from your policy by using the Systematic Payout Option. Any payment in excess of the cumulative interest credited at the time of the payment may be subject to an excess interest adjustment. Systematic withdrawals can be made monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, or annually. Each withdrawal must be at least $50. Monthly and quarterly withdrawals must generally be made by electronic funds transfer directly to your checking or savings account. There is no charge for this benefit.

Keep in mind that partial withdrawals under the Systematic Payout Option may be taxable, and if made before age 59 ¹/₂, may be subject to a 10% federal penalty tax.

Liquidity Rider

The optional Liquidity Rider (only available with the B-share) reduces the number of years each premium payment is subject to surrender charges. You can only elect this rider at the time you purchase the policy.

49

Surrender Charge Schedule. The Liquidity Rider reduces the number of years each premium payment is subject to surrender charges from seven years to four years. The surrender charge will remain unchanged from that of the B-share for the first four years.

Rider Fee. There is an additional charge for this rider which is a percentage of the daily net asset value in the separate account which is deducted in calculating the accumulation unit values. The rider fee is only charged for the first four policy years.

Accumulation Unit Values. We intend to administer the removal of the Liquidity Rider fee by changing to a different class of accumulation units. This will result in adjusting the number of accumulation units and adjusting the unit value of the subaccounts in which you were invested once the Liquidity Rider fee is no longer charged. The elimination of the fee and the adjustment in the number of accumulation units and unit values will not affect policy values.

Termination. The rider is irrevocable.

Please note:

• This feature terminates upon annuitization and there is a mandatory annuitization date.

• We may credit interest in the fixed account (if available) at a lower rate if you select this rider.

The Liquidity Rider may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Liquidity Rider. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

Additional Death Distribution

The optional Additional Death Distribution rider pays an additional amount (based on earnings, if any, since the rider was issued) when a death benefit is payable during the accumulation phase under your policy, in certain circumstances. The Additional Death Distribution is only available for issue ages through age 80.

Additional Death Distribution Benefit Amount. The Additional Death Distribution is payable only if you elected the rider prior to the death triggering the payment of the policy death benefit and a death benefit is payable under the policy. The Additional Death Distribution is equal to:

• the Additional Death Distribution factor (see below); multiplied by

• the rider earnings, if any, on the date the death benefit is calculated.

Rider earnings equal:

• the policy value on the date the death benefit is determined; minus

• policy value on the rider date; minus

• premium payments after the rider date; plus

• surrenders after the rider date that exceed the rider earnings on the date of the surrender.

50

No benefit is payable under the Additional Death Distribution rider if there are no rider earnings on the date the death benefit is calculated.

If you purchase your policy as part of a 1035 exchange or add the Additional Death Distribution rider after you purchase the policy, rider earnings do not include any gains before the 1035 exchange or the date the Additional Death Distribution is added to your policy.

The Additional Death Distribution factor is currently 40% for issue ages under 71 and 25% for issue ages 71-80, based on the annuitant’s age.

No benefit is paid under the rider unless (a) the rider is in force, (b) a death benefit is payable on the policy, and (c) there are rider earnings when the death benefit is calculated.

For purposes of computing taxable gains, both the death benefit payable under the policy and the Additional Death Distribution will be considered.

Please see “Appendix - Additional Death Distribution” for an example which illustrates the Additional Death Distribution payable as well as the effect of a partial surrender on the Additional Death Distribution benefit amount.

Spousal Continuation. If a spouse, as the new owner of the policy, elects to continue the policy instead of receiving a death benefit and Additional Death Distribution, the spouse will receive a one-time policy value increase equal to the Additional Death Distribution. At this time the rider will terminate. The spouse will have the option of immediately re-electing the rider through age 80. See TAX INFORMATION - Tax Status of the Policy - Distribution Requirements. (The payment of a death benefit under the policy is triggered by the death of the annuitant.)

Rider Fee. There is an additional charge for this rider which is a percentage of the policy value which, is deducted annually on each rider anniversary prior to annuitization. We will also deduct this fee upon full surrender of the policy or other termination of the rider. The rider fee is deducted pro rata from each investment option. The fee is deducted even during periods when the Additional Death Distribution would not pay any benefit (because there are no rider earnings).

Termination. The rider will remain in effect until:

• you cancel it by notifying our Administrative and Service Office in writing,

• the policy is annuitized or surrendered, or

• the Additional Death Distribution is paid or added to the policy value under a spousal continuation.

Once terminated, the Additional Death Distribution may be re-elected; however, a new rider will be issued and the additional death benefit will be re-determined. Please note that if the rider is terminated and then re-elected, it will only cover gains, if any, since it was re-elected and the terms of the new rider may be different than the terminated rider.

51

The tax consequences associated with this rider are not clear. This rider may violate the requirements of certain qualified plans and IRAs. Consult a tax adviser before electing this rider for any qualified plan or IRA.

Please note: This feature terminates upon annuitization and there is a mandatory annuitization date.

The Additional Death Distribution may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Additional Death Distribution. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

Additional Death Distribution+

The optional Additional Death Distribution+ rider pays an additional death benefit amount when a death benefit is payable during the accumulation phase under your policy, in certain circumstances. The Additional Death Distribution+ is only available for issue ages through age 75.

Additional Death Distribution+ Benefit Amount. An additional death benefit is only payable if a death benefit is paid on the base policy to which the rider is attached. The amount of the additional benefit is dependent on the amount of time that has passed since the rider date as follows:

• If a death benefit is payable within the first five years after the rider date, the additional benefit amount will be equal to the sum of all rider fees paid since the rider date.

• If a death benefit is payable after five years following the rider date, the additional benefit will be equal to the rider benefit base multiplied by the rider benefit percentage.

The rider benefit base at any time is equal to the policy value less any premiums added after the rider date.

The rider benefit percentage may vary but currently equals 30% for issue ages 0 - 70 and 20% for issue ages 71 - 75, based on the annuitant’s age.

No benefit is payable under the Additional Death Distribution+ if the policy value on the date the death benefit is paid is less than the premium payments after the rider date.

For purposes of computing taxable gains, both the death benefit payable under the policy and the additional benefit will be considered.

Please see “Appendix - Additional Death Distribution+” for an example that illustrates the additional death benefit payable as well as the effect of a partial surrender on the Additional Death Distribution+ benefit amount.

Spousal Continuation. If a spouse, as the new owner of the policy, elects to continue the policy instead of receiving the death benefit and Additional Death Distribution+, then the spouse will receive a one-time policy value increase equal to the Additional Death Distribution+. At this time the rider will terminate. The spouse will have the option of immediately re-electing the rider through age 75. See TAX INFORMATION - Tax Status of the Policy - Distribution Requirements. (The payment of a death benefit under the policy is triggered by the death of the annuitant.)

52

Rider Fee. There is an additional charge for this rider which is a percentage of the policy value which, is deducted annually on each rider anniversary prior to annuitization. We will also deduct this fee upon full surrender of the policy or other termination of the rider.

Please note: the rider fee is deducted pro rata from each investment option. The fee is deducted even during periods when the rider would not pay any benefits.

Termination. The rider will remain in effect until:

• you cancel it by notifying our Administrative and Service Office in writing in good order,

• the policy is annuitized or surrendered, or

• the additional death benefit is paid or added to the policy value under a spousal continuation.

Once terminated, the Additional Death Distribution+ may not be re-elected for one year.

The tax consequences associated with this rider are not clear. This rider may violate the requirements of certain qualified plans and IRAs. Consult a tax adviser before electing this rider for any qualified plan or IRA.

Please note: This feature terminates upon annuitization and there is a maximum annuity commencement date.

The Additional Death Distribution+ may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Additional Death Distribution+. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

Nursing Care and Terminal Condition Withdrawal Option

No surrender charges or excess interest adjustments will apply if you make a surrender ($1,000 minimum), under certain circumstances, because you or your spouse has been:

• confined in a hospital or nursing facility for 30 days in a row after the policy issue date; or

• diagnosed with a terminal condition after the policy issue date (usually a life expectancy of 12 months or less).

You may exercise this benefit at any time during the accumulation phase. This benefit is also available to the annuitant or annuitant’s spouse if the owner is not a natural person. There is no restriction on the maximum amount you may surrender under this benefit. There is no charge for this benefit.

This benefit may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states.

Unemployment Waiver

No surrender charges or excess interest adjustments will apply to surrenders after you or your spouse become unemployed in certain circumstances (e.g., because you were terminated, laid off, or otherwise lost your job involuntarily). In order to qualify, you (or your spouse, whichever is applicable) must have been:

• employed full time for at least two years prior to becoming unemployed;

• employed full time on the policy date;

53

• unemployed for at least 60 days in a row at the time of surrender;

• must have a minimum cash value at the time of surrender of $5,000; and

• you (or your spouse) must be receiving unemployment benefits.

You must provide written proof from your State’s Department of Labor, which verifies that you qualify for and are receiving unemployment benefits at the time of surrender.

You may use this benefit at any time during the accumulation phase. This benefit is also available to the annuitant or annuitant’s spouse if the owner is not a natural person. There is no restriction on the maximum amount you may surrender under this benefit. There is no charge for this benefit.

This benefit may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states.

Telephone Transactions

You may generally make certain transactions by telephone upon our receipt of the appropriate authorization. You will be required to provide certain information for identification purposes when requesting a transaction by telephone and we may record your telephone call. We may also require written confirmation of your request. We will not be liable for losses resulting from telephone requests that we believe are genuine. We reserve the right to revoke your telephone transaction privileges at any time without revoking all owners’ telephone transfer privileges. We may deny the telephone transaction privileges to market timers and frequent or disruptive traders.

Telephone requests must be received while the New York Stock Exchange is open for regular trading to get same-day pricing of the transaction. We may discontinue this option at any time.

We cannot guarantee that telephone transactions will always be available. For example, our offices may be closed during severe circumstances or other emergencies. There may be interruptions in service beyond our control, and if the volume of calls is unusually high, we might not have anyone available, or lines available, to take your call. Although we have taken precautions to help our systems handle heavy use, we cannot promise complete reliability in all circumstances.

Dollar Cost Averaging Program

During the accumulation phase, you may instruct us to automatically make transfers into one or more variable subaccounts in accordance with your allocation instructions. This is known as Dollar Cost Averaging. While Dollar Cost Averaging buys more accumulation units when prices are low and fewer accumulation units when prices are high, it does not guarantee profits or assure that you will not experience a loss.

There are two Dollar Cost Averaging programs available under your policy:

• Traditional—You may specify the dollar amount to be transferred or the number of transfers. Transfers will begin as soon as the program is started. A minimum of $500 per transfer is required. The minimum number of transfers is 6 monthly or 4 quarterly, and the maximum is 24 monthly or 8 quarterly. You can elect to transfer from either the fixed account or money market (see the Dollar Cost Averaging election form).

54

• Special—You may only elect either a six or twelve month program. Transfers will begin as soon as the program is started. You cannot transfer from another investment option into a Special Dollar Cost Averaging program. This program is only available for new premium, requires transfers from a fixed source, and may credit a higher or lower interest rate than a traditional program. A minimum of $500 per transfer is required ($3,000 or $6,000 to start a 6-month or 12-month program, respectively).

A Dollar Cost Averaging program will begin once we have received in good order all necessary information and the minimum required amount. See OTHER INFORMATION - Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order. Please note: Dollar Cost Averaging programs will not begin on the 29th, 30th, or 31st. If a program would have started on one of those dates, it will start on the 1st business day of the following month. If we receive additional premium payments while a Dollar Cost Averaging program is running, absent new instructions to the contrary, the amount of the Dollar Cost Averaging transfers will increase, but the length of the Dollar Cost Averaging program will not.

NOTE CAREFULLY:

IF:

• we do not receive all necessary information to begin an initial Dollar Cost Averaging program within 30 days of allocating the minimum required amount to a Dollar Cost Averaging program; or

• we do not receive the minimum required amount to begin an initial Dollar Cost Averaging program within 30 days of allocating an insufficient amount;

THEN:

• any amount in a fixed source will be transferred to the money market investment option; and

• any amount in a variable source will remain in that variable investment option; and

• new instructions will be required to begin a Dollar Cost Averaging program.

IF:

• we receive additional premium payments after a Dollar Cost Averaging program is completed and the additional premium meets the minimum requirements to start a Dollar Cost Averaging program;

THEN:

• the additional premium payments will be allocated according to the current payment allocations at the time and will not reactivate a completed Dollar Cost Averaging program. (New Dollar Cost Averaging instructions are required to start a new Dollar Cost Averaging program once the previous Dollar Cost Averaging program has completed.)

IF:

• we receive additional premium payments after a Dollar Cost Averaging program is completed, and the additional premium does not meet the minimum requirements to start a Dollar Cost Averaging program;

THEN:

• we will, absent new instructions to the contrary, allocate the additional premium among the subaccounts as identified in the previous Dollar Cost Averaging program.

IF:

• you discontinue a Dollar Cost Averaging program before its completion;

55

THEN:

• we will, absent new instructions to the contrary, transfer any remaining balance directly into the subaccounts in the Dollar Cost Averaging instructions.

You should consider your ability to continue a Dollar Cost Averaging program during all economic conditions. Transfers from a Dollar Cost Averaging fixed source are not subject to an excess interest adjustment. A Dollar Cost Averaging program can be used in conjunction with a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit (subject to any investment restrictions involving the source). There is no charge for this benefit.

The Dollar Cost Averaging Program may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. See your policy for availability of the fixed account options.

Asset Rebalancing

During the accumulation phase you can instruct us to automatically rebalance the amounts in your subaccounts to maintain your desired asset allocation. This feature is called Asset Rebalancing and can be started and stopped at any time. If a transfer is requested, we will honor the requested transfer and discontinue Asset Rebalancing. New instructions are required to start Asset Rebalancing. Asset Rebalancing ignores amounts in the fixed account. You can choose to rebalance monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, or annually. Asset Rebalancing can be used in conjunction with a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit. Please note, any amounts rebalanced may be immediately transferred to the PAM investment options as applicable under the Portfolio Allocation Method.There is no charge for this benefit.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefits

You may elect one of the following optional riders under the policy that offers guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefits - the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, the Income Link^SM Rider, the Retirement Income Max^SM Rider or the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider. Important aspects of each of these riders are summarized in the “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal benefit Comparison Table” and are described in more detail below. You should consult with tax and financial professionals to determine which of these riders is appropriate for you.

Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider

You may elect to purchase the optional Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider (also known as Living Benefits Rider) which provides you with a guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit and a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit. The Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider is only available during the accumulation phase. The Living Benefits Rider is only available for annuitant issue ages through age 80. The maximum issue age may be lower if required by state law.

You should view the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider as a way to permit you to invest in variable investment options while still having your policy value and liquidity protected to the extent provided by the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider.

56

Please note:

• Certain protections under the rider are available only if you hold the rider for ten years.

• If you elect the rider, we will monitor your policy value and we may transfer amounts back and forth between specified investment options under the policy (including guaranteed period options in the fixed account) and the variable investment options you choose, according to a mathematical model that we will use to assist us in managing portfolio risk and supporting the guarantees under the rider. See Portfolio Allocation Method below.

• Any such transfers out of a guaranteed period option may be subject to an excess interest adjustment. (See Portfolio Allocation Method, below.)

• You will begin paying the rider charge as of the date the rider takes effect, even if you do not begin taking withdrawals for many years, or ever. We will not refund the charges you have paid under the rider if you never choose to take withdrawals and/or if you never receive any payments under the rider.

• We have designed this rider for you to take withdrawals each rider year that are less than or equal to the maximum annual withdrawal amount. You should not purchase this rider if you plan to take withdrawals in excess of the maximum annual withdrawal amount, because such excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or eliminate the value of the guarantees provided by the rider.

• Because the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit under this rider is accessed through regular withdrawals that do not exceed the maximum annual withdrawal amount, the rider may not be appropriate for you if you do not foresee a need for liquidity and your primary objective is to take the maximum advantage of the tax deferral aspect of the policy.

• The tax rules for qualified policies may limit the value of this rider. Please consult a qualified tax adviser before electing the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider for a qualified policy.

Guaranteed Minimum Accumulation Benefit of Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider

If you elect the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, we will provide a guaranteed future value. This benefit is intended to provide a level of protection regardless of the performance of the variable investment options you select.

Guaranteed Future Value. We guarantee that, on the guaranteed future value date (ten years after you elect the rider), your policy value will at least equal your guaranteed future value. The guaranteed future value on the rider date (i.e., the date the rider is added to the policy) is the policy value (if X-Share is elected, less any premium enhancements if the rider is added in the first policy year). After the rider date and before the guaranteed future value date, the guaranteed future value is equal to:

• the guaranteed future value on the rider date; plus

• a percentage of subsequent premium payments (as described below); less

• subsequent adjusted partial withdrawals (as described below).

After the guaranteed future value date, the guaranteed future value equals zero.

Subsequent Premium Payments. The percentage of subsequent premium payments that will be added to the guaranteed future value is as follows:

57

Rider Year	Percent of subsequent premium payments                                                      added to guaranteed future value
1	100%
2	90%
3	80%
4	70%
5	60%
6	50%
7	50%
8	50%
9	50%
10	0%

Guaranteed Future Value Adjusted Partial Withdrawals. If you take a partial withdrawal, even withdrawals under the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits, it will reduce your guaranteed future value. The amount of the reduction is referred to as the adjusted partial withdrawal amount, which will be equal to the greater of:

• the guaranteed future value immediately prior to the withdrawal multiplied by the percentage reduction in the policy value resulting from the gross partial withdrawal; or

• the gross partial withdrawal amount.

(The gross partial withdrawal amount is the amount you request, plus any surrender charges or excess interest adjustment that may be applicable.)

In other words, if your policy value is greater than the guaranteed future value at the time you make a partial withdrawal, then your guaranteed future value is reduced by the same amount we reduce your policy value. However, if your policy value is less than the guaranteed future value at the time you make a partial withdrawal, then your guaranteed future value will be reduced by more than the amount we reduce your policy value.

See the “Appendix - Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider Adjusted Partial Withdrawals” to this prospectus for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail, including withdrawals that reduce the guaranteed future value by more than the amount of the gross partial withdrawal.

Guaranteed Minimum Accumulation Benefit. On the guaranteed future value date (ten years after you elect the rider), if the policy value is less than the guaranteed future value, we will add an amount equal to the difference to your policy value (the policy value will then be subject to investment risk). This addition will not increase your “principal back” or “for life” total withdrawal bases. After the guaranteed future value date, the guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit will terminate.

Example. Assume you make a single premium payment of $100,000 and you do not make any withdrawals or additional premium payments. If, on the guaranteed future value date, your policy value has declined to $90,000 because of negative investment performance, then we will add $10,000 ($100,000 – $90,000) to your policy value.

58

Please note: You do not have any protection under the guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit unless you hold the policy with the rider for ten years. If you think that you may terminate the policy or elect to start receiving annuity payments (or if you must begin taking required minimum distributions) before the guaranteed future value date, electing the rider may not be in your best interests.

Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit of Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider

If you elect the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, we will provide a maximum annual withdrawal amount (first as withdrawals from your policy value or, if necessary, as payments from us) regardless of your policy value. This benefit is intended to provide a level of benefits regardless of the performance of the variable investment options you select.

Withdrawal Guarantees. We account for the withdrawals you take under the rider by applying two different withdrawal guarantees:

• “principal back,” for withdrawals of up to 7% of your total withdrawal base.

• “for life,” for withdrawals of up to 5% of your total withdrawal base.

When you make a withdrawal, you do not need to specify it as being under either withdrawal guarantee. Any withdrawals that you take while the rider is in effect could have different impacts under each of the withdrawal guarantees - on your maximum annual withdrawal amount, on your total withdrawal base, and on your minimum remaining withdrawal amount. For example, withdrawals that are compliant with the “principal back” maximum withdrawal amount could result in excess withdrawals under the “for life” withdrawal guarantee and, consequently, would reduce the maximum annual withdrawal amount, the total withdrawal base, and the minimum remaining withdrawal amount under the “for life” withdrawal guarantee. (See Adjusted Partial Withdrawals below.)

Example: Assume you make a single premium payment of $100,000 and you have not made any withdrawals or additional premium payments. If you withdraw $6,000, that would be an excess withdrawal of $1,000 ($6,000 - $5,000) under the for life guarantee but not under the principal back guarantee.

Your ability to change the frequency or amount of your withdrawals ceases if your policy value reaches zero.

Of course, you can always withdraw an amount up to your cash value pursuant to your rights under the policy at your discretion. See “Appendix - Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider Adjusted Partial Withdrawals,” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail, including an excess withdrawal that reduces the total withdrawal base by a pro rata amount.

Please note:

• Any amount withdrawn in a rider year (including any surrender charge or excess interest adjustment) in excess of the maximum withdrawal amount is an excess withdrawal.

• The amount of your excess withdrawal will impact the maximum annual withdrawal amount, total withdrawal base, and minimum remaining withdrawal amount under each guarantee and such impact may be on a greater than dollar-for-dollar basis. (See Maximum Annual Withdrawal Benefit, Total Withdrawal Base, and Minimum Remaining Withdrawal Amount, below.)

59

Withdrawals under the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit also:

• reduce your policy value;

• reduce the guaranteed future value;

• reduce your death benefit and other benefits;

• may be subject to surrender charges or excess interest adjustments;

• may be subject to income taxes and federal tax penalties (See TAX INFORMATION).

Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. Under this benefit:

• you can withdraw up to 7% of your “principal back” total withdrawal base each rider year until your “principal back” minimum remaining withdrawal amount reaches zero.

Example. Assume you make a single premium payment of $100,000 and that you do not make any withdrawals or additional premium payments. Assume that after five years, your policy value has declined to $70,000 solely because of negative investment performance. You could still receive up to $7,000 (7% of $100,000) each rider year for the next fourteen years and $2,000 in the year immediately thereafter so you would get back your full $100,000 (assuming that you do not withdraw more than $7,000 in any one rider year).

• or, you can withdraw up to 5% of your “for life” total withdrawal base each rider year starting with the rider anniversary immediately following the annuitant’s 59th birthday and lasting until the annuitant’s death, unless your “for life” minimum remaining withdrawal amount reaches zero because of “excess withdrawals” (see Adjusted Partial Withdrawals, below). A penalty tax may be assessed on amounts surrendered from the policy before the annuitant reaches age 59½.

Example. Assume you are the owner and annuitant and you make a single premium payment of $100,000 when you are 55 years old. Assume you do not make any withdrawals or additional premium payments. Assume that after five years, your policy value has declined to $70,000 solely because of negative investment performance. You could still receive up to $5,000 (5% of $100,000) each rider year for the rest of your life (assuming that you do not withdraw more than $5,000 in any one rider year).

You can receive up to the maximum annual withdrawal amount each rider year (first as withdrawals from your policy value and, if necessary, as payments from us) under this rider regardless of your policy value; however, once your policy value reaches zero you cannot make premium payments, and all other policy features, benefits, and guarantees (except those provided by this rider) are terminated. In order to continue withdrawals under this rider after your policy value reaches zero, you must select an amount (which cannot exceed the maximum annual withdrawal amount at that time) and frequency (annually, semi-annually, quarterly or monthly) of future withdrawals. Once selected, the amount and frequency of future withdrawals cannot be changed.

Please note:

• Withdrawals under the 5% “for life” guarantee cannot begin until after the rider anniversary following the annuitant’s 59th birthday.

• Any withdrawal before the rider anniversary following the annuitant’s 59th birthday will reduce the benefits under the 5% “for life” guarantee.

• The maximum annual withdrawal amounts described above (the 7% “principal back” and 5% “for life”) are based on rider years, not calendar or policy years (if different from rider years).

60

• You cannot carry over any portion of your maximum annual withdrawal amount that is not withdrawn during a rider year for withdrawal in a future rider year. This means that if you do not take the maximum annual withdrawal amount during a rider year, you cannot take more than the maximum annual withdrawal amount in the next rider year and maintain the rider’s guarantees.

• Excess withdrawals may cause you to lose the benefit of the rider.

• If you have a qualified policy, minimum required distribution rules may force you to take excess withdrawals to avoid the imposition of a 50% excise tax. Further, some qualified policies have withdrawal restrictions that may (with limited exceptions) prevent you from taking withdrawals before age 59 ¹/₂. You should consult a tax adviser before purchasing this rider with a qualified policy.

Total Withdrawal Base. We use the total withdrawal base to calculate the maximum annual withdrawal amount. The total withdrawal base on the rider date is the policy value (if X-Share is elected, less any premium enhancements if the rider is added in the first policy year). After the rider date, the total withdrawal base is equal to:

• the total withdrawal base on the rider date; plus

• subsequent premium payments; less

• subsequent adjusted partial withdrawals (as described below).

We will calculate separate total withdrawal bases for the “principal back” and “for life” guarantees.

Please note: We determine the total withdrawal base solely to calculate the maximum annual withdrawal amount. Your total withdrawal base is not a cash value, a surrender value, or a death benefit. It is not available for withdrawal, it is not a minimum return for any subaccount, and it is not a guarantee of policy value.

Minimum Remaining Withdrawal Amount. The minimum remaining withdrawal amount represents the total amount of guaranteed withdrawals still available under the rider. The minimum remaining withdrawal amount on the rider date is the policy value(if X-Share is elected, less any premium enhancements if the rider is added in the first policy year). After the rider date, the minimum remaining withdrawal amount is equal to:

• the minimum remaining withdrawal amount on the rider date; plus

• subsequent premium payments; less

• subsequent adjusted partial withdrawals (as described below).

We will calculate separate minimum remaining withdrawal amounts for the “principal back” and “for life” guarantees. It is important to calculate separate minimum remaining withdrawal amounts because they can provide different payment amounts not only upon reaching exhaustion but also in certain situations involving continuation after the annuitant’s death.

Adjusted Partial Withdrawals. Each rider year, for each withdrawal guarantee (i.e., “principal back” and “for life”), gross partial withdrawals (the amount that you request be withdrawn, plus any surrender charge or excess interest adjustment that may be applicable) up to the maximum annual withdrawal amount for that withdrawal guarantee, will reduce the minimum remaining withdrawal amount for that withdrawal guarantee on a dollar-for-dollar basis, but will not reduce the total withdrawal base for that withdrawal guarantee. For each withdrawal guarantee, gross partial withdrawals in excess of the maximum annual withdrawal amount for that withdrawal guarantee will reduce the total withdrawal base and minimum remaining withdrawal amount for that withdrawal guarantee by a pro rata

61

amount (possibly to zero). See “Appendix - Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider Adjusted Partial Withdrawals,” which provides examples showing the effect of a withdrawal. Excess withdrawals may cause you to lose the withdrawal guarantees under this rider.

Please note: Gross partial withdrawals that are compliant with the “principal back” withdrawal guarantee (i.e., withdrawals of the “principal back” maximum annual withdrawal amount) and any partial withdrawal before the rider anniversary following the annuitant’s 59th birthday, will result in an excess partial withdrawal under the “for life” guarantee, and will reduce the “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount, the “for life” total withdrawal base, and the “for life” minimum remaining withdrawal amount. Such reduction may be on a greater than dollar-for-dollar basis if the policy value is less than the applicable base.

Rider Fee. There is an additional charge for this rider which is a percentage of the “principal back” total withdrawal base on each rider anniversary which is charged annually before annuitization. We will also deduct the rider fee upon full surrender of the policy or other termination of the rider. The rider fee is deducted from each investment option in proportion to the amount of policy value in each investment option. Generally, the rider fee is deducted regardless of your values (i.e., even if your policy value exceeds your total withdrawal base).

We will continue to calculate the rider fee using the “principal back” total withdrawal base even after the “principal back” minimum remaining withdrawal amount reaches zero. The “principal back” total withdrawal base is always greater than or equal to the “for life” total withdrawal base.

Please note: Because the rider fee is a percentage of your “principal back” total withdrawal base on each rider anniversary, the fee can be substantially more than 0.90% of your policy value if that total withdrawal base is higher than your policy value.

Portfolio Allocation Method

If you elect the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, the Portfolio Allocation Method (“PAM”) will automatically be in effect. PAM is designed to help manage portfolio risk and support the guarantees under the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider. Using PAM, we will monitor your policy value and may transfer amounts back and forth between the PAM TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class subaccount (which invests in the Transamerica AEGON U.S. Government Securities VP - Service Class portfolio of the Transamerica Series Trust) or certain guaranteed period options of the fixed account (each a “PAM investment option” and collectively, the “PAM investment options”) and the variable investment options you choose. You should read the underlying fund prospectus for the variable PAM investment option(s) carefully before you elect the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider. We will transfer amounts from your variable investment options to the PAM investment options to the extent we deem necessary to support the guarantees under the rider. We will transfer amounts to the PAM investment options proportionally from all your variable investment options. Currently, PAM transfers are being made to the PAM TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class subaccount. We will not transfer amounts to the PAM investment options if your policy value is greater than guarantees under the rider.

PAM is designed to help reduce portfolio risk associated with negative performance. Using PAM, we will transfer amounts from your variable investment options to the PAM investment options to the extent we deem necessary to help manage portfolio risk and support the guarantees under the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider. You

62

should not view the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider or PAM as a “market timing” tool or other type of investment program designed to enhance your policy value. If you choose this rider, it may result in a lower policy value in certain situations. If policy value is transferred from your chosen variable investment options to the PAM investment options, less of your policy value may be available to participate in any future positive investment performance of your variable investment options. This may potentially provide a lower policy value than if you did not select the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider.

Under PAM, the mathematical model compares a number of interrelated factors including your policy value and the guarantees under the rider to be provided in the future. The mathematical model also uses assumptions for interest rates, the duration of the policy and stock market volatility. The following table sets forth the most influential of these factors and indicates how each one (assuming all other factors remain constant) could trigger a transfer into or out of the PAM subaccounts.

Factor	Direction of Transfer
Policy Value Increases	Transfer to the investment options
Policy Value Decreases	Transfer to the PAM subaccounts
Interest Rates Increase	Transfer to the investment options
Volatility Increases	Transfer to the PAM subaccounts

The amount of the transfer will vary depending on the magnitude and direction of the change in these factors. We may transfer some or all of your policy value to or from the PAM investment options.

Transactions you make also affect the number of PAM transfers including:

• additional premium payments; and

• excess withdrawals.

These transactions will change the policy value relative to the guarantees under the rider and may result in additional PAM transfers.

You may not allocate premium payments to, nor transfer policy value into or out of, the PAM investment options. PAM transfers are not subject to any transfer fee and do not count against the number of any free transfers we allow. Transfers out of a fixed account PAM investment option are at our discretion and may be subject to an excess interest adjustment if the transfer occurs before the end of a guarantee period. Any transfer to your variable investment options will be allocated into your variable investment options in proportion to the amount of policy value in each variable investment option.

Generally, transfers to the PAM investment options first occur when the policy value drops by a cumulative amount of 3% to 5% over any period of time, although we may make transfers to the PAM investment options when the policy value drops by a cumulative amount of less than 3% in relation to the guarantees. If the policy value continues to fall, more transfers to the PAM investment options will occur. When a transfer occurs, the transferred policy value is allocated to the PAM investment option(s) we deem appropriate. The policy value allocated to the PAM investment options will remain there unless the performance of your chosen investment options recovers sufficiently to enable us to transfer amounts back to your investment options while maintaining the guarantees

63

under the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider. This generally occurs when the policy value increases by 5% to 10% in relation to the guarantees, although we may require a larger increase before transferring amounts back to your investment options.

The Daily Rebalancing Formula Under the Mathematical Model: As noted above, to limit our exposure under the rider, we transfer policy value from your investment options to the PAM subaccounts, to the extent called for by a mathematical model that will not change once you purchase the policy. We do this in order to minimize the need to provide payments (for example, when your policy value goes to zero by other than an excess withdrawal), or to extend the time before any payment is required. When payments become more likely (because your policy value is approaching zero), the mathematical model will tend to allocate more policy value to the PAM subaccounts. If, on the other hand, the policy value is much higher than the guarantees under the rider, then payments may not be necessary, and therefore, the mathematical model will tend to allocate more policy value to the investment options.

Each business day the mathematical model computes a “target allocation,” which is the portion of the policy value that is to be allocated to the investment options.

The target allocation depends on several factors, including the policy value as compared to the guarantees under the rider, the time until payments are likely required, and interest rates. However, as time passes, these factors change. Therefore, the target allocation changes from one business day to the next.The formula is:

Percent of Policy Value required in PAM Subaccount (or X) = e^{-Dividend*Time} *(1- NormDist(d1))

where:

e = Base of the Natural Logarithm

NormDist = Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution

d1 = [ln(G)+(R – F +.5*V ^ 2)* T]/[V * T^.5]

In order to calculate the percent of policy value required in the PAM Subaccount, we must first calculate d1:

d1 = [ln(G)+(R – F +.5*V ^ 2)* T]/[V * T^.5]

where:

ln = Natural Logarithm Function—G = Guarantee Ratio—R = Rate—F = Fees—V = Volatility—T = Time

See “Appendix—PAM Method Transfers” for more detail regarding the workings of the mathematical model.

Upgrades

Prior to the annuitant’s 86th birthday and after the third rider anniversary, you can upgrade the total withdrawal base and guaranteed future value to the policy value by providing us the required notice. The minimum remaining withdrawal amounts will also be upgraded to the policy value and the maximum annual withdrawal amounts will be recalculated.

64

If an upgrade is elected, your current rider will terminate and a new rider will be issued with a new rider date, guaranteed future value date, and its own rider fee percentage (which may be higher than your current rider fee percentage). The “principal back” and “for life” withdrawal percentages will not change. The new rider date will be the date we receive all necessary information.

Annuitization

If you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date, we will allow you to annuitize your policy and elect to receive lifetime annuity payments equal to your 5% “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount.

Termination

The Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider will terminate upon the earliest of the following:

• the date we receive written notice from you in good order requesting termination of the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider (you may not terminate the rider before the third rider anniversary);

• annuitization (however, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date you may choose an annuitization option which guarantees you lifetime payments in an amount equal to your 5% “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount);

• the date the policy to which this rider is attached is assigned or the owner is changed without our approval;

• the date an excess withdrawal reduces your policy value to zero; or

• termination of your policy.

Please note: This feature terminates upon annuitization and there is a maximum annuity commencement date.

The Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

Income Link^SM Rider

You may elect to purchase the optional Income Link^SM rider which, provides you with: (1) a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit that uses a higher withdrawal percentage for a defined period of time and then resets to a lower percentage (see Withdrawal Options and Percentages below); and (2) an opportunity for increases in the rider withdrawal amount. This rider is available during the accumulation phase, and requires that you allocate 100% of your policy value in certain designated investment options which are designed to help manage our risk and support the guarantees under the rider. The tax rules for qualified policies may limit the value of this rider. Please consult a qualified tax adviser before electing the Income Link^SM rider for a qualified policy. The date this rider is added to your policy is the “rider date.” You choose the date of the first Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal, which is the Income Link^SM rider start date. If you elect the Income Link^SM rider you cannot elect another GLWB. The guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit is based on the claims-paying ability of Transamerica.

65

Income Link^SM Rider– Base Benefit

Under this benefit, you can receive up to the rider withdrawal amount each Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year (first as systematic withdrawals from your policy value and, if necessary, as systematic payments from us), beginning on the Income Link^SM rider start date and lasting until the annuitant’s death (unless your withdrawal base is reduced to zero because of any a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal; see Withdrawal Base Adjustments below). The first Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year begins on the Income Link^SM rider start date and each successive Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year begins thereafter on each anniversary of that date.

Income Link^SM Rider – Systematic Withdrawals. In order to begin receiving Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals, you must elect the withdrawal option and frequency (monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually) through which you will receive the Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals (for qualified policies you will also have to elect whether or not to receive your minimum required distribution amount as calculated herein). Any change to the frequency of your Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals will take effect at the beginning of the next Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year. Any other withdrawal, regardless of amount or timing, is a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal. See Withdrawal Base Adjustments below.

Of course, you can always withdraw any amount up to your cash value pursuant to your rights under the policy at your discretion however, withdrawals other than Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals (and certain minimum required distributions) will reduce the withdrawal base. See the “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Income Link^SM Rider” for an example showing the effect of a hypothetical withdrawal in more detail.

Please note:

• You will begin paying the rider charge as of the date the rider takes effect, even if you do not begin taking withdrawals for many years, or ever. We will not refund the charges you have paid under the rider if you never choose to take withdrawals and/or if you never receive any payments under the rider.

• We have designed this rider to allow for Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals from your policy value each Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year that are less than or equal to the rider withdrawal amount. You should not purchase this rider if you plan to take withdrawals in excess of the rider withdrawal amount or on a non-systematic basis, because such withdrawals may significantly reduce or eliminate the value of the guarantees provided by the rider.

• Depending on which withdrawal option you elect, your withdrawal percentage will decrease after second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth or seventh withdrawal year.

• The longer you wait to start taking Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals under the rider, the less time you have to benefit from the guarantee because of decreasing life expectancy as you age. You should carefully consider when to begin making withdrawals. There is a risk that you will not begin making withdrawals at the most financially beneficial time for you.

• Because the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit under this rider is accessed through regular Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals that do not exceed the rider withdrawal amount, the rider may not be appropriate for you if you do not foresee a need for liquidity and your primary objective is to take maximum advantage of the tax deferral aspect of the policy.

66

• All policy value must be allocated to a limited number of specified funds. You should consult with your registered representative to assist you in determining whether these certain investment options are suited for your financial needs and risk tolerance.

• Any withdrawal that is not an Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal (or certain minimum required distributions) will decrease the withdrawal base; the impact may be on a greater than dollar-for-dollar basis.

• During any Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year, if there is a withdrawal base adjustment, the remaining rider withdrawal amount and the Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount will increase or decrease by the same percentage as the withdrawal base.

• Upon the death of the annuitant (or the death of the surviving spouse if the joint option is elected), the Income Link^SM rider terminates and all benefits thereunder cease.

• The only way to receive withdrawals (either Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals or minimum required distributions) without causing an adjustment to the withdrawal base is to use the Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal programs.

Like all withdrawals, Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals while this rider is in effect also:

• reduce your policy value;

• reduce the amount you can withdraw “adjustment free” as a minimum required distribution;

• reduce your base policy death benefit and other benefits;

• may be subject to surrender charges or excess interest adjustments;

• may be subject to income taxes and federal tax penalties; and

• may be limited or restricted under certain qualified policies.

Rider Withdrawal Amount. You can withdraw up to the rider withdrawal amount systematically each Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year from your policy value without causing an adjustment. See Withdrawal Base Adjustments below. You must use a systematic withdrawal program to withdraw your rider withdrawal amount. Such withdrawals are Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals. Any withdrawal other than an Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal is considered a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal and will result in a withdrawal base adjustment (except for certain minimum required distributions, see Minimum Required Distribution below).

The annual rider withdrawal amount is zero until Income Link^SM rider start date. On the Income Link^SM rider start date and at the beginning of each Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year thereafter, the annual rider withdrawal amount is equal to the applicable withdrawal percentage (based on the withdrawal option you elect) multiplied by the withdrawal base. During any Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year, the rider withdrawal amount and Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount may be adjusted up or down as described in the Withdrawal Base Adjustment paragraph below.

Minimum Required Distribution: Prior to the Income Link^SM rider start date, the systematic withdrawal of the minimum required distribution amount (determined as set forth below) will not cause an adjustment. After the Income Link^SM rider start date, the withdrawal of the minimum required distribution amount (determined as set forth below) will not cause an adjustment to the withdrawal base; however, it must be withdrawn pursuant to an Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal program whereby you will receive your Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals and any remaining minimum required distribution amount as calculated herein distributed at the end of the applicable calendar year (not at the end of the applicable rider year).

67

If the plan participant (generally the annuitant) is at least 70 ¹/₂ years old, you can withdraw via a systematic withdrawal option, an amount equal to any minimum required distribution amount (for the tax year on that rider anniversary) calculated using only: (1) the living annuitant’s age, (2) the IRS Uniform Lifetime table or, if applicable, the Joint Life and Survivor Expectancy table, (3) the policy value of the base policy, (prior to the first rider anniversary we use the policy value on the rider date and thereafter we use the policy value on the date prescribed by the IRS) and (4) amounts from the current calendar year (no carry-over from past years). Minimum required distribution amounts calculated as set forth above and taken via a systematic withdrawal option will not cause an adjustment under this provision of the rider. Any withdrawal during a calendar year will reduce the withdrawal base adjustment free minimum required distribution amount for that year.

Please note: If you want to change the mode of the systematic withdrawal through which you are receiving your “adjustment free” minimum required distribution, your change will not take effect until the next anniversary of your systematic withdrawal program. Likewise, if you stop a systematic withdrawal program you cannot restart a new systematic program until the date that would have been the anniversary of the systematic withdrawal program you stopped. (For example, if you started a monthly systematic withdrawal program to receive your “adjustment free” minimum required distribution amount on August 19, 2013, and stopped it on December 21, 2013, you could not restart a new systematic withdrawal program until August 19, 2014.)

If your policy value reaches zero by other than an excess withdrawal, then you cannot make premium payments and all other policy features, benefits, and guarantees (except those provided by this rider) are terminated. In order to receive benefits guaranteed by this rider after your policy value reaches zero by other than an excess withdrawal, you must select the amount and frequency of future payments. Once selected, the amount and frequency cannot be changed.

Please note:

• The rider withdrawal amount will be zero until the Income Link^SM rider start date, however, you will still be charged a rider fee prior to this time.

• You cannot carry over any portion of your rider withdrawal amount that is not withdrawn during an Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year for withdrawal in a future Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year. This means that if you do not take the entire rider withdrawal amount during an Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year, you cannot take more than the rider withdrawal amount in the next Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year and maintain the rider’s guarantees.

• Non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals may cause you to lose the benefit of the rider.

• All policy value must be allocated to a limited number of specified funds. (See Designated Investment Options.)

Withdrawal Options and Percentages. We use the withdrawal percentage to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. The withdrawal percentage is determined by the withdrawal option you select. The withdrawal percentages, categorized by withdrawal option, are as follows:

Withdrawal Option - number years at increased rate	Withdrawal Percentage - Single Life Option	Withdrawal Percentage - Joint Life Option
	5% for 7 years	4.5% for 7 years
7 years	and 4% thereafter	and 3.5% thereafter

68

Withdrawal Option - number years at increased rate	Withdrawal Percentage - Single Life Option	Withdrawal Percentage - Joint Life Option
6 years	6% for 6 years and 4% thereafter	5.5% for 6 years and 3.5% thereafter
5 years	7% for 5 years and 4% thereafter	6.5% for 5 years and 3.5% thereafter
4 years	8% for 4 years and 4% thereafter	7.5% for 4 years and 3.5% thereafter
3 years	9% for 3 years and 4% thereafter	8.5% for 3 years and 3.5% thereafter
2 years	10% for 2 years and 4% thereafter	9.5% for 2 years and 3.5% thereafter

Please note, once established, the withdrawal percentage will not increase.

Withdrawal Base. We use the withdrawal base to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. The withdrawal base on the rider date is the policy value (if X-Share is elected, less any premium enhancements if the rider is added in the first policy year). During any rider year, the withdrawal base is equal to the withdrawal base on the rider date or most recent rider anniversary, plus subsequent premium payments, less subsequent withdrawal base adjustments due to non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals.

Please note:

• We determine the withdrawal base solely to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. Your withdrawal base is not a cash value, a surrender value, or a death benefit. It is not available for withdrawal, it is not a minimum return for any subaccount, and it is not a guarantee of policy value.

• Because the withdrawal base is generally equal to the policy value on the rider date, the rider withdrawal amount may be lower if you delay electing the rider and the policy value decreases before you elect the rider.

On each rider anniversary, the withdrawal base will equal the greater of:

• current withdrawal base or;

• the Automatic Step-up amount (see Automatic Step-Up below).

Automatic Step-Up. On each rider anniversary, we will automatically step-up the withdrawal base to an amount equal to the greater of (1) the highest policy value on any monthiversary^SM during the preceding rider year, if no non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal occurred, or (2) the policy value on the rider anniversary.

The rider fee percentage may increase (or decrease) at the time of any automatic step-up. The rider fee percentage will not exceed the maximum rider fee percentage in the fee table.

Please note:

• The withdrawal base “steps-up” on rider anniversaries whereas a Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year begins on the Income Link^SM rider start date and each anniversary thereof.

• If an automatic step-up occurs, your remaining rider withdrawal amount and Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount is proportionally increased for the remainder of that Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year.

69

Automatic Step-Up Opt Out. Each time an automatic step-up results in a rider fee percentage increase, you have the option to reject the automatic step-up and reinstate the withdrawal base and rider fee percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the automatic step-up, provided that you do so within 30 days after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. We must receive your rejection (each time you elect to opt out), in good order, at our Administrative and Service Office within the same 30 day period after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. Opting out of one step-up does not operate as an opt-out of any future step-ups.

Withdrawal Base Adjustments. Premium additions will increase the withdrawal base on a dollar-for-dollar basis. See Automatic Step-Up for a description of how automatic step-ups increase the withdrawal base.

Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals up to the rider withdrawal amount will not reduce the withdrawal base. Non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals will reduce the withdrawal base, however, by the greater of the dollar amount of the withdrawal (if the policy value is greater than the withdrawal base) or a pro rata amount (in proportion to the reduction in the policy value when the policy value is less than the withdrawal base), possibly to zero. See “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Income Link^SM Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail. The effect of a negative adjustment is amplified if the policy value is less than the withdrawal base. See the “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Benefit Adjustment Partial Surrenders - Income Link^SM Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals in more detail, including a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal that reduces the withdrawal base by a pro rata amount. Withdrawal base adjustments occur immediately following premium additions or non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals. If you take a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal that reduces your policy value (and withdrawal base) to zero, then the Income Link^SM rider will terminate and you will lose all its benefits.

Please Note: We do not monitor for non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals or notify you of withdrawal base adjustments. If you take a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal please note your Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount will be reduced.

Designated Investment Options. If you elect this rider, you must designate 100% of your policy value into one or more of the designated investment options:

American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2

TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Conservative - Service Class

TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class

TA AllianceBernstein Dynamic Allocation - Service Class

TA Asset Allocation - Conservative - Service Class

TA JPMorgan Core Bond - Service Class

TA JPMorgan Tactical Allocation - Service Class

TA PIMCO Real Return TIPS - Service Class

70

TA PIMCO Tactical - Conservative - Service Class

TA PIMCO Total Return - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Conservative - Service Class

Fixed Account

Transfers between the designated investment options are allowed as permitted under the policy; however, you cannot transfer any amount (or allocate premium payments) to any non-designated investment option. Following the fifth rider anniversary you can terminate this rider. Starting the next business day, you may transfer (or allocate premium payments) to a non-designated investment option. Terminating the rider will result in losing all your benefits under the rider.

Please note:

• The earliest you can transfer (or allocate premium payments) to a non-designated investment option is the first business day after the fifth rider anniversary. You will be required to terminate the rider first (and lose its benefits).

• We can eliminate a designated investment option at any time. If this occurs, then a policy owner will be required to reallocate values in the affected designated investment options to other designated investment options that meet the allocation requirements.

Income Link^SM Rider– Joint Life Option

If you elect this rider, then you can also elect to postpone termination of the rider until the later of the annuitant or annuitant’s spouse’s death (only if the annuitant’s spouse continues the policy, see TAX INFORMATION - Tax Status of the Policy - Distribution Requirements).

If you elect the Joint Life option, then the withdrawal percentage (used to calculate the rider withdrawal amount) is lower.

Please note:

• The withdrawal percentage for each withdrawal option is lower if you elect this option.

• The annuitant’s spouse must be either a joint owner along with the annuitant or the sole primary beneficiary (and there is no joint owner), if you elect this option.

• A former spouse of the annuitant cannot continue to keep the policy in force if no longer married to the annuitant at the time of the annuitant’s death. In that event, the rider will terminate and no additional withdrawals under the rider will be permitted.

• The annuitant’s spouse for purposes of this rider cannot be changed to a new spouse.

• This option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.

Income Link^SM Rider Fees

Income Link^SM Rider Fee. The rider fee is calculated on the rider date and at the beginning of each rider quarter. The rider fee will be adjusted for any premium additions and non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals during the rider quarter. It will be deducted automatically from your policy value at the end of each rider quarter.

71

On an annual basis, in general terms, the rider fee is the applicable “rider fee percentage” times the withdrawal base.

The quarterly fee is calculated by multiplying (A) by (B) by (C), where:

(A) is the withdrawal base;

(B) rider fee percentage; and

(C) is the number of (remaining) days in the rider quarter divided by the total number of days in the applicable rider year.

We will assess a prorated rider fee upon termination of the rider for the period beginning on the first day of the most recent rider quarter and ending on the date of termination.

Beginning on the first rider anniversary, the rider fee percentage may increase (or decrease) at the time of an automatic step-up. Each time an automatic step-up will result in a rider fee percentage increase, you will have the option to reject the automatic step-up and reinstate the withdrawal base and rider fee percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the automatic step-up (adjusted for any subsequent premium payments or withdrawals), provided that you do so within 30 calendar days after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. We must receive your rejection, in good order, at our Administrative and Service Office within the 30 day period after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred.

Please note regarding the rider fee:

• Because the rider fee is a percentage of the withdrawal base, it could be a much higher percentage of your policy value, particularly in the event that your policy value decreases significantly.

• Because the rider fee is a percentage of the withdrawal base, the amount of the rider fee we deduct will increase if the withdrawal base increases (although the percentage will remain the same).

Rider Fee Adjustment for Withdrawal Base Adjustments. A rider fee adjustment will also be calculated for subsequent premium payments and non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals because these events will change the withdrawal base. The rider fee adjustment compares the fee for the remainder of the rider quarter to the initially calculated fee for the same period. The rider fee adjustment may be positive or negative and will be added to or subtracted from the rider fee to be collected.

We will also deduct the rider fee pro rata upon full surrender of the policy or other termination of the rider.

Income Link^SM Rider Issue Requirements

We will not issue the Income Link^SM rider unless:

• the annuitant is at least 55 years old and not yet 81 years old (lower if required by state law);

• the annuitant is also an owner (except in the case of non-natural owners);

• there are no more than two owners; and

• if the joint life option is elected, the annuitant’s spouse is at least 55 years old and not yet 81 years old (lower if required by state law) and (1) is a joint owner along with the annuitant or (2) is the sole primary beneficiary (and there is no joint owner). The use of joint life option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.

72

Termination

The Income Link^SM rider will terminate upon the earliest of the following:

• the date we receive written notice from you requesting termination of the rider if such notice is received by us following the fifth rider anniversary;

• the death of the annuitant (or if the joint life option was elected, the death of the annuitant’s spouse if that spouse continued the policy as the surviving spouse);

• annuitization (however, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date you may choose an annuitization option which guarantees you lifetime payments in an amount equal to your rider withdrawal amount);

• the date the policy to which this rider is attached is assigned or the owner is changed without our approval;

• the date an excess withdrawal reduces your policy value to zero; or

• termination of your policy.

Please note: This rider terminates upon annuitization and there is a maximum annuity commencement date at which time your policy will be annuitized according to its terms. However, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date, we will allow you to annuitize your policy and elect to receive lifetime annuity payments which are at least equal to your rider withdrawal amount. Please contact us for more information concerning your options.

The Income Link^SM rider may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Income Link^SM rider. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

Retirement Income Max^SM Rider

You may elect to purchase the optional Retirement Income Max^SM rider which, provides you with: (1) a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit; and (2) an opportunity for increases in the rider withdrawal amount. This rider is available during the accumulation phase, and requires that you allocate 100% of your policy value in certain designated investment options which are designed to help manage our risk and support the guarantees under the rider. The tax rules for qualified policies may limit the value of this rider. Please consult a qualified tax adviser before electing the Retirement Income Max^SM rider for a qualified policy. If you elect the Retirement Income Max^SM rider you cannot elect another GLWB. The guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit is based on the claims-paying ability of Transamerica.

Retirement Income Max^SM – Base Benefit

Under this benefit, you can receive up to the rider withdrawal amount each rider year (first as withdrawals from your policy value and, if necessary because your policy value goes to zero by other than an excess withdrawal, as payments from us for life), starting with the rider year immediately following the annuitant’s (or the annuitant’s spouse if younger and the joint life option is elected) 59th birthday and lasting until the annuitant’s (or surviving spouse’s if the joint life option is elected) death (unless your withdrawal base is reduced to zero because of an “excess withdrawal”; see Withdrawal Base Adjustments, below). A rider year begins on the rider date and thereafter on each anniversary of that date.

73

Of course, you can always withdraw an amount up to your cash value pursuant to your rights under the policy at your discretion.

See the “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Max^SM Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail.

Please note:

• You will begin paying the rider charge as of the date the rider takes effect, even if you do not begin taking withdrawals for many years, or ever. We will not refund the charges you have paid under the rider if you never choose to take withdrawals and/or if you never receive any payments under the rider.

• We have designed this rider to allow for withdrawals from your policy value each rider year that are less than or equal to the rider withdrawal amount. You should not purchase this rider if you plan to take withdrawals in excess of the rider withdrawal amount, because such excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or eliminate the value of the guarantee provided by the rider.

• The longer you wait to start making withdrawals under the benefit, the less time you have to benefit from the guarantee because of decreasing life expectancy as you age. On the other hand, the longer you wait to begin making withdrawals, the higher your withdrawal percentage may be, the higher the withdrawal base due to growth may be, and the more opportunities you will have to lock in a higher withdrawal base. You should carefully consider when to begin making withdrawals. There is a risk that you will not begin making withdrawals at the most financially beneficial time for you.

• Because the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit under this rider is accessed through regular withdrawals that do not exceed the rider withdrawal amount, the rider may not be appropriate for you if you do not foresee a need for liquidity and your primary objective is to take maximum advantage of the tax deferral aspect of the policy.

• All policy value must be allocated to a limited number of specified funds. You should consult with your registered representative to assist you in determining whether these certain investment options are suited for your financial needs and risk tolerance.

• Cumulative withdrawals in any rider year that are in excess of the rider withdrawal amount are excess withdrawals.

• An excess withdrawal may impact the withdrawal base on a greater than dollar-for-dollar basis and may cause you to lose the benefit of this rider.

• Upon the death of the annuitant (or the death of the surviving spouse if the joint option is elected), the Retirement Income Max^SM rider terminates and all benefits thereunder cease.

Like all withdrawals, withdrawals while this rider is in effect also:

• reduce your policy value;

• reduce your base policy death benefit and other benefits;

• may be subject to surrender charges or excess interest adjustments;

• may be subject to income taxes and federal tax penalties; and

• may be limited or restricted under certain qualified policies.

Rider Withdrawal Amount. You can withdraw up to the rider withdrawal amount in any rider year (after age 59) from your policy value without causing an excess withdrawal. See Withdrawal Base Adjustments below.

74

The rider withdrawal amount is zero if the annuitant (or the annuitant’s spouse if younger and the joint life option is elected) is not 59 years old on the rider date and remains zero until the first day of the rider year after the annuitant’s (or the annuitant’s spouse’s if younger and the joint life option is elected) 59th birthday. If the annuitant (or the annuitant’s spouse if younger and the joint life option is elected) is at least 59 years old on the rider date, then the rider withdrawal amount is equal to the withdrawal base multiplied by the withdrawal percentage (see below).

For qualified policies: If the plan participant (generally the annuitant) is at least 70 ¹/₂ years old, the rider withdrawal amount for that rider year (and each subsequent rider year) is equal to the greater of:

• the rider withdrawal amount described above; or

• an amount equal to any minimum required distribution amount (for the tax year on that rider anniversary) calculated using only: (1) the living annuitant’s age, (2) the IRS Uniform Lifetime table or, if applicable, the Joint Life and Survivor Expectancy table, (3) the policy value of the base policy, (prior to the first rider anniversary we use the policy value on the rider date and thereafter we use the policy value on the date prescribed by the IRS) and (4) amounts from the current calendar year (no carry-over from past years).

Only amounts calculated as set forth above can be used as the rider withdrawal amount. If the minimum required distribution amount (determined as set forth above) exceeds the rider withdrawal amount, the excess will not be treated as an excess withdrawal under the rider. See “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Max^SM Rider” for an example showing the effect of a minimum required distribution amount.

If your policy value reaches zero:

• due to a non-excess withdrawal, then you cannot make premium payments and all other policy features, benefits, and guarantees (except those provided by this rider) are terminated. In order to receive benefits guaranteed by this rider after your policy value reaches zero, (i.e., payments of the rider withdrawal amount for life) you must select the amount and frequency of future payments. Once selected, the amount and frequency cannot be changed.

• due to an excess withdrawal, then this rider terminates (as does the policy).

Please note:

• If the rider is added prior to the annuitant’s 59th birthday, the rider withdrawal amount will be zero until the beginning of the rider year after the annuitant’s 59th birthday, however, you will still be charged a rider fee prior to this time.

• You cannot carry over any portion of your rider withdrawal amount that is not withdrawn during a rider year for withdrawal in a future rider year. This means that if you do not take the entire rider withdrawal amount during a rider year, you cannot take more than the rider withdrawal amount in the next rider year and maintain the rider’s guarantees.

• Excess withdrawals may cause you to lose the benefit of the rider.

• All policy value must be allocated to a limited number of specified funds. (See Designated Investment Options below.)

75

Withdrawal Percentage. We use the withdrawal percentage to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. The withdrawal percentage is determined by the annuitant’s age (or the annuitant’s spouse’s age if younger and the joint life option is elected) at the time of the first withdrawal taken on or after the rider anniversary immediately following the annuitant’s (or the annuitant’s spouse’s if younger and the joint life option is elected) 59th birthday. The withdrawal percentage is as follows:

Age at time of first withdrawal	Withdrawal Percentage - Single Life Option	Withdrawal Percentage - Joint Life Option
0-58	0.0%	0.0%
59-64	4.30%	3.80%
65-79	5.30%	4.80%
³ 80	6.30%	5.80%

Please note, once established, the withdrawal percentage will not generally increase even though the annuitant’s age increases except in certain instances involving automatic step-ups.

Withdrawal Base. We use the withdrawal base to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. The withdrawal base on the rider date is the policy value (if X-Share is elected, less any premium enhancements if the rider is added in the first policy year). During any rider year, the withdrawal base is equal to the withdrawal base on the rider date or most recent rider anniversary, plus subsequent premium payments, less subsequent withdrawal base adjustments due to excess withdrawals.

Please note:

• We determine the withdrawal base solely to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. Your withdrawal base is not a cash value, a surrender value, or a death benefit. It is not available for withdrawal, it is not a minimum return for any subaccount, and it is not a guarantee of policy value.

• Because the withdrawal base is generally equal to the policy value on the rider date, the rider withdrawal amount may be lower if you delay electing the rider and the policy value decreases before you elect the rider.

On each rider anniversary, the withdrawal base will equal the greatest of:

• current withdrawal base;

• the withdrawal base immediately before the rider anniversary, increased by the growth percentage, if any (see Growth below);

• the policy value on any monthiversary^SM, (the same day of the month as the rider date, or the next market day if our Administrative Office or the New York Stock Exchange are closed) including the current rider anniversary (see Automatic Step-Up below).

See “Appendix - Hypothetical Example of the Withdrawal Base Calculation - Retirement Income Max^SM Rider” which illustrates the hypothetical example of the withdrawal base calculation.

Growth. On each of the first ten rider anniversaries, we will apply a growth percentage to your withdrawal base if no withdrawal occurred during the preceding rider year. The growth percentage is equal to 5.0% of the withdrawal base immediately before the rider anniversary (i.e., withdrawal base x 0.05).

76

Please note: Because a withdrawal will eliminate the potential application of the growth percentage for that rider year, you should consider your need or possible need to take withdrawals within the first 10 rider years in deciding whether to purchase the rider.

Automatic Step-Up. On each rider anniversary, we will automatically step-up the withdrawal base to an amount equal to the greater of (1) the highest policy value on any monthiversary^SM during the preceding rider year, if no excess withdrawal occurred, or (2) the policy value on the rider anniversary. This comparison takes place after the application of any applicable growth percentage. The withdrawal percentage (as indicated in the withdrawal percentage table) will also increase if you have crossed into another age band prior to the automatic step-up. Please note, the increase is part of the automatic step-up and if no automatic step-up occurs then there will be no withdrawal percentage increase.

On each rider anniversary the rider fee percentage may increase (or decrease) up to 75 basis points (0.75%) at the time of any automatic step-up (but will not exceed the maximum rider fee percentage in the fee table), i.e., the rider fee percentage is reset to the rider fee percentage then associated with newly issued riders.

Automatic Step-Up Opt Out. Each time an automatic step-up results in a rider fee percentage increase, you have the option to reject the automatic step-up and reinstate the withdrawal base, withdrawal percentage, and rider fee percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the automatic step-up, provided that you do so within 30 days after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. We must receive your rejection (each time you elect to opt out), in good order, at our Administrative and Service Office within the same 30 day period after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. Opting out of one step-up does not operate as an opt-out of any future step-ups.

Withdrawal Base Adjustments. Cumulative gross partial withdrawals up to the rider withdrawal amount in any rider year will not reduce the withdrawal base. Cumulative gross partial withdrawals in excess of the rider withdrawal amount in any rider year (“excess withdrawals”) will reduce the withdrawal base, however, by the greater of the dollar amount of the excess withdrawal (if the policy value is greater than the withdrawal base) or a pro rata amount (in proportion to the reduction in the policy value when the policy value is less than the withdrawal base), possibly to zero. If an excess withdrawal reduces the policy value to zero, this rider will terminate. Withdrawal base adjustments occur immediately following excess withdrawals. See “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Max^SM Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail, including an excess withdrawal that reduces the withdrawal base by a pro rata amount. The effect of an excess withdrawal is amplified if the policy value is less than the withdrawal base.

Please Note: We do not monitor for, or notify you of, excess withdrawals. If you take regular or scheduled withdrawals please pay particular attention to any excess withdrawal because your otherwise regular or scheduled non-excess withdrawals may thereafter all be excess withdrawals that reduce or eliminate your benefit on an accelerated basis.

Designated Investment Options. If you elect this rider, you must designate 100% of your policy value into one or more of the designated investment options:

77

American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2

TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Conservative - Service Class

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Balanced - Service Class

TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class

TA Asset Allocation - Conservative - Service Class

TA Asset Allocation - Moderate - Service Class

TA JPMorgan Core Bond - Service Class

TA JPMorgan Tactical Allocation - Service Class

TA Legg Mason Dynamic Allocation - Balanced - Service Class

TA PIMCO Real Return TIPS - Service Class

TA PIMCO Tactical - Balanced - Service Class

TA PIMCO Tactical - Conservative - Service Class

TA PIMCO Total Return - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Balanced - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Conservative - Service Class

Fixed Account

Transfers between the designated investment options are allowed as permitted under the policy; however, you cannot transfer any amount (or allocate premium payments) to any non-designated investment option. Within 30 days following the fifth rider anniversary (and each successive fifth rider anniversary), you can terminate this rider. Starting the next business day, you may transfer (or allocate premium payments) to a non-designated investment option. Terminating the rider will result in losing all your benefits under the rider.

Please note:

• The earliest you can transfer (or allocate premium payments) to a non-designated investment option is the first business day after the fifth rider anniversary. You will be required to terminate the rider first (and lose its benefits).

• We can eliminate a designated investment option at any time. If this occurs, then a policy owner will be required to reallocate values in the affected designated investment options to other designated investment options that meet the allocation requirements.

Retirement Income Max^SM – Joint Life Option

If you elect this rider, then you can also elect to postpone termination of the rider until the later of the annuitant or annuitant’s spouse’s death (only if the annuitant’s spouse continues the policy, see TAX INFORMATION - Tax Status of the Policy - Distribution Requirements). If you elect the Joint Life option, then the withdrawal percentage (used to calculate the rider withdrawal amount) is lower.

Please note:

• The annuitant’s spouse must be either a joint owner along with the annuitant or the sole primary beneficiary (and there is no joint owner), if you elect this option.

78

• A former spouse of the annuitant cannot continue to keep the policy in force if no longer married to the annuitant at the time of the annuitant’s death. In that event, the rider will terminate and no additional withdrawals under the rider will be permitted.

• The annuitant’s spouse for purposes of this rider cannot be changed to a new spouse.

• The rider withdrawal percentage is based on the age of the younger of the annuitant and annuitant’s spouse, if you elect this option.

• The withdrawal percentage for each “age at the time of the first withdrawal” is lower if you elect this option.

• This option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.

Retirement Income Max^SM Rider Fees

Retirement Income Max^SM Rider Fee. The rider fee is calculated on the rider date and at the beginning of each rider quarter. The rider fee will be adjusted for any premium additions and excess withdrawals. It will be deducted automatically from your policy value at the end of each rider quarter.

On an annual basis, in general terms, the rider fee is the rider fee percentage times the withdrawal base. Specifically, the quarterly fee is calculated by multiplying (A) by (B) multiplied by (C), where:

(A) is the withdrawal base;

(B) is the rider fee percentage; and

(C) is the number of (remaining) days in the rider quarter divided by the total number of days in the applicable rider year.

Example 1: Calculation at rider issue for first quarter rider fee assuming an initial withdrawal base of $100,000.

=100,000*0.0125*(91/365)

=1,250*(91/365)

=$311.64

We will assess a prorated rider fee upon termination of the rider for the period beginning on the first day of the most recent rider quarter and ending on the date of termination.

On each rider anniversary the rider fee percentage may increase (or decrease) at the time of an automatic step-up. Each time an automatic step-up results in a rider fee percentage increase, you will have the option to reject the automatic step-up and reinstate the withdrawal base and rider fee percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the automatic step-up (adjusted for any subsequent premium payments or withdrawals), provided that you do so within 30 calendar days after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. We must receive your rejection, in good order, at our Administrative and Service Office within the 30 day period after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred.

Please note regarding the rider fee:

• Because the rider fee is a percentage of the withdrawal base, it could be a much higher percentage of your policy value, particularly in the event that your policy value decreases significantly.

• Because the rider fee is a percentage of the withdrawal base, the amount of the rider fee we deduct will increase if the withdrawal base increases (although the percentage(s) may remain the same).

79

Rider Fee Adjustment for Premium Payments and Excess Withdrawals. A rider fee adjustment will be calculated for subsequent premium payments and excess withdrawals because these events will change the withdrawal base. The rider fee adjustment will be calculated using the same formula as the rider fee and compare the fee for the remainder of the rider quarter to the initially calculated fee for the same period. The rider fee adjustment may be positive or negative and will be added to or subtracted from the rider fee to be collected.

Example 2: Calculation for first quarter fee assuming initial withdrawal base from Example 1 above, plus adjustment for additional premium payment of $10,000 made with 20 days remaining in the first rider quarter. The withdrawal base change equals $10,000. Fee adjustment as follows:

=10,000*0.0125*(20/365)

=125*(20/365)

=$6.85

Total fee assessed at the end of the first rider quarter (assuming no further rider fee adjustments):

=6.85 + 311.64

=$318.49

We will also deduct all rider fees pro rata upon full surrender of the policy or other termination of the rider.

Retirement Income Max^SM Rider Issue Requirements

We will not issue the Retirement Income Max^SM rider unless:

• the annuitant is not yet age 86 (lower if required by state law);

• the annuitant is also an owner (except in the case of non-natural owners);

• there are no more than two owners; and

• if the joint life option is elected, the annuitant’s spouse is also not yet 86 (lower if required by state law) and (1) is a joint owner along with the annuitant or (2) is the sole primary beneficiary (and there is no joint owner). The use of joint life option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.

Termination

The Retirement Income Max^SM rider will terminate upon the earliest of the following:

• the date we receive written notice from you requesting termination of the rider if such notice is received by us during the 30 days following the fifth rider anniversary or every fifth rider anniversary thereafter;

• the death of the annuitant (or if the joint life option was elected, the death of the annuitant’s spouse if that spouse continued the policy as the surviving spouse);

• annuitization (however, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date you may choose an annuitization option which guarantees you lifetime payments in an amount equal to your rider withdrawal amount);

• the date the policy to which this rider is attached is assigned or if the owner is changed without our approval;

• the date an excess withdrawal reduces your policy value to zero; or

• termination of your policy.

80

Please note: This rider terminates upon annuitization and there is a maximum annuity commencement date at which time your policy will be annuitized according to its terms. However, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date, we will allow you to annuitize your policy and elect to receive lifetime annuity payments which are at least equal to your rider withdrawal amount. Please contact us for more information concerning your options.

The Retirement Income Max^SM rider and additional options may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Retirement Income Max^SM rider. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider

You may elect to purchase the optional Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider which, provides you with: (1) a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit; and (2) an opportunity for increases in the rider withdrawal amount. This rider is available during the accumulation phase, and requires that you allocate 100% of your policy value in certain designated investment options. The tax rules for qualified policies may limit the value of this rider. Please consult a qualified tax adviser before electing the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider for a qualified policy. If you elect the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider you cannot elect another GLWB. The guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit is based on the claims-paying ability of Transamerica.

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 – Base Benefit

Under this benefit, you can receive up to the rider withdrawal amount each rider year (first as withdrawals from your policy value and, if necessary, as payments from us), starting with the rider year immediately following the annuitant’s (or the annuitant’s spouse if younger and the joint life option is elected) 59th birthday and lasting until the annuitant’s death (unless your withdrawal base is reduced to zero because of an “excess withdrawal”; see Withdrawal Base Adjustments and Rider Death Benefit Adjustments, below). A rider year begins on the rider date (the date the rider becomes effective) and thereafter on each anniversary of that date.

Please note:

• You will begin paying the rider charge as of the date the rider takes effect, even if you do not begin taking withdrawals for many years, or ever. We will not refund the charges you have paid under the rider if you never choose to take withdrawals and/or if you never receive any payments under the rider.

• We have designed this rider to allow for withdrawals from your policy value each rider year that are less than or equal to the rider withdrawal amount. You should not purchase this rider if you plan to take withdrawals in excess of the rider withdrawal amount, because such excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or eliminate the value of the guarantees provided by the rider.

• The longer you wait to start making withdrawals under the benefit, the less time you have to benefit from the guarantee because of decreasing life expectancy as you age. On the other hand, the longer you wait to begin making withdrawals, the higher your withdrawal percentage may be, the higher the withdrawal base due to growth may be, and the more opportunities you will have to lock in a higher withdrawal base. You should carefully consider when to begin making withdrawals. There is a risk that you will not begin making withdrawals at the most financially beneficial time for you.

81

• Because the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit under this rider is accessed through regular withdrawals that do not exceed the rider withdrawal amount, the rider may not be appropriate for you if you do not foresee a need for liquidity and your primary objective is to take maximum advantage of the tax deferral aspect of the policy.

• All policy value must be allocated to a limited number of specified investment options. You should consult with your registered representative to assist you in determining whether these investment options are suited for your financial needs and risk tolerance.

• Cumulative withdrawals in any rider year that are in excess of the rider withdrawal amount are excess withdrawals.

• An excess withdrawal may impact the withdrawal base, and rider death benefit (if applicable) on a greater than dollar-for-dollar basis and may eliminate the benefit.

• Any withdrawal will reduce your rider death benefit (if applicable).

• Upon the death of the annuitant (or the death of the surviving spouse if the joint option is elected), the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider terminates and all benefits thereunder cease.

Like all withdrawals, withdrawals while this rider is in effect also:

• reduce your policy value;

• reduce your base policy death benefit and other benefits;

• may be subject to surrender charges or excess interest adjustments;

• may be subject to income taxes and federal tax penalties; and

• may be limited or restricted under certain qualified policies.

Rider Withdrawal Amount. You can withdraw up to the rider withdrawal amount in any rider year (after age 59) from your policy value without causing an excess withdrawal. See Withdrawal Base Adjustments and Rider Death Benefit Adjustments below.

The rider withdrawal amount is zero if the annuitant is not 59 years old on the rider date and remains zero until the first day of the rider year after the annuitant’s 59th birthday. If the annuitant (or the annuitant’s spouse if younger and the joint life option is elected) is at least 59 years old on the rider date, then the rider withdrawal amount is equal to the withdrawal base multiplied by the withdrawal percentage (see below).

For qualified policies: If the plan participant (generally the annuitant) is at least 70 ¹/₂ years old, the rider withdrawal amount for that rider year (and each subsequent rider year) is equal to the greater of:

• the rider withdrawal amount described above; or

• an amount equal to any minimum required distribution amount (for the tax year on that rider anniversary) calculated using only: (1) the living annuitant’s age, (2) the IRS Uniform Lifetime table or, if applicable, the Joint Life and Survivor Expectancy table, (3) the policy value of the base policy, (prior to the first rider anniversary we use the policy value on the rider date and thereafter we use the policy value on the date prescribed by the IRS) and (4) amounts from the current calendar year (no carry-over from past years).

Only amounts calculated as set forth above can be used as the rider withdrawal amount. If the minimum required distribution amount (determined as set forth above) exceeds the rider withdrawal amount, the excess will not be treated as an excess withdrawal under the rider.

82

If your policy value reaches zero by other than an excess withdrawal, then you cannot make premium payments and all other policy features, benefits, and guarantees (except those provided by this rider) are terminated. In order to receive benefits guaranteed by this rider after your policy value reaches zero by other than an excess withdrawal, you must select the amount and frequency of future payments. Once selected, the amount and frequency cannot be changed.

Please note:

• If the rider is added prior to the annuitant’s 59th birthday, the rider withdrawal amount will be zero until the beginning of the rider year after the annuitant’s 59th birthday, however, you will still be charged a rider fee prior to this time.

• You cannot carry over any portion of your rider withdrawal amount that is not withdrawn during a rider year for withdrawal in a future rider year. This means that if you do not take the entire rider withdrawal amount during a rider year, you cannot take more than the rider withdrawal amount in the next rider year and maintain the rider’s guarantees.

• Excess withdrawals may cause you to lose the benefit of the rider.

• All policy value must be allocated to a limited number of specified funds. (See Designated Investment Options below.)

Withdrawal Percentage. We use the withdrawal percentage to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. The withdrawal percentage is determined by the annuitant’s age (or the annuitant’s spouse’s age if younger and the joint life option is elected) at the time of the first withdrawal taken on or after the rider anniversary immediately following the annuitant’s (or the annuitant’s spouse’s if younger and the joint life option is elected) 59th birthday. The withdrawal percentage is as follows:

Age at time of first withdrawal	Withdrawal Percentage - Single Life Option	Withdrawal Percentage - Joint Life Option
0-58	0.0%	0.0%
59-64	4.0%	3.5%
65-79	5.0%	4.5%
³ 80	6.0%	5.5%

Please note, once established, the withdrawal percentage will not generally increase even though the annuitant’s age increases except in certain instances involving automatic step-ups.

Withdrawal Base. We use the withdrawal base to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. The withdrawal base on the rider date is the policy value. During any rider year, the withdrawal base is equal to the withdrawal base on the rider date or most recent rider anniversary, plus subsequent premium payments, less subsequent withdrawal base adjustments due to excess withdrawals.

Please note:

• We determine the withdrawal base solely to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. Your withdrawal base is not a cash value, a surrender value, or a death benefit. It is not available for withdrawal, it is not a minimum return for any subaccount, and it is not a guarantee of policy value.

83

• Because the withdrawal base is generally equal to the policy value on the rider date, the rider withdrawal amount may be lower if you delay electing the rider and the policy value decreases before you elect the rider.

On each rider anniversary, the withdrawal base will equal the greatest of:

• Current withdrawal base;

• The withdrawal base immediately before the rider anniversary, increased by the growth percentage, if any (see Growth below);

• The policy value on any monthiversary^SM, including the current rider anniversary (see Automatic Step-Up below).

Growth. On each of the first ten rider anniversaries, we will apply a growth percentage to your withdrawal base if no withdrawal occurred during the preceding rider year. The growth percentage is equal to 5.0% of the withdrawal base immediately before the rider anniversary (i.e., withdrawal base x 0.05).

Please note: Because a withdrawal will eliminate the potential application of the growth percentage for that rider year, you should consider your need or possible need to take withdrawals within the first 10 rider years in deciding whether to purchase the rider.

Automatic Step-Up. On each rider anniversary, we will automatically step-up the withdrawal base to an amount equal to the greater of (1) the highest policy value on any monthiversary^SM during the preceding rider year, if no excess withdrawal occurred, or (2) the policy value on the rider anniversary. This comparison takes place after the application of any applicable growth percentage. The withdrawal percentage (as indicated in the withdrawal percentage table) will also increase if you have crossed into another age band prior to the automatic step-up. Please note, the increase is part of the automatic step-up and if no automatic step-up occurs then there will be no withdrawal percentage increase.

Beginning on the fifth rider anniversary, the rider fee percentage may increase (or decrease) at the time of any automatic step-up. The rider fee percentage will not exceed the maximum rider fee percentage in the fee table.

Automatic Step-Up Opt Out. Each time an automatic step-up results in a rider fee percentage increase, you have the option to reject the automatic step-up and reinstate the withdrawal base, withdrawal percentage, and rider fee percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the automatic step-up, provided that you do so within 30 days after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. We must receive your rejection (each time you elect to opt out), in good order, at our Administrative and Service Office within the same 30 day period after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. Opting out of one step-up does not operate as an opt-out of any future step-ups.

Withdrawal Base Adjustments. Cumulative gross partial withdrawals up to the rider withdrawal amount in any rider year will not reduce the withdrawal base. Cumulative gross partial withdrawals in excess of the rider withdrawal amount in any rider year (“excess withdrawals”) will reduce the withdrawal base, however, by the greater of the dollar amount of the excess withdrawal (if the policy value is greater than the withdrawal base) or a pro rata amount (in proportion to the reduction in the policy value when the policy value is less than the withdrawal base), possibly to zero. Withdrawal base adjustments occur immediately following excess withdrawals. See “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider” for examples

84

showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail, including an excess withdrawal that reduces the withdrawal base by a pro rata amount. The effect of an excess withdrawal is magnified if the policy value is less than the withdrawal base. See the “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical excess withdrawals in more detail.

Please Note: We do not monitor for, or notify you of, excess withdrawals. If you take regular or scheduled withdrawals please pay particular attention to any excess withdrawal because your otherwise regular or scheduled non-excess withdrawals may thereafter all be excess withdrawals that reduce or eliminate your benefit on an accelerated basis.

Example. Assume you are the owner and annuitant and you make a single premium payment of $100,000 when you are 66 years old. Further assume that you do not make any withdrawals or additional premium payments, no automatic step-ups occurred, but that after five years your policy value has declined to $90,000 solely because of negative investment performance. With an annual growth rate percentage of 5.0%, after 5 years the withdrawal base is equal to $127,628 ($100,000 x 1.055). You could receive up to $6,381 which is the applicable withdrawal percentage of 5.0% for the single life option multiplied by the withdrawal base of $127,628, each rider year for the rest of your life (assuming that you take your first withdrawal when you are age 71, that you do not withdraw more than the rider withdrawal amount in any one year and there are no future automatic step-ups.)

Example continued. Assume the same facts as above, but you withdraw $10,000 when you are 71 years old. That excess withdrawal decreases your future rider withdrawal amount to $6,105.

See the “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail.

Designated Investment Options. If you elect this rider, you must designate 100% of your policy value into one or more of the designated investment options in the following designated allocation groups:

Designated Allocation Group A

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Growth - Service Class

TA Asset Allocation - Moderate Growth - Service Class

TA International Moderate Growth - Service Class

TA Janus Balanced - Service Class

TA Legg Mason Dynamic Allocation - Growth - Service Class

TA PIMCO Tactical - Growth - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Growth - Service Class

Designated Allocation Group B

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Balanced - Service Class

TA Asset Allocation - Moderate - Service Class

TA BlackRock Tactical Allocation - Service Class

85

TA Legg Mason Dynamic Allocation - Balanced - Service Class

TA Market Participation Strategy - Service Class

TA PIMCO Tactical - Balanced - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Balanced - Service Class

Designated Allocation Group C

American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Conservative - Service Class

TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class

TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class

TA AllianceBernstein Dynamic Allocation - Service Class

TA Asset Allocation - Conservative - Service Class

TA JPMorgan Core Bond - Service Class

TA JPMorgan Tactical Allocation - Service Class

TA PIMCO Real Return TIPS - Service Class

TA PIMCO Tactical - Conservative - Service Class

TA PIMCO Total Return - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Conservative - Service Class

Fixed Account

Transfers between the designated investment options are allowed as permitted under the policy; however, you cannot transfer any amount (or allocate premium payments) to any non-designated investment option. Within 30 days following the fifth rider anniversary (and each successive fifth rider anniversary) you can terminate this rider. Starting the next business day, you may transfer (or allocate premium payments) to a non-designated investment option. Terminating the rider will result in losing all your benefits under the rider.

Please note:

• The earliest you can transfer (or allocate premium payments) to a non-designated investment option is the first business day after the fifth rider anniversary. You will be required to terminate the rider first. If you terminate the rider you will lose all of its benefits.

• We can change a designated allocation group or eliminate a designated investment option at any time. If this occurs, then a policy owner will be required to reallocate values in the affected designated investment options to other designated investment options that meet the allocation requirements.

Manual Resets. You can effectively “reset” the withdrawal base to the policy value using a manual process under which your current rider is terminated and a new rider is issued. You can only elect a reset during the 30 day periods following each successive fifth rider anniversary and if all other rider issue requirements are met. When the new rider is issued, the rider withdrawal amount and, if applicable, the rider death benefit will be recalculated. Your new rider will have a new rider date, new rider fee percentage (which may be higher than your current rider fee percentage), and its own terms and benefits (which may not be as advantageous as the current rider). The new rider date will be the date we receive all necessary information in good order. Please note that this “reset” procedure may be referred to as a “manual upgrade” in your policy rider and other materials.

86

Please note:

• Resets, unlike automatic step-ups, occur only if you so elect during the 30 day window following each successive fifth rider anniversary.

• Resets result in the purchase of a new rider whose terms may be more or less favorable than the current rider whereas automatic step-ups do not require termination of the existing rider and repurchase of a new rider (although fees may increase at the time of an automatic step-up).

• Policy owners may decide to terminate an existing rider if it no longer meets their needs and then elect a new available rider that does.

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 – Additional Options

You may elect the following options with this rider (the options are not mutually exclusive):

• Death Benefit;

• Joint Life; and

• Income Enhancement^SM.

There is an additional fee if you elect the Death Benefit and/or the Income Enhancement^SM Benefit option(s) under the rider. If you elect the Joint Life option, then the withdrawal percentage (used to calculate the rider withdrawal amount) is lower. Furthermore, if you elect the Joint Life option in combination with the Death Benefit and/or the Income Enhancement^SM Benefit option(s), then the fee for each of those additional options will be different than under the Single Life option. See Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider Fees below.

Death Benefit. If you elect this rider, you can also elect to add an additional amount to the death benefit payable under the base policy, upon the death of the annuitant (or if the joint life option is selected, the annuitant’s spouse). The additional amount will be equal to the excess, if any, of the rider death benefit over the greater of any optional guaranteed minimum death benefit or the base policy death benefit. The additional amount can be zero. See DEATH BENEFIT.

Rider Death Benefit. The rider death benefit on the rider date is the policy value (if X-Share is elected, less any premium enhancements if the rider is added in the first policy year). After the rider date, the rider death benefit is equal to:

• the rider death benefit on the rider date; plus

• subsequent premium payments; less

• adjustments for withdrawals (as described under Rider Death Benefit Adjustments, below).

Rider Death Benefit Adjustments. Gross partial withdrawals up to the rider withdrawal amount in a rider year will reduce the rider death benefit on a dollar-for-dollar basis. Gross partial withdrawals in excess of the rider withdrawal amount in a rider year will reduce the rider death benefit by the greater of the dollar amount of the excess withdrawal or a pro rata amount (in proportion to the reduction in policy value), and possibly to zero. See “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail, including an excess withdrawal that results in pro rata adjustments. Rider death benefit adjustments occur immediately following all withdrawals.

87

Please note:

• No additional death benefit is payable if the base policy death benefit (including the guaranteed minimum death benefit) exceeds the rider death benefit. The greater the death benefit payable under the guaranteed minimum death benefit selected, the more likely it is that an additional amount will not be payable under the rider death benefit option.

• Excess withdrawals may eliminate the additional death benefit available with this rider. You will continue to pay the fee for this option, even if the additional death benefit available under the rider is $0.

• Manual resets to the withdrawal base will result in a recalculation of the rider death benefit. However, automatic step-ups will not reset the rider death benefit.

• If an owner who is not the annuitant dies and the surviving spouse continues the policy, then no additional amount is payable. If the policy is not continued, then the surviving owner (who is also the sole beneficiary) may elect to receive lifetime annuity payments equal to the rider withdrawal amount divided by the number of payments each year instead of receiving the policy’s cash value. See TAX INFORMATION - Tax Status of the Policy - Distribution Requirements. (The payment of a death benefit under the policy is triggered by the death of the annuitant.)

• The additional death benefit adjustment differs from the adjusted partial surrender amount for the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefits described in DEATH BENEFIT - Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefits. Accordingly, withdrawals may effect the additional death benefit differently than the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefits.

The additional death benefit payment option may be referred to as “rider death benefit” on your policy statement and other documents.

Joint Life Benefit. If you elect this rider, then you can also elect to postpone termination of the rider until the later of the annuitant or annuitant’s spouse’s death (only if the annuitant’s spouse continues the policy).

Please note:

• The withdrawal percentage for each “age at the time of first withdrawal” is lower if you elect this option.

• The annuitant’s spouse must be either a joint owner along with the annuitant or the sole primary beneficiary (and there is no joint owner), if you elect this option.

• A former spouse of the annuitant cannot continue to keep the policy in force if no longer married to the annuitant at the time of the annuitant’s death. In that event, the rider will terminate and no additional withdrawals under the rider will be permitted.

• The annuitant’s spouse for purposes of this rider cannot be changed to a new spouse.

• The rider withdrawal percentage is based on the age of the younger of the annuitant and annuitant’s spouse, if you elect this option.

• The rider death benefit is not payable until the death of the surviving spouse, if you elect this option.

• You cannot elect a manual reset if the annuitant or annuitant’s spouse is 86 or older (lower if required by state law).

• This option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.

Income Enhancement^SM Option. If you elect this rider, you can also elect to have your withdrawal percentage increase to 150% of the non-income enhanced withdrawal percentage if either the annuitant (or the annuitant’s spouse if the joint life option is elected) is confined, due to a medical necessity in a hospital or nursing facility due to

88

physical or cognitive ailments. Benefits from this option are not available unless the rider has been in effect for 12 months (the “waiting period”) and confinement must meet the elimination period of 180 days within the last 365 days. The elimination period and waiting period can, but do not need to, run concurrently.

Please note:

• You cannot elect the Income Enhancement^SM Option if the qualifying person or persons is/are already admitted to a hospital or already reside in a nursing facility.

• Confinement must be prescribed by a physician based on the individual’s inability to sustain themselves outside of a hospital or nursing facility due to physical or cognitive ailments.

• The increase to the withdrawal percentage stops when the qualifying person or persons is/are no longer confined as described above.

• The hospital and/or nursing facility must meet the criteria listed below to qualify for the benefit.

• You cannot elect the Income Enhancement^SM Option if you are confined in an assisted living facility or a residential care facility.

A Qualifying Hospital must meet the following criteria:

• It is operated pursuant to the laws of the jurisdiction in which it is located;

• It is operated primarily for the care and treatment of sick and injured persons on an inpatient basis;

• It provides 24-hour nursing service by or under the supervision of registered graduate professional nurses;

• It is supervised by a staff of one or more licensed physicians; and

• It has medical, surgical and diagnostic facilities or access to such facilities.

A Qualifying Nursing Facility must meet the following criteria:

• It is operated pursuant to the laws and regulations of the state in which it is located as a nursing facility or

Alzheimer’s disease facility;

• It provides care performed or supervised by a registered graduate nurse;

• It provides room and board accommodations; and

• Will provide 24-hour nursing services, 7 days a week by an on-site Registered Nurse and related services on a continuing inpatient basis.

• It has a planned program of policies and procedures developed with the advice of, and periodically reviewed by, at least one physician; and

• It maintains a clinical record of each patient.

A Qualifying Nursing Facility does not include:

• Assisted living facilities or residential care facilities;

• A place primarily for treatment of mental or nervous disorders, drug addiction or alcoholism;

• A home for the aged, a rest home, community living center or a place that provides domestic, resident, retirement or educational care;

• Personal care homes, personal care boarding homes, residential or domiciliary care homes;

• A rehabilitation hospital or basic care facilities;

• Adult foster care facilities, congregate care facilities, family and group living assisted living facilities; or

• Other facilities similar to those described above.

89

We will require confirmation of confinement in a qualifying hospital or a qualifying nursing facility while benefit payouts are being received. Confirmation of that confinement will be attained and approved by completing our “Income Enhancement^SM Election and Proof of Confinement Questionnaire” form. This form requires additional proof of confinement which may be a physician’s statement, a statement from a hospital or nursing facility administrator, or any other information satisfactory to us which may include information from third party or company interviews and/or visits of the facility. If it is determined that the qualifying individual was not confined in an eligible facility as defined above and has received payments under the Income Enhancement^SM Option, those payments could be considered an excess withdrawal and have a negative effect on the rider values. If confinement ceases, you may re-qualify by satisfying another 180-day elimination period requirement.

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Fees

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Base Rider Fee. The base rider fee is calculated on the rider date and at the beginning of each rider quarter. The base rider fee will be adjusted for any premium additions, excess withdrawals, transfers between designated investment groups, or changes to other allocation options during the rider quarter. It will be deducted automatically from your policy value at the end of each rider quarter.

On an annual basis, in general terms, the base rider fee is the applicable rider fee percentage times the withdrawal base.

The base quarterly fee is calculated by multiplying (A) by (B) divided by (C) multiplied by (D), where:

(A) is the withdrawal base;

(B) is the sum of each designated investment group’s rider fee percentage multiplied by the applicable designated investment group’s value;

(C) is the total policy value; and

(D) is the number of (remaining) days in the rider quarter divided by the total number of days in the applicable rider year.

We will assess a prorated rider fee upon termination of the rider for the period beginning on the first day of the most recent rider quarter and ending on the date of termination.

Beginning on the fifth rider anniversary, the rider fee percentage may increase (or decrease) at the time of an automatic step-up. Each time an automatic step-up will result in a rider fee percentage increase, you will have the option to reject the automatic step-up and reinstate the withdrawal base and rider fee percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the automatic step-up (adjusted for any subsequent premium payments or withdrawals), provided that you do so within 30 calendar days after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. We must receive your rejection, in good order, at our Administrative and Service Office within the 30 day period after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred.

Please note regarding the base rider fee:

• Because the base rider fee is a percentage of the withdrawal base, it could be a much higher percentage of your policy value, particularly in the event that your policy value decreases significantly.

• Because the base rider fee is a percentage of the withdrawal base, the amount of the base rider fee we deduct will increase if the withdrawal base increases (although the percentage(s) may remain the same).

90

• If you make a transfer from one designated allocation group to another designated allocation group that has a higher rider fee percentage, then the resulting rider fee will be higher.

Base Rider Fee Adjustment for Transfers. For transfers that you make between different designated investment options in different designated allocation groups on other than the first business day of a rider quarter, a “rider fee adjustment” will be applied. This adjustment is necessary because of differences in the rider fee percentages. The adjustment in the rider fee percentage will ensure that you are charged the correct overall rider fee. The base rider fee adjustment will be calculated using the same formula as the base rider fee and compare the fee for the remainder of the rider quarter to the initially calculated fee for the same period. The rider fee adjustment may be positive or negative and will be added to or subtracted from the rider fee to be allocated.

Base Rider Fee Adjustment for Premium Payments and Excess Withdrawals. A rider fee adjustment will also be calculated for subsequent premium payments and excess withdrawals because these events will change the withdrawal base. The rider fee adjustment will be calculated using the same formula as the base rider fee and compare the fee for the remainder of the rider quarter to the initially calculated fee for the same period. As with the rider fee adjustments calculated for transfers, the rider fee adjustment may be positive or negative and will be added to or subtracted from the rider fee to be collected.

Additional Option Fees. If you elect options with this rider, then you will be charged a fee for each option you elect that is in addition to the rider fee for the base benefit. Each additional fee is charged quarterly before annuitization and is a percentage of the withdrawal base on each rider anniversary.

We will also deduct all rider fees pro rata upon full surrender of the policy or other termination of the rider.

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider Issue Requirements

We will not issue the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider unless:

• the annuitant is not yet age 86 (lower if required by state law);

• the annuitant is also an owner (except in the case of non-natural owners);

• there are no more than two owners; and

• if the joint life option is elected, the annuitant’s spouse is also not yet 86 (lower if required by state law) and (1) is a joint owner along with the annuitant or (2) is the sole primary beneficiary (and there is no joint owner). The use of joint life option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.

Termination

The Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider and any additional options will terminate upon the earliest of the following:

• the date we receive written notice from you requesting termination of the rider if such notice is received by us during the 30 days following the fifth rider anniversary or every fifth rider anniversary thereafter;

• the death of the annuitant (or if the joint life option was elected, the death of the annuitant’s spouse if that spouse continued the policy as the surviving spouse);

91

• annuitization (however, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date you may choose an annuitization option which guarantees you lifetime payments in an amount equal to your rider withdrawal amount);

• the date the policy to which this rider is attached is assigned or if the owner is changed without our approval;

• the date an excess withdrawal reduces your policy value to zero; or

• termination of your policy.

Please note: This rider terminates upon annuitization and there is a maximum annuity commencement date at which time your policy will be annuitized according to its terms. However, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date, we will allow you to annuitize your policy and elect to receive lifetime annuity payments which are at least equal to your rider withdrawal amount. Please contact us for more information concerning your options.

The Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider and additional options may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

OTHER INFORMATION

State Variations

The following section describes modifications to this prospectus required by one of more state insurance departments as of the date of this prospectus. Unless otherwise noted, variations apply to all forms of Contracts we issue. References to certain state’s variations do not imply that we actually offer Contracts in each such state. These variations are subject to change without notice and additional variations may be imposed as specific states approve new riders.

Arizona - The right to cancel period for owners that are age 65 and above is 30 days.

California - The right to cancel period for owners that are age 60 and above is 30 days. Unless the owners age 60 and above elect otherwise (i.e., elect immediate investment), the initial premium payment will be allocated to the money market subaccount for 35 calendar days and then invested in the investment options selected by the owner. The amount returned under the right to cancel provision if immediate investment is not elected is your premium payment amount.

Connecticut - If the policy is canceled prior to deliver, the amount of your premium payment is returned.

Florida - The right to cancel period for owners that are less than age 65 is 14 days. The right to cancel period for owners that are age 65 and above is 21 days. The unemployment waiver is not available. Notwithstanding any references to withdrawal order sections of the policy, the service charge will be deducted from the policy value’s earnings, if available.

92

Montana - The unemployment waiver is not available. There is no premium tax in the state of Montana. The premium enhancement recapture does not include unemployment. Only uni-sex factors are used in calculating annuity payments.

New York - The amount returned under the right to cancel provision is the premium payment allocated to the fixed account, if any, plus the policy value in the separate account, if any, including any fees and charges. If the policy is a replacement, the right to cancel period is extended to 60 days. The Unemployment Waiver, Additional Death Distribution, Additional Death Distribution+, telephone transactions and the Income Enhancement^SM under the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider are not available. The issue requirements for the Retirement Income Max^SM Rider are that the annuitant is at least age 56 and not yet age 86 for Single Life and at least age 65 but not yet age 86 for Joint Life. The guaranteed minimum interest rate must be at least the nonforfeiture rate. There is no excess interest adjustment. Premium enhancement recapture does not include unemployment. A surrender charge is not applied at death. The amount of the death benefit payable during the accumulation phase is the greater of the policy value on the date we receive due proof of death and an election of method of settlement or the guaranteed minimum death benefit, if any, on the date of death, plus any additional premium payments received, less any gross withdrawals from the date of death to the date of payment of death proceeds.

Ownership

You, as owner of the policy, exercise all rights under the policy. You can change the owner at any time by notifying us in writing at our Administrative and Service Office. An ownership change may be a taxable event.

Beneficiary

The beneficiary designation will remain in effect until changed. The owner may change the designated beneficiary by sending us written notice. The beneficiary’s consent to such change is not required unless the beneficiary was irrevocably designated or law requires consent. (If an irrevocable beneficiary dies, the owner may then designate a new beneficiary.) The change will take effect as of the date the owner signs the written notice, whether or not the owner is living when the notice is received by us. We will not be liable for any payment made before the written notice is received in our Administrative and Service Office. If more than one beneficiary is designated, and the owner fails to specify their interests, they will share equally. If, upon the death of the annuitant, there is a surviving owner(s), then the surviving owner(s) automatically takes the place of any beneficiary designation.

Right to Cancel Period

You may return your policy for a refund, but only if you return it within a prescribed period, which is generally 10 days after you receive the policy, or whatever longer time may be required by state law. The amount of the refund will generally be the premiums paid plus or minus accumulated gains or losses in the separate account. You bear the risk of any decline in policy value during the right to cancel period. However, if state law requires, we will refund your original premium payment(s). We will pay the refund within seven days after we receive in good order within the applicable period at our Administrative and Service Office, written notice of cancellation and the returned policy. The policy will then be deemed void.

93

Assignment

You can also generally assign the policy any time during your lifetime. We will not be bound by the assignment until we receive written notice of the assignment in good order at our Administrative and Service Office and approve it. We reserve the right, except to the extent prohibited by applicable laws, regulations, or actions of the State insurance commissioner, to require that an assignment will be effective only upon acceptance by us, and to refuse assignments or transfers at any time on a non-discriminatory basis. We will not be liable for any payment or other action we take in accordance with the policy before we approve the assignment. There may be limitations on your ability to assign a qualified policy. An assignment may have tax consequences.

Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order

We cannot process your requests for transactions relating to the policy until they are received in good order. “Good order” means the actual receipt of the instructions relating to the requested transaction in writing (or, when appropriate, by telephone or electronically), along with all forms, information and supporting legal documentation necessary to effect the transaction. This information and documentation generally includes, to the extent applicable to the transaction: your completed application; the policy number; the transaction amount (in dollars or percentage terms); the names and allocations to and/or from the Subaccounts affected by the requested transaction; the signatures of all policy owners (exactly as registered on the Policy) if necessary; Social Security Number or Taxpayer I.D.; and any other information or supporting documentation that we may require, including any spousal or joint owner’s consents. With respect to purchase requests, “good order” also generally includes receipt of sufficient funds to effect the purchase. We may, in our sole discretion, determine whether any particular transaction request is in good order, and we reserve the right to change or waive any good order requirements at any time.

“Received” or receipt in good order generally means that everything necessary must be received by us, at our Administrative and Service Office specified in the Glossary of Terms. However, in certain cases where applications or transaction requests are transmitted electronically through or by a broker/dealer, “receipt” can mean the point in time when the application or transaction request is electronically transmitted by the broker/dealer (or other financial intermediary), provided that we actually receive the application or transaction request promptly and in good order. We reserve the right to reject electronic transactions that do not meet our requirements.

Regulatory Modifications to Policy

We reserve the right to amend the policy or any riders attached thereto as necessary to comply with specific direction provided by state or federal regulators, through change of law, rule, regulation, bulletin, regulatory directives or agreements.

Certain Offers

We may pay you more than your current cash value for your voluntary participation in certain offerings. We will notify you of the terms of any such offers.

94

Mixed and Shared Funding

Before making a decision concerning the allocation of premium payments to a particular subaccount, please read the prospectuses for the underlying fund portfolios. The underlying fund portfolios are not limited to selling their shares to this separate account and can accept investments from any insurance company separate account or qualified retirement plan. Since the underlying fund portfolios are available to registered separate accounts offering our variable annuity products, as well as variable annuity and variable life products of other insurance companies, and qualified retirement plans, there is a possibility that a material conflict may arise between the interests of this separate account and one or more of the other separate accounts of another participating insurance company. In the event of a material conflict, the affected insurance companies, including us, agree to take any necessary steps to resolve the matter. This may include removing their separate accounts from the underlying fund portfolios. See the underlying fund portfolios prospectuses for more details.

Exchanges and Reinstatements

You can generally exchange one annuity policy for another in a “tax-free exchange” under Section 1035 of the Code. Before making an exchange, you should compare both annuities carefully. Remember that if you exchange another annuity for the one described in this prospectus, then you may pay a surrender charge on the other annuity, and there will be a new surrender charge period under this annuity and other charges may be higher (or lower) and the benefits under this annuity may be different. You should not exchange another annuity for this one unless you determine, after knowing all the facts, that the exchange is in your best interest and not just better for the person trying to sell you this policy (that person will generally earn a commission if you buy this policy through an exchange or otherwise).

You may surrender your policy and transfer your money directly to another life insurance company (sometimes referred to as a 1035 Exchange or a trustee-to-trustee transfer). You may also ask us to reinstate your policy after such a transfer and in certain limited circumstances we will allow you to do so by returning the same total dollar amount of funds to the applicable investment options. The dollar amount will be used to purchase new accumulation units at the then current price. Because of changes in market value, your new accumulation units may be worth more or less than the units you previously owned. We recommend that you consult a tax professional to explain the possible tax consequences of exchanges and/or reinstatements.

Voting Rights

To the extent required by law, we will vote all shares of the underlying fund portfolios held in the separate account in accordance with instructions we receive from you and other owners that have voting interests in the portfolios. We will send you and other owners requests for instructions on how to vote those shares. When we receive those instructions, we will vote all of the shares in proportion to those instructions. Accordingly, it is possible for a small number of policy owners (assuming there is a quorum) to determine the outcome of a vote, especially if they have large policy values. If, however, we determine that we are permitted to vote the shares in our own right, we may do so.

Each person having a voting interest will receive proxy material, reports, and other materials relating to the appropriate portfolio.

95

Legal Proceedings

There are no legal proceedings to which the separate account is a party or to which the assets of the separate account are subject. We, like other life insurance companies, are involved in lawsuits, regulatory audits and examination activity. In some class action and other lawsuits, regulatory audits and examinations involving other insurers, substantial damages have been sought and/or material settlement payments have been made. Although the outcome of any litigation, regulatory audit or examination cannot be predicted with certainty, we believe that at the present time there are no pending or threatened lawsuits, regulatory audits or examinations that are reasonably likely to have a material adverse impact on the separate account, on the ability of Transamerica Capital, Inc., to perform under its principal underwriting agreement, or on our ability to meet our obligations under the policy.

Information About Us

We are engaged in the sale of life and health insurance and annuity policies. Transamerica Life Insurance Company was incorporated under the laws of the State of Iowa on April 19, 1961 as NN Investors Life Insurance Company Inc. and is licensed in all states and the District of Columbia, Guam, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company was incorporated under the laws of the State of New York on October 3, 1947 and is licensed in all states and the District of Columbia. We are a wholly-owned indirect subsidiary of Transamerica Corporation which conducts most of its operations through subsidiary companies engaged in the insurance business or in providing non-insurance financial services. All of the stock of Transamerica Corporation is indirectly owned by AEGON N.V. of The Netherlands, the securities of which are publicly traded. AEGON N.V., a holding company, conducts its business through subsidiary companies engaged primarily in the insurance business.

All obligations arising under the policies, including the promise to make annuity payments, are general corporate obligations of ours. Accordingly, no financial institution, brokerage firm or insurance agency is responsible for our financial obligations arising under the policies.

Financial Condition

We pay benefits under your policy from our general account assets and/or from your policy value held in the separate account. It is important that you understand that payments of the benefits depend upon certain factors discussed below.

Assets in the Separate Account. You assume all of the investment risk for your policy value that is allocated to the subaccounts of the separate account. Your policy value in those subaccounts constitutes a portion of the assets of the separate account. These assets are segregated and insulated from our general account, and may not be charged with liabilities arising from any other business that we may conduct.

Assets in the General Account. You also may be permitted to make allocations to guaranteed period options of the fixed account, which are supported by the assets in our general account. Any guarantees under a policy that exceed policy value, such as those associated with any lifetime withdrawal benefit riders and any optional death benefits, are paid from our general account (and not the separate account). Therefore, any amounts that we may be obligated to pay under the policy in excess of policy value are subject to our financial strength and claims-paying ability and our

96

long-term ability to make such payments. The assets of the separate account, however, are also available to cover the liabilities of our general account, but only to the extent that the separate account assets exceed the separate account liabilities arising under the policies supported by it.

We issue other types of insurance policies and financial products as well, and we also pay our obligations under these products from our assets in the general account.

As an insurance company, we are required by state insurance regulation to hold a specified amount of reserves in order to meet all the contractual obligations of our general account. In order to meet our claims-paying obligation we monitor our reserves so that we hold sufficient amounts to cover actual or expected policy and claims payments. However, it is important to note that there are risks to purchasing any insurance product.

State insurance regulators also require insurance companies to maintain a minimum amount of capital, which acts as a cushion in the event that the insurer suffers a financial impairment, based on the inherent risks in the insurer’s operations. These risks include those associated with losses that we may incur as the result of defaults on the payment of interest or principal on our general account assets, which include bonds, mortgages, general real estate investments, and stocks, as well as the loss in market value of these investments.

How to Obtain More Information. We encourage both existing and prospective policy owners to read and understand our financial statements. We prepare our financial statements on a statutory basis. Our financial statements, which are presented in conformity with accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the Iowa Department of Commerce, Insurance Division as well as the financial statements of the separate account - are located in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI). For a free copy of the SAI, simply call or write us at the phone number or address of our Administrative and Service Office referenced in this prospectus. In addition, the SAI’s available on the SEC’s website at http://www.sec.gov. Our financial strength can be found on our website.

The Separate Account

Each separate account receives and invests the premium payments that are allocated to it for investment in shares of the underlying fund portfolios. Each separate account is registered with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the 1940 Act. However, the SEC does not supervise the management, the investment practices, or the policies of the separate account or us. Income, gains and losses (whether or not realized), from assets allocated to the separate account are, in accordance with the policies, credited to or charged against the separate account without regard to our other income, gains or losses.

The assets of each separate account are held in our name on behalf of the separate account and belong to us. However, those assets that underlie the policies are not chargeable with liabilities arising out of any other business we may conduct. The separate account may include other subaccounts that are not available under these policies. We do not guarantee the investment results of the Separate Account.

97

The Funds

At the time you purchase your policy, you may allocate your premium to subaccounts. These are subdivisions of our separate account, an account that keeps you policy assets separate from our company assets. The subaccounts then purchase shares of mutual funds set up exclusively for variable annuity or variable life insurance products. These are not the same mutual funds that you buy through your investment professional even though they may have similar investment strategies and the same portfolio managers. Each underlying fund portfolio has varying degrees of investment risk. Underlying fund portfolios are also subject to separate fees and expenses such as management fees and operating expenses. “Master-feeder” or “fund of funds” invest substantially all of their assets in other funds and will therefor bear a pro-rata share of fees and expenses incurred by both funds. This will reduce your investment return. Read the underlying fund portfolio prospectuses carefully before investing. We do not guarantee the investment results of any underlying fund portfolio. Certain underlying fund portfolios may not be available in all states and in all share classes. Please see “Appendix -Portfolios Associated with the Subaccounts” for additional information.

Distribution of the Policies

Distribution and Principal Underwriting Agreement. We have entered into a principal underwriting agreement with our affiliate, Transamerica Capital, Inc. (TCI), for the distribution and sale of the policies. We pay commissions to TCI which are passed through to selling firms. (See below). We also pay TCI an “override” that is a percentage of total commissions paid on sales of our policies which is not passed through to the selling firms and we may reimburse TCI for certain expenses it incurs in order to pay for the distribution of the policies. TCI markets the policies through bank affiliated firms, national brokerage firms, regional and independent broker-dealers and independent financial planners.

Compensation to Broker-Dealers Selling the Policies. The policies are offered to the public through broker-dealers (“selling firms”) that are licensed under the federal securities laws; the selling firm and/or its affiliates are also licensed under state insurance laws. The selling firms have entered into written selling agreements with us and with TCI as principal underwriter for the policies. We pay commissions through TCI to the selling firms for their sales of the policies.

A limited number of affiliated and unaffiliated broker-dealers may also be paid commissions and overrides to “wholesale” the policies, that is, to provide sales support and training to sales representatives at the selling firms. We also provide compensation to a limited number of broker-dealers for providing ongoing service in relation to the policies that have already been purchased.

The selling firms that have selling agreements with us and TCI are paid commissions for the promotion and sale of the policies according to one or more schedules. The amount and timing of commissions may vary depending on the selling agreement, but the maximum commission is 7.2% of premiums (additional amounts may be paid as overrides to wholesalers).

98

To the extent permitted by Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) rules, TCI may pay (or allow other broker-dealers to provide) promotional incentives or payments in the form of cash or non-cash compensation or reimbursement to some, but not all, selling firms and their sales representatives. These arrangements are sometimes referred to as “revenue sharing” arrangements and are described further below.

The sales representative who sells you the policy typically receives a portion of the compensation we (and our affiliates) pay to the selling firms, depending on the agreement between the selling firm and its registered representative and the firm’s internal compensation program. These programs may include other types of cash and non-cash compensation and other benefits. Ask your sales representative for further information about the compensation your sales representative, and the selling firm that employs your sales representative, may receive in connection with your purchase of a policy. Also inquire about any revenue sharing arrangements that we and our affiliates may have with the selling firm, including the conflicts of interests that such arrangements may create.

You should be aware that a selling firm or its sales representatives may receive different compensation or incentives for selling one product over another. In some cases, these differences may create an incentive for the selling firm or its sales representatives to recommend or sell this policy to you. You may wish to take such incentives into account when considering and evaluating any recommendation relating to the policies.

Special Compensation Paid to Affiliated Firms. We and/or our affiliates provide paid-in capital to TCI and pay the cost of TCI’s operating and other expenses, including costs for facilities, legal and accounting services, and other internal administrative functions. We and/or our affiliates also provide TCI with a percentage of total commissions paid on sales of our policies and provide TCI with capital payments that are not contingent on sales.

TCI’s registered representatives and supervisors may receive non-cash compensation, such as attendance at conferences, seminars and trips (such as travel, lodging and meals in connection therewith), entertainment, merchandise and other similar items, payments, loans, loan forgiveness or loan guaranties.

Additional Compensation That We, TCI and/or Our Affiliates Pay to Selected Selling Firms. TCI, in connection with the sales of the policies, may pay certain selling firms additional cash amounts for “preferred product” treatment of the policies in their marketing programs in order to receive enhanced marketing services and increased access to their sales representatives. In exchange for providing TCI with access to their distribution network, such selling firms may receive additional compensation or reimbursement for, among other things, the hiring and training of sales personnel, marketing, sponsoring of conferences, meetings, seminars, events, and/or other services they provide to us and our affiliates. To the extent permitted by applicable law, TCI and other parties may provide the selling firms with occasional gifts, meals, tickets or other non-cash compensation as an incentive to sell the policies. These special compensation arrangements are not offered to all selling firms and the terms of such arrangements may differ among selling firms.

Special compensation arrangements are calculated in different ways by different selling firms and may be based on past or anticipated sales of the policies and other criteria. For instance, in 2012, TCI, in connection with the sales of our policies, made flat fee payments to several selling firms ranging from $15,000 to $500,000, and payments of between 0.10% and 1.16% on new sales. TCI also paid selling firms special fees based on new sales and/or assets under management.

99

During 2012, we and/or TCI had such “preferred product” arrangements with the following selling firms:

AXA Advisors LLC

Centarus Financial Inc.

CFD Investments

Citigroup Global Markets

Citizens Investment Services Corporation

BBVA Compass Investment Solutions, Inc.

Equity Services Inc.

Financial Network Invest Corp

FSC Securities

Genworth Financial Securities Corp.

Hantz Financial Services Inc.

Huntington Investment Company

ING Financial Partners

Invest Financial Corporation

Investment Centers Of America

Investacorp

Investors Capital Corp

James T. Borello

LPL Financial (IFP)

M&T Securities Inc.

Merrill Lynch

Morgan Stanley

Multi Financial Securities

Park Avenue Securities

Primevest Financial Services

ProEquities/Protech

Raymond James and Associates

Raymond James Financial Services

Royal Alliance

SagePoint Financial, Inc.

Securities America, Inc.

Sigma Financial Corporation

Signator Investors, Inc.

SII Investments Inc.

Smith Barney Div of Citigroup

Summit Equities

SunTrust Investment Services, Inc.

The Investment Center, Inc.

Transamerica Financial Advisors

UBS Financial Services, Inc.

US Bancorp Investments Inc.

100

Valmark Securities Inc.

Wells Fargo Advisors

Wells Fargo Wealth Brokerage

During 2012, in conjunction with TCI, we paid the following amounts (in addition to sales commissions) to the top 10 selling firms (in terms of amounts paid):

Name of Firm	Amount Paid in 2012
LPL Financial LLC	$1,422,696
Morgan Stanley Smith Barney	$1,395,442
Wells Fargo Wealth Brokerage	$1,204,432
Wells Fargo Advisors	$1,083,661
Transamerica Financial Advisors	$886,784
Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated	$847,433
UBS Financial	$499,696
Raymond James Financial Services	$471,327
National Planning Corporation	$451,124
CCO Investment Services Corp.	$390,414

No specific charge is assessed directly to policy owners or the separate account to cover commissions, non-cash compensation, and other incentives or payments described above. We do intend to recoup commissions and other sales expenses and incentives we pay, however, through fees and charges deducted under the policy and other corporate revenue.

TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Glossary of Terms

The Policy - General Provisions

Investment Experience

Performance

Historical Performance Data

Published Ratings

State Regulation of Us

Administration

Records and Reports

Distribution of the Policies

Voting Rights

Other Products

Custody of Assets

Legal Matters

Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

Other Information

Financial Statements

101

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

Accumulation Unit — An accounting unit of measure used in calculating the policy value in the separate account before the annuity commencement date.

Adjusted Policy Value — The policy value increased or decreased by any excess interest adjustment.

Administrative and Service Office — Transamerica Life Insurance Company and Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company, Attention: Customer Care Group, 4333 Edgewood Road NE, Cedar Rapids, IA 52499-0001, (800) 525-6205.

Annuitant — The person on whose life any annuity payments involving life contingencies will be based.

Annuitize (Annuitization) — When you switch from the accumulation phase to the income phase and we begin to make annuity payments to you (or your designee).

Annuity Commencement Date — The date we issue a supplementary contract. In no event can this date be earlier than the third policy anniversary, or later than the last day of the month following the month in which the annuitant attains age 99. You may elect an annuity commencement date at any time by giving us 30 days written notice. The annuity commencement date may have to be earlier for qualified policies and may be earlier if required by state law.

Annuity Payment Option — A method of receiving a stream of annuity payments selected by the owner.

Assumed Investment Return or AIR — The annual effective rate shown in the contract specifications section of the contract that is used in the calculation of each variable annuity payment.

Cash Value — The adjusted policy value less any applicable surrender charge and rider fees (imposed upon surrender).

Excess Interest Adjustment — A positive or negative adjustment to amounts surrendered (both partial or full surrenders and transfers) or applied to annuity payment options from the fixed account guaranteed period options prior to the end of the guaranteed period. The adjustment reflects changes in the interest rates declared by us since the date any payment was received by, or an amount was transferred to, the guaranteed period option. The excess interest adjustment can either decrease or increase the amount to be received by the owner upon full surrender or commencement of annuity payments, depending upon whether there has been an increase or decrease in interest rates, respectively. The excess interest adjustment does not apply to policies issued in New York by Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company.

Fixed Account — One or more investment options that may be available under the policy that are part of our general assets and are not in the separate account.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — Any optional benefit under the policy that provides a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit, including Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, the Income Link^SM Rider, the Retirement Income Max^SM Rider or the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider

102

Guaranteed Period Options — The various guaranteed interest rate periods of the fixed account which we may offer and into which premium payments may be paid or amounts transferred when available.

Owner (You, Your) — The person who may exercise all rights and privileges under the policy.

Policy Date — The date shown on the policy data page attached to the policy and the date on which the policy becomes effective.

Policy Value — On or before the annuity commencement date, the policy value is equal to the owner’s:

• premium payments; minus

• gross surrenders (surrenders plus the surrender charge on the portion of the requested partial surrender that is subject to the surrender charge plus or minus any excess interest adjustment); plus

• interest credited in the fixed account; plus

• accumulated gains in the separate account; minus

• accumulated losses in the separate account; minus

• service charges, rider fees, premium taxes, transfer fees, and other charges, if any.

Policy Year — A policy year begins on the policy date and on each anniversary thereof.

Separate Account — Separate Account VA B and Separate Account VA BNY, separate accounts established and registered as unit investment trusts under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”), to which premium payments under the policies may be allocated.

Separate Account Value — The portion of the policy value that is invested in the separate account.

Subaccount — A subdivision within the separate account, the assets of which are invested in a specified underlying fund portfolios.

Surrender Charge Free Amount — The amount that can be withdrawn each year without incurring any surrender charges.

Valuation Period — The period of time from one determination of accumulation unit values and annuity unit values to the next subsequent determination of those values. Such determination shall be made generally at the close of business on each market day.

Written Notice — Written notice, signed by the owner, that gives us the information we require and is received in good order at the Administrative and Service Office. For some transactions, we may accept an electronic notice such as telephone instructions. Such electronic notice must meet the requirements for good order that we establish for such notices.

You (Your) — The owner of the policy.

103

APPENDIX

PORTFOLIOS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SUBACCOUNTS

Please Note: We reserve the right to change investment choices made by purchasers of the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, including changing the PAM investment option, as we deem necessary to support the guarantees under these riders.

SUBACCOUNT(1)	PORTFOLIO	ADVISOR/SUBADVISOR
ALLIANCEBERNSTEIN VARIABLE PRODUCTS SERIES FUND, INC.
AllianceBernstein Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio - Class B	AllianceBernstein Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio - Class B	AllianceBernstein L.P.
Investment Objective: Maximize total return consistent with the Adviser’s determination of reasonable risk.
AllianceBernstein Growth and Income Portfolio – Class B	AllianceBernstein Growth and Income Portfolio – Class B	AllianceBernstein L.P.
Investment Objective: Long-term growth of capital.
AMERICAN FUNDS INSURANCE SERIES ® TRUST
American Funds - Asset Allocation Fund - Class 2	American Funds - Asset Allocation Fund - Class 2	Capital Research and Management CompanySM
Investment Objective: High total return (including income and capital gains) consistent with preservation of capital over the long term.
American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2	American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2	Capital Research and Management CompanySM
Investment Objective: To provide as high a level of current income as is consistent with the preservation of capital.
American Funds - Growth Fund - Class 2	American Funds - Growth Fund - Class 2	Capital Research and Management CompanySM
Investment Objective: Growth of capital.
American Funds - Growth-Income Fund - Class 2	American Funds - Growth-Income Fund - Class 2	Capital Research and Management CompanySM
Investment Objective: Long-term growth of capital and income.
American Funds - International Fund - Class 2	American Funds - International Fund - Class 2	Capital Research and Management CompanySM
Investment Objective: Capital growth.
FIDELITY ® VARIABLE INSURANCE PRODUCTS FUND
Fidelity VIP Balanced Portfolio - Service Class 2	Fidelity VIP Balanced Portfolio - Service Class 2	Fidelity Management & Research Company
Investment Objective: Seeks income and capital growth consistent with reasonable risk.
Fidelity VIP Contrafund ® Portfolio – Service Class 2	Fidelity VIP Contrafund ® Portfolio – Service Class 2	Fidelity Management & Research Company
Investment Objective: Long term capital appreciation.
Fidelity VIP Mid Cap Portfolio – Service Class 2	Fidelity VIP Mid Cap Portfolio – Service Class 2	Fidelity Management & Research Company
Investment Objective: Long-term growth of capital.
Fidelity VIP Value Strategies Portfolio – Service Class 2	Fidelity VIP Value Strategies Portfolio – Service Class 2	Fidelity Management & Research Company
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation
GE INVESTMENTS FUNDS, INC.
GE Investments Total Return Fund - Class 3	GE Investments Total Return Fund - Class 3	GE Asset Management, Inc.
Investment Objective: Seeks the highest total return, composed of current income and capital appreciation, as is consistent with prudentinvestment risk.
TRANSAMERICA SERIES TRUST
TA AEGON High Yield Bond - Service Class	Transamerica AEGON High Yield Bond VP – Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: High level of current income by investing in high-yield debt securities.
TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class(2)	Transamerica AEGON Money Market VP – Service Class(2)	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Maximum current income from money market securities consistent with liquidity and preservation of principal.
TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Balanced - Service Class	Transamerica AEGON Active Asset Allocation - Moderate VP - Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC

104

PORTFOLIOS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SUBACCOUNTS — (Continued)

SUBACCOUNT(1)	PORTFOLIO	ADVISOR/SUBADVISOR
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation and current income.
TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Conservative - Service Class	Transamerica AEGON Active Asset Allocation - Conservative VP - Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Current income and preservation of capital.
TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Growth - Service Class	Transamerica AEGON Active Asset Allocation - Moderate Growth VP - Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation with current income as secondary objective.
TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class	Transamerica AEGON U.S. Government Securities VP – Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: High level of total return as is consistent with prudent investment strategies.
TA AllianceBernstein Dynamic Allocation - Service Class	Transamerica AllianceBernstein Dynamic Allocation VP - Service Class	Alliance Bernstein L.P.
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation and current income.
TA Asset Allocation - Conservative - Service Class	Transamerica Asset Allocation - Conservative VP – Service Class	Transamerica Asset Management, Inc.
Investment Objective: Current income and preservation of capital.
TA Asset Allocation - Growth - Service Class	Transamerica Asset Allocation - Growth VP – Service Class	Transamerica Asset Management, Inc.
Investment Objective: Long-term capital appreciation.
TA Asset Allocation - Moderate - Service Class	Transamerica Asset Allocation - Moderate VP – Service Class	Transamerica Asset Management, Inc.
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation and current income.
TA Asset Allocation - Moderate Growth - Service Class	Transamerica Asset Allocation - Moderate Growth VP – Service Class	Transamerica Asset Management, Inc.
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation with current income as a secondary objective.
TA BlackRock Global Allocation - Service Class	Transamerica BlackRock Global Allocation VP - Service Class	BlackRock Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: High total investment return. Total investment return is the combination of capital appreciation and investment income.
TA BlackRock Large Cap Value - Service Class	Transamerica BlackRock Large Cap Value VP – Service Class	BlackRock Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Long-term capital growth.
TA BlackRock Tactical Allocation - Service Class	Transamerica BlackRock Tactical Allocation VP - Service Class	BlackRock Financial Management, Inc.
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation with current income as secondary objective.
TA Clarion Global Real Estate Securities - Service Class	Transamerica Clarion Global Real Estate Securities VP – Service Class	CBRE Clarion Securities, LLC
Investment Objective: Long-term total return from investments primarily in equity securities of real estate companies. Total return consists of realized and unrealized capital gains and losses plus income.
TA Efficient Markets - Service Class	Transamerica Efficient Markets VP - Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation while seeking income as a secondary objective.
TA Hanlon Income - Service Class	Transamerica Hanlon Income VP – Service Class	Hanlon Investment Management, Inc.
Investment Objective: Conservative stability.
TA International Moderate Growth - Service Class	Transamerica International Moderate Growth VP – Service Class	Transamerica Asset Management, Inc.
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation with current income as a secondary objective.
TA JPMorgan Core Bond - Service Class	Transamerica JPMorgan Core Bond VP - Service Class	J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.
Investment Objective: Total return, consisting of current income and capital appreciation.
TA JPMorgan Enhanced Index - Service Class	Transamerica JPMorgan Enhanced Index VP – Service Class	J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.
Investment Objective: Earn a total return modestly in excess of the total return performance of the Standard & Poor’s 500 Index (including the reinvestment of dividends) while maintaining a volatility of return similar to the S&P 500 Index.

105

PORTFOLIOS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SUBACCOUNTS — (Continued)

SUBACCOUNT(1)	PORTFOLIO	ADVISOR/SUBADVISOR
TA JPMorgan Mid Cap Value - Service Class	Transamerica JPMorgan Mid Cap Value VP – Service Class	J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.
Investment Objective: Growth from capital appreciation.
TA JPMorgan Tactical Allocation - Service Class	Transamerica JPMorgan Tactical Allocation VP - Service Class	J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.
Investment Objective: Current income and preservation of capital.
TA Janus Balanced - Service Class	Transamerica Janus Balanced VP – Service Class	Janus Capital Management LLC
Investment Objective: Long-term capital growth, consistent with preservation of capital and balanced by current income.
TA Jennison Growth - Service Class	Transamerica Jennison Growth VP– Service Class	Jennison Associates LLC
Investment Objective: Long-term growth of capital.
TA Legg Mason Dynamic Allocation - Balanced - Service Class	Transamerica Legg Mason Dynamic Allocation - Balanced VP - Service Class	Legg Mason Global Asset Allocation, LLC
Investment Objective: Seeks capital appreciation and income.
TA Market Participation Strategy - Service Class	Transamerica Market Participation Strategy VP - Service Class	Quantitative Management Associates LLC
Investment Objective: Seeks capital appreciation.
TA MFS International Equity - Service Class	Transamerica MFS International Equity VP – Service Class	MFS ® Investment Management
Investment Objective: Capital growth.
TA Morgan Stanley Active International Allocation - Service Class	Transamerica Morgan Stanley Active International Allocation VP – Service Class	Morgan Stanley Investment Management Inc.
Investment Objective: Long-term capital appreciation.
TA Morgan Stanley Capital Growth - Service Class	Transamerica Morgan Stanley Capital Growth VP – Service Class	Morgan Stanley Investment Management Inc.
Investment Objective: Maximize long-term growth.
TA Morgan Stanley Mid Cap Growth - Service Class	Transamerica Morgan Stanley Mid-Cap Growth VP – Service Class	Morgan Stanley Investment Management Inc.
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation.
TA Multi-Managed Balanced - Service Class	Transamerica Multi-Managed Balanced VP – Service Class	J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc. and BlackRock Financial Management, Inc.
Investment Objective: High total investment return through investments in a broadly diversified portfolio of stock, bonds and money market instruments.
TA Multi Managed Large Cap Core - Service Class	Transamerica Multi Managed Large Cap Core VP – Service Class	Morgan Stanley Investment Management Inc. and Invesco Advisers, Inc.
Investment Objective: High total return.
TA PIMCO Tactical - Balanced - Service Class	Transamerica PIMCO Tactical – Balanced VP – Service Class	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Investment Objective: Seeks a combination of capital appreciation and income.
TA PIMCO Tactical - Conservative - Service Class	Transamerica PIMCO Tactical – Conservative VP – Service Class	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Investment Objective: Seeks a combination of capital appreciation and income.
TA PIMCO Tactical - Growth - Service Class	Transamerica PIMCO Tactical – Growth VP – Service Class	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Investment Objective: Seeks a combination of capital appreciation and income.
TA PIMCO Real Return TIPS - Service Class	Transamerica PIMCO Real Return TIPS VP - Service Class	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Investment Objective: Maximum real return consistent with preservation of real capital and prudent investment management.
TA PIMCO Total Return - Service Class	Transamerica PIMCO Total Return VP – Service Class	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Investment Objective: Maximum total return consistent with preservation of capital and prudent investment management.
TA Systematic Small Mid Cap Value - Service Class	Transamerica Systematic Small/Mid Cap Value VP – Service Class	Systematic Financial Management L.P.

106

PORTFOLIOS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SUBACCOUNTS — (Continued)

SUBACCOUNT(1)	PORTFOLIO	ADVISOR/SUBADVISOR
Investment Objective: Maximize total return.
TA T. Rowe Price Small Cap - Service Class	Transamerica T. Rowe Price Small Cap VP – Service Class	T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc.
Investment Objective: Long-term growth of capital by investing primarily in common stocks of small growth companies.
TA Vanguard ETF Index - Aggressive Growth - Service Class	Transamerica Index 100 VP – Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Long-term capital appreciation.
TA Vanguard ETF Index - Balanced - Service Class	Transamerica Index 50 VP – Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Balance capital appreciation and income.
TA Vanguard ETF Index - Conservative - Service Class	Transamerica Index 35 VP – Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Current income and preservation of capital.
TA Vanguard ETF Index - Growth - Service Class	Transamerica Index 75 VP – Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation as a primary objective and income as a secondary objective.
TA WMC Diversified Growth - Service Class	Transamerica WMC Diversified Growth VP – Service Class	Wellington Management Company, LLP
Investment Objective: Maximize long-term growth.

⁽¹⁾ Some subaccounts may be available for certain policies and may not be available for all policies. You should work with your registered representative to decide which subaccount(s) may be appropriate for you based on a thorough analysis of your particular insurance needs, financial objective, investment goals, time horizons, and risk tolerance.

⁽²⁾ There can be no assurance that the Transamerica AEGON Money Market VP - Service Class portfolio will be able to maintain a stable net asset value per share. during extended periods of low interest rates, and partly as a result of policy charges, the yield on the TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class subaccount may become extremely low and possibly negative.

107

APPENDIX

EXCESS INTEREST ADJUSTMENT EXAMPLES

Money that you surrender from, transfer out of, or apply to an annuity payment option, from a guaranteed period option of the fixed account before the end of its guaranteed period (the number of years you specified the money would remain in the guaranteed period option) may be subject to an excess interest adjustment (“EIA”). At the time you request a surrender, if interest rates set by us have risen since the date of the initial guarantee, the excess interest adjustment will result in a lower cash value. However, if interest rates have fallen since the date of the initial guarantee, the excess interest adjustment will result in a higher cash value.

Excess interest adjustments will not reduce the adjusted policy value for a guaranteed period option below the premium payments and transfers to that guaranteed period option, less any prior partial surrenders and transfers from the guaranteed period option, plus interest at the policy’s minimum guaranteed effective annual interest rate. This is referred to as the excess interest adjustment floor.

The formula that will be used to determine the excess interest adjustment is:

S* (G-C)* (M/12)

S	=	Is the amount (before surrender charges, premium taxes and the application of any Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefits, if any) being surrendered, withdrawn, transferred, paid upon death, or applied to an income option that is subject to the excess interest adjustment.
G	=	Is the guaranteed interest rate for the guaranteed period applicable to “S”;
C	=	Is the current guaranteed interest rate then being offered on new premiums for the next longer option period than “M”. If this policy form or such an option period is no longer offered, “C” will be the U.S. Treasury rate for the next longer maturity (in whole years) than “M” on the 25th day of the previous calendar month, plus up to 0.25%; and.
M	=	Number of months remaining in the current option period for “S”, rounded up to the next higher whole number of months.
*	=	multiplication
^	=	exponentiation (as used in the following examples)

The following examples are for illustrative purposes only and are calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.

108

Excess Interest Adjustment Examples — (Continued)

Example 1 (Full Surrender, rates increase by 3%):

Single premium:	$50,000.00
Guarantee period:	5 Years
Guarantee rate:	5.50% per annum
Surrender:	Middle of policy year 2
Cumulative Earnings	= 54,181.21 – 50,000.00 = 4,181.21
Amount free of excess interest adjustment	= 4,181.21
Amount subject to excess interest adjustment	= 54,181.21 – 4,181.21 = 50,000.00
Excess interest adjustment floor	= 50,000.00 * (1.015) ^ 1.5 = 51,129.21
Excess interest adjustment
G = .055
C = .085
M = 42
Excess interest adjustment	= S* (G-C)* (M/12)
	= 50,000.00 * (.055-.085) * (42/12)
	= -5,250.00, but excess interest adjustment cannot cause the adjusted policy value to fall below the excess interest adjustment floor, so the adjustment is limited to 51,129.21 - 54,181.21 = -3,052.00
Adjusted policy value	= policy value + excess interest adjustment = 54,181.21 + (-3,052.00) = 51,129.21
Upon full surrender of the policy, the net surrender value (adjusted policy value less any surrender charge) will never be less than that required by the non-forfeiture laws of your state.

* This example is for illustrative purposes only. The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate how this feature is calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.

109

Excess Interest Adjustment Examples — (Continued)

Example 2 (Full Surrender, rates decrease by 1%):

Single premium:	$50,000.00
Guarantee period:	5 Years
Guarantee rate:	5.50% per annum
Surrender:	Middle of policy year 2
Policy value at middle of policy year 2	= 50,000.00 * (1.055) ^ 1.5 = 54,181.21
Cumulative Earnings	= 54,181.21 – 50,000.00 = 4,181.21
Amount free of excess interest adjustment	= 4,181.21
Amount subject to excess interest adjustment	= 54,181.21 – 4,181.21 = 50,000.00
Excess interest adjustment floor	= 50,000.00 * (1.015) ^ 1.5 = 51,129.21
Excess interest adjustment
G = .055
C = .045
M = 42
Excess interest adjustment	= S* (G-C)* (M/12)
	= 50,000.00 * (.055-.045) * (42/12) = 1,750.00
Adjusted policy value	= 54,181.21 + 1,750.00 = 55,931.21
Upon full surrender of the policy, the net surrender value will never by less than that required by the non-forfeiture laws of your state. For the purpose of these illustrations no surrender charges are assumed.

* This example is for illustrative purposes only. The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate how this feature is calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.

On a partial surrender, we will pay the policyholder the full amount of surrender requested (as long as the policy value is sufficient). Amounts surrendered will reduce the policy value by an amount equal to:

R - E + SC

R =  the requested partial surrender;

E =  the excess interest adjustment; and

SC =  the surrender charges on (EPW - E); where

EPW =  the excess partial withdrawal amount.

110

Excess Interest Adjustment Examples — (Continued)

Example 3 (Partial Surrender, rates increase by 1%):

Single premium:	$50,000.00
Guarantee period:	5 Years
Guarantee rate:	5.50% per annum
Partial surrender:	$20,000; middle of policy year 2
Policy value at middle of policy year 2	= 50,000.00 * (1.055) ^ 1.5 = 54,181.21
Cumulative Earnings	= 54,181.21 – 50,000.00 = 4,181.21
Amount free of excess interest adjustment	= 4,181.21
Excess interest adjustment
S = 20,000 – 4,181.21 = 15,818.79
G = .055
C = .065
M = 42
E = 15,818.79 * (.055 - .065) * (42/12) = -553.66	= 54,181.21 - (R - E + surrender charge)
Remaining policy value at middle of policy year 2	= 54,181.21 - (20,000.00 - (-553.66) + 0.00) = 33,627.55
* This example is for illustrative purposes only. The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate how this feature is calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.
Example 4 (Partial Surrender, rates decrease by 1%):
Single premium:	$50,000.00
Guarantee period:	5 Years
Guarantee rate:	5.50% per annum
Partial surrender:	$20,000; middle of policy year 2
Policy value at middle of policy year 2	= 50,000.00 * (1.055) ^ 1.5 = 54,181.21
Cumulative Earnings	= 54,181.21 – 50,000.00 = 4,181.21
Amount free of excess interest adjustment	= 4,181.21
Excess interest adjustment
S = 20,000 – 4,181.21 = 15,818.79
G = .055
C = .045
M = 42
E = 15,818.79 * (.055 - .045)* (42/12) = 553.66	= 54,181.21 - (R - E + surrender charge)
Remaining policy value at middle of policy year 2	= 54,181.21 - (20,000.00 – 553.66 + 0.00) = 34,734.87

* This example is for illustrative purposes only. The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate how this feature is calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.

111

APPENDIX

DEATH BENEFIT

Adjusted Partial Surrender. If you make a partial surrender (withdrawal), then your guaranteed minimum death benefit is reduced by an amount called the adjusted partial surrender. The amount of the reduction depends on the relationship between your death benefit and policy value. The adjusted partial surrender is equal to (1) multiplied by (2) divided by (3), where:

(1) is the amount of the gross partial surrender;

(2) is the value of the current death proceeds immediately prior to the gross partial surrender;

(3) is the policy value immediately prior to the gross partial surrender.

The following examples describe the effect of a surrender on the guaranteed minimum death benefit and policy value.

Example 1 (Assumed Facts for Example)

Current guaranteed minimum death benefit before surrender	$75,000
Current policy value before surrender	$50,000
Current death proceeds	$75,000
Total Gross Partial Surrender	$15,494
Adjusted partial surrender = 15,494 * 75,000 / 50,000	$23,241
New guaranteed minimum death benefit (after surrender) = 75,000 – 23,241	$51,759
New policy value (after surrender) = 50,000 - 15,494	$34,506

Summary:
Reduction in guaranteed minimum death benefit	= $	23,241
Reduction in policy value	= $	15,494

* This example is for illustrative purposes only. The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate how this feature is calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.

** The guaranteed minimum death benefit is reduced more than the policy value because the guaranteed minimum death benefit was greater than the policy value just prior to the surrender.

112

Death Benefit — (Continued)

Example 2 (Assumed Facts for Example)

Current guaranteed minimum death benefit before surrender	$50,000
Current policy value before surrender	$75,000
Current death proceeds	$75,000
Total Gross Partial Surrender	$15,556
Adjusted partial surrender = 15,556 * 75,000 / 75,000	$15,556
New guaranteed minimum death benefit (after surrender) = 50,000—15,556	$34,444
New policy value (after surrender) = 75,000 - 15,556	$59,444

Summary:
Reduction in guaranteed minimum death benefit	= $15,556
Reduction in policy value	= $15,556

* This example is for illustrative purposes only. The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate how this feature is calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.

** The guaranteed minimum death benefit and policy value are reduced by the same amount because the policy value was higher than the guaranteed minimum death benefit just prior to the surrender.

113

Death Benefit — (Continued)

Hypothetical Example

In this example, certain death benefit values at various points in time are depicted based on hypothetical assumed rates of performance. This example is for illustrative purposes only and assumes a single $100,000 premium payment by a sole owner and annuitant who is age 50. It further assumes no subsequent premium payments or withdrawals. The difference between the two “Policy Value” columns is the fee for the guaranteed minimum death benefit.

End of Year	Net Rate of Return for Fund*	Policy Value   (No GMDB Elected)	Policy Value (Return of Premium GMDB  Elected)	Return of     Premium GMDB	Policy Value (Annual Step-up   GMDB Elected)	Annual Step-Up GMDB
Issue	N/A	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000
1	-4%	$95,550	$95,400	$100,000	$95,200	$100,000
2	18%	$112,319	$112,000	$100.000	$111,574	$111,574
3	15%	$128,661	$128,128	$100,000	$127,418	$127,418
4	-7%	$119,076	$118,390	$100,000	$117,479	$127,418
5	2%	$120,922	$120,047	$100,000	$118,889	$127,418
6	10%	$132,470	$131,332	$100,000	$129,827	$129,827
7	14%	$150,420	$148,930	$100,000	$146,964	$146,964
8	-3%	$145,230	$143,569	$100,000	$141,379	$146,964
9	17%	$169,266	$167,114	$100,000	$164,283	$164,283
10	6%	$178,660	$176,138	$100,000	$172,826	$172,826

* The assumed rate does reflect the deduction of a hypothetical fund fee but does not reflect the deduction of any other fees, charges or taxes. The death benefit values do reflect the deduction of hypothetical base policy fees and hypothetical death benefit fees. Different hypothetical returns and fees would produce different results.

114

APPENDIX

ADDITIONAL DEATH DISTRIBUTION RIDER

The following example illustrates the Additional Death Distribution additional death benefit payable by this rider as well as the effect of a partial surrender on the Additional Death Distribution benefit amount. The annuitant is less than age 71 on the Rider Date.

Example 1

Policy Value on the Rider Date:	$100,000
Premiums paid after the Rider Date before Surrender:	$25,000
Gross Partial Surrenders after the Rider Date:	$30,000
Policy Value on date of Surrender:	$150,000
Rider Earnings on Date of Surrender (Policy Value on date of surrender – Policy Value on Rider Date – Premiums paid after Rider Date + Surrenders since Rider Date that exceeded Rider Earnings = $150,000 - $100,000 - $25,000 + 0):	$25,000
Amount of Surrender that exceeds Rider Earnings ($30,000 - $25,000):	$5,000
Base Policy Death Benefit on the date of Death Benefit Calculation:	$200,000
Policy Value on the date of Death Benefit Calculations:	$175,000
Rider Earnings (= Policy Value on date of Death Benefit Calculations – policy value on Rider Date – Premiums since Rider Date + Surrenders since Rider Date that exceeded Rider Earnings = $175,000 - $100,000 - $25,000 + $5,000):	$55,000
Additional Death Benefit Amount (= Additional Death Benefit Factor * Rider Earnings = 40%* $55,000):	$22,000
Total Death Benefit paid (=Base policy death benefit plus Additional Death Benefit Amount):	$222,000
Example 2
Policy Value on the Rider Date:	$100,000
Premiums paid after the Rider Date before Surrender:	$0
Gross Partial Surrenders after the Rider Date:	$0
Base Policy Death Benefit on the date of Death Benefit Calculation:	$100,000
Policy Value on the date of Death Benefit Calculations:	$75,000
Rider Earnings (= Policy Value on date of death benefit calculations – policy value on Rider Date – Premiums since Rider Date + Surrenders since Rider Date that exceeded Rider Earnings = $75,000 - $100,000 - $0 + $0):	$0
Additional Death Benefit Amount (= Additional Death Benefit Factor * Rider Earnings = 40%* $0):	$0
Total Death Benefit paid (=Base policy death benefit plus Additional Death Benefit Amount):	$100,000

115

APPENDIX

ADDITIONAL DEATH DISTRIBUTION+ RIDER

Assume the Additional Death Distribution+ is added to a new policy opened with $100,000 initial premium. The annuitant is less than age 71 on the Rider Date. On the first and second Rider Anniversaries, the Policy Value is $110,000 and $95,000 respectively when the Rider Fees are deducted. The annuitant adds $25,000 premium in the 3rd Rider Year when the Policy Value is equal to $115,000 and then takes a withdrawal of $35,000 during the 4th Rider Year when the Policy Value is equal to $145,000. After 5 years, the Policy Value is equal to $130,000 and the death proceeds are equal to $145,000.

Example 1

Account Value on Rider Date (equals initial policy value since new policy)	$100,000
Additional Death Benefit during first Rider Year	$0
Rider Fee on first Rider Anniversary (= Rider Fee * Policy Value = 0.55% * $110,000)	$605
Additional Death Benefit during 2nd Rider Year (= sum of total Rider Fees paid)	$605
Rider Fee on second Rider Anniversary (= Rider Fee * Policy Value = 0.55% * $95,000)	$522.50
Additional Death Benefit during 3rd Rider Year (= sum of total Rider Fees paid = $605 + $522.50)	$1,127.50
Rider Benefit Base in 3rd Rider Year prior to Premium addition (= Account Value less premiums added since Rider Date = $115,000 – $0)	$115,000
Rider Benefit Base in 3rd Rider Year after Premium addition (= $140,000 - $25,000)	$115,000
Rider Benefit Base in 4th Rider Year prior to withdrawal (= Account Value less premiums added since Rider Date = $145,000 - $25,000)	$120,000
Rider Benefit Base in 4th Rider Year after withdrawal = (Account Value less premiums added since Rider Date =$110,000 - $25,000)	$85,000
Rider Benefit Base in 5th Rider Year (= $130,000 - $25,000)	$105,000
Additional Death Benefit = Rider Benefit Percentage * Rider Benefit Base = 30% * $105,000	$31,500
Total Death Proceeds in 5th Rider Year (= base policy Death Proceeds + Additional Death Benefit Amount = $145,000 + $31,500)	$176,500

116

APPENDIX

GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT COMPARISON TABLE

Important aspects of the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, the Income Link^SM Rider, the Retirement Income Max^SM Rider or the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider are summararized in the following chart.

Note: The Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, the Income Link^SM Rider, the Retirement Income Max^SM Rider or the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider and any additional options available under these riders, may vary for certain policies and may not be available for all policies; the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Riders may not be available in all states. You should consult with tax and financial professionals to determine which of these riders is appropriate for you.

Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM Rider	Income LinkSM Rider	Retirement Income MaxSM Rider	Retirement Income Choice 1.6SM Rider
Benefit: • Provides: (1)Guaranteed Minimum Accumulation Benefit (“GMAB”)—Ten years after you elect the rider (“guaranteed future value date”), your policy value will equal your guaranteed future value (calculated as described below). After that date, the guaranteed future value equals zero. (2) Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit (“GMWB”)—a maximum annual withdrawal amount (calculated as described below) regardless of your policy value; we account for withdrawals you take under the rider by applying two different withdrawal guarantees, “principal back,” for withdrawals of up to 7% of your total withdrawal base, or “for life,” for withdrawals up to 5% of your total withdrawal base.	Benefit: • Provides (1)Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (“GLWB”)—i.e., a level of cash withdrawals (and payments from us, if necessary), which are based on a withdrawal percentage that is higher for a defined period and lower thereafter, regardless of the Designated Investment Option that you select. (2) Automatic Step-Up—We will automatically step-up the withdrawal base on each rider anniversary. You can opt out of the automatic step-up if the automatic step-up would result in an increase in the rider fee percentage.	Benefit: • Provides: (1) Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (“GLWB”)—i.e., a series of cash withdrawals (and payments from us, if necessary) regardless of the performance of the designated investment options that you select – if you invest in certain designated investment options. (2) Growth—On each of the first 10 rider anniversaries, we add an annual growth credit (5% of the withdrawal base immediately before the rider anniversary) to the withdrawal base if no withdrawals have occurred during the preceding rider year. (3) Automatic Step-Up—We will automatically step-up the withdrawal base on each rider anniversary. You can opt out of the automatic step-up if the automatic step-up would result in an increase in the rider fee percentage.	Benefit: • Provides: (1) Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (“GLWB”)—i.e., a level of cash withdrawals (and payments from us, if necessary) regardless of the performance of the designated investment options that you select. (2) Growth—On each of the first 10 rider anniversaries, we add an annual growth credit (5% of the withdrawal base immediately before the rider anniversary) to the withdrawal base if no withdrawals have occurred during the preceding rider year. (3) Automatic Step-Up—We will automatically step-up the withdrawal base on each rider anniversary. You can opt out of the automatic step-up if the automatic step-up would result in an increase in the rider fee percentage.

117

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Comparison Table — (Continued)

Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM Rider	Income LinkSM Rider	Retirement Income MaxSM Rider	Retirement Income Choice 1.6SM Rider
• Upgrades: (1) Before the annuitant’s 86th birthday, you can upgrade the total withdrawal base (for GMWB) and the guaranteed future value (for GMAB) by sending us written notice. (2) If you upgrade, the current rider terminates and a new rider is issued (which may have a higher rider fee).			• Upgrades: You may request by sending us written notice. If you elect to manually reset, the current rider terminates and a new rider is issued (which may have a higher rider fee percentage and lower growth rate percentage.) If you have elected the joint life option under the rider, you cannot elect a manual reset if the annuitant or the annuitant’s spouse is 86 or older (unless state law requires a lower maximum age).

118

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Comparison Table — (Continued)

Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM  Rider	Income LinkSM Rider	Retirement Income MaxSM Rider	Retirement Income Choice 1.6SM Rider
	•   Additional Options: (1) Joint Life Option—You may elect to postpone termination of the rider until the later of the death of the annuitant or the death of the annuitant’s spouse. The annuitant’s spouse must be either a joint owner (along with the annuitant) or the sole primary beneficiary (without a joint owner). (2) The use of joint life option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.	•   Additional Options: (1) Joint Life Option—You may elect to postpone termination of the rider until the later of the death of the annuitant or the death of the annuitant’s spouse. The annuitant’s spouse must be either a joint owner (along with the annuitant) or the sole primary beneficiary (without a joint owner). (2) The use of joint life option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.	•   Additional Options: (1) Death Benefit Option— You may add an amount to the death benefit payable under the base policy. (2) Joint Life Option—You may elect to postpone termination of the rider until the later of the death of the annuitant or the death of the annuitant’s spouse. The annuitant’s spouse must be either a joint owner (along with the annuitant) or the sole primary beneficiary (without a joint owner). The use of joint life option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners. (3) Income EnhancementSM Option—If the rider has been in effect for at least 12 months, then you may elect to have your withdrawal percentage increase to 150% of the non-income enhanced withdrawal percentage if either the annuitant or the annuitant’s spouse, if the joint life option is elected, is confined in a hospital or nursing facility because of a medical necessity, and has been so confined for an “elimination period” (i.e., 180 days within the last 365 days). You cannot elect this option if the qualifying person(s) is/are already confined in a hospital or nursing facility when the rider is elected. In addition, the increase to the withdrawal percentage stops when the qualifying person(s) is/are no longer confined.

119

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Comparison Table — (Continued)

Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM  Rider	Income  LinkSM Rider	Retirement Income MaxSM Rider	Retirement Income Choice 1.6SM Rider
Availability: •    0 - 80 (unless state law requires a lower maximum issue age	Availability: •    At least 55 years old and not yet age 81 (unless state law requires a lower maximum issue age)	Availability: •    Younger than age 86 (unless state law requires a lower maximum issue age)	Availability: •    Younger than age 86 (unless state law requires a lower maximum issue age)
Charge: (1) 0.90% of total withdrawal base on each rider anniversary under the “principal back” withdrawal guarantee under the rider.	Charges: (1) 0.90% annually (single life and joint life) of withdrawal base deducted on each rider quarter.	Charges: (1) 1.25% annually (single life and joint life)of withdrawal base deducted on each rider quarter.	Charge: (1) for Base Benefit only—0.70% to 1.55% annually (single and joint life) of withdrawal base deducted on each rider quarter; (2) with Death Benefit Option— 0.40% (single life) or 0.35% (joint life) annually of withdrawal base deducted on each rider quarter, in addition to the base benefit fee; (3) with Income EnhancementSM Option—0.30% (single life) or 0.50% (joint life) annually of withdrawal base deducted on each rider quarter, in addition to the base benefit fee.
Investment Restrictions: •    Portfolio Allocation Method (“PAM”)—We monitor your policy value and, as we deem necessary to support the guarantees under the rider, may transfer amounts between investment options that we designate and the variable investment options that you select.	Investment Restrictions: •    Designated Investment option—You must allocate 100% of your policy value to one or more investment options that we designate.	Investment Restrictions: •    Designated Investment option—You must allocate 100% of your policy value to one or more investment options that we designate.	Investment Restrictions: •    You must allocate 100% of your policy value to one or more investment options that we designate.
Withdrawal Option: 5% For Life - Policyholder can withdraw up to 5% of the 5% For Life total withdrawal base each year starting with the rider anniversary following the annuitant’s 59th birthday until at least the later of the death of the annuitant or the time when the 5% For Life Minimum Remaining Withdrawal Amount has reached zero.	Withdrawal Percentages (Single Life): 7 yr option - 5% for 7 years and 4% thereafter 6 yr option - 6% for 6 years and 4% thereafter 5 yr option - 7% for 5 years and 4% thereafter 4 yr option - 8% for 4 years and 4% thereafter 3 yr option - 9% for 3 years and 4% thereafter 2 year option - 10% for 2 years and 4% thereafter	Withdrawal Percentages (Single Life): 0-58                            0.0% 59-64                          4.3% 65-79                          5.3% 80+                             6.3%	Withdrawal Percentages (Single Life): 0-58                            0.0% 59-64                          4.0% 65-79                          5.0% 80+                             6.0%

120

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Comparison Table — (Continued)

Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM  Rider	Income LinkSM Rider	Retirement Income MaxSM Rider	Retirement Income Choice 1.6SM Rider
Withdrawal Option: 7% Principal Back - Policyholder can withdraw up to 7% of the 7% Principal Back total withdrawal base per year until at least the time at which the 7% Principal Back minimum remaining withdrawal amount has reached zero.	Withdrawal Percentages (Joint Life): 7 yr option - 4.5% for 7 years and 3.5% thereafter 6 yr option - 5.5% for 6 years and 3.5% thereafter 5 yr option - 6.5% for 5 years and 3.5% thereafter 4 yr option - 7.5% for 4 years and 3.5% thereafter 3 yr option - 8.5% for 3 years and 3.5% thereafter 2 year option - 9.5% for 2 years and 3.5% thereafter	Withdrawal Percentages (Joint Life): 0-58                            0.0% 59-64                          3.8% 65-79                          4.8% 80+                             5.8%	Withdrawal Percentages (Joint Life): 0-58                            0.0% 59-64                          3.5% 65-79                          4.5% 80+                             5.5%

121

APPENDIX

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL

WITHDRAWALS

The following examples show the effect of withdrawals on the benefits under the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider.

GUARANTEED MINIMUM ACCUMULATION BENEFIT

Gross partial withdrawals will reduce the guaranteed future value by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the gross partial withdrawal amount; and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

A is the amount of gross partial withdrawal;

B is the policy value immediately prior to the gross partial withdrawal; and

C is the guaranteed future value immediately prior to the gross partial withdrawal.

The following demonstrates, on a purely hypothetical basis, the effects of partial withdrawals under the guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit.

EXAMPLE 1:

Assumptions:

Policy value prior to withdrawal (“PV”) = $90,000

Guaranteed future value prior to withdrawal (“GFV”) = $100,000

Gross withdrawal amount (“WD”) = $10,000

Step One. What is the pro rata value of the amount withdrawn?

1. Formula is (WD / PV) * GFV = pro rata amount

2. ($10,000 / $90,000) * $100,000 = $11,111.11

Step Two. Which is larger, the $10,000 withdrawal or the $11,111.11 pro rata amount?

$11,111.11 pro rata amount

Step Three. After the withdrawal is taken, what will be new guaranteed future value?

$100,000 - $11,111.11 = $88,888.89

Result. If no more withdrawals are taken, the guaranteed future value on the 10th rider anniversary is $88,888.89.

122

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS — (Continued)

EXAMPLE 2:

Assumptions:

PV = $120,000

GFV= $100,000

WD= $10,000

Step One. What is the pro rata value of the amount withdrawn?

1. Formula is (WD / PV) * GFV = pro rata amount

2. ($10,000 / $120,000) * $100,000 = $8,333.33

Step Two. Which is larger, the $10,000 withdrawal or the $8,333.33 pro rata amount?

$10,000 withdrawal

Step Three. After the withdrawal is taken, what will be new guaranteed future value?

$100,000 - $10,000 = $90,000

Result. If no more withdrawals are taken, the guaranteed future value on the 10th Rider Anniversary is $90,000.

GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT

Total Withdrawal Base. Gross partial withdrawals up to the maximum annual withdrawal amount will not reduce the total withdrawal base. Gross partial withdrawals in excess of the maximum annual withdrawal amount will reduce the total withdrawal base by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the excess gross partial withdrawal amount; and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

A is the excess gross partial withdrawal (the amount in excess of the guaranteed annual withdrawal amount remaining prior to the withdrawal);

B is the policy value after the maximum annual withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount; and

C is the total withdrawal base prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount.

Minimum Remaining Withdrawal Amount. Gross partial withdrawals up to the maximum annual withdrawal amount will reduce the minimum remaining withdrawal amount by the same amount (dollar-for-dollar). Gross partial withdrawals in excess of the maximum annual withdrawal amount will reduce the minimum remaining withdrawal amount by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the excess gross partial withdrawal amount; and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

123

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS — (Continued)

A is the excess gross partial withdrawal (the amount in excess of the guaranteed annual withdrawal amount remaining prior to the withdrawal);

B is the policy value after the maximum annual withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount; and

C is the minimum remaining withdrawal amount after the maximum annual withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount.

The following demonstrates, on a purely hypothetical basis, the effects of partial withdrawals under the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit.

When a withdrawal is taken, three parts of the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit can be affected:

1. Minimum remaining withdrawal amount (“MRWA”)

2. Total withdrawal base (“TWB”)

3. Maximum annual withdrawal amount (“MAWA”)

EXAMPLE 1 (7% “PRINCIPAL BACK”):

Assumptions:

TWB = $100,000

MRWA = $100,000

7% WD would be $7,000 (7% of the current $100,000 total withdrawal base)

WD = $7,000

Excess withdrawal (“EWD”) = None

PV = $100,000

You = Owner and Annuitant (Age 60)

Step One. Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the “principal back” maximum annual withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the “principal back” guarantee if no more than $7,000 is withdrawn.

Step Two. What is the minimum remaining withdrawal amount after the withdrawal has been taken?

1. Total to deduct from the minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $7,000 (there is no excess to deduct)

2. $100,000 - $7,000 = $93,000.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $7,000, the “principal back” total withdrawal base does not change and the “principal back” minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $93,000.00.

EXAMPLE 2 (7% “PRINCIPAL BACK”):

Assumptions:

TWB = $100,000

124

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS — (Continued)

MRWA = $100,000

7% WD would be $7,000 (7% of the current $100,000 total withdrawal base)

WD = $8,000

EWD = $1,000 ($8,000 - $7,000)

PV = $90,000

You = Owner and Annuitant (Age 60)

Step One. Is any portion of the total withdrawal greater than the maximum annual withdrawal amount?

Yes. $8,000 - $7,000 = $1,000 (the excess withdrawal amount)

Step Two. Calculate how much of the “principal back” minimum remaining withdrawal amount is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. Formula for pro rata amount is: (EWD / (PV - 7% WD)) * (MRWA - 7% WD)

2. ($1,000 / ($90,000 - $7,000)) * ($100,000 - $7,000) = $1,120.48

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $1,000 excess withdrawal amount or the $1,120.48 pro rata amount?

$1,120.48 pro rata amount

Step Four. What is the “principal back” minimum remaining withdrawal amount after the withdrawal has been taken?

1. Total to deduct from the minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $7,000 + $1,120.48 (pro rata excess) = $8,120.48

2. $100,000 - $8,120.48 = $91,879.52

Result. The “principal back” minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $91,879.52.

NOTE. For the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit, because there was an excess withdrawal amount, the total withdrawal base needs to be adjusted as well as a new lower maximum annual withdrawal amount. Had the withdrawal for this example not been more than $7,000, the “principal back” total withdrawal base would remain at $100,000 and the “principal back” maximum annual withdrawal amount would be $7,000. However, because an excess withdrawal has been taken, the total withdrawal base is also changed (this is the amount the 7% is based on).

New “principal back” total withdrawal base:

Step One. The total withdrawal base is only reduced by the excess withdrawal amount or the pro rata amount if greater.

Step Two. Calculate how much the total withdrawal base is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. The formula is (EWD / (PV - 7% WD)) * TWB before any adjustments

2. ($1,000 / ($90,000 - $7,000)) * $100,000 = $1,204.82

125

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS — (Continued)

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $1,000 excess withdrawal amount or the $1,204.82 pro rata amount?

$1,204.82 pro rata amount.

Step Four. What is the new total withdrawal base upon which the maximum annual withdrawal amount is based?

$100,000 - $1,204.82 = $98,795.18

Result. The new “principal back” total withdrawal base is $98,795.18

New “principal back” maximum annual withdrawal amount:

Because the “principal back” total withdrawal base was adjusted (due to the excess withdrawal) we have to calculate a new maximum annual withdrawal amount for the 7% “principal back” guarantee that will be available starting on the next rider anniversary. This calculation assumes no more activity prior to the next rider anniversary.

Step One. What is the new “principal back” maximum annual withdrawal amount?

$98,795.18 (the adjusted total withdrawal base) * 7% = $6,915.66

Result. Going forward, the maximum you can take out in a rider year is $6,915.66 without causing an excess withdrawal for the “principal back” guarantee and further reduction of the “principal back” total withdrawal base.

EXAMPLE 3 (5% “FOR LIFE”):

Assumptions:

TWB = $100,000

MRWA = $100,000

5% WD would be $5,000 (5% of the current $100,000 total withdrawal base)

WD = $5,000

Excess withdrawal (“EWD”) = None

PV = $100,000

You = Owner and Annuitant (Age 60)

Step One. Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the “for life” guarantee if no more than $5,000 is withdrawn.

Step Two. What is the minimum remaining withdrawal amount after the withdrawal has been taken?

1. Total to deduct from the minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $5,000 (there is no excess to deduct).

2. $100,000 - $5,000 = $95,000.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $5,000, the “for life” total withdrawal base does not change and the “for life” minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $95,000.00.

126

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS — (Continued)

EXAMPLE 4 (5% “FOR LIFE”):

Assumptions:

TWB = $100,000

MRWA = $100,000

5% WD would be $5,000 (5% of the current $100,000 total withdrawal base)

WD = $7,000

EWD = $2,000 ($7,000 - $5,000)

PV = $90,000

You = Owner and Annuitant (Age 60)

Step One. Is any portion of the total withdrawal greater than the maximum annual withdrawal amount?

Yes. $7,000 - $5,000 = $2,000 (the excess withdrawal amount)

Step Two. Calculate how much of the “for life” minimum remaining withdrawal amount is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. Formula for pro rata amount is: (EWD / (PV - 5% WD)) * (MRWA - 5% WD)

2. ($2,000 / ($90,000 - $5,000)) * ($100,000 - $5,000) = $2,235.29

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $2,000 excess withdrawal amount or the $2,235.29 pro rata amount?

$2,235.29 pro rata amount

Step Four. What is the “for life” minimum remaining withdrawal amount after the withdrawal has been taken?

1. Total to deduct from the minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $5,000 + $2,235.29 (pro rata excess) = $7,235.29

2. $100,000 - $7,235.29 = $92,764.71

Result. The “for life” minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $92,764.71.

NOTE. For the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit, because there was an excess withdrawal amount, the total withdrawal base needs to be adjusted as well as a new lower maximum annual withdrawal amount. Had the withdrawal for this example not been more than $5,000, the “for life” total withdrawal base would remain at $100,000 and the “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount would be $5,000. However, because an excess withdrawal has been taken, the total withdrawal base is also changed (this is the amount the 5% is based on).

New “for life” total withdrawal base:

Step One. The total withdrawal base is only reduced by the excess withdrawal amount or the pro rata amount if greater.

127

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS — (Continued)

Step Two. Calculate how much the total withdrawal base is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. The formula is (EWD / (PV - 5% WD)) * TWB before any adjustments

2. ($2,000 / ($90,000 - $5,000)) * $100,000 = $2,352.94

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $2,000 excess withdrawal amount or the $2,352.94 pro rata amount?

$2,352.94 pro rata amount.

Step Four. What is the new total withdrawal base upon which the maximum annual withdrawal amount is based?

$100,000 - $2,352.94 = $97,647.06

Result. The new “for life” total withdrawal base is $97,647.06

New “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount:

Because the “for life” total withdrawal base was adjusted (due to the excess withdrawal) we have to calculate a new maximum annual withdrawal amount for the 5% “for life” guarantee that will be available starting on the next rider anniversary. This calculation assumes no more activity prior to the next rider anniversary.

Step One. What is the new “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount?

$97,647.06 (the adjusted total withdrawal base) * 5% = $4,882.35

Result. Going forward, the maximum you can take out in a rider year is $4,882.35 without causing an excess withdrawal for the “for life” guarantee and further reduction of the “for life” total withdrawal base.

128

APPENDIX

PAM METHOD TRANSFERS

To make the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider available, we monitor your policy value and guarantees under the rider daily and periodically transfer amounts between your selected investment options and the PAM Subaccount. We determine the amount and timing of PAM Method transfers between the investment options and the PAM Subaccount according to a mathematical model.

The mathematical model is designed to calculate how much of your policy value should be allocated to the PAM Subaccount. Based on this calculation, transfers into or out of the PAM Subaccount will occur. The formula is:

Percent of Policy Value required in PAM Subaccount (or X) = e^{-Dividend*Time} *(1- NormDist(d1))

where:

e = Base of the Natural Logarithm

NormDist = Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution

d1 = [ln(G)+(R – F +.5*V ^ 2)* T]/[V * T^.5]

In order to calculate the percent of policy value required in the PAM Subaccount, we must first calculate d1:

d1 = [ln(G)+(R – F +.5*V ^ 2)* T]/[V * T^.5]

where:

ln = Natural Logarithm Function

G = Guarantee Ratio

R = Rate

F = Fees

V = Volatility

T = Time

After calculating d1, the percent of policy value required in the PAM Subaccount can be calculated. Once calculated, appropriate transfers into or out of the PAM Subaccount will occur.

Following is a brief discussion of the values used in the formula.

The POLICY VALUE includes the value in both the investment options and in the PAM Subaccount.

The GUARANTEE RATIO is the policy value divided by 7% “Principal Back” Minimum Remaining Withdrawal Amount.

The RATE is the interest rate used for the PAM Method. It is based on a long-term expectation based on historical interest rates and may vary over time.

129

PAM METHOD TRANSFERS — (Continued)

The FEES is an approximation of average policy fees and charges associated with policies that have elected the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider. This value may change over time.

The VOLATILITY represents the volatility of the returns of policy value for all in force policies and is based on the long-term expectation of the degree to which the policy values tend to fluctuate. This value may vary over time.

The TIME is an approximation based on actuarial calculations of historical average number of years (including any fraction) which we anticipate remain until any potential payments are made under the benefit. This value may vary over time.

The PERCENT OF POLICY VALUE TO BE ALLOCATED TO THE PAM SUBACCOUNT is computed for each policy. Ultimately the allocation for a policy takes into account the guarantees under the rider and the limit on allocations to the PAM Subaccount.

The CUMULATIVE STANDARD NORMAL DISTRIBUTION function assumes that random events are distributed according to the classic bell curve. For a given value it computes the percentage of such events which can be expected to be less than that value.

The NATURAL LOGARITHM function for a given value, computes the power to which e must be raised, in order to result in that value. Here, e is the base of the natural logarithms, or approximately 2.718282.

Example:

Day 1: Policy Value Declines by 10%

For purposes of this example we will assume that the policy value declines by 10% to $90,000 the day after the rider issue date from the initial premium amount of $100,000 producing a guarantee ratio of 90% ($90,000/$100,000). We will also assume:

Guarantee Ratio = 90%

Rate = 4.5%

Volatility = 10%

Fees = 3%

Time = 20

First we calculate d1.

d1=[In(G)+(R – F +.5*V ^ 2)* T]/[V * T^.5]

d1=[In(.90)+(.045 – .03 +.5*.10 ^ 2)* 20]/[.10 * 20^.5]

d1=.658832

Using the value we just calculated for d1 we can now calculate the percent of policy value required in the PAM Subaccount.

130

PAM METHOD TRANSFERS — (Continued)

Percent of Policy Value in PAM Subaccount (or X) = e^{-Dividend*Time} *(1-NormDist(d1))

X= (2.718282 ^ -.03 * 20) * (1 – NormDist(.658832))

X = 13.9948%

Therefore, 13.9948% of the policy value is transferred to the PAM Subaccount, resulting in a total transfer of $12,595.32.

Day 2: Policy Value Recovers to 105% of Initial Value after the 10% Decline

For purposes of this example we will assume that after the policy value declined to $90,000 it recovered the next day to $105,000 producing a guarantee ratio of 105% ($105,000/$100,000). We will also assume:

Guarantee Ratio = 105%

Rate = 4.5%

Volatility = 10%

Fees = 3%

Time = 20

First we calculate d1.

d1=[ln(G)+(R – F +.5*V ^ 2)* T]/[V * T^.5]

d1=[ln(1.05)+(.045 – .03 +.5*.10 ^ 2)* 20]/[.10 * 20^.5]

d1= 1.003524

Using the value we just calculated for d1 we can now calculate the percent of policy value required in the PAM Subaccount.

Percent of Policy Value in PAM Subaccount (or X) = e^{-Dividend*Time} *(1 - NormDist(d1))

X= (2.718282 ^ -.03 * 20) * (1 – NormDist(1.003524))

X = 8.6605%

While the mathematical model would suggest we transfer only a portion of the policy value in the PAM Subaccount into your investment options (leaving 8.6605% in the PAM Subaccount), all of the policy value in the PAM Subaccount will be transferred into your investment options. If the Guarantee Ratio equals or exceeds 100%, then your policy value is greater than or equal to the value of the guarantee and there is no current need for any policy value to be allocated to the PAM Subaccount.

131

APPENDIX

GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT

ADJUSTED PARTIAL SURRENDERS - INCOME LINK^SM RIDER

When a withdrawal is taken, three parts of the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit can be affected:

1. Withdrawal Base (“WB”)

2. Rider Withdrawal Amount (“RWA”)

3. Income Link^SM Rider Systematic Withdrawals (“ILSW”)

Withdrawal Base. Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals (and certain minimum required distributions) will not reduce the withdrawal base. Non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals (and minimum required distributions calculated other than as provided for in the rider or not taken via a systematic withdrawal program) will reduce the withdrawal base by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the amount of the non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal (or non-qualifying minimum required distribution); and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

A is the amount in 1 above;

B is the policy value prior to the withdrawal; and

C is the withdrawal base prior to the withdrawal.

The following demonstrates, on a purely hypothetical basis, the effects of partial withdrawals under this guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit.

Assumptions:

WB = $100,000

RWA = 6% withdrawal would be $6,000 (6% of the current $100,000 withdrawal base)

ILSW = $500 per month

Non-ILSW = $10,000 (taken after the eighteenth monthly Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal)

PV = $90,000

Assumes single life withdrawal option of 6% for 6 years and 4% thereafter has been elected. Non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal occurs during the second Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year (which means the withdrawal percentage is 6%).

Result. For the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit, because there was a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal, the withdrawal base needs to be adjusted and a new lower rider withdrawal amount and Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount calculated.

New withdrawal base:

Step One. The withdrawal base is reduced only by the amount of the amount of the non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal or the pro rata amount, if greater.

132

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — (Continued)

Step Two. Calculate how much the withdrawal base is affected by the non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal.

1. The formula is (Non-ILSW / (PV before withdrawal)) * WB before any adjustments

2. ($10,000 / ($90,000)) * $100,000 = $11,111

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $10,000 non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal or the $11,111 pro rata amount? $11,111 pro rata amount.

Step Four. What is the new withdrawal base upon which the rider withdrawal amount is based? $100,000 - $11,111 = $88,889

Result. The new withdrawal base is $88,889. Please note the percentage reduction in the withdrawal base is used in calculating the revised RWA and ILSW.

New rider withdrawal amount:

Because the withdrawal base was adjusted (due to the non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal) we have to calculate a new (remaining) rider withdrawal amount. This calculation assumes no more non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal activity prior to the next Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year.

Question: What is the new (remaining) rider withdrawal amount for the remainder of the Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year?

$3,000 (the remaining rider withdrawal amount) - ($3000*11.11%) = $2,667

Result. Going forward, the maximum you can take out in a benefit year without causing a negative withdrawal base adjustment and further reduction of the withdrawal base (assuming there are no future automatic step-ups) is $5,333.

New Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount:

Because the withdrawal base was adjusted (due to the non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal) we have to calculate a new Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount. This calculation assumes no more non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal activity prior to the next Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year.

Question: What is the new Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount?

$500 (the old Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount) - ($500*11.11%) = $444

Result. Going forward (until the seventh Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year), the Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount (assuming there are no future automatic step-ups) is $444

133

APPENDIX

GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT

ADJUSTED PARTIAL SURRENDERS - RETIREMENT INCOME MAX^SM RIDER

When a withdrawal is taken, the following parts of the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit can be affected:

1. Withdrawal Base (“WB”)

2. Rider Withdrawal Amount (“RWA”)

Withdrawal Base. Gross partial withdrawals in a rider year up to the rider withdrawal amount will not reduce the withdrawal base. Gross partial withdrawals in a rider year in excess of the rider withdrawal amount will reduce the withdrawal base by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the excess gross partial withdrawal amount; and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

A is the excess gross partial withdrawal (the amount in excess of the rider withdrawal amount remaining prior to the withdrawal);

B is the policy value after the rider withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount; and

C is the withdrawal base prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount.

The following demonstrates, on a purely hypothetical basis, the effects of partial withdrawals under this guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit.

Example 1 (Base):

Assumptions:

Withdrawal Base (“WB”) = $100,000

Rider Withdrawal Amount (“RWA”) = 5.3% withdrawal would be $5,300 (5.3% of the current $100,000 withdrawal base)

Gross partial withdrawal (“GPWD”) = $5,300

Excess withdrawal (“EWD”) = None

Policy Value (“PV”) = $100,000 (PV after GPWD = $94,700)

You = owner and annuitant, age 71 at time withdrawals begin, which means Withdrawal Percentage is 5.3%.

Question: Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the guarantee since no more than $5,300 is withdrawn.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $5,300, the withdrawal base does not change.

134

Example 2 (Excess Withdrawal):

Assumptions:

WB = $100,000

RWA = 5.3% withdrawal would be $5,300 (5.3% of the current $100,000 withdrawal base)

GPWD = $7,000

EWD = $1,700 ($7,000 - $5,300)

PV = $90,000

You = owner and annuitant, age 71 at time withdrawals begin, which means Withdrawal Percentage is 5.3%.

Result. For the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit, because there was an excess withdrawal amount, the withdrawal base needs to be adjusted and a new lower rider withdrawal amount calculated. Had the withdrawal for this example not been more than $5,300, the withdrawal base would remain at $100,000 and the rider withdrawal amount would be $5,300 starting on the next rider anniversary. However, because an excess withdrawal has been taken, the withdrawal base is also reduced (this is the amount the 5.3% is based on).

New withdrawal base:

Step One. The withdrawal base is reduced only by the amount of the excess withdrawal or the pro rata amount, if greater.

Step Two. Calculate how much the withdrawal base is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. The formula is (EWD / (PV - 5.3% withdrawal)) * WB before any adjustments

2. ($1,700 / ($90,000 - $5,300)) * $100,000 = $2,007.08

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $1,700 excess withdrawal or the $2,007.08 pro rata amount? $2,007.08 pro rata amount.

Step Four. What is the new withdrawal base upon which the rider withdrawal amount is based? $100,000 - $2,007.08 = $97,992.92

Result. The new withdrawal base is $97,992.92

New rider withdrawal amount:

Because the withdrawal base was adjusted (due to the excess withdrawal) we have to calculate a new rider withdrawal amount for the 5.3% guarantee that will be available starting on the next rider anniversary. This calculation assumes no more activity prior to the next rider anniversary.

Question: What is the new rider withdrawal amount?

$97,992.92 (the adjusted withdrawal base) * 5.3% = $5,193.62

Result. Going forward, the maximum you can take out in a year without causing an excess withdrawal and further reduction of the withdrawal base (assuming there are no future automatic step-ups) is $5,193.62.

135

Example 3 (Base demonstrating growth):

Assumptions:

WB = $100,000

Automatic step-up never occurs and no withdrawals are taken.

WB in 8 years (assuming an annual growth rate percentage of 5%) = $100,000 * (1 + .05) ^8= $147,745.54

RWA = 5.3% withdrawal beginning 8 years from the rider date would be $7,830.51 (5.3% of the then-current $147,745.54 withdrawal base)

GPWD = $7,830.51

EWD = None

PV = $90,000 in 8 years

You = owner and annuitant, age 63 on rider issue; age 71 at time withdrawals begin, which means Withdrawal Percentage is 5.3%.

Question: Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the guarantee if no more than $7,830.51 is withdrawn in a rider year.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $7,830.51, the withdrawal base does not change.

Example 4 (Minimum Required Distribution “MRD”):

WB= $100,000

Automatic Step-up and growth never occur.

RWA for rider year beginning July 1, 2013 = 5.3% withdrawal would be $5,300 (5.3% of the current $100,000 withdrawal base).

MRD for 2013 = $6,000 (calculated as set forth in the rider)

MRD for 2014 = $6,500 (calculated as set forth in the rider)

GPWD on February 1, 2014 = $6,500

EWD = $500

Question: Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount or the minimum required withdrawal calculated pursuant to the terms of the rider?

Yes. Because more than $6,000 (the greater of the RWA ($5,500) or MRD for the tax year on that rider anniversary ($6,000) was withdrawn, there is an excess withdrawal of $500 (6,500 - 6,000 = 500). Please note, even though the withdrawal occurred in 2014, the MRD for 2014 does not become part of the RWA calculation until July 1, 2014 (the rider anniversary during that tax year).

Result: Because there was an excess withdrawal amount, the withdrawal base needs to be adjusted and a new lower withdrawal amount calculated. See Example 2 (Excess Withdrawal) for an example of how the new withdrawal base and new rider withdrawal amount are calculated.

136

APPENDIX

HYPOTHETICAL EXAMPLE OF THE WITHDRAWAL BASE CALCULATION -

RETIREMENT INCOME MAX^SM RIDER

The following table demonstrates, on a purely hypothetical basis, the withdrawal base calculation for the Retirement Income Max^SM rider using an initial premium payment of $100,000 for a Single Life Option rider at an issue age of 80. All values shown are post transaction values.

Rider Year	Hypothetical Policy Value	Subsequent Premium Payment	Withdrawal	Excess WB Adjustment	Growth Amount	High MonthiversarySM Value	Withdrawal Base	Rider Withdrawal Amount
	$100,000	$	$	$	$	$100,000	$100,000	$6,300
1	$102,000	$	$	$	$	$102,000	$100,000	$6,300
1	$105,060	$	$	$	$	$105,060	$100,000	$6,300
1	$107,161	$	$	$	$	$107,161	$100,000	$6,300
1	$110,376	$	$	$	$	$110,376	$100,000	$6,300
1	$112,584	$	$	$	$	$112,584	$100,000	$6,300
1	$115,961	$	$	$	$	$115,961	$100,000	$6,300
1	$118,280	$	$	$	$	$118,280	$100,000	$6,300
1	$121,829	$	$	$	$	$121,829	$100,000	$6,300
1	$124,265	$	$	$	$	$124,265	$100,000	$6,300
1	$120,537	$	$	$	$	$124,265	$100,000	$6,300
1	$115,716	$	$	$	$	$124,265	$100,000	$6,300
1	$109,930	$	$	$	$105,000	$124,265	$124,2651	$7,829
2	$112,129	$	$	$	$	$112,129	$124,265	$7,829
2	$115,492	$	$	$	$	$115,492	$124,265	$7,829
2	$ 117,802	$	$	$	$	$ 117,802	$ 124,265	$ 7,829
2	$121,336	$	$	$	$	$121,336	$124,265	$7,829
2	$124,976	$	$	$	$	$124,976	$124,265	$7,829
2	$177,476	$50,000	$	$	$	$177,476	$174,265	$10,979
2	$175,701	$	$	$	$	$177,476	$174,265	$10,979
2	$172,187	$	$	$	$	$177,476	$174,265	$10,979
2	$167,022	$	$	$	$	$177,476	$174,265	$10,979
2	$163,681	$	$	$	$	$177,476	$174,265	$10,979
2	$166,955	$	$	$	$	$177,476	$174,265	$10,979
2	$170,294	$	$	$	$182,979	$177,476	$182,9792	$11,528
3	$166,888	$	$	$	$	$166,888	$182,979	$11,528
3	$171,895	$	$	$	$	$171,895	$182,979	$11,528
3	$173,614	$	$	$	$	$173,614	$182,979	$11,528
3	$178,822	$	$	$	$	$178,822	$182,979	$11,528
3	$175,246	$	$	$	$	$178,822	$182,979	$11,528
3	$151,741	$	$20,000	$9,676	$	$	$173,303	$
3	$154,775	$	$	$	$	$	$173,303	$

137

Rider Year	Hypothetical Policy Value	Subsequent Premium Payment	Withdrawal	Excess WB Adjustment	Growth Amount	High MonthiversarySM Value	Withdrawal Base	Rider Withdrawal Amount
3	$159,419	$	$	$	$	$	$173,303	$
3	$161,013	$	$	$	$	$	$173,303	$
3	$165,843	$	$	$	$	$	$173,303	$
3	$174,135	$	$	$	$	$	$173,303	$
3	$181,101	$	$	$	$	$	$181,1011	$11,409

⁽¹⁾ Automatic Step Up Applied

⁽²⁾ Growth Applied

138

APPENDIX

GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT

ADJUSTED PARTIAL SURRENDERS - RETIREMENT INCOME CHOICE^SM 1.6

RIDER

When a withdrawal is taken, three parts of the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit can be affected:

1. Withdrawal Base (“WB”)(also referred to as Total Withdrawal Base (“TWB”) for some riders)

2. Rider Withdrawal Amount (“RWA”)(also referred to as Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (“MAWA”) for some riders)

3. Rider Death Benefit (“RDB”)(also referred to as Minimum Remaining Withdrawal Amount (“MRWA”) for some rider (if applicable))

Withdrawal Base. Gross partial withdrawals in a rider year up to the rider withdrawal amount will not reduce the withdrawal base. Gross partial withdrawals in a rider year in excess of the rider withdrawal amount will reduce the withdrawal base by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the excess gross partial withdrawal amount; and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

A is the excess gross partial withdrawal (the amount in excess of the rider withdrawal amount remaining prior to the withdrawal);

B is the policy value after the rider withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount; and

C is the withdrawal base prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount.

Rider Death Benefit. Gross partial withdrawals in a rider year up to the rider withdrawal amount will reduce the rider death benefit by the amount withdrawn (dollar-for-dollar). Gross partial withdrawals in a rider year in excess of the rider withdrawal amount will reduce the rider death benefit by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the excess gross partial withdrawal amount; and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

A is the excess gross partial withdrawal (the amount in excess of the rider withdrawal amount remaining prior to the withdrawal);

B is the policy value after the rider withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount; and

C is the rider death benefit after the rider withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount.

The following demonstrates, on a purely hypothetical basis, the effects of partial withdrawals under a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit. The withdrawal percentages shown may not be available on all riders. Certain features (growth and rider death benefits) may not be available on all riders. For information regarding a specific rider, please refer to that rider section of this prospectus.

139

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — (Continued)

EXAMPLE 1 (BASE):

Assumptions:

WB = $100,000

Withdrawal Percentage = 5%

RWA = 5% withdrawal would be $5,000 (5% of the current $100,000 withdrawal base)

Gross partial withdrawal (“GPWD”) = $5,000

Excess withdrawal (“EWD”) = None

Policy Value (“PV”) = $100,000

Question: Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the guarantee since no more than $5,000 is withdrawn.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $5,000, the withdrawal base does not change.

EXAMPLE 2 (EXCESS WITHDRAWAL):

Assumptions:

WB = $100,000

Withdrawal Percentage = 5%

RWA = 5% withdrawal would be $5,000 (5% of the current $100,000 withdrawal base)

GPWD = $7,000

EWD = $2,000 ($7,000 - $5,000)

PV = $90,000

NOTE. For the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit, because there was an excess withdrawal amount, the withdrawal base needs to be adjusted and a new lower rider withdrawal amount calculated. Had the withdrawal for this example not been more than $5,000, the withdrawal base would remain at $100,000 and the rider withdrawal amount would be $5,000. However, because an excess withdrawal has been taken, the withdrawal base is also reduced (this is the amount the 5% is based on).

New withdrawal base:

Step One. The withdrawal base is reduced only by the amount of the excess withdrawal or the pro rata amount, if greater.

Step Two. Calculate how much the withdrawal base is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. The formula is (EWD / (PV - 5% withdrawal)) * WB before any adjustments

2. ($2,000 / ($90,000 - $5,000)) * $100,000 = $2,352.94

140

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — (Continued)

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $2,000 excess withdrawal or the $2,352.94 pro rata amount? $2,352.94 pro rata amount.

Step Four. What is the new withdrawal base upon which the rider withdrawal amount is based? $100,000 - $2,352.94 = $97,647.06

Result. The new withdrawal base is $97,647.06

New rider withdrawal amount:

Because the withdrawal base was adjusted (due to the excess withdrawal) we have to calculate a new rider withdrawal amount for the 5% guarantee that will be available starting on the next calendar anniversary. This calculation assumes no more activity prior to the next calendar anniversary.

Question: What is the new rider withdrawal amount?

$97,647 (the adjusted withdrawal base) * 5% = $4,882.35

Result. Going forward, the maximum you can take out in a year is $4,882.35 without causing excess withdrawal for the guarantee and further reduction of the withdrawal base (assuming there are no future automatic step-ups).

EXAMPLE 3 (BASE DEMONSTRATING GROWTH):

Assumptions:

WB = $100,000

Withdrawal Percentage = 5%

WB in 10 years (assuming an annual growth rate percentage of 5.0%) = $100,000 * (1 + .05) ^ 10 = $162,889 RWA = 5% withdrawal beginning 10 years from the rider date would be $8,144 (5% of the then-current $162,889 withdrawal base)

Please note that withdrawals under this rider can begin prior to the 10th rider anniversary, but the WB growth will not occur during the rider years when a withdrawal is taken and the growth stops on the 10th rider anniversary.

GPWD = $8,144

EWD = None

PV = $90,000 in 10 years

Question: Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the guarantee if no more than $8,144 is withdrawn.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $8,144, the withdrawal base does not change.

141

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — (Continued)

EXAMPLE 4 (BASE DEMONSTRATING WB GROWTH WITH ADDITIONAL DEATH PAYMENT OPTION):

Assumptions:

Withdrawal Percentage = 5%.

WB at rider issue = $100,000

WB in 10 years (assuming an annual growth rate percentage of 5.0%) = $100,000 * (1 + .05) ^ 10 = $162,889

RDB (optional additional death benefit for additional cost) = $100,000

RWA = 5% withdrawal beginning 10 years from the rider date would be $8,144 (5% of the then-current $162,889 withdrawal base)

Please note that withdrawals under this rider can begin prior to the 10th rider anniversary, but the WB growth will not occur during the rider years when a withdrawal is taken, and the annual growth credit stops on the 10th rider anniversary.

GPWD = $8,144

EWD = None

PV = $90,000 in 10 years

Step One. Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the guarantee if no more than $8,144 is withdrawn.

Step Two. What is the rider death benefit after the withdrawal has been taken?

1. Total to deduct from the rider death benefit is $8,144 (there is no excess to deduct)

2. $100,000 - $8,144 = $91,856.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $8,144, the total withdrawal base does not change and the rider death benefit reduces to $91,856.

EXAMPLE 5 (BASE WITH WB GROWTH WITH ADDITIONAL DEATH PAYMENT OPTION ILLUSTRATING EXCESS WITHDRAWAL):

Assumptions:

Withdrawal Percentage = 5%.

WB at rider issue = $100,000

Automatic step-up never occurs and no withdrawals are taken in the first 10 rider years.

WB in 10 years (assuming an annual growth rate percentage of 5.0%) = $100,000 * (1 + .05) ^ 10 = $162,889

RDB (optional additional death benefit for additional cost) = $100,000

RWA = 5% withdrawal beginning 10 years from the rider date would be $8,144 (5% of the then-current $162,889 withdrawal base)

Please note that withdrawals under this rider can begin prior to the 10th rider anniversary, but the WB growth will not occur during the rider years when a withdrawal is taken, and the annual growth credit stops on the 10th rider anniversary.

142

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — (Continued)

GPWD = $10,000

EWD = $1,856 ($10,000 - $8,144)

PV = $90,000 in 10 years

Step One. Is any portion of the total withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount?

Yes. $10,000 - $8,144 = $1,856 (the excess withdrawal amount)

Step Two. Calculate how much of the rider death benefit is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. Formula for pro rata amount is: (EWD / (PV - 5% withdrawal)) * (RDB - 5% withdrawal)

2. ($1,856 / ($90,000 - $8,144)) * ($100,000 - $8,144) = $2,082.74

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $1,856 excess withdrawal amount or the $2,082.74 pro rata amount?

$2,082.74 pro rata amount

Step Four. What is the rider death benefit after the withdrawal has been taken?

1. Total to deduct from the rider death benefit is $8,144 (RWA) + $2,082.74 (pro rata excess) = $10,226.74

2. $100,000 - $10,226.74= $89,773.26

Result. The rider benefit is $89,773.26.

NOTE. Because there was an excess withdrawal amount in this example, the withdrawal base needs to be adjusted and a new lower rider withdrawal amount calculated. Had the withdrawal for this example not been more than $8,144, the withdrawal base would remain at $162,889 and the rider withdrawal amount would be $8,144. However, because an excess withdrawal has been taken, the withdrawal base is also reduced (this is the amount the 5% is based on).

143

The information in this Prospectus is not complete and may be changed. This Prospectus is contained in a registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and we may not sell these securities until that registration statement is effective. This Prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any state where the offer or sale is not permitted.

PROSPECTUS (Subject to Completion             , 2013)

MEMBERS^® VARIABLE ANNUITY SERIES

Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company
Separate Account B (EST. 1/19/1990)	Separate Account BNY (EST. 9/27/1994)
4333 Edgewood Road NE	4333 Edgewood Road NE
Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001	Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001
(800)525-6205	(800)525-6205
www.transamericaannuities.com	www.transamericaannuities.com

This prospectus describes information you should know before you purchase a MEMBERS^® Variable Annuity Series variable annuity. The prospectus describes a contract between each owner and joint owner (“you”) and Transamerica Life Insurance Company or Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company (“us,” “we,” “our” or “Company”). This is an individual, deferred, flexible premium variable annuity. This variable annuity allows you to allocate your premium payments among the fixed account (if available) and the following portfolio companies:

AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. • American Funds Insurance Series • Fidelity^® Variable Insurance Products Fund • GE Investments Funds, Inc. • Transamerica Series Trust

This prospectus also refers to the following share classes: B-Share, C-Share, L-Share and X-Share. A share class will be selected on your application and identified in your policy.

This prospectus and the underlying fund prospectuses give you important information about the policies and the underlying fund portfolios. Please read them carefully before you invest and keep them for future reference. You can also contact us to get a Statement of Additional Information (SAI) free of charge. The SAI contains more information about this policy. A registration statement, including the SAI, has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and the SAI is incorporated herein by reference. The prospectus and SAI can also be obtained from the SEC’s website (www.sec.gov). The table of contents of the SAI is included at the end of this prospectus. The Securities and Exchange Commission has not approved or disapproved these securities, or passed upon the adequacy of this prospectus. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

If you elect the X-Share, we will add a credit to your policy value for each premium payment that you make. Generally, an annuity with a premium enhancement will have higher overall expenses than a similar annuity without a premium enhancement; the amount credited under the premium enhancement may be more than offset by the additional fees and charges associated with the premium enhancement. You should always consider the expenses along with the features and enhancements to be sure that any annuity meets your financial needs and goals.

This variable annuity may not be suitable for everyone. This variable annuity may not be appropriate for people who do not have a long investment time horizon and is not appropriate for people who intend to engage in market timing. You will get no additional tax advantage from this variable annuity if you are investing in a variable annuity through a tax-advantaged retirement plan (such as a 401(k) plan or Individual Retirement Account (“IRA”)). This prospectus is not intended to provide tax, accounting or legal advice.

We are not an investment adviser nor are we registered as such with the SEC or any state securities regulatory authority. We are not acting in any fiduciary capacity with respect to your investment nor are we acting for any tax-advantaged retirement plan. This information does not constitute personalized investment advice or financial planning advice.

Prospectus Date: May 1, 2013

Statement of Additional Information Date: May 1, 2013

2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION	5
FEE TABLE AND EXPENSE EXAMPLES	6
THE ANNUITY	11
PURCHASE	11
Policy Issue Requirements	11
Premium Payments	12
Policy Value	13
INVESTMENT OPTIONS	14
Selection of Underlying Portfolios	15
Addition, Deletion, or Substitution of Investments	16
The Fixed Account	17
Transfers	18
Market Timing and Disruptive Trading	19
EXPENSES	22
Surrender Charges	22
Excess Interest Adjustment	23
Mortality and Expense Risk Fees	24
Premium Taxes	24
Federal, State and Local Taxes	24
Special Service Fees	24
Transfer Fee	24
Administrative Charges	24
Fund Facilitation Fee	25
Optional Benefits	25
Portfolio Fees and Expenses	25
Reduced Fees and Charges	25
Revenue We Receive	25
ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY	28
Surrenders	28
Delay of Payment and Transfers	28
Excess Interest Adjustment	29
Signature Guarantee	30
ANNUITY PAYMENTS (THE INCOME PHASE)	31
Annuity Payment Options	31
DEATH BENEFIT	33
When We Pay A Death Benefit	33
When We Do Not Pay A Death Benefit	34
Deaths After the Annuity Commencement Date	34

Succession of Ownership	34
Amount of Death Benefit	35
Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit	35
Adjusted Partial Surrender	37
TAX INFORMATION	37
ADDITIONAL FEATURES	49
Systematic Payout Option	49
Liquidity Rider	49
Additional Death Distribution	50
Additional Death Distribution+	51
Nursing Care and Terminal Condition Withdrawal Option	53
Unemployment Waiver	53
Telephone Transactions	53
Dollar Cost Averaging Program	54
Asset Rebalancing	55
Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefits	56
Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM Rider	56
Income LinkSM Rider	65
Retirement Income MaxSM Rider	72
Retirement Income ChoiceSM 1.6 Rider	80
OTHER INFORMATION	91
State Variations	91
Ownership	92
Beneficiary	92
Right to Cancel Period	93
Assignment	93
Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order	93
Regulatory Modifications to Policy	94
Certain Offers	94
Mixed and Shared Funding	94
Exchanges and Reinstatements	94
Voting Rights	95
Legal Proceedings	95
Information About Us	95
Financial Condition	96
The Separate Account	97
The Funds	97
Distribution of the Policies	97

3

TABLE OF CONTENTS continued

TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION	100
GLOSSARY OF TERMS	102
APPENDIX
PORTFOLIOS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SUBACCOUNTS	104
APPENDIX
EXCESS INTEREST ADJUSTMENT EXAMPLES	107
APPENDIX
DEATH BENEFIT	111
APPENDIX
ADDITIONAL DEATH DISTRIBUTION RIDER	114
APPENDIX
ADDITIONAL DEATH DISTRIBUTION+ RIDER	115
APPENDIX
GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT COMPARISON TABLE	116
APPENDIX
GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTIONSM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS	121

APPENDIX
PAM METHOD TRANSFERS	128
APPENDIX
GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT ADJUSTED PARTIAL SURRENDERS - INCOME LINKSM RIDER	131
APPENDIX
GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT ADJUSTED PARTIAL SURRENDERS - RETIREMENT INCOME MAXSM RIDER	133
APPENDIX
HYPOTHETICAL EXAMPLE OF THE WITHDRAWAL BASE CALCULATION -RETIREMENT INCOME MAXSM RIDER	136
APPENDIX
GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT ADJUSTED PARTIAL SURRENDERS - RETIREMENT INCOME CHOICESM 1.6 RIDER	138

4

INTRODUCTION

How to buy this variable annuity

Ö CHOOSE A SHARE CLASS

	Qualified Policy* Minimum Initial Deposit	Non-Qualified Policy Minimum Initial Deposit	Surrender Charge Period	Mortality & Expense Risk and Administrative Charges
B-Share	$1,000	$5,000	7 years	1.15%
C-Share	$1,000	$5,000	none	1.55%
L-Share	$1,000	$5,000	4 years	1.50%
X-Share	$1,000	$5,000	9 years	1.50%

* We currently issue new policies to the following qualified plans: Traditional IRAs, Roth IRAs, SEP-IRAs, 457(f) plans (in certain circumstances) and Section 401(a) plans (including profit sharing plans, defined benefit pension plans, defined contribution pension plans, 401(k) plans, combination defined benefit/contribution plans).

This table does not show underlying fund portfolio expenses, annual service charge and optional rider fees. Each share class has its own minimum policy value requirements. Not all share classes may be available through your Financial Intermediary.

Ö CHOOSE INVESTMENT OPTIONS

• Subaccounts - Funds representing a range of investment strategies, objectives and asset classes

• Fixed Account - A fixed interest account (if available).

Subject to limitations, you may move your investment among each of these investment options.

Ö CHOOSE OPTIONAL GUARANTEED BENEFITS (IF DESIRED)

Lifetime Withdrawal Benefits	Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM *
	Income LinkSM *
	Retirement Income MaxSM *
	Retirement Income ChoiceSM 1.6*
Death Benefits	Return of Premium*
	Annual Step-Up*
	Additional Death Distribution*
	Additional Death Distribution +*
L-Share Rider (only with B-Share Class)	Liquidity Rider

* Investment restrictions apply

Optional benefits may not be available through your Financial intermediary or in all states.

Ö COMPLETE OUR APPLICATION OR ORDER FORM

Ö PAY THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM INITIAL DEPOSIT

5

FEE TABLE AND EXPENSE EXAMPLES

The following describes the fees and expenses that you will pay when buying, owning, and surrendering the policy. Please be certain to review the notes following the fee table and expense examples for further information about the fees and charges presented. The order of the notes follows the order in which the fees and charges under the policy are presented in the fee tables and the expense examples.

The fee table applies only to the accumulation phase and reflects the maximum charges unless otherwise noted. During the income phase the fees may be different than those described in the Fee Table. See EXPENSES.

The first section describes the fees and expenses that you will pay at the time that you buy the policy, surrender the policy, or transfer cash value between investment options. State premium taxes may also be deducted. Excess interest adjustments may be made to amounts surrendered or applied to annuity payment options from cash value from the fixed account. (All fees are maximum for purchases made while this prospectus is effective unless otherwise noted.)

Policy Owner Transaction Expenses:

	B-Share	C-Share	L-Share	X-Share
Front-End Sales Load On Purchase Payments	0%	0%	0%	0%
Contingent Deferred Surrender Charges (as a percentage of premium surrendered)
Number of Years Since Premium Payment Date
1	8%	0%	8%	9%
2	8%	0%	8%	8%
3	7%	0%	7%	7%
4	6%	0%	6%	6%
5	5%	0%	0%	5%
6	4%	0%	0%	4%
7	3%	0%	0%	3%
8	0%	0%	0%	2%
9	0%	0%	0%	1%
10+	0%	0%	0%	0%
Transfer Fee	$0-$10	$0-$10	$0-$10	$0-$10
Special Service Fee	$0-$25	$0-$25	$0-$25	$0-$25

The next section describes the fees and expenses that you will pay periodically during the time that you own the policy, not including portfolio fees and expenses. (All fees are maximum for purchases made while this prospectus is effective unless otherwise noted.)

6

Classes	B-Share	C-Share	L-Share	X-Share
Annual Service Charge	$0 - $50	$0 - $50	$0 - 50	$0 - $50
Separate Account Annual Expenses (as a percentage, annually, of average separate account value):
Mortality and Expense Risk Fee	1.00%	1.40%	1.35%	1.35%
Administrative Charge	0.15%	0.15%	0.15%	0.15%
Total Base Separate Account Annual Expenses	1.15%	1.55%	1.50%	1.50%
Optional Separate Account Expenses:
Return of Premium Death Benefit	0.15%	0.15%	0.15%	0.15%
Annual Step-Up Death Benefit	0.35%	0.35%	0.35%	0.35%
Fund Facilitation Fee	0.30%	0.30%	0.30%	0.30%
Liquidity Rider (only available with B-Share)	0.50%	——	——	——
Optional Rider Charges:
Additional Death Distribution (annual charge based on policy value)	0.25%	0.25%	0.25%	0.25%
Additional Death Distribution + (annual charge based on policy value)	0.55%	0.55%	0.55%	0.55%

Optional Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Rider Charges:	Maximum	Current
Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM (aka Living Benefits Rider) (annual charge - % of Total Withdrawal Base)	0.90%	0.90%
Income LinkSM (annual charge-% of Withdrawal Base)	1.65%	0.90%
Retirement Income MaxSM (annual charge - % of Withdrawal Base)	2.00%	1.25%
Retirement Income ChoiceSM 1.6 (annual charge - % of Withdrawal Base)
Base Benefit Designated Allocation Group A	2.30%	1.55%
Base Benefit Designated Allocation Group B	1.85%	1.10%
Base Benefit Designated Allocation Group C	1.45%	0.70%
Additional Benefits available with Retirement Income ChoiceSM 1.6 rider:
Death Benefit - (Single Life Option)	0.40%	0.40%
Death Benefit - (Joint Life Option)	0.35%	0.35%
Income EnhancementSM - (Single Life Option - Not available in NY)	0.30%	0.30%
Income EnhancementSM - (Joint Life Option - Not available in NY)	0.50%	0.50%

The next section shows the lowest and highest total operating expenses charged by the underlying fund portfolios for the year ended December 31, 2012 (before any fee waiver or expense reimbursements). Expenses may be higher or lower in future years. More detail concerning each portfolio’s fees and expenses is contained in the prospectus for each portfolio.

Total Portfolio Annual Operating Expenses (Expenses that are deducted from portfolio assets, including management fees, distribution and/or service 12b-1 fees, and other expenses):

7

Lowest Gross	0.53	%
Highest Gross	2.12	%

The following Example is intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the policy with the cost of investing in other variable annuity policies. These costs include policy owner transaction expenses, policy fees, separate account annual expenses, and portfolio fees and expenses.

The Example assumes that you invest $10,000 in the policy for the time periods indicated. The Example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year, the highest fees and expenses of any of the portfolios for the year ended December 31, 2012, and the base policy with the combination of available optional features or riders with the highest fees and expenses, including the Highest Fund Facilitation Fee, Annual Step-Up Death Benefit, Additional Death Distribution+ Rider, and Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider - Joint Life with additional Death Benefit and Income Enhancement^SM options. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs would be:

Expense Examples:

If the policy is surrendered at the end of the applicable time period:

	B-Share	B-Share	C-Share	L-Share	X-Share
		w/Liquidity
1 Year	$1427	$1476	$  746	$1462	$1552
3 Years	$2762	$2898	$2241	$2857	$2857

If the policy is annuitized at the end of the applicable time period or if you do not surrender your policy:

	B-Share	B-Share	C-Share	L-Share	X-Share
		w/Liquidity
1 Year	$  707	$  756	$  746	$  742	$  742
3 Years	$2132	$2268	$2241	$2227	$2227

Please remember that the Example is an illustration and does not represent past or future expenses. Your actual expenses may be lower or higher than those reflected in the Example. Similarly, your rate of return may be more or less than the 5% assumed in the Example.

For information concerning compensation paid for the sale of the policies, see OTHER INFORMATION -Distributor of the Policies.

NOTES TO FEE TABLE AND EXPENSE EXAMPLES

Annual Service Charge:

The current annual service charge is $35. If your policy value or the sum of all premium payments less all partial surrenders is at least $50,000 the entire annual service charge is waived.

8

Policy Owner Transaction Expenses:

Maximum Surrender Charge: The surrender charge, if any is imposed, applies to each premium, regardless of how policy value is allocated among the investment options. The surrender charge decreases based on the number of years since the premium payment was made.

Transfer Fee: The transfer fee, if any is imposed, applies to each policy, regardless of how policy value is allocated among the investment options. There is no fee for the first 12 transfers per policy year. For additional transfers, we may charge a fee of $10 per transfer.

Special Service Fees: We may deduct a charge for special services, such as overnight delivery.

Separate Account Annual Expenses:

Mortality and Expense Risk Fee: The mortality and expense risk fee shown is for the accumulation phase with the base death benefit. During the income phase, the mortality and expense risk fee is at an annual rate of 1.25%.

Optional Separate Account Expenses: Any optional separate account expense is in addition to the mortality and expense risk and administrative fees.

Fund Facilitation Fee: This daily fee is applied only to policy value in the subaccounts invested in:

Fund	Fee %
American Funds - Asset Allocation Fund - Class 2; American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2;	0.30%
American Funds - Growth Fund - Class 2; American Funds Growth-Income Fund - Class 2;
American Funds International Fund - Class 2
AllianceBernstein Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio - Class B; GE Investments Total Return	0.20%
Fund - Class 2
Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund - Class 4	0.15%
TA BlackRock Global Allocation - Service Class	0.10%

See EXPENSES for additional information.

Total Separate Account Annual Expenses with Highest Optional Separate Account Expenses: This reflects the base separate account expenses, the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit fee, plus the Fund Facilitation fee, but does not include any annual optional rider fees. The death benefits are mutually exclusive.

Optional Rider Fees:

In some cases, riders to the policy are available that provide optional benefits. There are additional fees (each year) for those riders.

Income Link^SM Rider and Retirement Income Max^SM Rider Fees:

Maximum Total Fees with Highest Combination of Benefits: This fee total reflects the maximum fee increase resulting from an automatic step-up of the Withdrawal Base while the rider is in effect.

9

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider:

Maximum Total Fees with Highest Combination of Benefits: These fee totals reflect the maximum fee increase resulting from an automatic step-up of the Withdrawal Base while the rider is in effect.

Maximum Total Fees (Joint Life) with Highest Combination of Benefits: This reflects the Base Benefit Designated Allocation Group A (Maximum), the Death Benefit (Joint Life Option), plus the Income Enhancement^SM Benefit (Joint Life Option).

Current Total Fees (Joint Life) with Highest Combination of Benefits: This reflects the Base Benefit Designated Allocation Group A (Current), the Death Benefit (Joint Life Option), plus the Income Enhancement^SM Benefit (Joint Life Option).

Total Portfolio Annual Operating Expenses:

The fee table information relating to the underlying fund portfolios was provided to us by the underlying fund portfolios, their investment advisers or managers, and we have not and cannot independently verify the accuracy or completeness of such information. Actual future expenses of the portfolios may be greater or less than those shown in the Table. “Gross” expense figures do not reflect any fee waivers or expense reimbursements. Actual expenses may have been lower than those shown in the Table.

Expense Examples:

The Example does not reflect premium tax charges or transfer fees. Different fees and expenses not reflected in the Example may be assessed during the income phase of the policy.

10

THE ANNUITY

This prospectus describes information you should know before you purchase the Transamerica MEMBERS^® Variable Annuity Series. This prospectus generally describes policies issued on or after the date of this prospectus.

An annuity is a contract between you, the owner, and an insurance company (in this case us), where the insurance company promises to pay you an income in the form of annuity payments. These payments begin on a designated date, referred to as the annuity commencement date. Until the annuity commencement date, your annuity is in the accumulation phase and the earnings (if any) are tax deferred. Tax deferral means you generally are generally not taxed until you take money out of your annuity. After you annuitize, your annuity switches to the income phase.

The policy is a “deferred” annuity. You can use the policy to accumulate funds for retirement or other long-term financial planning purposes. Your individual investment and your rights are determined primarily by your own policy.

The policy is a “flexible premium” annuity because after you purchase it, you can generally make additional investments of at least $50 (but not more than the stated maximum premium addition amount) until the annuity commencement date. You are not required to make any additional investments.

The policy is a “variable” annuity because the value of your investments can go up or down based on the performance of your investment options. If you invest in the separate account, the amount of money you are able to accumulate in your policy during the accumulation phase depends upon the performance of your investment options. You could lose the amount you allocate to the separate account. The amount of annuity payments you receive during the income phase from the separate account also depends upon the investment performance of your investment options for the income phase.

The policy may also contain a fixed account. If the fixed account is offered it will offer interest at a rate(s) that we guarantee will not decrease during the selected guaranteed period. There may be different interest rates for each different guaranteed period that we may offer and that you select.

Do not purchase this policy if you plan to use it, or any of its riders, for resale, speculation, arbitrage, viatication, or any other type of collective investment scheme. Your policy is not intended or designed to be traded on any stock exchange or secondary market. By purchasing this policy, you represent and warrant that you are not using the policy, or any of its riders for resale, speculation, arbitrage, viatication, or any other type of collective investment scheme.

PURCHASE

Policy Issue Requirements

We will not issue a policy unless:

• we receive in good order (See OTHER INFORMATION - Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order) all information needed to issue the policy;

• we receive in good order (at our Administrative and Service Office) a minimum initial premium payment; and

11

• the annuitant, owner, and any joint owner are age 89 or younger (the limit may be lower for qualified policies).

We reserve the right to reject any application or premium payment.

Premium Payments

General. You should make checks for premium payments payable to Transamerica Life Insurance Company or Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company, as applicable, and send them to the Administrative and Service Office. Your check must be honored in order for us to pay any associated payments and benefits due under the policy.

We do not accept cash. We reserve the right to not accept third party checks. A third party check is a check that is made payable to one person who endorses it and offers it as payment to a second person. Checks should normally be payable to us, however, in some circumstances, at our discretion we may accept third party checks that are from a rollover or transfer from other financial institutions. Any third party checks not accepted by us will be returned.

We reserve the right to reject or accept any form of payment. Any unacceptable forms of payment will be returned.

Initial Premium Requirements. The initial premium payment for nonqualified policies must be at least $5,000, and at least $1,000 for qualified policies. You must obtain our prior approval to purchase a policy with an amount less than the stated minimum. There is generally no minimum initial premium payment for policies issued under section 403(b) of the Internal Revenue Code; however, your premium must be received within 90 days of the policy date or your policy will be canceled. We will credit your initial premium payment to your policy within two business days after the day we receive it and your complete policy information in good order. If we are unable to credit your initial premium payment, we will contact you within five business days and explain why. We will also return your initial premium payment at that time unless you let us keep it and credit it as soon as possible.

The date on which we credit your initial premium payment to your policy is generally the policy date. The policy date is used to determine policy years, policy months and policy anniversaries.

There may be lengthy delays in our receipt of applications that are outside of our control (for example, because of the failure of the selling broker/dealer or sales agent to forward the application to us promptly, or because of delays in determining whether the policy is suitable for you). Any such delays will affect when your policy can be issued and your premium allocated among your investment choices.

Additional Premium Payments. You are not required to make any additional premium payments. However, you can generally make additional premium payments during the accumulation phase. Additional premium payments must be at least $50. After the first policy year, additional premium payments each policy year cannot, in the aggregate, exceed $25,000 for nonqualified policies and the lesser of (1) the IRS maximum annual contribution limit or (2) $60,000 for qualified policies. We will credit additional premium payments to your policy as of the market day we receive your premium and required information in good order at our Administrative and Service Office. Additional premium payments must be received before the close of the New York Stock Exchange (usually 4:00 p.m. Eastern time) to get same-day pricing of the additional premium payment.

12

Maximum Total Premium Payments. For issue ages 0-80, we reserve the right to reject cumulative premium payments over $1,000,000 (this includes subsequent premium payments) for policies with the same owner or same annuitant issued by us or an affiliate. For issue ages over 80, we reserve the right to reject cumulative premium payments over $500,000 (this includes subsequent premium payments) for policies with the same owner or same annuitant issued by us or an affiliate.

Allocation of Premium Payments. When you purchase a policy, we will allocate your premium payment to the investment choices you select. Your allocation must be in whole percentages and must total 100%. We will allocate additional premium payments the same way, unless you request a different allocation. You could lose the amount you allocate to the variable subaccounts.

If you allocate premium payments to the Dollar Cost Averaging program (if it is available), you must give us instructions regarding the subaccount(s) to which transfers are to be made or we cannot accept your premium payment.

You may change allocations for future additional premium payments by sending written instructions to our Administrative and Service Office, or by telephone, subject to the limitations described in ADDITIONAL FEATURES - Telephone Transactions. The allocation change will apply to premium payments received on or after the date we receive the change request in good order.

We reserve the right to restrict or refuse any premium payment.

Policy Value

You should expect your policy value to change from valuation period to valuation period. A valuation period begins at the close of trading on the New York Stock Exchange on each market day and ends at the close of trading on the next succeeding market day. A market day is each day that the New York Stock Exchange is open for business. The New York Stock Exchange generally closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time. Holidays are generally not market days.

Premium Enhancement (X-Share). If you elect the X-share, an amount equal to the applicable premium enhancement percentage (as set forth below) of the initial premium payment will be added to the policy value. The amount of the premium enhancement is not considered a premium payment and therefore may not be included in the calculation of certain policy features (such as certain death benefits or living benefits) or in the calculation of fees and charges that are based on premium payments made. The premium enhancement percentage may vary from premium to premium on subsequent premium payments, but will never be less than 0.25% nor more than 7%. A confirmation will be sent advising the owner of the amount of premium enhancement applicable to each subsequent premium payment. No premium enhancement will apply if the policy is canceled pursuant to the right to cancel provision.

The premium enhancement percentage is determined by the annuitant’s age at the time of each premium payment. The percentage will decrease as the annuitant’s attained age increases. The following schedule shows the current premium enhancement percentages:

13

Annuitant’s Age	Premium Enhancement Percentage
0-59	5.5%
60-69	5.0%
70-79	4.0%
80+	2.0%

The current premium enhancement percentages are not guaranteed and, as noted above, may change to as little as 0.25%.

Generally, an annuity with a premium enhancement may have higher expenses than a similar annuity without a premium enhancement. Accordingly, you should always consider the expenses along with the features and enhancements to be sure any annuity meets your financial needs and goals.

There is no specific charge for the premium enhancement. We expect to use a portion of the mortality and expense risk fee, administrative charge and/or the surrender charge to pay the premium enhancement.

Once we have received all necessary regulatory approvals, we may take back or “recapture” the full dollar amount of any premium enhancement upon the occurrence of any of the following events: (1) exercise of the right to cancel option; (2) exercise of the Nursing Care and Terminal Condition Withdrawal Option or the Unemployment Waiver within one year from the time we apply the premium enhancement; (3) a death benefit is payable within one year from the time we apply the premium enhancement; or (4) annuitization within one year from the time we apply the premium enhancement. In certain unusual circumstances, you might be worse off because of the premium enhancement. This could happen if we recapture the dollar amount of the premium enhancement and the overall investment performance of your policy was negative (if the overall investment performance of your policy was positive you would be better off).

The Internal Revenue Code generally requires that interests in a qualified policy be nonforfeitable, and it is unclear whether the premium enhancement feature is consistent with those requirements. Consult a tax adviser before purchasing the X-share as a qualified policy.

The premium enhancement may vary for certain policies and may not be available for all policies.

INVESTMENT OPTIONS

This policy offers you a means of investing in various underlying fund portfolios offered by different investment companies (by investing in the corresponding subaccounts). The companies that provide investment advice and administrative services for the underlying fund portfolios offered through this policy are listed in the “Appendix -Portfolios Associated with the Subaccounts”.

The general public may not purchase shares of any of these underlying fund portfolios. The names and investment objectives and policies may be similar to other portfolios managed by the same investment adviser or manager that are sold directly to the public. You should not expect the investment results of the underlying fund portfolios to be the same as those of other portfolios.

14

More detailed information, including an explanation of the portfolios’ fees and investment objectives, may be found in the current prospectuses for the underlying fund portfolios, which accompany this prospectus. You should read the prospectuses for the underlying fund portfolios carefully before you invest.

Note: If you received a summary prospectus for any of the portfolios listed in “Appendix - Portfolios Associated with the Subaccounts”, please follow the instructions on the first page of the summary prospectus to obtain a copy of the full fund prospectus.

Selection of Underlying Portfolios

The underlying fund portfolios offered through this variable annuity are selected by us, and we may consider various factors, including, but not limited to, asset class coverage, the strength of the adviser’s or sub-adviser’s reputation and tenure, brand recognition, performance, volatility, hedgeability, and the capability and qualification of each investment firm. Another factor that we may consider is whether the underlying fund portfolio or its service providers (e.g., the investment adviser or sub-advisers) or its affiliates will make payments to us or our affiliates. For additional information about these arrangements, see EXPENSES - Revenue We Receive. We review the portfolios periodically and may remove a portfolio, or limit its availability to new premiums and/or transfers of cash value if we determine that a portfolio no longer satisfies one or more of the selection criteria, and/or if the portfolio has not attracted significant allocations from owners. We have included the Transamerica Series Trust (“TST”) underlying fund portfolios at least in part because they are managed by one of our affiliates, Transamerica Asset Management, Inc. (“TAM”).

We have developed this variable annuity in cooperation with one or more distributors, and have included certain underlying fund portfolios based on their recommendations; their selection criteria may differ from our selection criteria.

You are responsible for choosing the subaccounts which invest in the underlying fund portfolios, and the amounts allocated to each, that are appropriate for your own individual circumstances and your investment goals, financial situation, and risk tolerance. Because investment risk is borne by you, decisions regarding investment allocations should be carefully considered. We do not recommend or endorse any particular underlying fund portfolio and we do not provide investment advice.

In making your investment selections, we encourage you to thoroughly investigate all of the information regarding the underlying fund portfolios that are available to you, including each underlying fund portfolio’s prospectus, statement of additional information and annual and semi-annual reports. Other sources such as the Fund’s website or newspapers and financial and other magazines provide more current information, including information about any regulatory actions or investigations relating to a Fund or underlying fund portfolio. After you select underlying fund portfolios for your initial premium, you should monitor and periodically re-evaluate your allocations to determine if they are still appropriate.

You bear the risk of any decline in the cash value of your policy resulting from the performance of the underlying fund portfolios you have chosen.

15

We do not guarantee that any of the subaccounts will always be available for premium payments, allocations, or transfers. We will not add, delete or substitute any underlying fund portfolio shares attributable to your interest in a subaccount without notice to you and prior approval of the SEC, to the extent required by the 1940 Act or other applicable law.

We reserve the right to limit the number of subaccounts you are invested in at any one time.

Addition, Deletion, or Substitution of Investments

We cannot and do not guarantee that any of the subaccounts will always be available for premium payments, allocations, or transfers. We retain the right, subject to any applicable law, to make certain changes to the separate account and its investments. We reserve the right to add new portfolios (or portfolio classes) or close existing portfolios (or portfolio classes). We also reserve the right to eliminate the shares of any portfolio held by a subaccount and to substitute shares of another portfolio of the underlying fund portfolios, or of another registered open-end management investment company for the shares of any portfolio, if the shares of the portfolio are no longer available for investment or if, in our judgment, investment in any portfolio would be inappropriate in view of the purposes of the separate account. To the extent required by the 1940 Act, as amended, substitutions of shares attributable to your interest in a subaccount will not be made without prior notice to you and the prior approval of the SEC. Nothing contained herein shall prevent the separate account from purchasing other securities for other series or classes of variable annuity policies, or from affecting an exchange between series or classes of variable annuity policies on the basis of your requests.

New subaccounts may be established when, in our sole discretion, marketing, tax, investment or other conditions warrant. Any new subaccounts may be made available to existing owners on a basis to be determined by us. Each additional subaccount will purchase shares in a mutual fund portfolio, or other investment vehicle. We may also eliminate one or more subaccounts if, in our sole discretion, marketing, tax, investment or other conditions warrant such change. In the event any subaccount is eliminated, we will notify you and request a reallocation of the amounts invested in the eliminated subaccount.

Similarly, we may, at our discretion, close a subaccount to new investment. Any subsequent premium payments, asset rebalance programs or dollar cost averaging transactions into a closed subaccount will be re-allocated to the remaining available investment options according to the investment allocation instructions you previously provided. Under asset rebalance programs the value remaining in the closed fund will be excluded from any future rebalancing. The value of the closed fund will continue to fluctuate due to portfolio performance, and may exceed the original rebalance percentages you requested. As you consider your overall investment strategy within your policy, you should also consider whether or not to re-allocate the value remaining in the closed fund to another investment choice. If you decide to re-allocate the value of the closed fund, you will need to provide us with instructions to achieve your goal.

If you allocate premium to a subaccount that is closed to new investment, we will require new instructions. If we do not receive new instructions, the requested transaction will be canceled and the premium will be returned.

16

In the event of any such substitution or change, we may, by appropriate endorsement, make such changes in the policies as may be necessary or appropriate to reflect such substitution or change. Furthermore, if deemed to be in the best interests of persons having voting rights under the policies, the separate account may be (1) operated as a management company under the 1940 Act or any other form permitted by law, (2) deregistered under the 1940 Act in the event such registration is no longer required or (3) combined with one or more other separate accounts. To the extent permitted by applicable law, we also may (1) transfer the assets of the separate account associated with the policies to another account or accounts, (2) restrict or eliminate any voting rights of owners or other persons who have voting rights as to the separate account, (3) create new separate accounts, (4) add new subaccounts to or remove existing subaccounts from the separate account, or combine subaccounts or (5) add new underlying fund portfolios, or substitute a new fund for an existing fund.

The Fixed Account.

The fixed account may, but will not always, be available. If available, premium payments allocated and amounts transferred to the fixed account become part of our general account. Interests in the general account have not been registered under the Securities Act of 1933 (the “1933 Act”), nor is the general account registered as an investment company under the 1940 Act. Accordingly, neither the general account nor any interests therein are generally subject to the provisions of the 1933 or 1940 Acts. Disclosures relating to interests in the general account may, however, be subject to certain generally applicable provisions of the federal securities laws relating to the accuracy of statements made in a registration statement.

While we do not guarantee that the fixed account will always be available for investment, we do guarantee that the interest credited to the fixed account when available will not be less than the guaranteed minimum effective annual interest rate shown on your policy (the “guaranteed minimum”). We determine credited rates, which are guaranteed for at least one year, in our sole discretion. You bear the risk that we will not credit interest greater than the guaranteed minimum. At the end of the guaranteed period option you selected, the value in that guaranteed period option will automatically be transferred into the money market subaccount or if a money market subaccount is unavailable to a new guaranteed period option of the same length (or the next shorter period if the same period is no longer offered) at the current interest rate for that period. You can transfer to another investment option by giving us notice within 30 days before the end of the expiring guaranteed period.

Full and partial surrenders and transfers from a guaranteed period option of the fixed account prior to the end of the guaranteed period are generally subject to an excess interest adjustment (except for policies issued in New York by Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company). See ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY - Excess Interest Adjustment for more information about when an excess interest adjustment applies. This adjustment will also be made to amounts that you apply to an annuity payment option. This adjustment may increase or decrease the amount of interest credited to your policy. The excess interest adjustment will not decrease the interest credited to your policy below the guaranteed minimum.

We also guarantee that upon full surrender your cash value attributable to the fixed account will not be less than the amount required by the applicable nonforfeiture law at the time the policy is issued.

17

If you select the fixed account, when it is available, your money will be placed with our other general assets. The amount of money you are able to accumulate in the fixed account during the accumulation phase depends upon the total interest credited. The amount of each annuity payment you receive during the income phase from the fixed portion of your policy will remain level for the entire income phase. The interest credited as well as principal invested in the fixed account is based on the claims-paying ability of Transamerica.

We reserve the right to refuse any premium payment or transfer to the fixed account.

Transfers

During the accumulation phase, you may make transfers to or from any investment option within certain limitations. Transfers out of a guaranteed period option of the fixed account are limited to the following:

• Transfers at the end of a guaranteed period.

• Transfers of amounts equal to interest credited. This may affect your overall interest-crediting rate, because transfers are deemed to come from the oldest premium payment first.

• Other than at the end of a guaranteed period, transfers of amounts from the guaranteed period option in excess of amounts equal to interest credited, are subject to an excess interest adjustment. If it is a negative adjustment, the maximum amount you can transfer in any one policy year is 25% of the amount in that guaranteed period option, less any previous transfers during the current policy year. If it is a positive adjustment, we do not limit the amount that you can transfer. (Note: This restriction may prolong the period of time it takes to transfer the full amount in the guaranteed period option of the fixed account. You should carefully consider whether investment in the fixed account meets your needs and investment criteria.)

Each transfer must be at least $500, or the entire subaccount value. Transfers of interest from a guaranteed period option of the fixed account must be at least $50. If less than $500 remains as a result of the transfer, then we reserve the right to include that amount in the transfer. Transfer requests must be received in good order while the New York Stock Exchange is open to get same-day pricing of the transaction. See OTHER INFORMATION - Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order.

The number of transfers permitted may be limited and a $10 charge for each transfer in excess of 12 in any policy year may apply. We reserve the right to prohibit transfers to the fixed account.

During the income phase, you may transfer values out of any subaccount; however, you cannot transfer values out of the fixed account. The minimum amount that can be transferred during this phase is the lesser of $10 of monthly income, or the entire monthly income of the annuity units in the subaccount from which the transfer is being made.

Transfers made by telephone are subject to the limitations described in ADDITIONAL FEATURES - Telephone Transactions.

18

Market Timing and Disruptive Trading

Statement of Policy. This variable annuity was not designed for the use of market timers or frequent or disruptive traders. (Frequent transfers are considered to be disruptive.) Such transfers may be harmful to the underlying fund portfolios and increase transaction costs.

Market timing and disruptive trading among the subaccounts or between the subaccounts and the fixed account can cause risks with adverse effects for other policy owners (and beneficiaries and underlying fund portfolios). These risks and harmful effects include:

(1) dilution of the interests of long-term investors in a subaccount if purchases or transfers into or out of an underlying fund portfolio are made at prices that do not reflect an accurate value for the underlying fund portfolio’s investments (some market timers attempt to do this through methods known as “time-zone arbitrage” and “liquidity arbitrage”);

(2) an adverse effect on portfolio management, such as:

(a) impeding a portfolio manager’s ability to sustain an investment objective;

(b) causing the underlying fund portfolio to maintain a higher level of cash than would otherwise be the case; or

(c) causing an underlying fund portfolio to liquidate investments prematurely (or otherwise at an inopportune time) in order to pay withdrawals or transfers out of the underlying fund portfolio; and

(3) increased brokerage and administrative expenses.

These costs are borne by all policy owners invested in those subaccounts, not just those making the transfers.

We have developed policies and procedures with respect to market timing and disruptive trading (which vary for certain subaccounts at the request of the corresponding underlying fund portfolios) and we do not make special arrangements or grant exceptions to accommodate market timing or potentially disruptive trading. As discussed herein, we cannot detect or deter all market timing or potentially disruptive trading. Do not invest with us if you intend to conduct market timing or potentially disruptive trading.

Detection. We employ various means in an attempt to detect and deter market timing and disruptive trading. However, despite our monitoring we may not be able to detect nor halt all harmful trading. In addition, because other insurance companies (and retirement plans) with different policies and procedures may invest in the underlying fund portfolios, we cannot guarantee that all harmful trading will be detected or that an underlying fund portfolio will not suffer harm from market timing and disruptive trading among subaccounts of variable products issued by these other insurance companies or retirement plans.

Deterrence. If we determine you are engaged in market timing or disruptive trading, we may take one or more actions in an attempt to halt such trading. Your ability to make transfers is subject to modification or restriction if we determine, in our sole opinion, that your exercise of the transfer privilege may disadvantage or potentially harm the rights or interests of other policy owners (or others having an interest in the variable insurance products). As described below, restrictions may take various forms, but under our current policies and procedures will include loss of expedited transfer privileges. We consider transfers by telephone, fax, overnight mail, or the Internet to be

19

“expedited” transfers. This means that we would accept only written transfer requests with an original signature transmitted to us only by U.S. mail. We may also restrict the transfer privileges of others acting on your behalf, including your registered representative or an asset allocation or investment advisory service.

We reserve the right to reject any premium payment or transfer request from any person without prior notice, if, in our judgment, (1) the payment or transfer, or series of transfers, would have a negative impact on an underlying fund portfolio’s operations, or (2) if an underlying fund portfolio would reject or has rejected our purchase order or has instructed us not to allow that purchase or transfer, or (3) because of a history of market timing or disruptive trading. We may impose other restrictions on transfers, or even prohibit transfers for any owner who, in our view, has abused, or appears likely to abuse, the transfer privilege on a case-by-case basis. We may, at any time and without prior notice, discontinue transfer privileges, modify our procedures, impose holding period requirements or limit the number, size, frequency, manner, or timing of transfers we permit. Because determining whether to impose any such special restrictions depends on our judgment and discretion, it is possible that some policy owners could engage in disruptive trading that is not permitted for others. We also reserve the right to reverse a potentially harmful transfer if an underlying fund portfolio refuses or reverses our order; in such instances some policy owners may be treated differently than others in that some transfers may be reversed and others allowed. For all of these purposes, we may aggregate two or more variable insurance products that we believe are connected.

In addition, transfers for multiple policies invested in the Transamerica Series Trust underlying fund portfolios which are submitted together may be disruptive at certain levels. At the present time, such aggregated transactions likely will not cause disruption if less than one million dollars total is being transferred with respect to any one underlying fund portfolio (a smaller amount may apply to smaller portfolios). Please note that transfers of less than one million dollars may be disruptive in some circumstances and this general amount may change quickly.

For policies with Portfolio Asset Management, the effect of transfers pursuant thereto may be considered disruptive for certain underlying fund portfolios. As a result, policy owners using Portfolio Asset Management may have to change their selected underlying fund portfolios.

Please note: If you engage a third party investment adviser for asset allocation services, then you may be subject to these transfer restrictions because of the actions of your investment adviser in providing these services.

In addition to our internal policies and procedures, we will administer your variable annuity to comply with any applicable state, federal, and other regulatory requirements concerning transfers. We reserve the right to implement, administer, and charge you for any fee or restriction, including redemption fees, imposed by any underlying fund portfolio. To the extent permitted by law, we also reserve the right to defer the transfer privilege at any time that we are unable to purchase or redeem shares of any of the underlying fund portfolios.

Under our current policies and procedures, we do not:

• impose redemption fees on transfers; or

• expressly limit the number or size of transfers in a given period except for certain subaccounts where an underlying fund portfolio has advised us to prohibit certain transfers that exceed a certain size; or

• provide a certain number of allowable transfers in a given period.

20

Redemption fees, transfer limits, and other procedures or restrictions may be more or less successful than ours in deterring market timing or other disruptive trading and in preventing or limiting harm from such trading.

In the absence of a prophylactic transfer restriction (e.g., expressly limiting the number of trades within a given period or limiting trades by their size), it is likely that some level of market timing and disruptive trading will occur before it is detected and steps taken to deter it (although some level of market timing and disruptive trading can occur with a prophylactic transfer restriction). As noted above, we do not impose a prophylactic transfer restriction and, therefore, it is likely that some level of market timing and disruptive trading will occur before we are able to detect it and take steps in an attempt to deter it.

Please note that the limits and restrictions described herein are subject to our ability to monitor transfer activity. Our ability to detect market timing or disruptive trading may be limited by operational and technological systems, as well as by our ability to predict strategies employed by policy owners (or those acting on their behalf) to avoid detection. As a result, despite our efforts to prevent harmful trading activity among the variable investment options available under this variable insurance product, there is no assurance that we will be able to detect or deter market timing or disruptive trading by such policy owners or intermediaries acting on their behalf. Moreover, our ability to discourage and restrict market timing or disruptive trading may be limited by decisions of state regulatory bodies and court orders that we cannot predict.

Furthermore, we may revise our policies and procedures in our sole discretion at any time and without prior notice, as we deem necessary or appropriate (1) to better detect and deter harmful trading that may adversely affect other policy owners, other persons with material rights under the variable insurance products, or underlying fund shareholders generally, (2) to comply with state or federal regulatory requirements, or (3) to impose additional or alternative restrictions on owners engaging in market timing or disruptive trading among the investment options under the variable insurance product. In addition, we may not honor transfer requests if any variable investment choice that would be affected by the transfer is unable to purchase or redeem shares of its corresponding underlying fund portfolio.

Underlying Fund Portfolio Frequent Trading Policies. The underlying fund portfolios may have adopted their own policies and procedures with respect to frequent purchases and redemptions of their respective shares. Underlying fund portfolios may, for example, assess a redemption fee (which we reserve the right to collect) on shares held for less than a certain period of time. The prospectuses for the underlying fund portfolios describe any such policies and procedures. The frequent trading policies and procedures of an underlying fund portfolio may be different, and more or less restrictive, than the frequent trading policies and procedures of other underlying fund portfolios and the policies and procedures we have adopted for our variable insurance products to discourage market timing and disruptive trading. Policy owners should be aware that we may not have the contractual ability or the operational capacity to monitor policy owners’ transfer requests and apply the frequent trading policies and procedures of the respective underlying funds that would be affected by the transfers. Accordingly, policy owners and other persons who have material rights under our variable insurance products should assume that any protection they may have against potential harm from market timing and disruptive trading is the protection, if any, provided by the policies and procedures we have adopted for our variable insurance products to discourage market timing and disruptive trading in certain subaccounts.

21

Policy owners should be aware that we are required to provide to an underlying fund portfolio or its designee, promptly upon request, certain information about the trading activity of individual policy owners, and to restrict or prohibit further purchases or transfers by specific policy owners identified by an underlying fund portfolio as violating the frequent trading policies established for the portfolio.

Omnibus Orders. Policy owners and other persons with material rights under the variable insurance products also should be aware that the purchase and redemption orders received by the underlying fund portfolios generally are “omnibus” orders from intermediaries such as retirement plans and separate accounts funding variable insurance products. The omnibus orders reflect the aggregation and netting of multiple orders from individual retirement plan participants and individual owners of variable insurance products. The omnibus nature of these orders may limit the underlying fund portfolios’ ability to apply their respective frequent trading policies and procedures. We cannot guarantee that the underlying fund portfolios will not be harmed by transfer activity relating to the retirement plans or other insurance companies that may invest in the underlying fund portfolios. These other insurance companies are responsible for their own policies and procedures regarding frequent transfer activity. If their policies and procedures fail to successfully discourage harmful transfer activity, it will affect other owners of underlying fund portfolio shares, as well as the owners of all of the variable annuity or life insurance policies, including ours, whose variable investment choices correspond to the affected underlying fund portfolios. In addition, if an underlying fund portfolio believes that an omnibus order we submit may reflect one or more transfer requests from owners engaged in market timing and disruptive trading, the underlying fund portfolio may reject the entire omnibus order and thereby delay or prevent us from implementing your request.

EXPENSES

There are charges and expenses associated with your policy that reduce the return on your investment in the policy. In addition to the following charges, there are optional benefits that if selected, assess additional charges. Please see ADDITIONAL FEATURES for more information.

Surrender Charges

During the accumulation phase, you can surrender part or all of the cash value (restrictions may apply to qualified policies). We may apply a surrender charge to compensate us for start-up expenses of the policy relating to sales, including commissions to registered representatives and other promotional expenses.

You can surrender up to 10% of your premium payments each year free of surrender charges. This amount is referred to as the surrender charge free amount and is determined at the time of surrender. (This amount is not cumulative, so not surrendering anything in one year does not increase the surrender charge free amount in subsequent years.) If the surrender is in excess of the surrender charge free amount, you might have to pay a surrender charge, which is a contingent deferred sales charge, on the excess amount.

22

For example, assume you selected the B-share and your premium is $100,000 and your policy value is $106,000 at the beginning of the second policy year and you surrender $30,000. Since that amount is more than your free amount ($10,000), you would pay a surrender charge of $1,600 on the remaining $20,000 [8% of ($30,000 - $10,000)]. Likewise, assume you selected the B-share and your policy value is $80,000 (premium payments $100,000) at the beginning of the second policy year and you surrender your policy. You would pay a surrender charge of $7,200 [8% of ($100,000 - ($100,000 x 10%))].

You can generally choose to receive the full amount of a requested partial surrender by directing us to deduct any applicable surrender charge (and any applicable excess interest adjustment) from your remaining policy value. You receive your cash value upon full surrender.

Surrender charges are waived if you surrender money under the Nursing Care and Terminal Condition Withdrawal Option or the Unemployment Waiver.

For surrender charge purposes, earnings are considered to be surrendered first, then the oldest premium is considered to be surrendered next. Please note, while there is no surrender charge on the withdrawal of earnings, withdrawing earnings will reduce (possibly to zero) your surrender charge free amount for that year.

Keep in mind that surrenders may be taxable and, if made before age 59 ¹/₂, may be subject to a 10% federal penalty tax. For tax purposes, surrenders from nonqualified policies are considered to come from taxable earnings first.

We may elect to reduce or eliminate the amount of the surrender charge when the policy is sold under circumstances which reduce our sales or other expenses or when required to by regulation or regulatory authority.

Liquidity Rider Surrender Charge Schedule. The optional Liquidity Rider (only available with the B-share) reduces the number of years each premium payment is subject to surrender charges from seven years to four years. The surrender charge schedule is the same as the B-share during the first four years for each premium payment. There is an extra charge for this rider.

Excess Interest Adjustment

Surrenders and transfers from the fixed account may be subject to an excess interest adjustment. This adjustment could retroactively reduce the interest credited in the fixed account to the guaranteed minimum or increase the amount credited. This adjustment may also apply to amounts applied to an annuity payment option. Please see “Appendix - Excess Interest Adjustment Examples” for an example showing the effect of a hypothetical excess interest adjustment calculation. The excess interest adjustment plays a role in calculating the total interest credited to the fixed account.

23

Mortality and Expense Risk Fees

We charge a fee as compensation for bearing certain mortality and expense risks under the policy. This fee is assessed daily based on the net asset value of each subaccount. Examples of such risks include a guarantee of annuity rates, the death benefit, certain expenses of the policy (including distribution related expenses), and assuming the risk that the current charges will be insufficient in the future to cover costs of selling, distributing and administering the policy.

If this charge does not cover our actual costs, we absorb the loss. Conversely, if the charge more than covers actual costs, the excess is added to our surplus. We expect to profit from this charge. We may use any profit for any proper purpose, including distribution expenses.

Premium Taxes

A deduction is also made for premium taxes, if any, imposed on us by a state, municipality or other government agency. The tax, currently ranging from 0% to 4%, is assessed at the time premium payments are made or when annuity payments begin. We pay the premium tax at the time it is imposed. We will, at our discretion, deduct the total amount of premium taxes, if any, from the policy value when such taxes are due to the applicable taxing authority, you begin receiving annuity payments, you surrender the policy or a death benefit is paid.

Federal, State and Local Taxes

We may in the future deduct charges from the policy for any taxes we incur because of the policy. However, no deductions are being made at the present time.

Special Service Fees

We will deduct a charge for special services, such as overnight delivery.

Transfer Fee

You are generally allowed to make 12 free transfers per policy year before the annuity commencement date. If you make more than 12 transfers per policy year, we reserve the right to charge for each additional transfer. Premium payments, Asset Rebalancing, and Dollar Cost Averaging transfers do not count as one of your free transfers. All transfer requests made at the same time are treated as a single transfer.

Administrative Charges

We deduct a daily administrative charge to cover the costs of supporting and administering the policy (including certain distribution-related expenses). This charge is equal to a percentage of the daily net asset value of each subaccount during both the accumulation phase and the income phase.

24

We reserve the right to increase the annual service charge up to the maximum. A portion of the service charge may be waived, but is not guaranteed to always be waived. We reserve the right to vary the amount of any waiver and the circumstances in which any waiver or waivers apply.

Fund Facilitation Fee

We charge a fund facilitation fee in order to make certain funds available as investment options under the policies. We apply the fee to funds that do not provide us with the amount of revenue we require in order for us to meet our expenses and revenue targets. This fee is assessed daily based on the net asset value of subaccounts that we specify.

Optional Benefits

If you elect to purchase optional benefits, we will deduct an additional fee. For some optional benefits the fee is assessed against the daily net asset value and for others it is deducted from each investment choice in proportion to the amount of policy value in each investment choice. Please refer to the ANNUITY POLICY FEE TABLE AND EXPENSE EXAMPLES for the list of fees for each optional benefit and ADDITIONAL FEATURES for more information.

Portfolio Fees and Expenses

The value of the assets in each subaccount will reflect the fees and expenses paid by the underlying fund portfolios. The lowest and highest fund expenses for the previous calendar year are found in ANNUITY POLICY FEE TABLE AND EXPENSE EXAMPLES in this prospectus. See the prospectuses for the underlying fund portfolios for more information.

Reduced Fees and Charges

We may, at our discretion, reduce or eliminate certain fees and charges for certain policies (including employer-sponsored savings plans) which may result in decreased costs and expenses.

Revenue We Receive

This prospectus describes generally the payments that we (and/or our affiliates) may directly or indirectly receive from the underlying fund portfolios, their advisers, subadvisers, distributors or affiliates thereof, in connection with certain administrative, marketing and other support services we (and/or our affiliates) provide and expenses we incur in offering and selling our variable insurance products. These arrangements are sometimes referred to as “revenue sharing” arrangements and are described further below. While only certain of the types of payments described below may be made in connection with your particular policy, all such payments may nonetheless influence or impact actions we (and/or our affiliates) take, and recommendations we (and our affiliates) make, regarding each of the variable insurance products that we (and our affiliates) offer, including your policy.

We (and/or our affiliates) may receive some or all of the following types of payments:

• Rule 12b-1 Fees. We and/or our affiliate, Transamerica Capital, Inc. (“TCI”) who is the principal underwriter for the policies, indirectly receive 12b-1 fees from the funds available as investment choices under our variable

25

insurance products. Any 12b-1 fees received by TCI that are attributable to our variable insurance products are then credited to us. These fees range from 0.00% to 0.45% of the average daily assets of the certain underlying fund portfolios attributable to the policies and to certain other variable insurance products that we and our affiliates issue.

• Administrative, Marketing and Support Service Fees (“Support Fees”). As noted above, an investment adviser, subadviser, administrator and/or distributor (or affiliates thereof) of the underlying fund portfolios may make payments to us and/or our affiliates, including TCI. These payments may be derived, in whole or in part, from the profits the investment adviser or subadviser realized on the advisory fee deducted from underlying fund portfolio assets. Policy owners, through their indirect investment in the underlying fund portfolios, bear the costs of these advisory fees (see the prospectuses for the underlying funds for more information). The amount of the payments we (or our affiliates) receive is generally based on a percentage of the assets of the particular underlying fund portfolios attributable to the policy and to certain other variable insurance products that our affiliates and we issue. These percentages differ and the amounts may be significant. Some advisers or sub-advisers (or other affiliates) pay us more than others.

The following chart provides the maximum combined percentages of 12b-1 fees and Support Fees that we anticipate will be paid to us on an annual basis. Please note: Some of the underlying funds listed in the chart below may not currently be available under your policy:

Incoming Payments to US and/or TCI
Fund	Maximum Fee % of assets
TRANSAMERICA SERIES TRUST	0.25%
AIM VARIABLE INSURANCE FUNDS (INVESCO VARIABLE INSURANCE FUNDS)	0.50%
ALLIANCEBERNSTEIN VARIABLE PRODUCTS SERIES FUND, INC.	0.45%
AMERICAN FUNDS INSURANCE SERIES ® TRUST	0.25%
FIDELITY ® VARIABLE INSURANCE PRODUCTS FUND	0.39%
FRANKLIN TEMPLETON VARIABLE INSURANCE PRODUCTS TRUST	0.50%
GE INVESTMENTS FUNDS, INC.	0.45%
JANUS ASPEN SERIES	0.35%
MFS ® VARIABLE INSURANCE TRUST	0.45%

NOTES TO INCOMING PAYMENTS TABLE:

Maximum Fee % of assets: Payments are based on a percentage of the average assets of each underlying fund portfolio owned by the subaccounts available under this policy and under certain other variable insurance products offered by our affiliates and us. We and/or TCI may continue to receive 12b-1 fees and administrative fees on subaccounts that are closed to new investments, depending on the terms of the agreements supporting those payments and on the services provided.

Transamerica Series Trust (“TST”): Because TST is managed by Transamerica Asset Management, Inc. (“TAM”), an affiliate of ours, there are additional benefits to us and our affiliates for amounts you allocate to the TST underlying fund portfolios, in terms of our and our affiliates’ overall profitability. These additional benefits may be significant. Payments or other benefits may be received from TAM. Such payments or benefits may be entered into for a variety of purposes, such as to allocate resources to us to provide administrative services to the policyholders who invest in the TST underlying fund portfolios. These payments or

26

benefits may take the form of internal credits, recognition, or cash payments. A variety of financial and accounting methods may be used to allocate resources and profits to us. Additionally, if a TST portfolio is subadvised by an entity that is affiliated with us, we may retain more revenue than on those TST portfolios that are subadvised by non-affiliated entities. During 2012 we received $89,306,110.22 in benefits from TAM pursuant to these arrangements. This includes the 0.25% amount in the above chart. We anticipate receiving comparable amounts in the future.

Fidelity^® Variable Insurance Products Fund: We receive this percentage once $100 million in fund shares are held by the subaccounts of ours and our affiliates.

• Other Payments. TCI also serves as the wholesale distributor for the policies, and in that capacity directly or indirectly receives additional amounts or different percentages of assets under management from certain advisers and subadvisers to the underlying fund portfolios (or their affiliates) with regard to variable insurance products and/or mutual funds that are issued by us and our affiliates. These amounts may be derived, in whole or in part, from the profits the investment adviser or subadviser receives from the advisory fee deducted from underlying fund portfolio assets. Policy owners, through their indirect investment in the underlying fund portfolios, bear the costs of these advisory fees. Certain advisers and subadvisers of the underlying fund portfolios (or their affiliates):

• may each directly or indirectly pay TCI amounts up to $75,000 per year to participate in a “preferred sponsor” program that provides such advisers and subadvisers with access to TCI’s wholesalers at TCI’s national and regional sales conferences as well as internal and external meetings and events that are attended by TCI’s wholesalers and/or other TCI employees.

• may provide our affiliates and/or selling firms with wholesaling services to assist us in the distribution of the policies.

• may provide us and/or certain affiliates and/or selling firms with occasional gifts, meals, tickets or other compensation as an incentive to market the underlying fund portfolios and to assist with their promotional efforts. The amounts may be significant and these arrangements provide the adviser or subadviser (or other affiliates) with increased access to us and to our affiliates involved in the distribution of the policies.

For the calendar year ended December 31, 2012, TCI or its affiliates received total revenue sharing payments in the amount of $                 from the following Fund managers and/or subadvisers to participate in TCI’s events: AEGON USA Investment Management, Alliance Bernstein Investments, BlackRock Investment Management, LLC., Fidelity Investments, Franklin Templeton Investments, GE Asset Management, Hanlon Investment Management Inc., ING Clarion Real Estate Securities, Invesco AIM, Janus Capital, Jennison Associates, JPMorgan Investment Management, Logan Circle Investment Partners, Loomis, Sayles & Company, MFS Investment Management, Madison Asset Management, Morgan Stanley Investment Management, Neuberger Berman Management, Oppenheimer Funds, Pacific Investment Management Company, Schroder Investment Management North America, Systematic Financial Management LP, Thompson, Siegel and Walmsley LLC, Vanguard, Wellington Management Company. Please note some of the aforementioned managers and/or subadvisers may not be associated with underlying fund portfolios currently available in this product.

Proceeds from certain of these payments by the underlying fund portfolios, the advisers, the subadvisers and/or their affiliates may be used for any corporate purpose, including payment of expenses (1) that we and our affiliates incur in promoting, marketing, and administering the policy, and (2) that we incur, in our role as intermediary, in promoting, marketing, and administering the underlying fund portfolios. We and our affiliates may profit from these payments.

27

For further details about the compensation payments we make in connection with the sale of the policies, see OTHER INFORMATION - Distribution of the Policies in this prospectus.

ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY

During the accumulation phase, you can have access to the money in your policy in the following ways:

• by making a surrender (either a full or partial surrender); or

• by taking systematic payouts (See ADDITIONAL FEATURES - Systematic Payout Option for more details).

Surrenders

During the accumulation phase, if you take a full surrender you will receive your cash value. If you want to take a partial surrender, in most cases it must be for at least $500. Unless you tell us otherwise, we will take the surrender from each of the investment options in proportion to the policy value. Surrenders may be referred to as withdrawals on your policy statement and other documents.

You may elect to take up to the free amount each policy year without incurring a surrender charge. Remember that any surrender you take will reduce the policy value, and the amount of the death benefit. See DEATH BENEFIT, for more details. A partial surrender also may have a negative impact on certain other benefits and guarantees of your policy. See ADDITIONAL FEATURES, for more details.

Surrenders in excess of the surrender charge free amount may be subject to a surrender charge. Surrenders from the fixed account may be subject to an excess interest adjustment. Income taxes, federal tax penalties and certain restrictions may apply to any surrenders you make.

Surrenders from qualified policies may be restricted or prohibited. If your policy was issued pursuant to a 403(b) plan, we generally are required to confirm, with your 403(b) plan sponsor or otherwise, that surrenders, loans or transfers you request comply with applicable tax requirements and to decline requests that are not in compliance. We will defer such payments you request until all information required under the tax law has been received. By requesting a surrender, loan or transfer, you consent to the sharing of confidential information about you, the policy, and transactions under the policy and any other 403(b) contracts or accounts you have under the 403(b) plan among us, your employer or plan sponsor, any plan administrator or record keeper, and other product providers.

During the income phase, you will receive annuity payments under the annuity payment option you select; however, you generally may not take any other surrenders, either full or partial.

Delay of Payment and Transfers

Payment of any amount due from the separate account for a surrender, a death benefit, or the death of the owner of a nonqualified policy, will generally occur within seven days from the date we receive in good order all required information at our Administrative and Service Office. We may defer such payment from the separate account if:

• the New York Stock Exchange is closed other than for usual weekends or holidays or trading on the Exchange is otherwise restricted;

• an emergency exists as defined by the SEC or the SEC requires that trading be restricted; or

28

• the SEC permits a delay for the protection of owners.

Transfers of amounts from the subaccounts also may be deferred under these circumstances. In addition, if, pursuant to SEC rules, the Transamerica AEGON Money Market VP portfolio suspends payment of redemption proceeds in connection with a liquidation of the portfolio, then we may delay payment of any transfer, partial withdrawal, surrender, loan, or death benefit from the TA AEGON Money Market subaccount until the portfolio is liquidated.

Any payment or transfer request which is not in good order will cause a delay. See OTHER INFORMATION - Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order.

Federal laws designed to counter terrorism and prevent money laundering by criminals might in certain circumstances require us to reject a premium payment and/or “freeze” a policy owner’s account. If these laws apply in a particular situation, we would not be allowed to pay any request for withdrawals, surrenders, or death benefits, make transfers, or continue making annuity payments absent instructions from the appropriate federal regulator. We may also be required to provide information about you and your policy to government agencies or departments.

Pursuant to the requirements of certain state laws, we reserve the right to defer payment of the cash value from the fixed account for up to six months. We may defer payment of any amount until your premium payment check has cleared your bank.

Excess Interest Adjustment

Money that you transfer out of or surrender from a guaranteed period option of the fixed account before the end of its guaranteed period (the number of years you specified the money would remain in the guaranteed period option) may be subject to an excess interest adjustment. At the time you request a transfer or surrender (either full or partial), if interest rates set by us have risen since the date of the initial guarantee, the excess interest adjustment will result in a lower cash value on surrender or transfer (but not below the excess interest adjustment floor described in “Appendix - Excess Interest Adjustment Examples”). However, if interest rates have fallen since the date of the initial guarantee, the excess interest adjustment will result in a higher cash value on surrender or transfer. Please see “Appendix - Excess Interest Adjustment Examples” to see how the excess interest adjustment is calculated and illustrative examples using hypothetical values.

Any amount surrendered in excess of the cumulative interest credited is generally subject to an excess interest adjustment. An excess interest adjustment may also be made on amounts applied to an annuity payment option.

The formula that will be used to determine the excess interest adjustment is:

S* (G-C)* (M/12)

S = Is the amount (before surrender charges, premium taxes and the application of any Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefits, if any) being surrendered, withdrawn, transferred, paid upon death, or applied to an income option that is subject to the excess interest adjustment;

G = Is the guaranteed interest rate for the guaranteed period applicable to “S”;

29

C = Is the current guaranteed interest rate then being offered on new premium payments for the next longer option period than “M”. If this policy form or such an option period is no longer offered, “C” will be the U.S. Treasury rate for the next longer maturity (in whole years) than “M” on the 25th day of the previous calendar month, plus up to 0.25%; and

M = Number of months remaining in the current option period for “S”, rounded up to the next higher whole number of months.

* = multiplication

There will be no excess interest adjustment on any of the following:

• surrenders of cumulative interest credited;

• Nursing Care and Terminal Condition Withdrawal Option surrenders;

• Unemployment Waiver surrenders;

• transfers from a Dollar Cost Averaging fixed source;

• surrenders to satisfy any minimum distribution requirements; and

• Systematic Payout Option payments, which do not exceed cumulative interest credited at the time of payment.

Please note that in these circumstances you will not receive a higher cash value if interest rates have fallen nor will you receive a lower cash value if interest rates have risen.

The excess interest adjustment may vary for certain policies and may not be applicable for all policies.

Signature Guarantee

As a protection against fraud, we require a signature guarantee (i.e., Medallion Signature Guarantee as required by us) for the following transaction requests:

• Any surrenders over $250,000;

• Certain surrenders on or within 15 days of an address change;

• Any disbursement request made on or within 15 days of an ownership change;

• Any surrender when we have been directed to send proceeds to a different personal address from the address of record for that contract owner’s account. PLEASE NOTE: This requirement will not apply to requests made in connection with exchanges of one annuity for another with the same owner in a “tax-free exchange”;

• Any surrender when we do not have an originating or guaranteed signature on file;

• Any other transaction where we require.

We may change the specific requirements listed above, or add signature guarantees in other circumstances, at our discretion if we deem it necessary or appropriate to help protect against fraud. For current requirements, please refer to the requirements listed on the appropriate form or call us at (800)525-6205.

You can obtain a Medallion signature guarantee from more than 7,000 financial institutions across the United States and Canada that participate in a Medallion signature guarantee program.

The best source of a Medallion signature guarantee is a bank, savings and loan association, brokerage firm, or credit union with which you do business.

30

A notary public cannot provide a Medallion signature guarantee. Notarization will not substitute for a Medallion signature guarantee.

ANNUITY PAYMENTS (THE INCOME PHASE)

You can change the annuity commencement date. You can change this date by giving us 30 days notice with the information we need. The latest maximum annuity commencement date generally cannot be later than the last day of the month following the month in which the annuitant attains age 99 (earlier if required by state law). In no event can this date be earlier than the third policy anniversary.

Before the annuity commencement date, if the annuitant is alive, you may choose an annuity payment option or change your election. If the annuitant dies before the annuity commencement date, the death benefit is payable in a lump sum or under one of the annuity payment options (unless the surviving spouse continues the policy).

Unless you specify otherwise, the annuitant will receive the annuity payments. After the annuitant’s death, the beneficiary you designate at annuitization will receive any remaining guaranteed payments.

Annuity Payment Options

The policy provides several annuity payment options that are described below. You may choose any combination of annuity payment options. We will use your adjusted policy value to provide these annuity payments. If the adjusted policy value on the annuity commencement date is less than $2,000, we reserve the right to pay it in one lump sum in lieu of applying it under an annuity payment option. You can receive annuity payments monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, or annually. (We reserve the right to change the frequency if payments would be less than $50.)

In deciding on which annuity payment option to elect, you must decide if fixed or variable payments are better for you. If you choose to receive fixed payments, then the amount of each payment will be set on the annuity commencement date and will not change. You may, however, choose to receive variable payments. The dollar amount of the first variable payment will be determined in accordance with the annuity payment rates set forth in the applicable table contained in the policy. The dollar amount of additional variable payments will vary based on the investment performance of the subaccount(s) you select. The dollar amount of each variable payment after the first may increase, decrease, or remain constant. If the actual investment performance (net of fees and expenses) exactly matched the assumed investment return of 3% at all times, the amount of each variable annuity payment would remain constant. If actual investment performance (net of fees and expenses) exceeds the assumed investment return, the amount of the variable annuity payments would increase. Conversely, if actual investment performance (net of fees and expenses) is lower than the assumed investment return, the amount of the variable annuity payments would decrease.

You must also decide if you want your annuity payments to be guaranteed for the annuitant’s lifetime, a period certain, or a combination thereof. Generally, payments will be lower if you combine a period certain, guaranteed amount, or liquidity with a lifetime guarantee (e.g., Life Income with 10 years Certain and Life with Guaranteed Return of Policy proceeds). Likewise, payments will also generally be lower the longer the period certain (because you are guaranteed payments for a longer time).

31

A charge for premium taxes and an excess interest adjustment may be made when annuity payments begin.

The annuity payment options are explained below. Some options are fixed only and some can be fixed or variable.

Income for a Specified Period (fixed only). We will make level payments only for a fixed period. No funds will remain at the end of the period. If your policy is a qualified policy, this payment option may not satisfy minimum required distribution rules. Consult a tax adviser before electing this option.

Income of a Specified Amount (fixed only). Payments are made for any specified amount until the amount applied to this option, with interest, is exhausted. This will be a series of level payments followed by a smaller final payment. If your policy is a qualified policy, this payment option may not satisfy minimum required distribution rules. Consult a tax adviser before electing this option.

Life Income (not available for adjusted ages greater than 85). You may choose between:

• No Period Certain (fixed or variable)-Payments will be made only during the annuitant’s lifetime. The last payment will be the payment immediately before the annuitant’s death.

• 10 Years Certain (fixed or variable)-Payments will be made for the longer of the annuitant’s lifetime or ten years.

• Guaranteed Return of Policy Proceeds (fixed only)-Payments will be made for the longer of the annuitant’s lifetime or until the total dollar amount of payments we made to you equals the annuitized amount (i.e., the adjusted policy value).

Joint and Survivor Annuity (not available for adjusted ages greater than 85). You may choose:

• No Period Certain (fixed or variable)-Payments are made during the joint lifetime of the annuitant and a joint annuitant of your selection. Payments will be made as long as either person is living.

Other annuity payment options may be arranged by agreement with us. Some annuity payment options may not be available for all policies.

NOTE CAREFULLY

IF:

• you choose Life Income with No Period Certain or a Joint and Survivor Annuity with No Period Certain; and

• the annuitant dies (or both joint annuitants die) before the due date of the second (third, fourth, etc.) annuity payment;

THEN:

• we may make only one (two, three, etc.) annuity payments.

IF:

• you choose Income for a Specified Period, Life Income with 10 Years Certain, Life Income with Guaranteed Return of Policy Proceeds, or Income of a Specified Amount; and

• the person receiving payments dies prior to the end of the guaranteed period;

32

THEN:

• the remaining guaranteed payments will be continued to a new payee, or their present value may be paid in a single sum.

We will not pay interest on amounts represented by uncashed annuity payment checks if the postal or other delivery service is unable to deliver checks to the payee’s address of record. The person receiving payments is responsible for keeping us informed of his/her current address.

You must annuitize your policy no later than the maximum annuity commencement date specified in your policy (earlier for certain distribution channels). If you do not elect an annuity payment option, the default option will be Life with 10 Years Certain option. Please note, all optional benefits (including guaranteed minimum death benefits and living benefits) terminate upon annuitization.

DEATH BENEFIT

We will pay a death benefit to your beneficiary, under certain circumstances, if the annuitant dies during the accumulation phase. If there is a surviving owner(s) when the annuitant dies, the surviving owner(s) will receive the death benefit instead of the listed beneficiary. The person receiving the death benefit may choose an annuity payment option (if you pick a variable annuity payment option fees and expenses will apply), or may choose to receive the death benefit via partial withdrawals, or lump sum withdrawal. The guarantees of these death benefits are based on our claims-paying ability.

We will determine the amount of and pay the death benefit proceeds, if any are payable on a policy, upon receipt at our Administrative and Service Office of satisfactory proof of the annuitant’s death, written directions from each eligible recipient of death benefit proceeds regarding how to pay the death benefit, and any other documents, forms and information that we need (collectively referred to as “due proof of death”). Please Note: Such due proof of death must be submitted in good order to avoid a delay in processing the death benefit claim. Due proof requires selecting a payment option. See OTHER INFORMATION - Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order.

The death benefit proceeds remain invested in the separate account in accordance with the allocations made by the policy owner until the beneficiary has provided us with due proof of death. Once we receive due proof of death, investments in the separate account may be reallocated in accordance with the beneficiary’s instructions.

We may permit the beneficiary to give a “one-time” written instruction to reallocate the investments in the separate account to the money market subaccount after the death of the annuitant. If there is more than one beneficiary, all beneficiaries must agree to the reallocation instructions. This one-time reallocation will be permitted if the beneficiary provides satisfactory evidence of the annuitant’s death (satisfactory evidence may include a certified death certificate).

When We Pay A Death Benefit

We will pay death benefit IF:

• you are both the annuitant and sole owner of the policy; and

33

• you die before the annuity commencement date.

We will pay a death benefit to you (owner) IF:

• you are not the annuitant; and

• the annuitant dies before the annuity commencement date.

If the only person receiving the death benefit is the surviving spouse, then he or she may elect to continue the policy as the new annuitant and owner, instead of receiving the death benefit. See TAX INFORMATION - Tax Status of the Policy - Distribution Requirements.All currently existing surrender charges will be waived.

When We Do Not Pay A Death Benefit

We will not pay a death benefit IF:

• you are the owner but not the annuitant; and

• you die prior to the annuity commencement date.

Please note: Distribution requirements apply upon the death of any owner. Generally, upon the owner’s death (who is not the annuitant) the entire interest must be distributed within five years. See TAX INFORMATION for a more detailed discussion of the distribution requirements under the Code.

Deaths After the Annuity Commencement Date

The death benefit payable, if any, on or after the annuity commencement date depends on the annuity payment option selected.

IF:

• you are not the annuitant; and

• you die on or after the annuity commencement date; and

• the entire guaranteed interest in the policy has not been paid;

THEN:

• the remaining portion of such guaranteed interest in the policy will continue to be distributed at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution being used as of the date of your death.

IF:

• you are the owner and annuitant; and

• you die after the annuity commencement date; and

• the annuity payment option you selected did not or no longer has a guaranteed period;

THEN:

• no additional payments will be made (there is no death benefit).

Succession of Ownership

If an owner dies during the accumulation phase, the person or entity first listed below who is alive or in existence on the date of that death will become the new owner:

34

• any surviving owner;

• primary beneficiary;

• contingent beneficiary; or

• owner’s estate.

Amount of Death Benefit

Death benefit provisions may differ from state to state. The death benefit may be paid as a lump sum, partial withdrawals or as annuity payments. The amount of the death benefit depends on the guaranteed minimum death benefit option, if any, you choose when you buy the policy. The “base policy” death benefit will generally be the greatest of:

• the policy value on the date we receive the required information in good order at our Administrative and Service Office;

• the cash value on the date we receive in good order the required information at our Administrative and Service Office (this will be more than the policy value if there is a positive excess interest adjustment that exceeds the surrender charge);

• and the guaranteed minimum death benefit (if one was elected); plus premium payments, less adjusted partial surrender, from the date of death to the date the death benefit is paid. Please see “Appendix - Death Benefit’ for illustrative examples regarding death benefit calculations.

Please note, the death benefit terminates upon annuitization and there is a maximum annuity commencement date.

Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit

On the policy application, you may generally choose a guaranteed minimum death benefit (age limitations may apply) for an additional fee. After the policy is issued, you cannot make an election and the death benefit cannot be changed.

Annual Step-Up Death Benefit

Under this option, on each policy anniversary prior to your 81st birthday, a new ”stepped-up“ death benefit is determined and becomes the guaranteed minimum death benefit for that policy year. This ”step-up“ death benefit is equal to:

• the largest policy value on the policy date or on any policy anniversary prior to the earlier of the annuitant’s date of death or the annuitant’s 81st birthday; plus

• any premium payments since the date of any policy anniversary with the largest policy value; minus

• any adjusted partial surrenders since the date of the policy anniversary with the largest policy value.

The Annual Step-Up Death Benefit is not available if you or the annuitant is 76 or older on the policy date. There is an extra charge for this death benefit.

35

Designated Investment Options. If you elected the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit, you must allocate 100% of your policy value to one or more of the following “designated investment options:”

AllianceBernstein Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio - Class B

American Funds - Asset Allocation Fund - Class 2

American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2

Fidelity VIP Balanced Portfolio - Service Class 2

GE Investments Total Return Fund - Class 3

TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Conservative - Service Class

TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class

TA AllianceBernstein Dynamic Allocation - Service Class

TA PIMCO Total Return - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Balanced - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Conservative - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Growth - Service Class

Fixed Account

Please note:

• All policy value must be allocated to one or more designated investment options.

• You may transfer amounts among the designated investment options; however, you cannot transfer any amount to any other subaccount if you elect this death benefit.

Return of Premium Death Benefit

The Return of Premium Death Benefit is equal to:

• total premium payments; less

• any adjusted partial surrenders as of the date of death.

This benefit is not available if you or the annuitant is 86 or older on the policy date. There is an extra charge for this death benefit.

Designated Investment Options. If you elected the Return of Premium Death Benefit, you must allocate 100% of your policy value to one or more of the following “designated investment options:”

AllianceBernstein Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio - Class B

American Funds - Asset Allocation Fund - Class 2

American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2

Fidelity VIP Balanced Portfolio - Service Class 2

GE Investments Total Return Fund - Class 3

TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Conservative - Service Class

TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class

36

TA AllianceBernstein Dynamic Allocation - Service Class

TA PIMCO Total Return - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Balanced - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Conservative - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Growth - Service Class Fixed Account

Please note:

• All policy value must be allocated to one or more designated investment options.

• You may transfer amounts among the designated investment options; however, you cannot transfer any amount to any other subaccount if you elect this death benefit.

Please note: You will not receive an optional guaranteed minimum death benefit if you do not choose one when you purchase your policy.

The Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit may vary for certain policies and may not be available for all policies. This disclosure explains the material features of the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. The application and operation of the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit are governed by the terms and conditions of the policy form and riders.

Adjusted Partial Surrender

When you request a partial surrender, your guaranteed minimum death benefit will be reduced by an amount called the adjusted partial surrender. Under certain circumstances, the adjusted partial surrender may be more than the dollar amount of your surrender request. This will generally be the case if the guaranteed minimum death benefit exceeds the policy value at the time of surrender. It is also possible that if a death benefit is paid after you have made a partial surrender, then the total amount paid could be less than the total premium payments.

The formula used to calculate the adjusted partial surrender amount, for the guaranteed minimum death benefit offered in this prospectus, is: adjusted partial surrender = (amount gross partial surrender * value of the current death proceeds immediately prior to the gross partial surrender ) / policy value immediately prior to the gross surrender.

We have included a detailed explanation of this adjustment with examples in the “Appendix - Death Benefit.” This is referred to as “adjusted partial surrender” in your policy. If you have a qualified policy, minimum required distributions rules may require you to request a partial surrender.

TAX INFORMATION

NOTE: We have prepared the following information on federal income taxes as a general discussion of the subject. It is not intended as tax advice to any individual. The federal income tax consequences discussed herein reflects our understanding of current law, and the law may change. No representation is made regarding the likelihood of continuation of the present federal income tax law or of the current

37

interpretations by the Internal Revenue Service. No attempt is made to consider any applicable state or other income tax laws, any state and local estate or inheritance tax, or other tax consequences of ownership or receipt of distributions under the policy. You should consult your own tax adviser about your own circumstances.

Introduction

Deferred annuity policies are a way of setting aside money for future needs like retirement. Congress recognized how important saving for retirement is and provided special rules in the Internal Revenue Code (the “Code”) for annuities. Simply stated, these rules generally provide that individuals will not be taxed on the earnings, if any, on the money held in an annuity policy until withdrawn. This is referred to as tax deferral. When a non-natural person (e.g., corporation or certain other entities other than tax-qualified trusts) owns a nonqualified policy, the policy will generally not be treated as an annuity for tax purposes. Thus, the owner must generally include in income any increase in the account value over the investment in the policy during each taxable year.

There are different rules as to how you will be taxed depending on how you take the money out and the type of policy-qualified or nonqualified.

If you purchase the policy as an individual retirement annuity or as a part of a 403(b) plan, 457 plan, a pension plan, a profit sharing plan (including a 401(k) plan), or an employer sponsored retirement program, your policy is referred to as a qualified policy. There is no additional tax deferral benefit derived from placing qualified funds into a variable annuity. Features other than tax deferral should be considered in the purchase of a qualified policy. There are limits on the amount of contributions you can make to a qualified policy. Other restrictions may apply including terms of the plan in which you participate. To the extent there is a conflict between a plan’s provisions and a policy’s provisions, the plan’s provisions will control.

If you purchase the policy other than as part of any arrangement described in the preceding paragraph, the policy is referred to as a nonqualified policy.

You will generally not be taxed on increases in the value of your policy, whether qualified or nonqualified, until a distribution occurs (either as a surrender, withdrawal, or as annuity payments). Under certain circumstances, however, you may be subject to current taxation if you assign or pledge or enter into an agreement to assign or pledge any portion of the policy.

The Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) has not reviewed the policy for qualification as an IRA annuity, and has not addressed in a ruling of general applicability whether the death benefit options and riders available, with the policy, if any, comport with IRA qualification requirements.

The value of death benefit options and riders elected may need to be considered in calculating minimum required distributions from a qualified plan/or policy.

38

Taxation of Us

We at present are taxed as a life insurance company under part I of Subchapter L of the Code. The separate account is treated as a part of us and, accordingly, will not be taxed separately as a “regulated investment company” under Subchapter M of the Code. We do not expect to incur any federal income tax liability with respect to investment income and net capital gains arising from the activities of the separate account retained as part of the reserves under the policy. Based on this expectation, it is anticipated that no charges will be made against the separate account for federal income taxes. If in future years, any federal income taxes are incurred by us with respect to the separate account, we may make a charge to that account. We may benefit from any dividends received or foreign tax credits attributable to taxes paid by certain underlying funds to foreign jurisdictions to the extent permitted under federal tax law.

Tax Status of the Policy

Diversification Requirements. In order for a nonqualified variable policy which is based on a segregated asset account to qualify as an annuity policy under Section 817(h) of the Code, the investments made by such account must be “adequately diversified” in accordance with Treasury Regulations. The Regulations apply a diversification requirement to each of the subaccounts. Each separate account, through its underlying fund portfolios and their portfolios, intends to comply with the diversification requirements of the Regulations. We have entered into agreements with each underlying fund portfolio company that require the portfolios to be operated in compliance with the Regulations but we do not have control over the underlying fund portfolio companies. The policy owners bear the risk that the entire contract could be disqualified as an annuity policy under the Code due to the failure of a subaccount to be deemed to be “adequately diversified.”

Owner Control. In some circumstances, owners of variable policies who retain excessive control over the investment of the underlying separate account assets may be treated as the owners of those assets and may be subject to tax on income produced by those assets. In Revenue Ruling 2003-91, the IRS stated that whether the owner of a variable contract is to be treated as the owner of the assets held by the insurance company under the contract will depend on all of the facts and circumstances.

Revenue Ruling 2003-91 also gave an example of circumstances under which the owner of a variable contract would not possess sufficient control over the assets underlying the contract to be treated as the owner of those assets for federal income tax purposes. To the extent the circumstances relating to the issuance and ownership of a policy vary from those described in Revenue Ruling 2003-91, owners bear the risk that they will be treated as the owner of Separate Account assets and taxed accordingly.

We believe that the owner of a policy should not be treated as the owner of the underlying assets. We reserve the right to modify the policies to bring them into conformity with applicable standards should such modification be necessary to prevent owners of the policies from being treated as the owners of the underlying separate account assets. Concerned owners should consult their own tax advisers regarding the tax matter discussed above.

Distribution Requirements. The Code requires that nonqualified policies contain specific provisions for distribution of policy proceeds upon the death of any owner. In order to be treated as an annuity policy for federal income tax purposes, the Code requires that such policies provide that if any owner dies on or after the annuity starting dated

39

and before the entire interest in the policy has been distributed, the remaining portion must be distributed at least as rapidly as under the method in effect on such owner’s death. If any owner dies before the annuity starting date, the entire interest in the policy must generally be distributed within 5 years after such owner’s date of death or be used to provide payments to a designated beneficiary beginning within one year of such owner’s death that will be made for the life of the beneficiary or for a period not extending beyond the life expectancy of the beneficiary. However, if upon such owner’s death prior to the annuity starting date, such owner’s surviving spouse is the sole beneficiary, under the nonqualified policy, then the policy may be continued with the surviving spouse as the new owner. If any owner is a non-natural person, then for purposes of these distribution requirements, the primary annuitant shall be treated as an owner and any death or change of such primary annuitant shall be treated as the death of an owner.

The nonqualified policies contain provisions intended to comply with these requirements of the Code. No regulations interpreting these requirements of the Code have yet been issued and thus no assurance can be given that the provisions contained in the policies satisfy all such Code requirements. The provisions contained in the policies will be reviewed and modified if necessary to assure that they comply with the Code requirements when clarified by regulation or otherwise.

The Federal Defense of Marriage Act currently does not recognize same-sex marriages or civil unions, even those that are permitted under individual state laws. Therefore, exercise of the spousal continuation provisions of this policy or any riders by persons who do not meet the definition of “spouse” under federal law - e.g., civil union partners and same-sex marriage spouses - may have adverse tax consequences. Consult a tax adviser for more information on this subject.

Taxation of Annuities

The following discussion assumes the policy qualifies as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes.

In General. Code Section 72 governs taxation of annuities in general. We believe that an owner who is an individual will not be taxed on increases in the value of a policy until such amounts are surrendered or distributed. For this purpose, the assignment, pledge, or agreement to assign or pledge any portion of the policy value, and in the case of a qualified policy, any portion of an interest in the plan, generally will be treated as a distribution. The taxable portion of a distribution is taxable as ordinary income.

Non-Natural Persons. Pursuant to Section 72(u) of the Code, a nonqualified policy held by a taxpayer other than a natural person generally will not be treated as an annuity policy under the Code; accordingly, an owner who is not a natural person will recognize as ordinary income for a taxable year the excess, if any, of the policy value over the “investment in the contract”. There are some exceptions to this rule and a prospective purchaser of the policy that is not a natural person should discuss these with a competent tax adviser. A policy owned by a trust using the grantor’s social security number as its taxpayer identification number will be treated as owned by the grantor (natural person) for the purposes of our application of Section 72 of the Code. Consult a tax adviser for more information on how this may impact your policy.

40

Different Individual Owner and Annuitant

If the owner and annuitant on the policy are different individuals, there may be negative tax consequences to the owner and/or beneficiaries under the policy if the annuitant predeceases the owner including, but not limited, to the assessment of penalty tax and the loss of certain death benefit distribution options. You may wish to consult your legal counsel or tax adviser if you are considering designating a different individual as the annuitant on your policy to determine the potential tax ramifications of such a designation.

Annuity Starting Date

This section makes reference to the annuity starting date as defined in Section 72 of the Code and the applicable regulations. Generally, the definition of annuity starting date will correspond with the definition of annuity commencement date used in your policy and the dates will be the same. However, in certain circumstances, your annuity starting date and annuity commencement date will not be the same date. If there is a conflict between the definitions, we will interpret and apply the definitions in order to ensure your policy maintains its status as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. You may wish to consult a tax adviser for more information on when this issue may arise.

Taxation of Annuity Payments

Although the tax consequences may vary depending on the annuity payment option you select, in general, for nonqualified and certain qualified policies, only a portion of the annuity payments you receive will be includable in your gross income.

In general, the excludable portion of each annuity payment you receive will be determined as follows:

• Fixed payments-by dividing the “investment in the contract” on the annuity starting date by the total expected return under the policy (determined under Treasury regulations) for the term of the payments. This is the percentage of each annuity payment that is excludable.

• Variable payments-by dividing the “investment in the contract” on the annuity starting date by the total number of expected periodic payments. This is the amount of each annuity payment that is excludable.

The remainder of each annuity payment is includable in gross income. Once the “investment in the contract” has been fully recovered, the full amount of any additional annuity payments is includable in gross income and taxed as ordinary income.

If you select more than one annuity payment option, special rules govern the allocation of the policy’s entire “investment in the contract” to each such option, for purposes of determining the excludable amount of each payment received under that option. We advise you to consult a competent tax adviser as to the potential tax effects of allocating amounts to any particular annuity payment option.

If, after the annuity starting date, annuity payments stop because an annuitant died, the excess (if any) of the “investment in the contract” as of the annuity starting date over the aggregate amount of annuity payments received that was excluded from gross income may possibly be allowable as a deduction in your tax return.

41

Taxation of Surrenders and Partial Withdrawals - Nonqualified Policies

When you surrender your policy, you are generally taxed on the amount that your surrender proceeds exceeds the “investment in the contract,” which is generally your premiums paid (adjusted for any prior surrenders or portions thereof that were not taxable). Partial withdrawals are generally treated first as taxable income to the extent of the excess in the policy over the “investment in the contract.” In general, loans, pledges, and assignments are taxed in the same manner as partial withdrawals and surrenders. All taxable amounts received under a policy are subject to tax at ordinary rather than capital gain tax rates.

If your policy contains an excess interest adjustment feature (also known as a market value adjustment), then your account value immediately before the surrender may have to be increased by any positive excess interest adjustments that result from the surrender. There is, however, no definitive guidance on the proper tax treatment of excess interest adjustments, and you may want to discuss the potential tax consequences of an excess interest adjustment with your tax adviser.

The Code also provides that surrendered earnings may be subject to a penalty tax. The amount of the penalty tax is equal to 10% of the amount that is includable in income. Some surrender withdrawals will be exempt from the penalty tax. They include, among other, any amounts: (1) paid on or after the taxpayer reaches age 59 ¹/₂; (2) paid after an owner dies; (3) paid if the taxpayer becomes disabled (as that term is defined in the Code); (4) paid in a series of substantially equal payments made annually (or more frequently) over the life of the taxpayer or the joint life of the taxpayer and the taxpayer’s designated beneficiary; (5) paid under an immediate annuity; or (6) which come from premium payments made prior to August 14, 1982.

Other exceptions may be applicable under certain circumstances and special rules may be applicable in connection with the exceptions enumerated above. You may wish to consult a tax adviser for more information regarding the imposition of penalty tax.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefits

We may make available, as options under the policy, certain guaranteed lifetime withdrawal and other optional benefits. If your policy contains a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit rider the application of certain tax rules, particularly those rules relating to distributions from your policy, are not entirely clear. The tax rules for qualified policies may impact the value of these optional benefits. Additionally, the actions of the qualified plan as contract holder may cause the qualified plan participant to lose the benefit of the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit. In view of this uncertainty, you should consult a tax adviser before purchasing a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit rider for a qualified policy.

Aggregation

All nonqualified deferred annuity policies that are issued by us (or our affiliates) to the same owner (policyholder) during any calendar year are treated as one annuity for purposes of determining the amount includable in the owner’s income when a taxable distribution occurs. If you are considering purchasing multiple policies from us (or our affiliates) during the same calendar year, you may wish to consult with your tax adviser regarding how aggregation will apply to your policies.

42

Partial Annuitization

Under a new tax provision enacted in 2010, if part of an annuity policy’s value is applied to an annuity option that provides payments for one or more lives and for a period of at least ten years, those payments may be taxed as annuity payments instead of withdrawals. None of the payment options under the policy is intended to qualify for this “partial annuitization” treatment and, if you apply only part of the value of the policy to a payment option, we will treat those payments as withdrawals for tax purposes.

Tax-Free Exchanges

Section 1035 of the Code provides that no gain or loss shall be recognized on the exchange of one annuity contract for another. Generally, an annuity contract issued in an exchange for another annuity contract is treated as new for purposes of the penalty and distribution at death rules.

If the initial contribution is made as a result of an exchange or surrender of another annuity contract, we may require that you provide information relating to the federal income tax status of the previous annuity contract to us.

Revenue Procedure 2011-38 significantly ease the restrictions on partial transfers previously adopted by the IRS. Under Rev. Proc. 2011-38, a partial exchange will be treated as tax-free under Section 1035 of the Code if there are no distributions, from either annuity, within 180 days of the partial 1035 exchange and annuity payments that satisfy the newly enacted partial annuitization rule of Section 72(a)(2) of the code will not be treated as a distribution from either the old or new contract. Please discuss any tax consequences concerning any contemplated transaction with a competent tax adviser.

Medicare Tax

Beginning in 2013, distributions from nonqualified annuity policies will be considered “investment income” for purposes of the newly enacted Medicare tax on investment income. Thus, in certain circumstances, a 3.8% tax may be applied to some or all of the taxable portion of distributions (e.g. earnings) to individuals, trusts, and estates whose income exceeds certain threshold amounts. Please consult a tax adviser for more information.

Taxation of Surrenders and Partial Withdrawals - Qualified Policies

In the case of a withdrawal under a qualified policy (other than from a deferred compensation plan under Section 457 of the Code), a pro rata portion of the amount you receive is taxable, generally based on the ratio of your “investment in the contract” to your total account balance or accrued benefit under the retirement plan. Your “investment in the contract” generally equals the amount of any non-deductible purchase payments made by you or on your behalf. If you do not have any non-deductible purchase payments, your investment in the contract will be treated as zero.

43

The IRS has not reviewed this policy for qualification as an IRA, and has not addressed in a ruling of general applicability whether any death benefits available under the policy comport with qualification requirements. The actuarial present value of death and/or living benefit options and riders elected may need to be considered in calculating minimum required distributions. Consult a competent tax adviser before purchasing an optional death benefit.

In addition, a penalty tax may be assessed on amounts surrendered from the policy prior to the date you reach age 59 ¹/₂, unless you meet one of the exceptions to this rule which are similar to the penalty exceptions for distributions from nonqualified policies discussed above. You may also be required to begin taking minimum distributions from the policy by a certain date. The terms of the plan may limit the rights otherwise available to you under the policy.

Taxation of Death Benefit Proceeds

Amounts may be distributed from the policy because of the death of the annuitant. Generally, such amounts should be includable in the income of the recipient: (1) if distributed in a lump sum, these amounts are taxed in the same manner as a surrender; (2) if distributed via partial withdrawals, these amounts are taxed in the same manner as partial surrender; (3) or if distributed under an annuity payment option, these amounts are taxed in the same manner as annuity payments.

Transfers, Assignments or Exchanges of Policies

A transfer of ownership or assignment of a policy, the designation of an annuitant or payee or other beneficiary who is not also the owner, the selection of certain annuity starting dates, the exchange of a policy and certain other transactions, or a change of annuitant other than the owner, may result in certain income or gift tax consequences to the owner that are beyond the scope of this discussion. An owner contemplating any such transfer, assignment, selection, exchange or change should contact a competent tax adviser with respect to the potential tax effects of such a transaction.

Separate Account Charges

It is possible that the IRS may take a position that fees for certain optional benefits (e.g., death benefits other than the Return of Premium death benefit) are deemed to be taxable distributions to you. In particular, the IRS may treat fees associated with certain optional benefits as a taxable surrender, which might also be subject to a tax penalty if the surrender occurs prior to age 59 ¹/₂. Although we do not believe that the fees associated with any optional benefit provided under the policy should be treated as taxable surrenders, the tax rules associated with these benefits are unclear, and we advise that you consult your tax adviser prior to selecting any optional benefit under the policy.

Withholding

The portion of any distribution under a policy that is includable in gross income will be subject to federal income tax withholding unless the recipient of such distribution elects not to have federal income tax withheld. Election forms will be provided at the time distributions are requested or made. The amount of withholding varies according to the type of distribution. For qualified policies taxable, “eligible rollover distributions” from Section 401(a) plans, Section 403(a) annuities, Section 403(b) tax-sheltered annuities, and governmental 457 plans are subject to a

44

mandatory federal income tax withholding of 20%. An eligible rollover distribution is any distribution from such a plan, other than specified distributions such as distributions required by the Code, distributions in a specified annuity form or hardship distributions. The 20% withholding does not apply, however, to nontaxable distributions or if (i) the employee (or employee’s spouse or former spouse as beneficiary or alternate payee) chooses a “direct rollover” from the plan to a tax-qualified plan, IRA, Roth IRA or 403(b) tax-sheltered annuity or to a governmental 457 plan that agrees to separately account for rollover contributions; or (ii) a non-spouse beneficiary chooses a “direct rollover” from the plan to an IRA established by the direct rollover.

Federal Estate, Gift and Generation-Skipping Transfer Taxes

Beginning in 2013, in the absence of legislative action, the federal estate tax, gift tax and generation-skipping transfer (“GST”) tax exemptions and maximum rates will return to their 2001 levels (with inflation adjustments for the GST tax exemption but not for the estate or gift tax exemptions). The federal estate tax and gift tax exemptions and minimum rates will be $1,000,000 and 55%, respectively. The federal GTS tax exemptions and maximum rates will be $1,430,000 and 55%, respectively.

The uncertainty as to how the current law might be modified in coming years underscores the importance of seeking guidance from a competent adviser to help ensure that your estate plan adequately addresses your needs and that of your beneficiaries under all possible scenarios.

Federal Estate Taxes. While no attempt is being made to discuss the Federal estate tax implications of the policy in detail, a purchaser should keep in mind that the value of an annuity policy owned by a decedent and payable to a beneficiary by virtue of surviving the decedent is included in the decedent’s gross estate. Depending on the terms of the annuity policy, the value of the annuity included in the gross estate may be the value of the lump sum payment payable to the designated beneficiary or the actuarial value of the payments to be received by the beneficiary. Consult an estate planning adviser for more information.

Generation-Skipping Transfer Tax. Under certain circumstances, the Code may impose a “generation skipping transfer tax” when all or part of an annuity policy is transferred to, or a death benefit is paid to, an individual two or more generations younger than the Owner. Regulations issued under the Code may require us to deduct the tax from your policy, or from any applicable payment, and pay it directly to the IRS.

Annuity Purchases by Residents of Puerto Rico

The IRS recently announced that income received by residents of Puerto Rico under life insurance or annuity policies issued by a Puerto Rico branch of a United States life insurance company is U.S.-source income that is generally subject to United States federal income tax.

Annuity Policies Purchased by Nonresident Aliens and Foreign Corporations

The discussion above provided general information (but not tax advice) regarding U.S. federal income tax consequences to annuity owners that are U.S. persons. Taxable distributions made to owners who are not U.S. persons will generally be subject to U.S. federal income tax withholding at a 30% rate, unless a lower treaty rate

45

applies. In addition, distributions may be subject to state and/or municipal taxes and taxes that may be imposed by the owner’s country of citizenship or residence. Prospective foreign owners are advised to consult with a qualified tax adviser regarding U.S., state, and foreign taxation for any annuity policy purchase.

Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act (“FATCA”)

Beginning in 2014, we may be required to withhold at a rate of 30% under FATCA on certain distributions to foreign financial institutions and non-financial foreign entities holding accounts on behalf of and/or the assets of U.S. persons unless the foreign entities provide us with certain certifications regarding their status under FATCA on the applicable IRS forms. Prospective foreign entities are advised to consult with a competent tax adviser regarding the application of FATCA to their particular situation.

Qualified Policies

The qualified policy is designed for use with several types of tax-qualified retirement plans which are briefly described below. The tax rules applicable to participants and beneficiaries in tax-qualified retirement plans vary according to the type of plan and the terms and conditions of the plan. Special favorable tax treatment may be available for certain types of contributions and distributions. Adverse tax consequences may result from contributions in excess of specified limits, distributions prior to age 59 ¹/₂ (subject to certain exceptions), distributions that do not conform to specified commencement and minimum distribution rules, and in other specified circumstances. The distribution rules under Section 72(s) of the Code do not apply to annuities provided under a plan described in Sections 401(a), 403(a), 403(b), 408 or 408A of the Code or to an annuity that is qualified funding asset as defined in the Code Section 130(d) of the Code. Some retirement plans are subject to distribution and other requirements that are not incorporated into the policies or our policy administration procedures. Owners, participants, and beneficiaries are responsible for determining that contributions, distributions, and other transactions with respect to the policies comply with applicable law.

Traditional Individual Retirement Annuities. In order to qualify as a traditional individual retirement annuity under Section 408(b) of the Code, a policy must satisfy certain conditions: (i) the owner must be the annuitant; (ii) the policy generally is not transferable by the owner, e.g., the owner may not designate a new owner, designate a contingent owner or assign the policy as collateral security; (iii) subject to special rules, the total premium payments for any calendar year may not exceed the amount specified in the Code for the year, except in the case of a rollover amount or contribution under Section 402(c), 402(e)(6), 403(a)(4), 403(b)(8), 403(b)(10), 408(d)(3) or 457(e)(16) of the Code; (iv) annuity payments or partial surrenders according to the requirements in the IRS regulations must begin no later than April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the annuitant attains age 70 ¹/₂; (v) an annuity payment option with a period certain that will guarantee annuity payments beyond the life expectancy of the annuitant and the beneficiary may not be selected; (vi) certain payments of death benefits must be made in the event the annuitant dies prior to the distribution of the policy value; (vii) the entire interest of the owner is non-forfeitable; and (viii) the premiums must not be fixed. Policies intended to qualify as traditional individual retirement annuities under Section 408(b) of the Code contain such provisions. Amounts in the IRA (other than nondeductible contributions) are taxed when distributed from the IRA. Distributions prior to age 59 ¹/₂ (unless certain exceptions apply) are subject to a 10% penalty tax.

46

Roth Individual Retirement Annuities (Roth IRA). The Roth IRA, under Section 408A of the Code, contains many of the same provisions as a traditional IRA. However, there are some differences. First, the contributions are not deductible and must be made in cash or as a rollover or transfer from another Roth IRA, a traditional IRA or other allowed qualified plan. A rollover from or conversion of an IRA to a Roth IRA may be subject to tax. The ability to make cash contributions to Roth IRAs is available to individuals with earned income and whose modified adjusted gross income is under a specified dollar amount for the year. Subject to special rules, the amount per individual that may be contributed to all IRAs (Roth and traditional) is the deductible amount specified in the Code for the year. Secondly, the distributions are taxed differently. The Roth IRA offers tax-free distributions when made 5 tax years after the first contribution to any Roth IRA of the individual and made after one of the following attaining age 59 ¹/₂, to pay for qualified first time home buyer expenses (lifetime maximum of $10,000), or due to death or disability. All other distributions are subject to income tax when made from earnings and may be subject to a penalty tax unless an exception applies. Please note that specific tax ordering rules apply to Roth IRA distributions. Unlike the traditional IRA, there are no minimum required distributions during the owner’s lifetime; however, minimum required distributions at death are generally the same as for traditional IRAs.

Section 403(b) Plans. Under Section 403(b) of the Code, payments made by public school systems and certain tax exempt organizations to purchase policies for their employees are generally excludable from the gross income of the employee, subject to certain limitations. However, such payments may be subject to FICA (Social Security) taxes. The policy includes a death benefit that in some cases may exceed the greater of the premium payments or the policy value. Additionally, in accordance with the requirements of the Code, Section 403(b) annuities generally may not permit distribution of (i) elective contributions made in years beginning after December 31, 1988, and (ii) earnings on those contributions, and (iii) earnings on amounts attributed to elective contributions held as of the end of the last year beginning before January 1, 1989. Distributions of such amounts will be allowed only upon the death of the employee, on or after attainment of age 59 ¹/₂, severance from employment, disability, or financial hardship, except that income attributable to elective contributions may not be distributed in the case of hardship. These rules may prevent the payment of guaranteed withdrawals under a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit prior to age 59 ¹/₂. For policies issued after 2008, amounts attributable to non-elective contributions may be subject to distribution restrictions specified in the employer’s section 403(b) plan. Employers using the policy in connection with Section 403(b) plans may wish to consult with their tax adviser.

Pursuant to new tax regulations, we generally are required to confirm, with your 403(b) plan sponsor or otherwise, that surrenders you request from a 403(b) policy comply with applicable tax requirements before we process your request. We will defer such payments you request until all information required under the tax law has been received. By requesting a surrender or transfer, you consent to the sharing of confidential information about you, the policy, and transactions under the policy and any other 403(b) policies or accounts you have under the 403(b) plan among us, your employer or plan sponsor, any plan administrator or record keeper, and other product providers.

Corporate Pension and Profit-Sharing Plans and H.R. 10 Plans. Sections 401(a) and 403(a) of the Code permit corporate employers to establish various types of retirement plans for employees and self-employed individuals to establish qualified plans for themselves and their employees. Such retirement plans may permit the purchase of the policies to accumulate retirement savings. Adverse tax consequences to the plan, the participant or both may result if the policy is assigned or transferred to any individual as a means to provide benefit payments. Contributions to and distributions from such plans are limited by the Code and may be subject to penalties.

47

Deferred Compensation Plans. Section 457 of the Code, while not actually providing for a qualified plan as that term is normally used, provides for certain deferred compensation plans with respect to service for state governments, local governments, political subdivisions, agencies, instrumentalities, and certain affiliates of such entities, and tax exempt organizations. Under such plans a participant may specify the form of investment in which his or her participation will be made. For non-governmental Section 457 plans, all such investments, however, are owned by, and are subject to, the claims of the general creditors of the sponsoring employer. Depending on the terms of the particular plan, a non-government employer may be entitled to draw on deferred amounts for purposes unrelated to its Section 457 plan obligations. In general, all amounts received under a non-governmental Section 457 plan are taxable and are subject to federal income tax withholding as wages. Contributions to and distributions from such plans are limited by the Code and may be subject to penalties.

Ineligible Owners-Qualified

We currently will not issue new policies to/or for the following plans: 403(a), 403(b), 412(i)/412(e)(3), 419, 457 (we will in certain limited circumstances accept 457(f) plans), employee stock ownership plans, Keogh/HR-10 plans and any other types of plans at our sole discretion.

Qualified Plan Distribution

For qualified plans under Section 401(a), 403(a), 403(b), and 457, the Code requires that distributions generally must commence no later than the later of April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the owner (or plan participant) (i) reaches age 70 ¹/₂ or (ii) retires, and must be made in a specified form or manner. If a participant is a “5 percent owner” (as defined in the Code), or in the case of an IRA (other than a Roth IRA which is not subject to the lifetime required minimum distribution rules), distributions generally must begin no later than April 1 of the year following the calendar year in which the owner (or plan participant) reaches age 70 ¹/₂. Each owner is responsible for requesting distributions under the policy that satisfy applicable tax rules. We do not attempt to provide more than general information about the use of the policy with the various types of retirement plans. Purchasers of policies for use with any retirement plan should consult their legal counsel and tax adviser regarding the suitability of the policy.

The Code generally requires that interest in a qualified policy be non-forfeitable. If your policy contains a bonus rider with a recapture, forfeiture, or “vesting” feature, it may not be consistent with those requirements. Consult a tax adviser before purchasing a bonus rider as part of a qualified policy.

You should consult your legal counsel or tax adviser if you are considering purchasing an enhanced death benefit or other optional rider, or if you are considering purchasing a policy for use with any qualified retirement plan or arrangement.

Possible Tax Law Changes

Although the likelihood of legislative or regulatory changes is uncertain, there is always the possibility that the tax treatment of the policy could change by legislation, regulation, or otherwise. You should consult a tax adviser with respect to legal or regulatory developments and their effect on the policy.

48

We have the right to modify the policy to meet the requirements of any applicable laws or regulations, including legislative changes that could otherwise diminish the favorable tax treatment that annuity policy owners currently receive.

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

Systematic Payout Option

You can select at any time during the accumulation phase to receive regular withdrawals (i.e., partial surrenders) from your policy by using the Systematic Payout Option. Any payment in excess of the cumulative interest credited at the time of the payment may be subject to an excess interest adjustment. Systematic withdrawals can be made monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, or annually. Each withdrawal must be at least $50. Monthly and quarterly withdrawals must generally be made by electronic funds transfer directly to your checking or savings account. There is no charge for this benefit.

Keep in mind that partial withdrawals under the Systematic Payout Option may be taxable, and if made before age 59 ¹/₂, may be subject to a 10% federal penalty tax.

Liquidity Rider

The optional Liquidity Rider (only available with the B-share) reduces the number of years each premium payment is subject to surrender charges. You can only elect this rider at the time you purchase the policy.

Surrender Charge Schedule. The Liquidity Rider reduces the number of years each premium payment is subject to surrender charges from seven years to four years. The surrender charge will remain unchanged from that of the B-share for the first four years.

Rider Fee. There is an additional charge for this rider which is a percentage of the daily net asset value in the separate account which is deducted in calculating the accumulation unit values. The rider fee is only charged for the first four policy years.

Accumulation Unit Values. We intend to administer the removal of the Liquidity Rider fee by changing to a different class of accumulation units. This will result in adjusting the number of accumulation units and adjusting the unit value of the subaccounts in which you were invested once the Liquidity Rider fee is no longer charged. The elimination of the fee and the adjustment in the number of accumulation units and unit values will not affect policy values.

Termination. The rider is irrevocable.

Please note:

• This feature terminates upon annuitization and there is a mandatory annuitization date.

• We may credit interest in the fixed account (if available) at a lower rate if you select this rider.

49

The Liquidity Rider may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Liquidity Rider. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

Additional Death Distribution

The optional Additional Death Distribution rider pays an additional amount (based on earnings, if any, since the rider was issued) when a death benefit is payable during the accumulation phase under your policy, in certain circumstances. The Additional Death Distribution is only available for issue ages through age 80.

Additional Death Distribution Benefit Amount. The Additional Death Distribution is payable only if you elected the rider prior to the death triggering the payment of the policy death benefit and a death benefit is payable under the policy. The Additional Death Distribution is equal to:

• the Additional Death Distribution factor (see below); multiplied by

• the rider earnings, if any, on the date the death benefit is calculated.

Rider earnings equal:

• the policy value on the date the death benefit is determined; minus

• policy value on the rider date; minus

• premium payments after the rider date; plus

• surrenders after the rider date that exceed the rider earnings on the date of the surrender.

No benefit is payable under the Additional Death Distribution rider if there are no rider earnings on the date the death benefit is calculated.

If you purchase your policy as part of a 1035 exchange or add the Additional Death Distribution rider after you purchase the policy, rider earnings do not include any gains before the 1035 exchange or the date the Additional Death Distribution is added to your policy.

The Additional Death Distribution factor is currently 40% for issue ages under 71 and 25% for issue ages 71-80, based on the annuitant’s age.

No benefit is paid under the rider unless (a) the rider is in force, (b) a death benefit is payable on the policy, and (c) there are rider earnings when the death benefit is calculated.

For purposes of computing taxable gains, both the death benefit payable under the policy and the Additional Death Distribution will be considered.

Please see “Appendix - Additional Death Distribution” for an example which illustrates the Additional Death Distribution payable as well as the effect of a partial surrender on the Additional Death Distribution benefit amount.

50

Spousal Continuation. If a spouse, as the new owner of the policy, elects to continue the policy instead of receiving a death benefit and Additional Death Distribution, the spouse will receive a one-time policy value increase equal to the Additional Death Distribution. At this time the rider will terminate. The spouse will have the option of immediately re-electing the rider through age 80. See TAX INFORMATION - Tax Status of the Policy - Distribution Requirements. (The payment of a death benefit under the policy is triggered by the death of the annuitant.)

Rider Fee. There is an additional charge for this rider which is a percentage of the policy value which, is deducted annually on each rider anniversary prior to annuitization. We will also deduct this fee upon full surrender of the policy or other termination of the rider. The rider fee is deducted pro rata from each investment option. The fee is deducted even during periods when the Additional Death Distribution would not pay any benefit (because there are no rider earnings).

Termination. The rider will remain in effect until:

• you cancel it by notifying our Administrative and Service Office in writing,

• the policy is annuitized or surrendered, or

• the Additional Death Distribution is paid or added to the policy value under a spousal continuation.

Once terminated, the Additional Death Distribution may be re-elected; however, a new rider will be issued and the additional death benefit will be re-determined. Please note that if the rider is terminated and then re-elected, it will only cover gains, if any, since it was re-elected and the terms of the new rider may be different than the terminated rider.

The tax consequences associated with this rider are not clear. This rider may violate the requirements of certain qualified plans and IRAs. Consult a tax adviser before electing this rider for any qualified plan or IRA.

Please note: This feature terminates upon annuitization and there is a mandatory annuitization date.

The Additional Death Distribution may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Additional Death Distribution. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

Additional Death Distribution+

The optional Additional Death Distribution+ rider pays an additional death benefit amount when a death benefit is payable during the accumulation phase under your policy, in certain circumstances. The Additional Death Distribution+ is only available for issue ages through age 75.

Additional Death Distribution+ Benefit Amount. An additional death benefit is only payable if a death benefit is paid on the base policy to which the rider is attached. The amount of the additional benefit is dependent on the amount of time that has passed since the rider date as follows:

• If a death benefit is payable within the first five years after the rider date, the additional benefit amount will be equal to the sum of all rider fees paid since the rider date.

51

• If a death benefit is payable after five years following the rider date, the additional benefit will be equal to the rider benefit base multiplied by the rider benefit percentage.

The rider benefit base at any time is equal to the policy value less any premiums added after the rider date.

The rider benefit percentage may vary but currently equals 30% for issue ages 0 - 70 and 20% for issue ages 71 - 75, based on the annuitant’s age.

No benefit is payable under the Additional Death Distribution+ if the policy value on the date the death benefit is paid is less than the premium payments after the rider date.

For purposes of computing taxable gains, both the death benefit payable under the policy and the additional benefit will be considered.

Please see “Appendix - Additional Death Distribution+” for an example that illustrates the additional death benefit payable as well as the effect of a partial surrender on the Additional Death Distribution+ benefit amount.

Spousal Continuation. If a spouse, as the new owner of the policy, elects to continue the policy instead of receiving the death benefit and Additional Death Distribution+, then the spouse will receive a one-time policy value increase equal to the Additional Death Distribution+. At this time the rider will terminate. The spouse will have the option of immediately re-electing the rider through age 75. See TAX INFORMATION - Tax Status of the Policy - Distribution Requirements. (The payment of a death benefit under the policy is triggered by the death of the annuitant.)

Rider Fee. There is an additional charge for this rider which is a percentage of the policy value which, is deducted annually on each rider anniversary prior to annuitization. We will also deduct this fee upon full surrender of the policy or other termination of the rider.

Please note: the rider fee is deducted pro rata from each investment option. The fee is deducted even during periods when the rider would not pay any benefits.

Termination. The rider will remain in effect until:

• you cancel it by notifying our Administrative and Service Office in writing in good order,

• the policy is annuitized or surrendered, or

• the additional death benefit is paid or added to the policy value under a spousal continuation.

Once terminated, the Additional Death Distribution+ may not be re-elected for one year.

The tax consequences associated with this rider are not clear. This rider may violate the requirements of certain qualified plans and IRAs. Consult a tax adviser before electing this rider for any qualified plan or IRA.

Please note: This feature terminates upon annuitization and there is a maximum annuity commencement date.

52

The Additional Death Distribution+ may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Additional Death Distribution+. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

Nursing Care and Terminal Condition Withdrawal Option

No surrender charges or excess interest adjustments will apply if you make a surrender ($1,000 minimum), under certain circumstances, because you or your spouse has been:

• confined in a hospital or nursing facility for 30 days in a row after the policy issue date; or

• diagnosed with a terminal condition after the policy issue date (usually a life expectancy of 12 months or less).

You may exercise this benefit at any time during the accumulation phase. This benefit is also available to the annuitant or annuitant’s spouse if the owner is not a natural person. There is no restriction on the maximum amount you may surrender under this benefit. There is no charge for this benefit.

This benefit may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states.

Unemployment Waiver

No surrender charges or excess interest adjustments will apply to surrenders after you or your spouse become unemployed in certain circumstances (e.g., because you were terminated, laid off, or otherwise lost your job involuntarily). In order to qualify, you (or your spouse, whichever is applicable) must have been:

• employed full time for at least two years prior to becoming unemployed;

• employed full time on the policy date;

• unemployed for at least 60 days in a row at the time of surrender;

• must have a minimum cash value at the time of surrender of $5,000; and

• you (or your spouse) must be receiving unemployment benefits.

You must provide written proof from your State’s Department of Labor, which verifies that you qualify for and are receiving unemployment benefits at the time of surrender.

You may use this benefit at any time during the accumulation phase. This benefit is also available to the annuitant or annuitant’s spouse if the owner is not a natural person. There is no restriction on the maximum amount you may surrender under this benefit. There is no charge for this benefit.

This benefit may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states.

Telephone Transactions

You may generally make certain transactions by telephone upon our receipt of the appropriate authorization. You will be required to provide certain information for identification purposes when requesting a transaction by telephone and we may record your telephone call. We may also require written confirmation of your request. We will not be liable for losses resulting

53

from telephone requests that we believe are genuine. We reserve the right to revoke your telephone transaction privileges at any time without revoking all owners’ telephone transfer privileges. We may deny the telephone transaction privileges to market timers and frequent or disruptive traders.

Telephone requests must be received while the New York Stock Exchange is open for regular trading to get same-day pricing of the transaction. We may discontinue this option at any time.

We cannot guarantee that telephone transactions will always be available. For example, our offices may be closed during severe circumstances or other emergencies. There may be interruptions in service beyond our control, and if the volume of calls is unusually high, we might not have anyone available, or lines available, to take your call. Although we have taken precautions to help our systems handle heavy use, we cannot promise complete reliability in all circumstances.

Dollar Cost Averaging Program

During the accumulation phase, you may instruct us to automatically make transfers into one or more variable subaccounts in accordance with your allocation instructions. This is known as Dollar Cost Averaging. While Dollar Cost Averaging buys more accumulation units when prices are low and fewer accumulation units when prices are high, it does not guarantee profits or assure that you will not experience a loss.

There are two Dollar Cost Averaging programs available under your policy:

• Traditional—You may specify the dollar amount to be transferred or the number of transfers. Transfers will begin as soon as the program is started. A minimum of $500 per transfer is required. The minimum number of transfers is 6 monthly or 4 quarterly, and the maximum is 24 monthly or 8 quarterly. You can elect to transfer from either the fixed account or money market (see the Dollar Cost Averaging election form).

• Special—You may only elect either a six or twelve month program. Transfers will begin as soon as the program is started. You cannot transfer from another investment option into a Special Dollar Cost Averaging program. This program is only available for new premium, requires transfers from a fixed source, and may credit a higher or lower interest rate than a traditional program. A minimum of $500 per transfer is required ($3,000 or $6,000 to start a 6-month or 12-month program, respectively).

A Dollar Cost Averaging program will begin once we have received in good order all necessary information and the minimum required amount. See OTHER INFORMATION - Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order. Please note: Dollar Cost Averaging programs will not begin on the 29th, 30th, or 31st. If a program would have started on one of those dates, it will start on the 1st business day of the following month. If we receive additional premium payments while a Dollar Cost Averaging program is running, absent new instructions to the contrary, the amount of the Dollar Cost Averaging transfers will increase, but the length of the Dollar Cost Averaging program will not.

NOTE CAREFULLY:

IF:

• we do not receive all necessary information to begin an initial Dollar Cost Averaging program within 30 days of allocating the minimum required amount to a Dollar Cost Averaging program; or

54

• we do not receive the minimum required amount to begin an initial Dollar Cost Averaging program within 30 days of allocating an insufficient amount;

THEN:

• any amount in a fixed source will be transferred to the money market investment option; and

• any amount in a variable source will remain in that variable investment option; and

• new instructions will be required to begin a Dollar Cost Averaging program.

IF:

• we receive additional premium payments after a Dollar Cost Averaging program is completed and the additional premium meets the minimum requirements to start a Dollar Cost Averaging program;

THEN:

• the additional premium payments will be allocated according to the current payment allocations at the time and will not reactivate a completed Dollar Cost Averaging program. (New Dollar Cost Averaging instructions are required to start a new Dollar Cost Averaging program once the previous Dollar Cost Averaging program has completed.)

IF:

• we receive additional premium payments after a Dollar Cost Averaging program is completed, and the additional premium does not meet the minimum requirements to start a Dollar Cost Averaging program;

THEN:

• we will, absent new instructions to the contrary, allocate the additional premium among the subaccounts as identified in the previous Dollar Cost Averaging program.

IF:

• you discontinue a Dollar Cost Averaging program before its completion;

THEN:

• we will, absent new instructions to the contrary, transfer any remaining balance directly into the subaccounts in the Dollar Cost Averaging instructions.

You should consider your ability to continue a Dollar Cost Averaging program during all economic conditions. Transfers from a Dollar Cost Averaging fixed source are not subject to an excess interest adjustment. A Dollar Cost Averaging program can be used in conjunction with a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit (subject to any investment restrictions involving the source). There is no charge for this benefit.

The Dollar Cost Averaging Program may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. See your policy for availability of the fixed account options.

Asset Rebalancing

During the accumulation phase you can instruct us to automatically rebalance the amounts in your subaccounts to maintain your desired asset allocation. This feature is called Asset Rebalancing and can be started and stopped at any time. If a transfer is requested, we will honor the requested transfer and discontinue Asset Rebalancing. New instructions are required to start Asset Rebalancing. Asset Rebalancing ignores amounts in the fixed account. You can choose to rebalance monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, or annually. Asset Rebalancing can be used in

55

conjunction with a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit. Please note, any amounts rebalanced may be immediately transferred to the PAM investment options as applicable under the Portfolio Allocation Method.There is no charge for this benefit.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefits

You may elect one of the following optional riders under the policy that offers guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefits - the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, the Income Link^SM Rider, the Retirement Income Max^SM Rider or the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider. Important aspects of each of these riders are summarized in the “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal benefit Comparison Table” and are described in more detail below. You should consult with tax and financial professionals to determine which of these riders is appropriate for you.

Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider

You may elect to purchase the optional Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider (also known as Living Benefits Rider) which provides you with a guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit and a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit. The Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider is only available during the accumulation phase. The Living Benefits Rider is only available for annuitant issue ages through age 80. The maximum issue age may be lower if required by state law.

You should view the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider as a way to permit you to invest in variable investment options while still having your policy value and liquidity protected to the extent provided by the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider.

Please note:

• Certain protections under the rider are available only if you hold the rider for ten years.

• If you elect the rider, we will monitor your policy value and we may transfer amounts back and forth between specified investment options under the policy (including guaranteed period options in the fixed account) and the variable investment options you choose, according to a mathematical model that we will use to assist us in managing portfolio risk and supporting the guarantees under the rider. See Portfolio Allocation Method below.

• Any such transfers out of a guaranteed period option may be subject to an excess interest adjustment. (See Portfolio Allocation Method, below.)

• You will begin paying the rider charge as of the date the rider takes effect, even if you do not begin taking withdrawals for many years, or ever. We will not refund the charges you have paid under the rider if you never choose to take withdrawals and/or if you never receive any payments under the rider.

• We have designed this rider for you to take withdrawals each rider year that are less than or equal to the maximum annual withdrawal amount. You should not purchase this rider if you plan to take withdrawals in excess of the maximum annual withdrawal amount, because such excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or eliminate the value of the guarantees provided by the rider.

• Because the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit under this rider is accessed through regular withdrawals that do not exceed the maximum annual withdrawal amount, the rider may not be appropriate for you if you do not foresee a need for liquidity and your primary objective is to take the maximum advantage of the tax deferral aspect of the policy.

56

• The tax rules for qualified policies may limit the value of this rider. Please consult a qualified tax adviser before electing the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider for a qualified policy.

Guaranteed Minimum Accumulation Benefit of Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider

If you elect the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, we will provide a guaranteed future value. This benefit is intended to provide a level of protection regardless of the performance of the variable investment options you select.

Guaranteed Future Value. We guarantee that, on the guaranteed future value date (ten years after you elect the rider), your policy value will at least equal your guaranteed future value. The guaranteed future value on the rider date (i.e., the date the rider is added to the policy) is the policy value (if X-Share is elected, less any premium enhancements if the rider is added in the first policy year). After the rider date and before the guaranteed future value date, the guaranteed future value is equal to:

• the guaranteed future value on the rider date; plus

• a percentage of subsequent premium payments (as described below); less

• subsequent adjusted partial withdrawals (as described below).

After the guaranteed future value date, the guaranteed future value equals zero.

Subsequent Premium Payments. The percentage of subsequent premium payments that will be added to the guaranteed future value is as follows:

Rider Year	Percent of subsequent premium payments added to guaranteed future value
1	100%
2	90%
3	80%
4	70%
5	60%
6	50%
7	50%
8	50%
9	50%
10	0%

Guaranteed Future Value Adjusted Partial Withdrawals. If you take a partial withdrawal, even withdrawals under the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits, it will reduce your guaranteed future value. The amount of the reduction is referred to as the adjusted partial withdrawal amount, which will be equal to the greater of:

• the guaranteed future value immediately prior to the withdrawal multiplied by the percentage reduction in the policy value resulting from the gross partial withdrawal; or

• the gross partial withdrawal amount.

(The gross partial withdrawal amount is the amount you request, plus any surrender charges or excess interest adjustment that may be applicable.)

57

In other words, if your policy value is greater than the guaranteed future value at the time you make a partial withdrawal, then your guaranteed future value is reduced by the same amount we reduce your policy value. However, if your policy value is less than the guaranteed future value at the time you make a partial withdrawal, then your guaranteed future value will be reduced by more than the amount we reduce your policy value.

See the “Appendix - Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider Adjusted Partial Withdrawals” to this prospectus for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail, including withdrawals that reduce the guaranteed future value by more than the amount of the gross partial withdrawal.

Guaranteed Minimum Accumulation Benefit. On the guaranteed future value date (ten years after you elect the rider), if the policy value is less than the guaranteed future value, we will add an amount equal to the difference to your policy value (the policy value will then be subject to investment risk). This addition will not increase your “principal back” or “for life” total withdrawal bases. After the guaranteed future value date, the guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit will terminate.

Example. Assume you make a single premium payment of $100,000 and you do not make any withdrawals or additional premium payments. If, on the guaranteed future value date, your policy value has declined to $90,000 because of negative investment performance, then we will add $10,000 ($100,000 – $90,000) to your policy value.

Please note: You do not have any protection under the guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit unless you hold the policy with the rider for ten years. If you think that you may terminate the policy or elect to start receiving annuity payments (or if you must begin taking required minimum distributions) before the guaranteed future value date, electing the rider may not be in your best interests.

Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit of Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider

If you elect the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, we will provide a maximum annual withdrawal amount (first as withdrawals from your policy value or, if necessary, as payments from us) regardless of your policy value. This benefit is intended to provide a level of benefits regardless of the performance of the variable investment options you select.

Withdrawal Guarantees. We account for the withdrawals you take under the rider by applying two different withdrawal guarantees:

• “principal back,” for withdrawals of up to 7% of your total withdrawal base.

• “for life,” for withdrawals of up to 5% of your total withdrawal base.

When you make a withdrawal, you do not need to specify it as being under either withdrawal guarantee. Any withdrawals that you take while the rider is in effect could have different impacts under each of the withdrawal guarantees - on your maximum annual withdrawal amount, on your total withdrawal base, and on your minimum remaining withdrawal amount. For example, withdrawals that are compliant with the “principal back” maximum withdrawal amount could result in excess withdrawals under the “for life” withdrawal guarantee and, consequently, would reduce the maximum annual withdrawal amount, the total withdrawal base, and the minimum remaining withdrawal amount under the “for life” withdrawal guarantee. (See Adjusted Partial Withdrawals below.)

58

Example: Assume you make a single premium payment of $100,000 and you have not made any withdrawals or additional premium payments. If you withdraw $6,000, that would be an excess withdrawal of $1,000 ($6,000 - $5,000) under the for life guarantee but not under the principal back guarantee.

Your ability to change the frequency or amount of your withdrawals ceases if your policy value reaches zero.

Of course, you can always withdraw an amount up to your cash value pursuant to your rights under the policy at your discretion. See “Appendix - Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider Adjusted Partial Withdrawals,” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail, including an excess withdrawal that reduces the total withdrawal base by a pro rata amount.

Please note:

• Any amount withdrawn in a rider year (including any surrender charge or excess interest adjustment) in excess of the maximum withdrawal amount is an excess withdrawal.

• The amount of your excess withdrawal will impact the maximum annual withdrawal amount, total withdrawal base, and minimum remaining withdrawal amount under each guarantee and such impact may be on a greater than dollar-for-dollar basis. (See Maximum Annual Withdrawal Benefit, Total Withdrawal Base, and Minimum Remaining Withdrawal Amount, below.)

Withdrawals under the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit also:

• reduce your policy value;

• reduce the guaranteed future value;

• reduce your death benefit and other benefits;

• may be subject to surrender charges or excess interest adjustments;

• may be subject to income taxes and federal tax penalties (See TAX INFORMATION).

Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. Under this benefit:

• you can withdraw up to 7% of your “principal back” total withdrawal base each rider year until your “principal back” minimum remaining withdrawal amount reaches zero.

Example. Assume you make a single premium payment of $100,000 and that you do not make any withdrawals or additional premium payments. Assume that after five years, your policy value has declined to $70,000 solely because of negative investment performance. You could still receive up to $7,000 (7% of $100,000) each rider year for the next fourteen years and $2,000 in the year immediately thereafter so you would get back your full $100,000 (assuming that you do not withdraw more than $7,000 in any one rider year).

— or, you can withdraw up to 5% of your “for life” total withdrawal base each rider year starting with the rider anniversary immediately following the annuitant’s 59th birthday and lasting until the annuitant’s death, unless your “for life” minimum remaining withdrawal amount reaches zero because of “excess withdrawals” (see Adjusted Partial Withdrawals, below). A penalty tax may be assessed on amounts surrendered from the policy before the annuitant reaches age 59 ¹/₂.

Example. Assume you are the owner and annuitant and you make a single premium payment of $100,000 when you are 55 years old. Assume you do not make any withdrawals or additional premium payments. Assume that after five

59

years, your policy value has declined to $70,000 solely because of negative investment performance. You could still receive up to $5,000 (5% of $100,000) each rider year for the rest of your life (assuming that you do not withdraw more than $5,000 in any one rider year).

You can receive up to the maximum annual withdrawal amount each rider year (first as withdrawals from your policy value and, if necessary, as payments from us) under this rider regardless of your policy value; however, once your policy value reaches zero you cannot make premium payments, and all other policy features, benefits, and guarantees (except those provided by this rider) are terminated. In order to continue withdrawals under this rider after your policy value reaches zero, you must select an amount (which cannot exceed the maximum annual withdrawal amount at that time) and frequency (annually, semi-annually, quarterly or monthly) of future withdrawals. Once selected, the amount and frequency of future withdrawals cannot be changed.

Please note:

• Withdrawals under the 5% “for life” guarantee cannot begin until after the rider anniversary following the annuitant’s 59th birthday.

• Any withdrawal before the rider anniversary following the annuitant’s 59th birthday will reduce the benefits under the 5% “for life” guarantee.

• The maximum annual withdrawal amounts described above (the 7% “principal back” and 5% “for life”) are based on rider years, not calendar or policy years (if different from rider years).

• You cannot carry over any portion of your maximum annual withdrawal amount that is not withdrawn during a rider year for withdrawal in a future rider year. This means that if you do not take the maximum annual withdrawal amount during a rider year, you cannot take more than the maximum annual withdrawal amount in the next rider year and maintain the rider’s guarantees.

• Excess withdrawals may cause you to lose the benefit of the rider.

• If you have a qualified policy, minimum required distribution rules may force you to take excess withdrawals to avoid the imposition of a 50% excise tax. Further, some qualified policies have withdrawal restrictions that may (with limited exceptions) prevent you from taking withdrawals before age 59 ¹/₂. You should consult a tax adviser before purchasing this rider with a qualified policy.

Total Withdrawal Base. We use the total withdrawal base to calculate the maximum annual withdrawal amount. The total withdrawal base on the rider date is the policy value (if X-Share is elected, less any premium enhancements if the rider is added in the first policy year). After the rider date, the total withdrawal base is equal to:

• the total withdrawal base on the rider date; plus

• subsequent premium payments; less

• subsequent adjusted partial withdrawals (as described below).

We will calculate separate total withdrawal bases for the “principal back” and “for life” guarantees.

Please note: We determine the total withdrawal base solely to calculate the maximum annual withdrawal amount. Your total withdrawal base is not a cash value, a surrender value, or a death benefit. It is not available for withdrawal, it is not a minimum return for any subaccount, and it is not a guarantee of policy value.

60

Minimum Remaining Withdrawal Amount. The minimum remaining withdrawal amount represents the total amount of guaranteed withdrawals still available under the rider. The minimum remaining withdrawal amount on the rider date is the policy value (if X-Share is elected, less any premium enhancements if the rider is added in the first policy year). After the rider date, the minimum remaining withdrawal amount is equal to:

• the minimum remaining withdrawal amount on the rider date; plus

• subsequent premium payments; less

• subsequent adjusted partial withdrawals (as described below).

We will calculate separate minimum remaining withdrawal amounts for the “principal back” and “for life” guarantees. It is important to calculate separate minimum remaining withdrawal amounts because they can provide different payment amounts not only upon reaching exhaustion but also in certain situations involving continuation after the annuitant’s death.

Adjusted Partial Withdrawals. Each rider year, for each withdrawal guarantee (i.e., “principal back” and “for life”), gross partial withdrawals (the amount that you request be withdrawn, plus any surrender charge or excess interest adjustment that may be applicable) up to the maximum annual withdrawal amount for that withdrawal guarantee, will reduce the minimum remaining withdrawal amount for that withdrawal guarantee on a dollar-for-dollar basis, but will not reduce the total withdrawal base for that withdrawal guarantee. For each withdrawal guarantee, gross partial withdrawals in excess of the maximum annual withdrawal amount for that withdrawal guarantee will reduce the total withdrawal base and minimum remaining withdrawal amount for that withdrawal guarantee by a pro rata amount (possibly to zero). See “Appendix - Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider Adjusted Partial Withdrawals,” which provides examples showing the effect of a withdrawal. Excess withdrawals may cause you to lose the withdrawal guarantees under this rider.

Please note: Gross partial withdrawals that are compliant with the “principal back” withdrawal guarantee (i.e., withdrawals of the “principal back” maximum annual withdrawal amount) and any partial withdrawal before the rider anniversary following the annuitant’s 59th birthday, will result in an excess partial withdrawal under the “for life” guarantee, and will reduce the “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount, the “for life” total withdrawal base, and the “for life” minimum remaining withdrawal amount. Such reduction may be on a greater than dollar-for-dollar basis if the policy value is less than the applicable base.

Rider Fee. There is an additional charge for this rider which is a percentage of the “principal back” total withdrawal base on each rider anniversary which is charged annually before annuitization. We will also deduct the rider fee upon full surrender of the policy or other termination of the rider. The rider fee is deducted from each investment option in proportion to the amount of policy value in each investment option. Generally, the rider fee is deducted regardless of your values (i.e., even if your policy value exceeds your total withdrawal base).

We will continue to calculate the rider fee using the “principal back” total withdrawal base even after the “principal back” minimum remaining withdrawal amount reaches zero. The “principal back” total withdrawal base is always greater than or equal to the “for life” total withdrawal base.

Please note: Because the rider fee is a percentage of your “principal back” total withdrawal base on each rider anniversary, the fee can be substantially more than 0.90% of your policy value if that total withdrawal base is higher than your policy value.

61

Portfolio Allocation Method

If you elect the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, the Portfolio Allocation Method (“PAM”) will automatically be in effect. PAM is designed to help manage portfolio risk and support the guarantees under the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider. Using PAM, we will monitor your policy value and may transfer amounts back and forth between the PAM TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class subaccount (which invests in the Transamerica AEGON U.S. Government Securities VP - Service Class portfolio of the Transamerica Series Trust) or certain guaranteed period options of the fixed account (each a “PAM investment option” and collectively, the “PAM investment options”) and the variable investment options you choose. You should read the underlying fund prospectus for the variable PAM investment option(s) carefully before you elect the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider. We will transfer amounts from your variable investment options to the PAM investment options to the extent we deem necessary to support the guarantees under the rider. We will transfer amounts to the PAM investment options proportionally from all your variable investment options. Currently, PAM transfers are being made to the PAM TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class subaccount. We will not transfer amounts to the PAM investment options if your policy value is greater than guarantees under the rider.

PAM is designed to help reduce portfolio risk associated with negative performance. Using PAM, we will transfer amounts from your variable investment options to the PAM investment options to the extent we deem necessary to help manage portfolio risk and support the guarantees under the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider. You should not view the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider or PAM as a “market timing” tool or other type of investment program designed to enhance your policy value. If you choose this rider, it may result in a lower policy value in certain situations. If policy value is transferred from your chosen variable investment options to the PAM investment options, less of your policy value may be available to participate in any future positive investment performance of your variable investment options. This may potentially provide a lower policy value than if you did not select the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider.

Under PAM, the mathematical model compares a number of interrelated factors including your policy value and the guarantees under the rider to be provided in the future. The mathematical model also uses assumptions for interest rates, the duration of the policy and stock market volatility. The following table sets forth the most influential of these factors and indicates how each one (assuming all other factors remain constant) could trigger a transfer into or out of the PAM subaccounts.

Factor	Direction of Transfer
Policy Value Increases	Transfer to the investment options
Policy Value Decreases	Transfer to the PAM subaccounts
Interest Rates Increase	Transfer to the investment options
Volatility Increases	Transfer to the PAM subaccounts

The amount of the transfer will vary depending on the magnitude and direction of the change in these factors. We may transfer some or all of your policy value to or from the PAM investment options.

Transactions you make also affect the number of PAM transfers including:

• additional premium payments; and

• excess withdrawals.

62

These transactions will change the policy value relative to the guarantees under the rider and may result in additional PAM transfers.

You may not allocate premium payments to, nor transfer policy value into or out of, the PAM investment options. PAM transfers are not subject to any transfer fee and do not count against the number of any free transfers we allow. Transfers out of a fixed account PAM investment option are at our discretion and may be subject to an excess interest adjustment if the transfer occurs before the end of a guarantee period. Any transfer to your variable investment options will be allocated into your variable investment options in proportion to the amount of policy value in each variable investment option.

Generally, transfers to the PAM investment options first occur when the policy value drops by a cumulative amount of 3% to 5% over any period of time, although we may make transfers to the PAM investment options when the policy value drops by a cumulative amount of less than 3% in relation to the guarantees. If the policy value continues to fall, more transfers to the PAM investment options will occur. When a transfer occurs, the transferred policy value is allocated to the PAM investment option(s) we deem appropriate. The policy value allocated to the PAM investment options will remain there unless the performance of your chosen investment options recovers sufficiently to enable us to transfer amounts back to your investment options while maintaining the guarantees under the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider. This generally occurs when the policy value increases by 5% to 10% in relation to the guarantees, although we may require a larger increase before transferring amounts back to your investment options.

The Daily Rebalancing Formula Under the Mathematical Model: As noted above, to limit our exposure under the rider, we transfer policy value from your investment options to the PAM subaccounts, to the extent called for by a mathematical model that will not change once you purchase the policy. We do this in order to minimize the need to provide payments (for example, when your policy value goes to zero by other than an excess withdrawal), or to extend the time before any payment is required. When payments become more likely (because your policy value is approaching zero), the mathematical model will tend to allocate more policy value to the PAM subaccounts. If, on the other hand, the policy value is much higher than the guarantees under the rider, then payments may not be necessary, and therefore, the mathematical model will tend to allocate more policy value to the investment options.

Each business day the mathematical model computes a “target allocation,” which is the portion of the policy value that is to be allocated to the investment options.

The target allocation depends on several factors, including the policy value as compared to the guarantees under the rider, the time until payments are likely required, and interest rates. However, as time passes, these factors change. Therefore, the target allocation changes from one business day to the next. The formula is:

Percent of Policy Value required in PAM Subaccount (or X) = e^{-Dividend*Time} *(1- NormDist(d1))

where:

e = Base of the Natural Logarithm

NormDist = Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution

d1 = [ln(G)+(R – F +.5*V ^ 2)* T]/[V * T^.5]

63

In order to calculate the percent of policy value required in the PAM Subaccount, we must first calculate d1:

d1 = [ln(G)+(R – F +.5*V ^ 2)* T]/[V * T^.5]

where:

ln = Natural Logarithm Function—G = Guarantee Ratio—R = Rate—F = Fees—V = Volatility—T = Time

See “Appendix—PAM Method Transfers” for more detail regarding the workings of the mathematical model.

Upgrades

Prior to the annuitant’s 86th birthday and after the third rider anniversary, you can upgrade the total withdrawal base and guaranteed future value to the policy value by providing us the required notice. The minimum remaining withdrawal amounts will also be upgraded to the policy value and the maximum annual withdrawal amounts will be recalculated.

If an upgrade is elected, your current rider will terminate and a new rider will be issued with a new rider date, guaranteed future value date, and its own rider fee percentage (which may be higher than your current rider fee percentage). The “principal back” and “for life” withdrawal percentages will not change. The new rider date will be the date we receive all necessary information.

Annuitization

If you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date, we will allow you to annuitize your policy and elect to receive lifetime annuity payments equal to your 5% “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount.

Termination

The Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider will terminate upon the earliest of the following:

• the date we receive written notice from you in good order requesting termination of the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider (you may not terminate the rider before the third rider anniversary);

• annuitization (however, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date you may choose an annuitization option which guarantees you lifetime payments in an amount equal to your 5% “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount);

• the date the policy to which this rider is attached is assigned or the owner is changed without our approval;

• the date an excess withdrawal reduces your policy value to zero; or

• termination of your policy.

Please note: This feature terminates upon annuitization and there is a maximum annuity commencement date.

The Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

64

Income Link^SM Rider

You may elect to purchase the optional Income Link^SM rider which, provides you with: (1) a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit that uses a higher withdrawal percentage for a defined period of time and then resets to a lower percentage (see Withdrawal Options and Percentages below); and (2) an opportunity for increases in the rider withdrawal amount. This rider is available during the accumulation phase, and requires that you allocate 100% of your policy value in certain designated investment options which are designed to help manage our risk and support the guarantees under the rider. The tax rules for qualified policies may limit the value of this rider. Please consult a qualified tax adviser before electing the Income Link^SM rider for a qualified policy. The date this rider is added to your policy is the “rider date.” You choose the date of the first Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal, which is the Income Link^SM rider start date. If you elect the Income Link^SM rider you cannot elect another GLWB. The guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit is based on the claims-paying ability of Transamerica.

Income Link^SM Rider– Base Benefit

Under this benefit, you can receive up to the rider withdrawal amount each Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year (first as systematic withdrawals from your policy value and, if necessary, as systematic payments from us), beginning on the Income Link^SM rider start date and lasting until the annuitant’s death (unless your withdrawal base is reduced to zero because of any a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal; see Withdrawal Base Adjustments below). The first Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year begins on the Income Link^SM rider start date and each successive Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year begins thereafter on each anniversary of that date.

Income Link^SM Rider – Systematic Withdrawals. In order to begin receiving Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals, you must elect the withdrawal option and frequency (monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually) through which you will receive the Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals (for qualified policies you will also have to elect whether or not to receive your minimum required distribution amount as calculated herein). Any change to the frequency of your Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals will take effect at the beginning of the next Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year. Any other withdrawal, regardless of amount or timing, is a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal. See Withdrawal Base Adjustments below.

Of course, you can always withdraw any amount up to your cash value pursuant to your rights under the policy at your discretion however, withdrawals other than Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals (and certain minimum required distributions) will reduce the withdrawal base. See the “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Income Link^SM Rider” for an example showing the effect of a hypothetical withdrawal in more detail.

Please note:

• You will begin paying the rider charge as of the date the rider takes effect, even if you do not begin taking withdrawals for many years, or ever. We will not refund the charges you have paid under the rider if you never choose to take withdrawals and/or if you never receive any payments under the rider.

• We have designed this rider to allow for Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals from your policy value each Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year that are less than or equal to the rider withdrawal amount. You

65

should not purchase this rider if you plan to take withdrawals in excess of the rider withdrawal amount or on a non-systematic basis, because such withdrawals may significantly reduce or eliminate the value of the guarantees provided by the rider.

• Depending on which withdrawal option you elect, your withdrawal percentage will decrease after second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth or seventh withdrawal year.

• The longer you wait to start taking Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals under the rider, the less time you have to benefit from the guarantee because of decreasing life expectancy as you age. You should carefully consider when to begin making withdrawals. There is a risk that you will not begin making withdrawals at the most financially beneficial time for you.

• Because the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit under this rider is accessed through regular Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals that do not exceed the rider withdrawal amount, the rider may not be appropriate for you if you do not foresee a need for liquidity and your primary objective is to take maximum advantage of the tax deferral aspect of the policy.

• All policy value must be allocated to a limited number of specified funds. You should consult with your registered representative to assist you in determining whether these certain investment options are suited for your financial needs and risk tolerance.

• Any withdrawal that is not an Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal (or certain minimum required distributions) will decrease the withdrawal base; the impact may be on a greater than dollar-for-dollar basis.

• During any Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year, if there is a withdrawal base adjustment, the remaining rider withdrawal amount and the Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount will increase or decrease by the same percentage as the withdrawal base.

• Upon the death of the annuitant (or the death of the surviving spouse if the joint option is elected), the Income Link^SM rider terminates and all benefits thereunder cease.

• The only way to receive withdrawals (either Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals or minimum required distributions) without causing an adjustment to the withdrawal base is to use the Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal programs.

Like all withdrawals, Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals while this rider is in effect also:

• reduce your policy value;

• reduce the amount you can withdraw “adjustment free” as a minimum required distribution;

• reduce your base policy death benefit and other benefits;

• may be subject to surrender charges or excess interest adjustments;

• may be subject to income taxes and federal tax penalties; and

• may be limited or restricted under certain qualified policies.

Rider Withdrawal Amount. You can withdraw up to the rider withdrawal amount systematically each Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year from your policy value without causing an adjustment. See Withdrawal Base Adjustments below. You must use a systematic withdrawal program to withdraw your rider withdrawal amount. Such withdrawals are Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals. Any withdrawal other than an Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal is considered a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal and will result in a withdrawal base adjustment (except for certain minimum required distributions, see Minimum Required Distribution below).

66

The annual rider withdrawal amount is zero until Income Link^SM rider start date. On the Income Link^SM rider start date and at the beginning of each Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year thereafter, the annual rider withdrawal amount is equal to the applicable withdrawal percentage (based on the withdrawal option you elect) multiplied by the withdrawal base. During any Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year, the rider withdrawal amount and Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount may be adjusted up or down as described in the Withdrawal Base Adjustment paragraph below.

Minimum Required Distribution: Prior to the Income Link^SM rider start date, the systematic withdrawal of the minimum required distribution amount (determined as set forth below) will not cause an adjustment. After the Income Link^SM rider start date, the withdrawal of the minimum required distribution amount (determined as set forth below) will not cause an adjustment to the withdrawal base; however, it must be withdrawn pursuant to an Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal program whereby you will receive your Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals and any remaining minimum required distribution amount as calculated herein distributed at the end of the applicable calendar year (not at the end of the applicable rider year).

If the plan participant (generally the annuitant) is at least 70 ¹/₂ years old, you can withdraw via a systematic withdrawal option, an amount equal to any minimum required distribution amount (for the tax year on that rider anniversary) calculated using only: (1) the living annuitant’s age, (2) the IRS Uniform Lifetime table or, if applicable, the Joint Life and Survivor Expectancy table, (3) the policy value of the base policy, (prior to the first rider anniversary we use the policy value on the rider date and thereafter we use the policy value on the date prescribed by the IRS) and (4) amounts from the current calendar year (no carry-over from past years). Minimum required distribution amounts calculated as set forth above and taken via a systematic withdrawal option will not cause an adjustment under this provision of the rider. Any withdrawal during a calendar year will reduce the withdrawal base adjustment free minimum required distribution amount for that year.

Please note: If you want to change the mode of the systematic withdrawal through which you are receiving your “adjustment free” minimum required distribution, your change will not take effect until the next anniversary of your systematic withdrawal program. Likewise, if you stop a systematic withdrawal program you cannot restart a new systematic program until the date that would have been the anniversary of the systematic withdrawal program you stopped. (For example, if you started a monthly systematic withdrawal program to receive your “adjustment free” minimum required distribution amount on August 19, 2013, and stopped it on December 21, 2013, you could not restart a new systematic withdrawal program until August 19, 2014.)

If your policy value reaches zero by other than an excess withdrawal, then you cannot make premium payments and all other policy features, benefits, and guarantees (except those provided by this rider) are terminated. In order to receive benefits guaranteed by this rider after your policy value reaches zero by other than an excess withdrawal, you must select the amount and frequency of future payments. Once selected, the amount and frequency cannot be changed.

Please note:

• The rider withdrawal amount will be zero until the Income Link^SM rider start date, however, you will still be charged a rider fee prior to this time.

• You cannot carry over any portion of your rider withdrawal amount that is not withdrawn during an Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year for withdrawal in a future Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year. This means that

67

if you do not take the entire rider withdrawal amount during an Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year, you cannot take more than the rider withdrawal amount in the next Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year and maintain the rider’s guarantees.

• Non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals may cause you to lose the benefit of the rider.

• All policy value must be allocated to a limited number of specified funds. (See Designated Investment Options.)

Withdrawal Options and Percentages. We use the withdrawal percentage to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. The withdrawal percentage is determined by the withdrawal option you select. The withdrawal percentages, categorized by withdrawal option, are as follows:

Withdrawal Option - number years at increased rate	Withdrawal Percentage - Single Life Option	Withdrawal Percentage - Joint Life Option
7 years	5% for 7 years and 4% thereafter	4.5% for 7 years and 3.5% thereafter
6 years	6% for 6 years and 4% thereafter	5.5% for 6 years and 3.5% thereafter
5 years	7% for 5 years and 4% thereafter	6.5% for 5 years and 3.5% thereafter
4 years	8% for 4 years and 4% thereafter	7.5% for 4 years and 3.5% thereafter
3 years	9% for 3 years and 4% thereafter	8.5% for 3 years and 3.5% thereafter
2 years	10% for 2 years and 4% thereafter	9.5% for 2 years and 3.5% thereafter

Please note, once established, the withdrawal percentage will not increase.

Withdrawal Base. We use the withdrawal base to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. The withdrawal base on the rider date is the policy value (if X-Share is elected, less any premium enhancements if the rider is added in the first policy year). During any rider year, the withdrawal base is equal to the withdrawal base on the rider date or most recent rider anniversary, plus subsequent premium payments, less subsequent withdrawal base adjustments due to non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals.

Please note:

• We determine the withdrawal base solely to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. Your withdrawal base is not a cash value, a surrender value, or a death benefit. It is not available for withdrawal, it is not a minimum return for any subaccount, and it is not a guarantee of policy value.

• Because the withdrawal base is generally equal to the policy value on the rider date, the rider withdrawal amount may be lower if you delay electing the rider and the policy value decreases before you elect the rider.

On each rider anniversary, the withdrawal base will equal the greater of:

• current withdrawal base or;

• the Automatic Step-up amount (see Automatic Step-Up below).

68

Automatic Step-Up. On each rider anniversary, we will automatically step-up the withdrawal base to an amount equal to the greater of (1) the highest policy value on any monthiversary^SM during the preceding rider year, if no non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal occurred, or (2) the policy value on the rider anniversary.

The rider fee percentage may increase (or decrease) at the time of any automatic step-up. The rider fee percentage will not exceed the maximum rider fee percentage in the fee table.

Please note:

• The withdrawal base “steps-up” on rider anniversaries whereas a Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year begins on the Income Link^SM rider start date and each anniversary thereof.

• If an automatic step-up occurs, your remaining rider withdrawal amount and Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount is proportionally increased for the remainder of that Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year.

Automatic Step-Up Opt Out. Each time an automatic step-up results in a rider fee percentage increase, you have the option to reject the automatic step-up and reinstate the withdrawal base and rider fee percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the automatic step-up, provided that you do so within 30 days after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. We must receive your rejection (each time you elect to opt out), in good order, at our Administrative and Service Office within the same 30 day period after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. Opting out of one step-up does not operate as an opt-out of any future step-ups.

Withdrawal Base Adjustments. Premium additions will increase the withdrawal base on a dollar-for-dollar basis. See Automatic Step-Up for a description of how automatic step-ups increase the withdrawal base.

Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals up to the rider withdrawal amount will not reduce the withdrawal base. Non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals will reduce the withdrawal base, however, by the greater of the dollar amount of the withdrawal (if the policy value is greater than the withdrawal base) or a pro rata amount (in proportion to the reduction in the policy value when the policy value is less than the withdrawal base), possibly to zero. See “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Income Link^SM Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail. The effect of a negative adjustment is amplified if the policy value is less than the withdrawal base. See the “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Benefit Adjustment Partial Surrenders - Income Link^SM Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals in more detail, including a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal that reduces the withdrawal base by a pro rata amount. Withdrawal base adjustments occur immediately following premium additions or non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals. If you take a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal that reduces your policy value (and withdrawal base) to zero, then the Income Link^SM rider will terminate and you will lose all its benefits.

Please Note: We do not monitor for non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals or notify you of withdrawal base adjustments. If you take a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal please note your Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount will be reduced.

Designated Investment Options. If you elect this rider, you must designate 100% of your policy value into one or more of the designated investment options:

69

American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2

TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Conservative - Service Class

TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class

TA AllianceBernstein Dynamic Allocation - Service Class

TA Madison Conservative Allocation - Service Class

TA PIMCO Real Return TIPS - Service Class

TA PIMCO Tactical - Conservative - Service Class

TA PIMCO Total Return - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Conservative - Service Class

Fixed Account

Transfers between the designated investment options are allowed as permitted under the policy; however, you cannot transfer any amount (or allocate premium payments) to any non-designated investment option. Following the fifth rider anniversary you can terminate this rider. Starting the next business day, you may transfer (or allocate premium payments) to a non-designated investment option. Terminating the rider will result in losing all your benefits under the rider.

Please note:

• The earliest you can transfer (or allocate premium payments) to a non-designated investment option is the first business day after the fifth rider anniversary. You will be required to terminate the rider first (and lose its benefits).

• We can eliminate a designated investment option at any time. If this occurs, then a policy owner will be required to reallocate values in the affected designated investment options to other designated investment options that meet the allocation requirements.

Income Link^SM Rider– Joint Life Option

If you elect this rider, then you can also elect to postpone termination of the rider until the later of the annuitant or annuitant’s spouse’s death (only if the annuitant’s spouse continues the policy, see TAX INFORMATION - Tax Status of the Policy - Distribution Requirements).

If you elect the Joint Life option, then the withdrawal percentage (used to calculate the rider withdrawal amount) is lower.

Please note:

• The withdrawal percentage for each withdrawal option is lower if you elect this option.

• The annuitant’s spouse must be either a joint owner along with the annuitant or the sole primary beneficiary (and there is no joint owner), if you elect this option.

• A former spouse of the annuitant cannot continue to keep the policy in force if no longer married to the annuitant at the time of the annuitant’s death. In that event, the rider will terminate and no additional withdrawals under the rider will be permitted.

• The annuitant’s spouse for purposes of this rider cannot be changed to a new spouse.

• This option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.

70

Income Link^SM Rider Fees

Income Link^SM Rider Fee. The rider fee is calculated on the rider date and at the beginning of each rider quarter. The rider fee will be adjusted for any premium additions and non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals during the rider quarter. It will be deducted automatically from your policy value at the end of each rider quarter.

On an annual basis, in general terms, the rider fee is the applicable “rider fee percentage” times the withdrawal base.

The quarterly fee is calculated by multiplying (A) by (B) by (C), where:

(A) is the withdrawal base;

(B) rider fee percentage; and

(C) is the number of (remaining) days in the rider quarter divided by the total number of days in the applicable rider year.

We will assess a prorated rider fee upon termination of the rider for the period beginning on the first day of the most recent rider quarter and ending on the date of termination.

Beginning on the first rider anniversary, the rider fee percentage may increase (or decrease) at the time of an automatic step-up. Each time an automatic step-up will result in a rider fee percentage increase, you will have the option to reject the automatic step-up and reinstate the withdrawal base and rider fee percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the automatic step-up (adjusted for any subsequent premium payments or withdrawals), provided that you do so within 30 calendar days after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. We must receive your rejection, in good order, at our Administrative and Service Office within the 30 day period after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred.

Please note regarding the rider fee:

• Because the rider fee is a percentage of the withdrawal base, it could be a much higher percentage of your policy value, particularly in the event that your policy value decreases significantly.

• Because the rider fee is a percentage of the withdrawal base, the amount of the rider fee we deduct will increase if the withdrawal base increases (although the percentage will remain the same).

Rider Fee Adjustment for Withdrawal Base Adjustments. A rider fee adjustment will also be calculated for subsequent premium payments and non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals because these events will change the withdrawal base. The rider fee adjustment compares the fee for the remainder of the rider quarter to the initially calculated fee for the same period. The rider fee adjustment may be positive or negative and will be added to or subtracted from the rider fee to be collected.

We will also deduct the rider fee pro rata upon full surrender of the policy or other termination of the rider.

Income Link^SM Rider Issue Requirements

We will not issue the Income Link^SM rider unless:

• the annuitant is at least 55 years old and not yet 81 years old (lower if required by state law);

• the annuitant is also an owner (except in the case of non-natural owners);

71

• there are no more than two owners; and

• if the joint life option is elected, the annuitant’s spouse is at least 55 years old and not yet 81 years old (lower if required by state law) and (1) is a joint owner along with the annuitant or (2) is the sole primary beneficiary (and there is no joint owner). The use of joint life option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.

Termination

The Income Link^SM rider will terminate upon the earliest of the following:

• the date we receive written notice from you requesting termination of the rider if such notice is received by us following the fifth rider anniversary;

• the death of the annuitant (or if the joint life option was elected, the death of the annuitant’s spouse if that spouse continued the policy as the surviving spouse);

• annuitization (however, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date you may choose an annuitization option which guarantees you lifetime payments in an amount equal to your rider withdrawal amount);

• the date the policy to which this rider is attached is assigned or the owner is changed without our approval;

• the date an excess withdrawal reduces your policy value to zero; or

• termination of your policy.

Please note: This rider terminates upon annuitization and there is a maximum annuity commencement date at which time your policy will be annuitized according to its terms. However, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date, we will allow you to annuitize your policy and elect to receive lifetime annuity payments which are at least equal to your rider withdrawal amount. Please contact us for more information concerning your options.

The Income Link^SM rider may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Income Link^SM rider. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

Retirement Income Max^SM Rider

You may elect to purchase the optional Retirement Income Max^SM rider which, provides you with: (1) a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit; and (2) an opportunity for increases in the rider withdrawal amount. This rider is available during the accumulation phase, and requires that you allocate 100% of your policy value in certain designated investment options which are designed to help manage our risk and support the guarantees under the rider. The tax rules for qualified policies may limit the value of this rider. Please consult a qualified tax adviser before electing the Retirement Income Max^SM rider for a qualified policy. If you elect the Retirement Income Max^SM rider you cannot elect another GLWB. The guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit is based on the claims-paying ability of Transamerica.

72

Retirement Income Max^SM – Base Benefit

Under this benefit, you can receive up to the rider withdrawal amount each rider year (first as withdrawals from your policy value and, if necessary because your policy value goes to zero by other than an excess withdrawal, as payments from us for life), starting with the rider year immediately following the annuitant’s (or the annuitant’s spouse if younger and the joint life option is elected) 59th birthday and lasting until the annuitant’s (or surviving spouse’s if the joint life option is elected) death (unless your withdrawal base is reduced to zero because of an “excess withdrawal”; see Withdrawal Base Adjustments, below). A rider year begins on the rider date and thereafter on each anniversary of that date.

Of course, you can always withdraw an amount up to your cash value pursuant to your rights under the policy at your discretion.

See the “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Max^SM Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail.

Please note:

• You will begin paying the rider charge as of the date the rider takes effect, even if you do not begin taking withdrawals for many years, or ever. We will not refund the charges you have paid under the rider if you never choose to take withdrawals and/or if you never receive any payments under the rider.

• We have designed this rider to allow for withdrawals from your policy value each rider year that are less than or equal to the rider withdrawal amount. You should not purchase this rider if you plan to take withdrawals in excess of the rider withdrawal amount, because such excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or eliminate the value of the guarantee provided by the rider.

• The longer you wait to start making withdrawals under the benefit, the less time you have to benefit from the guarantee because of decreasing life expectancy as you age. On the other hand, the longer you wait to begin making withdrawals, the higher your withdrawal percentage may be, the higher the withdrawal base due to growth may be, and the more opportunities you will have to lock in a higher withdrawal base. You should carefully consider when to begin making withdrawals. There is a risk that you will not begin making withdrawals at the most financially beneficial time for you.

• Because the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit under this rider is accessed through regular withdrawals that do not exceed the rider withdrawal amount, the rider may not be appropriate for you if you do not foresee a need for liquidity and your primary objective is to take maximum advantage of the tax deferral aspect of the policy.

• All policy value must be allocated to a limited number of specified funds. You should consult with your registered representative to assist you in determining whether these certain investment options are suited for your financial needs and risk tolerance.

• Cumulative withdrawals in any rider year that are in excess of the rider withdrawal amount are excess withdrawals.

• An excess withdrawal may impact the withdrawal base on a greater than dollar-for-dollar basis and may cause you to lose the benefit of this rider.

• Upon the death of the annuitant (or the death of the surviving spouse if the joint option is elected), the Retirement Income Max^SM rider terminates and all benefits thereunder cease.

73

Like all withdrawals, withdrawals while this rider is in effect also:

• reduce your policy value;

• reduce your base policy death benefit and other benefits;

• may be subject to surrender charges or excess interest adjustments;

• may be subject to income taxes and federal tax penalties; and

• may be limited or restricted under certain qualified policies.

Rider Withdrawal Amount. You can withdraw up to the rider withdrawal amount in any rider year (after age 59) from your policy value without causing an excess withdrawal. See Withdrawal Base Adjustments below.

The rider withdrawal amount is zero if the annuitant (or the annuitant’s spouse if younger and the joint life option is elected) is not 59 years old on the rider date and remains zero until the first day of the rider year after the annuitant’s (or the annuitant’s spouse’s if younger and the joint life option is elected) 59th birthday. If the annuitant (or the annuitant’s spouse if younger and the joint life option is elected) is at least 59 years old on the rider date, then the rider withdrawal amount is equal to the withdrawal base multiplied by the withdrawal percentage (see below).

For qualified policies: If the plan participant (generally the annuitant) is at least 70 ¹/₂ years old, the rider withdrawal amount for that rider year (and each subsequent rider year) is equal to the greater of:

• the rider withdrawal amount described above; or

• an amount equal to any minimum required distribution amount (for the tax year on that rider anniversary) calculated using only: (1) the living annuitant’s age, (2) the IRS Uniform Lifetime table or, if applicable, the Joint Life and Survivor Expectancy table, (3) the policy value of the base policy, (prior to the first rider anniversary we use the policy value on the rider date and thereafter we use the policy value on the date prescribed by the IRS) and (4) amounts from the current calendar year (no carry-over from past years).

Only amounts calculated as set forth above can be used as the rider withdrawal amount. If the minimum required distribution amount (determined as set forth above) exceeds the rider withdrawal amount, the excess will not be treated as an excess withdrawal under the rider. See “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Max^SM Rider” for an example showing the effect of a minimum required distribution amount.

If your policy value reaches zero:

• due to a non-excess withdrawal, then you cannot make premium payments and all other policy features, benefits, and guarantees (except those provided by this rider) are terminated. In order to receive benefits guaranteed by this rider after your policy value reaches zero, (i.e., payments of the rider withdrawal amount for life) you must select the amount and frequency of future payments. Once selected, the amount and frequency cannot be changed.

• due to an excess withdrawal, then this rider terminates (as does the policy).

Please note:

• If the rider is added prior to the annuitant’s 59th birthday, the rider withdrawal amount will be zero until the beginning of the rider year after the annuitant’s 59th birthday, however, you will still be charged a rider fee prior to this time.

74

• You cannot carry over any portion of your rider withdrawal amount that is not withdrawn during a rider year for withdrawal in a future rider year. This means that if you do not take the entire rider withdrawal amount during a rider year, you cannot take more than the rider withdrawal amount in the next rider year and maintain the rider’s guarantees.

• Excess withdrawals may cause you to lose the benefit of the rider.

• All policy value must be allocated to a limited number of specified funds. (See Designated Investment Options below.)

Withdrawal Percentage. We use the withdrawal percentage to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. The withdrawal percentage is determined by the annuitant’s age (or the annuitant’s spouse’s age if younger and the joint life option is elected) at the time of the first withdrawal taken on or after the rider anniversary immediately following the annuitant’s (or the annuitant’s spouse’s if younger and the joint life option is elected) 59th birthday. The withdrawal percentage is as follows:

Age at time of first withdrawal	Withdrawal Percentage - Single Life Option	Withdrawal Percentage - Joint Life Option
0-58	0.0%	0.0%
59-64	4.30%	3.80%
65-79	5.30%	4.80%
³ 80	6.30%	5.80%

Please note, once established, the withdrawal percentage will not generally increase even though the annuitant’s age increases except in certain instances involving automatic step-ups.

Withdrawal Base. We use the withdrawal base to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. The withdrawal base on the rider date is the policy value (if X-Share is elected, less any premium enhancements if the rider is added in the first policy year). During any rider year, the withdrawal base is equal to the withdrawal base on the rider date or most recent rider anniversary, plus subsequent premium payments, less subsequent withdrawal base adjustments due to excess withdrawals.

Please note:

• We determine the withdrawal base solely to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. Your withdrawal base is not a cash value, a surrender value, or a death benefit. It is not available for withdrawal, it is not a minimum return for any subaccount, and it is not a guarantee of policy value.

• Because the withdrawal base is generally equal to the policy value on the rider date, the rider withdrawal amount may be lower if you delay electing the rider and the policy value decreases before you elect the rider.

On each rider anniversary, the withdrawal base will equal the greatest of:

• current withdrawal base;

• the withdrawal base immediately before the rider anniversary, increased by the growth percentage, if any (see Growth below);

• the policy value on any monthiversary^SM, (the same day of the month as the rider date, or the next market day if our Administrative Office or the New York Stock Exchange are closed) including the current rider anniversary (see Automatic Step-Up below).

75

See “Appendix - Hypothetical Example of the Withdrawal Base Calculation - Retirement Income Max^SM Rider” which illustrates the hypothetical example of the withdrawal base calculation.

Growth. On each of the first ten rider anniversaries, we will apply a growth percentage to your withdrawal base if no withdrawal occurred during the preceding rider year. The growth percentage is equal to 5.0% of the withdrawal base immediately before the rider anniversary (i.e., withdrawal base x 0.05).

Please note: Because a withdrawal will eliminate the potential application of the growth percentage for that rider year, you should consider your need or possible need to take withdrawals within the first 10 rider years in deciding whether to purchase the rider.

Automatic Step-Up. On each rider anniversary, we will automatically step-up the withdrawal base to an amount equal to the greater of (1) the highest policy value on any monthiversary^SM during the preceding rider year, if no excess withdrawal occurred, or (2) the policy value on the rider anniversary. This comparison takes place after the application of any applicable growth percentage. The withdrawal percentage (as indicated in the withdrawal percentage table) will also increase if you have crossed into another age band prior to the automatic step-up. Please note, the increase is part of the automatic step-up and if no automatic step-up occurs then there will be no withdrawal percentage increase.

On each rider anniversary the rider fee percentage may increase (or decrease) up to 75 basis points (0.75%) at the time of any automatic step-up (but will not exceed the maximum rider fee percentage in the fee table), i.e., the rider fee percentage is reset to the rider fee percentage then associated with newly issued riders.

Automatic Step-Up Opt Out. Each time an automatic step-up results in a rider fee percentage increase, you have the option to reject the automatic step-up and reinstate the withdrawal base, withdrawal percentage, and rider fee percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the automatic step-up, provided that you do so within 30 days after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. We must receive your rejection (each time you elect to opt out), in good order, at our Administrative and Service Office within the same 30 day period after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. Opting out of one step-up does not operate as an opt-out of any future step-ups.

Withdrawal Base Adjustments. Cumulative gross partial withdrawals up to the rider withdrawal amount in any rider year will not reduce the withdrawal base. Cumulative gross partial withdrawals in excess of the rider withdrawal amount in any rider year (“excess withdrawals”) will reduce the withdrawal base, however, by the greater of the dollar amount of the excess withdrawal (if the policy value is greater than the withdrawal base) or a pro rata amount (in proportion to the reduction in the policy value when the policy value is less than the withdrawal base), possibly to zero. If an excess withdrawal reduces the policy value to zero, this rider will terminate. Withdrawal base adjustments occur immediately following excess withdrawals. See “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Max^SM Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail, including an excess withdrawal that reduces the withdrawal base by a pro rata amount. The effect of an excess withdrawal is amplified if the policy value is less than the withdrawal base.

76

Please Note: We do not monitor for, or notify you of, excess withdrawals. If you take regular or scheduled withdrawals please pay particular attention to any excess withdrawal because your otherwise regular or scheduled non-excess withdrawals may thereafter all be excess withdrawals that reduce or eliminate your benefit on an accelerated basis.

Designated Investment Options. If you elect this rider, you must designate 100% of your policy value into one or more of the designated investment options:

American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2

TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Conservative - Service Class

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Balanced - Service Class

TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class

TA Legg Mason Dynamic Allocation - Balanced - Service Class

TA Madison Balanced Allocation - Service Class

TA Madison Conservative Allocation - Service Class

TA Madison Diversified Income - Service Class

TA PIMCO Real Return TIPS - Service Class

TA PIMCO Tactical - Balanced - Service Class

TA PIMCO Tactical - Conservative - Service Class

TA PIMCO Total Return - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Balanced - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Conservative - Service Class

Fixed Account

Transfers between the designated investment options are allowed as permitted under the policy; however, you cannot transfer any amount (or allocate premium payments) to any non-designated investment option. Within 30 days following the fifth rider anniversary (and each successive fifth rider anniversary), you can terminate this rider. Starting the next business day, you may transfer (or allocate premium payments) to a non-designated investment option. Terminating the rider will result in losing all your benefits under the rider.

Please note:

• The earliest you can transfer (or allocate premium payments) to a non-designated investment option is the first business day after the fifth rider anniversary. You will be required to terminate the rider first (and lose its benefits).

• We can eliminate a designated investment option at any time. If this occurs, then a policy owner will be required to reallocate values in the affected designated investment options to other designated investment options that meet the allocation requirements.

77

Retirement Income Max^SM – Joint Life Option

If you elect this rider, then you can also elect to postpone termination of the rider until the later of the annuitant or annuitant’s spouse’s death (only if the annuitant’s spouse continues the policy, see TAX INFORMATION - Tax Status of the Policy - Distribution Requirements). If you elect the Joint Life option, then the withdrawal percentage (used to calculate the rider withdrawal amount) is lower.

Please note:

• The annuitant’s spouse must be either a joint owner along with the annuitant or the sole primary beneficiary (and there is no joint owner), if you elect this option.

• A former spouse of the annuitant cannot continue to keep the policy in force if no longer married to the annuitant at the time of the annuitant’s death. In that event, the rider will terminate and no additional withdrawals under the rider will be permitted.

• The annuitant’s spouse for purposes of this rider cannot be changed to a new spouse.

• The rider withdrawal percentage is based on the age of the younger of the annuitant and annuitant’s spouse, if you elect this option.

• The withdrawal percentage for each “age at the time of the first withdrawal” is lower if you elect this option.

• This option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.

Retirement Income Max^SM Rider Fees

Retirement Income Max^SM Rider Fee. The rider fee is calculated on the rider date and at the beginning of each rider quarter. The rider fee will be adjusted for any premium additions and excess withdrawals. It will be deducted automatically from your policy value at the end of each rider quarter.

On an annual basis, in general terms, the rider fee is the rider fee percentage times the withdrawal base. Specifically, the quarterly fee is calculated by multiplying (A) by (B) multiplied by (C), where:

(A) is the withdrawal base;

(B) is the rider fee percentage; and

(C) is the number of (remaining) days in the rider quarter divided by the total number of days in the applicable rider year.

Example 1: Calculation at rider issue for first quarter rider fee assuming an initial withdrawal base of $100,000.

=100,000*0.0125*(91/365)

=1,250*(91/365)

=$311.64

We will assess a prorated rider fee upon termination of the rider for the period beginning on the first day of the most recent rider quarter and ending on the date of termination.

On each rider anniversary the rider fee percentage may increase (or decrease) at the time of an automatic step-up. Each time an automatic step-up results in a rider fee percentage increase, you will have the option to reject the automatic step-up and reinstate the withdrawal base and rider fee percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the automatic step-up (adjusted for any subsequent premium payments or withdrawals),

78

provided that you do so within 30 calendar days after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. We must receive your rejection, in good order, at our Administrative and Service Office within the 30 day period after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred.

Please note regarding the rider fee:

• Because the rider fee is a percentage of the withdrawal base, it could be a much higher percentage of your policy value, particularly in the event that your policy value decreases significantly.

• Because the rider fee is a percentage of the withdrawal base, the amount of the rider fee we deduct will increase if the withdrawal base increases (although the percentage(s) may remain the same).

Rider Fee Adjustment for Premium Payments and Excess Withdrawals. A rider fee adjustment will be calculated for subsequent premium payments and excess withdrawals because these events will change the withdrawal base. The rider fee adjustment will be calculated using the same formula as the rider fee and compare the fee for the remainder of the rider quarter to the initially calculated fee for the same period. The rider fee adjustment may be positive or negative and will be added to or subtracted from the rider fee to be collected.

Example 2: Calculation for first quarter fee assuming initial withdrawal base from Example 1 above, plus adjustment for additional premium payment of $10,000 made with 20 days remaining in the first rider quarter. The withdrawal base change equals $10,000. Fee adjustment as follows:

=10,000*0.0125*(20/365)

=125*(20/365)

=$6.85

Total fee assessed at the end of the first rider quarter (assuming no further rider fee adjustments):

=6.85 + 311.64

=$318.49

We will also deduct all rider fees pro rata upon full surrender of the policy or other termination of the rider.

Retirement Income Max^SM Rider Issue Requirements

We will not issue the Retirement Income Max^SM rider unless:

• the annuitant is not yet age 86 (lower if required by state law);

• the annuitant is also an owner (except in the case of non-natural owners);

• there are no more than two owners; and

• if the joint life option is elected, the annuitant’s spouse is also not yet 86 (lower if required by state law) and (1) is a joint owner along with the annuitant or (2) is the sole primary beneficiary (and there is no joint owner).

The use of joint life option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.

Termination

The Retirement Income Max^SM rider will terminate upon the earliest of the following:

• the date we receive written notice from you requesting termination of the rider if such notice is received by us during the 30 days following the fifth rider anniversary or every fifth rider anniversary thereafter;

79

• the death of the annuitant (or if the joint life option was elected, the death of the annuitant’s spouse if that spouse continued the policy as the surviving spouse);

• annuitization (however, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date you may choose an annuitization option which guarantees you lifetime payments in an amount equal to your rider withdrawal amount);

• the date the policy to which this rider is attached is assigned or if the owner is changed without our approval;

• the date an excess withdrawal reduces your policy value to zero; or

• termination of your policy.

Please note: This rider terminates upon annuitization and there is a maximum annuity commencement date at which time your policy will be annuitized according to its terms. However, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date, we will allow you to annuitize your policy and elect to receive lifetime annuity payments which are at least equal to your rider withdrawal amount. Please contact us for more information concerning your options.

The Retirement Income Max^SM rider and additional options may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Retirement Income Max^SM rider. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider

You may elect to purchase the optional Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider which, provides you with: (1) a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit; and (2) an opportunity for increases in the rider withdrawal amount. This rider is available during the accumulation phase, and requires that you allocate 100% of your policy value in certain designated investment options. The tax rules for qualified policies may limit the value of this rider. Please consult a qualified tax adviser before electing the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider for a qualified policy. If you elect the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider you cannot elect another GLWB. The guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit is based on the claims-paying ability of Transamerica.

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 – Base Benefit

Under this benefit, you can receive up to the rider withdrawal amount each rider year (first as withdrawals from your policy value and, if necessary, as payments from us), starting with the rider year immediately following the annuitant’s (or the annuitant’s spouse if younger and the joint life option is elected) 59th birthday and lasting until the annuitant’s death (unless your withdrawal base is reduced to zero because of an “excess withdrawal”; see Withdrawal Base Adjustments and Rider Death Benefit Adjustments, below). A rider year begins on the rider date (the date the rider becomes effective) and thereafter on each anniversary of that date.

Please note:

• You will begin paying the rider charge as of the date the rider takes effect, even if you do not begin taking withdrawals for many years, or ever. We will not refund the charges you have paid under the rider if you never choose to take withdrawals and/or if you never receive any payments under the rider.

80

• We have designed this rider to allow for withdrawals from your policy value each rider year that are less than or equal to the rider withdrawal amount. You should not purchase this rider if you plan to take withdrawals in excess of the rider withdrawal amount, because such excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or eliminate the value of the guarantees provided by the rider.

• The longer you wait to start making withdrawals under the benefit, the less time you have to benefit from the guarantee because of decreasing life expectancy as you age. On the other hand, the longer you wait to begin making withdrawals, the higher your withdrawal percentage may be, the higher the withdrawal base due to growth may be, and the more opportunities you will have to lock in a higher withdrawal base. You should carefully consider when to begin making withdrawals. There is a risk that you will not begin making withdrawals at the most financially beneficial time for you.

• Because the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit under this rider is accessed through regular withdrawals that do not exceed the rider withdrawal amount, the rider may not be appropriate for you if you do not foresee a need for liquidity and your primary objective is to take maximum advantage of the tax deferral aspect of the policy.

• All policy value must be allocated to a limited number of specified investment options. You should consult with your registered representative to assist you in determining whether these investment options are suited for your financial needs and risk tolerance.

• Cumulative withdrawals in any rider year that are in excess of the rider withdrawal amount are excess withdrawals.

• An excess withdrawal may impact the withdrawal base, and rider death benefit (if applicable) on a greater than dollar-for-dollar basis and may eliminate the benefit.

• Any withdrawal will reduce your rider death benefit (if applicable).

• Upon the death of the annuitant (or the death of the surviving spouse if the joint option is elected), the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider terminates and all benefits thereunder cease.

Like all withdrawals, withdrawals while this rider is in effect also:

• reduce your policy value;

• reduce your base policy death benefit and other benefits;

• may be subject to surrender charges or excess interest adjustments;

• may be subject to income taxes and federal tax penalties; and

• may be limited or restricted under certain qualified policies.

Rider Withdrawal Amount. You can withdraw up to the rider withdrawal amount in any rider year (after age 59) from your policy value without causing an excess withdrawal. See Withdrawal Base Adjustments and Rider Death Benefit Adjustments below.

The rider withdrawal amount is zero if the annuitant is not 59 years old on the rider date and remains zero until the first day of the rider year after the annuitant’s 59th birthday. If the annuitant (or the annuitant’s spouse if younger and the joint life option is elected) is at least 59 years old on the rider date, then the rider withdrawal amount is equal to the withdrawal base multiplied by the withdrawal percentage (see below).

For qualified policies: If the plan participant (generally the annuitant) is at least 70 ¹/₂ years old, the rider withdrawal amount for that rider year (and each subsequent rider year) is equal to the greater of:

• the rider withdrawal amount described above; or

81

• an amount equal to any minimum required distribution amount (for the tax year on that rider anniversary) calculated using only: (1) the living annuitant’s age, (2) the IRS Uniform Lifetime table or, if applicable, the Joint Life and Survivor Expectancy table, (3) the policy value of the base policy, (prior to the first rider anniversary we use the policy value on the rider date and thereafter we use the policy value on the date prescribed by the IRS) and (4) amounts from the current calendar year (no carry-over from past years).

Only amounts calculated as set forth above can be used as the rider withdrawal amount. If the minimum required distribution amount (determined as set forth above) exceeds the rider withdrawal amount, the excess will not be treated as an excess withdrawal under the rider.

If your policy value reaches zero by other than an excess withdrawal, then you cannot make premium payments and all other policy features, benefits, and guarantees (except those provided by this rider) are terminated. In order to receive benefits guaranteed by this rider after your policy value reaches zero by other than an excess withdrawal, you must select the amount and frequency of future payments. Once selected, the amount and frequency cannot be changed.

Please note:

• If the rider is added prior to the annuitant’s 59th birthday, the rider withdrawal amount will be zero until the beginning of the rider year after the annuitant’s 59th birthday, however, you will still be charged a rider fee prior to this time.

• You cannot carry over any portion of your rider withdrawal amount that is not withdrawn during a rider year for withdrawal in a future rider year. This means that if you do not take the entire rider withdrawal amount during a rider year, you cannot take more than the rider withdrawal amount in the next rider year and maintain the rider’s guarantees.

• Excess withdrawals may cause you to lose the benefit of the rider.

• All policy value must be allocated to a limited number of specified funds. (See Designated Investment Options below.)

Withdrawal Percentage. We use the withdrawal percentage to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. The withdrawal percentage is determined by the annuitant’s age (or the annuitant’s spouse’s age if younger and the joint life option is elected) at the time of the first withdrawal taken on or after the rider anniversary immediately following the annuitant’s (or the annuitant’s spouse’s if younger and the joint life option is elected) 59th birthday. The withdrawal percentage is as follows:

Age at time of first withdrawal	Withdrawal Percentage - Single Life Option	Withdrawal Percentage - Joint Life Option
0-58	0.0%	0.0%
59-64	4.0%	3.5%
65-79	5.0%	4.5%
³ 80	6.0%	5.5%

Please note, once established, the withdrawal percentage will not generally increase even though the annuitant’s age increases except in certain instances involving automatic step-ups.

82

Withdrawal Base. We use the withdrawal base to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. The withdrawal base on the rider date is the policy value. During any rider year, the withdrawal base is equal to the withdrawal base on the rider date or most recent rider anniversary, plus subsequent premium payments, less subsequent withdrawal base adjustments due to excess withdrawals.

Please note:

• We determine the withdrawal base solely to calculate the rider withdrawal amount. Your withdrawal base is not a cash value, a surrender value, or a death benefit. It is not available for withdrawal, it is not a minimum return for any subaccount, and it is not a guarantee of policy value.

• Because the withdrawal base is generally equal to the policy value on the rider date, the rider withdrawal amount may be lower if you delay electing the rider and the policy value decreases before you elect the rider.

On each rider anniversary, the withdrawal base will equal the greatest of:

• Current withdrawal base;

• The withdrawal base immediately before the rider anniversary, increased by the growth percentage, if any (see Growth below);

• The policy value on any monthiversary^SM, including the current rider anniversary (see Automatic Step-Up below).

Growth. On each of the first ten rider anniversaries, we will apply a growth percentage to your withdrawal base if no withdrawal occurred during the preceding rider year. The growth percentage is equal to 5.0% of the withdrawal base immediately before the rider anniversary (i.e., withdrawal base x 0.05).

Please note: Because a withdrawal will eliminate the potential application of the growth percentage for that rider year, you should consider your need or possible need to take withdrawals within the first 10 rider years in deciding whether to purchase the rider.

Automatic Step-Up. On each rider anniversary, we will automatically step-up the withdrawal base to an amount equal to the greater of (1) the highest policy value on any monthiversary^SM during the preceding rider year, if no excess withdrawal occurred, or (2) the policy value on the rider anniversary. This comparison takes place after the application of any applicable growth percentage. The withdrawal percentage (as indicated in the withdrawal percentage table) will also increase if you have crossed into another age band prior to the automatic step-up. Please note, the increase is part of the automatic step-up and if no automatic step-up occurs then there will be no withdrawal percentage increase.

Beginning on the fifth rider anniversary, the rider fee percentage may increase (or decrease) at the time of any automatic step-up. The rider fee percentage will not exceed the maximum rider fee percentage in the fee table.

Automatic Step-Up Opt Out. Each time an automatic step-up results in a rider fee percentage increase, you have the option to reject the automatic step-up and reinstate the withdrawal base, withdrawal percentage, and rider fee percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the automatic step-up, provided that you do so within 30 days after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. We must receive your rejection (each time

83

you elect to opt out), in good order, at our Administrative and Service Office within the same 30 day period after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. Opting out of one step-up does not operate as an opt-out of any future step-ups.

Withdrawal Base Adjustments. Cumulative gross partial withdrawals up to the rider withdrawal amount in any rider year will not reduce the withdrawal base. Cumulative gross partial withdrawals in excess of the rider withdrawal amount in any rider year (“excess withdrawals”) will reduce the withdrawal base, however, by the greater of the dollar amount of the excess withdrawal (if the policy value is greater than the withdrawal base) or a pro rata amount (in proportion to the reduction in the policy value when the policy value is less than the withdrawal base), possibly to zero. Withdrawal base adjustments occur immediately following excess withdrawals. See “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail, including an excess withdrawal that reduces the withdrawal base by a pro rata amount. The effect of an excess withdrawal is magnified if the policy value is less than the withdrawal base. See the “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical excess withdrawals in more detail.

Please Note: We do not monitor for, or notify you of, excess withdrawals. If you take regular or scheduled withdrawals please pay particular attention to any excess withdrawal because your otherwise regular or scheduled non-excess withdrawals may thereafter all be excess withdrawals that reduce or eliminate your benefit on an accelerated basis.

Example. Assume you are the owner and annuitant and you make a single premium payment of $100,000 when you are 66 years old. Further assume that you do not make any withdrawals or additional premium payments, no automatic step-ups occurred, but that after five years your policy value has declined to $90,000 solely because of negative investment performance. With an annual growth rate percentage of 5.0%, after 5 years the withdrawal base is equal to $127,628 ($100,000 x 1.055). You could receive up to $6,381 which is the applicable withdrawal percentage of 5.0% for the single life option multiplied by the withdrawal base of $127,628, each rider year for the rest of your life (assuming that you take your first withdrawal when you are age 71, that you do not withdraw more than the rider withdrawal amount in any one year and there are no future automatic step-ups.)

Example continued. Assume the same facts as above, but you withdraw $10,000 when you are 71 years old. That excess withdrawal decreases your future rider withdrawal amount to $6,105.

See the “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail.

Designated Investment Options. If you elect this rider, you must designate 100% of your policy value into one or more of the designated investment options in the following designated allocation groups:

84

Designated Allocation Group A

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Growth - Service Class

TA Janus Balanced - Service Class

TA Legg Mason Dynamic Allocation - Growth - Service Class

TA Madison Moderate Growth Allocation - Service Class

TA PIMCO Tactical - Growth - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Growth - Service Class

Designated Allocation Group B

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Balanced - Service Class

TA BlackRock Tactical Allocation - Service Class

TA Legg Mason Dynamic Allocation - Balanced - Service Class

TA Madison Balanced Allocation - Service Class

TA Madison Diversified Income - Service Class

TA Market Participation Strategy - Service Class

TA PIMCO Tactical - Balanced - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Balanced - Service Class

Designated Allocation Group C

American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2

TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Conservative - Service Class

TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class

TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class

TA AllianceBernstein Dynamic Allocation - Service Class

TA Madison Conservative Allocation - Service Class

TA PIMCO Real Return TIPS - Service Class

TA PIMCO Tactical - Conservative - Service Class

TA PIMCO Total Return - Service Class

TA Vanguard ETF Index - Conservative - Service Class

Fixed Account

Transfers between the designated investment options are allowed as permitted under the policy; however, you cannot transfer any amount (or allocate premium payments) to any non-designated investment option. Within 30 days following the fifth rider anniversary (and each successive fifth rider anniversary) you can terminate this rider. Starting the next business day, you may transfer (or allocate premium payments) to a non-designated investment option. Terminating the rider will result in losing all your benefits under the rider.

Please note:

• The earliest you can transfer (or allocate premium payments) to a non-designated investment option is the first business day after the fifth rider anniversary. You will be required to terminate the rider first. If you terminate the rider you will lose all of its benefits.

85

• We can change a designated allocation group or eliminate a designated investment option at any time. If this occurs, then a policy owner will be required to reallocate values in the affected designated investment options to other designated investment options that meet the allocation requirements.

Manual Resets. You can effectively “reset” the withdrawal base to the policy value using a manual process under which your current rider is terminated and a new rider is issued. You can only elect a reset during the 30 day periods following each successive fifth rider anniversary and if all other rider issue requirements are met. When the new rider is issued, the rider withdrawal amount and, if applicable, the rider death benefit will be recalculated. Your new rider will have a new rider date, new rider fee percentage (which may be higher than your current rider fee percentage), and its own terms and benefits (which may not be as advantageous as the current rider). The new rider date will be the date we receive all necessary information in good order. Please note that this “reset” procedure may be referred to as a “manual upgrade” in your policy rider and other materials.

Please note:

• Resets, unlike automatic step-ups, occur only if you so elect during the 30 day window following each successive fifth rider anniversary.

• Resets result in the purchase of a new rider whose terms may be more or less favorable than the current rider whereas automatic step-ups do not require termination of the existing rider and repurchase of a new rider (although fees may increase at the time of an automatic step-up).

• Policy owners may decide to terminate an existing rider if it no longer meets their needs and then elect a new available rider that does.

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 – Additional Options

You may elect the following options with this rider (the options are not mutually exclusive):

• Death Benefit;

• Joint Life; and

• Income Enhancement^SM

There is an additional fee if you elect the Death Benefit and/or the Income Enhancement^SM Benefit option(s) under the rider. If you elect the Joint Life option, then the withdrawal percentage (used to calculate the rider withdrawal amount) is lower. Furthermore, if you elect the Joint Life option in combination with the Death Benefit and/or the Income Enhancement^SM Benefit option(s), then the fee for each of those additional options will be different than under the Single Life option. See Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider Fees below.

Death Benefit. If you elect this rider, you can also elect to add an additional amount to the death benefit payable under the base policy, upon the death of the annuitant (or if the joint life option is selected, the annuitant’s spouse). The additional amount will be equal to the excess, if any, of the rider death benefit over the greater of any optional guaranteed minimum death benefit or the base policy death benefit. The additional amount can be zero. See DEATH BENEFIT.

86

Rider Death Benefit. The rider death benefit on the rider date is the policy value (if X-Share is elected, less any premium enhancements if the rider is added in the first policy year). After the rider date, the rider death benefit is equal to:

• the rider death benefit on the rider date; plus

• subsequent premium payments; less

• adjustments for withdrawals (as described under Rider Death Benefit Adjustments, below).

Rider Death Benefit Adjustments. Gross partial withdrawals up to the rider withdrawal amount in a rider year will reduce the rider death benefit on a dollar-for-dollar basis. Gross partial withdrawals in excess of the rider withdrawal amount in a rider year will reduce the rider death benefit by the greater of the dollar amount of the excess withdrawal or a pro rata amount (in proportion to the reduction in policy value), and possibly to zero. See “Appendix - Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Adjusted Partial Surrenders - Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider” for examples showing the effect of hypothetical withdrawals in more detail, including an excess withdrawal that results in pro rata adjustments. Rider death benefit adjustments occur immediately following all withdrawals.

Please note:

• No additional death benefit is payable if the base policy death benefit (including the guaranteed minimum death benefit) exceeds the rider death benefit. The greater the death benefit payable under the guaranteed minimum death benefit selected, the more likely it is that an additional amount will not be payable under the rider death benefit option.

• Excess withdrawals may eliminate the additional death benefit available with this rider. You will continue to pay the fee for this option, even if the additional death benefit available under the rider is $0.

• Manual resets to the withdrawal base will result in a recalculation of the rider death benefit. However, automatic step-ups will not reset the rider death benefit.

• If an owner who is not the annuitant dies and the surviving spouse continues the policy, then no additional amount is payable. If the policy is not continued, then the surviving owner (who is also the sole beneficiary) may elect to receive lifetime annuity payments equal to the rider withdrawal amount divided by the number of payments each year instead of receiving the policy’s cash value. See TAX INFORMATION - Tax Status of the Policy - Distribution Requirements. (The payment of a death benefit under the policy is triggered by the death of the annuitant.)

• The additional death benefit adjustment differs from the adjusted partial surrender amount for the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefits described in DEATH BENEFIT - Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefits.

Accordingly, withdrawals may effect the additional death benefit differently than the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefits.

The additional death benefit payment option may be referred to as “rider death benefit” on your policy statement and other documents.

Joint Life Benefit. If you elect this rider, then you can also elect to postpone termination of the rider until the later of the annuitant or annuitant’s spouse’s death (only if the annuitant’s spouse continues the policy).

Please note:

• The withdrawal percentage for each “age at the time of first withdrawal” is lower if you elect this option.

87

• The annuitant’s spouse must be either a joint owner along with the annuitant or the sole primary beneficiary (and there is no joint owner), if you elect this option.

• A former spouse of the annuitant cannot continue to keep the policy in force if no longer married to the annuitant at the time of the annuitant’s death. In that event, the rider will terminate and no additional withdrawals under the rider will be permitted.

• The annuitant’s spouse for purposes of this rider cannot be changed to a new spouse.

• The rider withdrawal percentage is based on the age of the younger of the annuitant and annuitant’s spouse, if you elect this option.

• The rider death benefit is not payable until the death of the surviving spouse, if you elect this option.

• You cannot elect a manual reset if the annuitant or annuitant’s spouse is 86 or older (lower if required by state law).

• This option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.

Income Enhancement^SM Option. If you elect this rider, you can also elect to have your withdrawal percentage increase to 150% of the non-income enhanced withdrawal percentage if either the annuitant (or the annuitant’s spouse if the joint life option is elected) is confined, due to a medical necessity in a hospital or nursing facility due to physical or cognitive ailments (not available for policies issued in New York for Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company). Benefits from this option are not available unless the rider has been in effect for 12 months (the “waiting period”) and confinement must meet the elimination period of 180 days within the last 365 days. The elimination period and waiting period can, but do not need to, run concurrently.

Please note:

• You cannot elect the Income Enhancement^SM Option if the qualifying person or persons is/are already admitted to a hospital or already reside in a nursing facility.

• Confinement must be prescribed by a physician based on the individual’s inability to sustain themselves outside of a hospital or nursing facility due to physical or cognitive ailments.

• The increase to the withdrawal percentage stops when the qualifying person or persons is/are no longer confined as described above.

• The hospital and/or nursing facility must meet the criteria listed below to qualify for the benefit.

• You cannot elect the Income Enhancement^SM Option if you are confined in an assisted living facility or a residential care facility.

A Qualifying Hospital must meet the following criteria:

• It is operated pursuant to the laws of the jurisdiction in which it is located;

• It is operated primarily for the care and treatment of sick and injured persons on an inpatient basis;

• It provides 24-hour nursing service by or under the supervision of registered graduate professional nurses;

• It is supervised by a staff of one or more licensed physicians; and

• It has medical, surgical and diagnostic facilities or access to such facilities.

A Qualifying Nursing Facility must meet the following criteria:

• It is operated pursuant to the laws and regulations of the state in which it is located as a nursing facility or Alzheimer’s disease facility;

• It provides care performed or supervised by a registered graduate nurse;

• It provides room and board accommodations; and

88

• Will provide 24-hour nursing services, 7 days a week by an on-site Registered Nurse and related services on a continuing inpatient basis.

• It has a planned program of policies and procedures developed with the advice of, and periodically reviewed by, at least one physician; and

• It maintains a clinical record of each patient.

A Qualifying Nursing Facility does not include:

• Assisted living facilities or residential care facilities;

• A place primarily for treatment of mental or nervous disorders, drug addiction or alcoholism;

• A home for the aged, a rest home, community living center or a place that provides domestic, resident, retirement or educational care;

• Personal care homes, personal care boarding homes, residential or domiciliary care homes;

• A rehabilitation hospital or basic care facilities;

• Adult foster care facilities, congregate care facilities, family and group living assisted living facilities; or

• Other facilities similar to those described above.

We will require confirmation of confinement in a qualifying hospital or a qualifying nursing facility while benefit payouts are being received. Confirmation of that confinement will be attained and approved by completing our “Income Enhancement^SM Election and Proof of Confinement Questionnaire” form. This form requires additional proof of confinement which may be a physician’s statement, a statement from a hospital or nursing facility administrator, or any other information satisfactory to us which may include information from third party or company interviews and/or visits of the facility. If it is determined that the qualifying individual was not confined in an eligible facility as defined above and has received payments under the Income Enhancement^SM Option, those payments could be considered an excess withdrawal and have a negative effect on the rider values. If confinement ceases, you may re-qualify by satisfying another 180-day elimination period requirement.

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Fees

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Base Rider Fee. The base rider fee is calculated on the rider date and at the beginning of each rider quarter. The base rider fee will be adjusted for any premium additions, excess withdrawals, transfers between designated investment groups, or changes to other allocation options during the rider quarter. It will be deducted automatically from your policy value at the end of each rider quarter.

On an annual basis, in general terms, the base rider fee is the applicable rider fee percentage times the withdrawal base.

The base quarterly fee is calculated by multiplying (A) by (B) divided by (C) multiplied by (D), where:

(A) is the withdrawal base;

(B) is the sum of each designated investment group’s rider fee percentage multiplied by the applicable designated investment group’s value;

(C) is the total policy value; and

(D) is the number of (remaining) days in the rider quarter divided by the total number of days in the applicable rider year.

89

We will assess a prorated rider fee upon termination of the rider for the period beginning on the first day of the most recent rider quarter and ending on the date of termination.

Beginning on the fifth rider anniversary, the rider fee percentage may increase (or decrease) at the time of an automatic step-up. Each time an automatic step-up will result in a rider fee percentage increase, you will have the option to reject the automatic step-up and reinstate the withdrawal base and rider fee percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the automatic step-up (adjusted for any subsequent premium payments or withdrawals), provided that you do so within 30 calendar days after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred. We must receive your rejection, in good order, at our Administrative and Service Office within the 30 day period after the rider anniversary on which the automatic step-up occurred.

Please note regarding the base rider fee:

• Because the base rider fee is a percentage of the withdrawal base, it could be a much higher percentage of your policy value, particularly in the event that your policy value decreases significantly.

• Because the base rider fee is a percentage of the withdrawal base, the amount of the base rider fee we deduct will increase if the withdrawal base increases (although the percentage(s) may remain the same).

• If you make a transfer from one designated allocation group to another designated allocation group that has a higher rider fee percentage, then the resulting rider fee will be higher.

Base Rider Fee Adjustment for Transfers. For transfers that you make between different designated investment options in different designated allocation groups on other than the first business day of a rider quarter, a “rider fee adjustment” will be applied. This adjustment is necessary because of differences in the rider fee percentages. The adjustment in the rider fee percentage will ensure that you are charged the correct overall rider fee. The base rider fee adjustment will be calculated using the same formula as the base rider fee and compare the fee for the remainder of the rider quarter to the initially calculated fee for the same period. The rider fee adjustment may be positive or negative and will be added to or subtracted from the rider fee to be allocated.

Base Rider Fee Adjustment for Premium Payments and Excess Withdrawals. A rider fee adjustment will also be calculated for subsequent premium payments and excess withdrawals because these events will change the withdrawal base. The rider fee adjustment will be calculated using the same formula as the base rider fee and compare the fee for the remainder of the rider quarter to the initially calculated fee for the same period. As with the rider fee adjustments calculated for transfers, the rider fee adjustment may be positive or negative and will be added to or subtracted from the rider fee to be collected.

Additional Option Fees. If you elect options with this rider, then you will be charged a fee for each option you elect that is in addition to the rider fee for the base benefit. Each additional fee is charged quarterly before annuitization and is a percentage of the withdrawal base on each rider anniversary.

We will also deduct all rider fees pro rata upon full surrender of the policy or other termination of the rider.

Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider Issue Requirements

We will not issue the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider unless:

• the annuitant is not yet age 86 (lower if required by state law);

90

• the annuitant is also an owner (except in the case of non-natural owners);

• there are no more than two owners; and

• if the joint life option is elected, the annuitant’s spouse is also not yet 86 (lower if required by state law) and (1) is a joint owner along with the annuitant or (2) is the sole primary beneficiary (and there is no joint owner).

The use of joint life option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.

Termination

The Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider and any additional options will terminate upon the earliest of the following:

• the date we receive written notice from you requesting termination of the rider if such notice is received by us during the 30 days following the fifth rider anniversary or every fifth rider anniversary thereafter;

• the death of the annuitant (or if the joint life option was elected, the death of the annuitant’s spouse if that spouse continued the policy as the surviving spouse);

• annuitization (however, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date you may choose an annuitization option which guarantees you lifetime payments in an amount equal to your rider withdrawal amount);

• the date the policy to which this rider is attached is assigned or if the owner is changed without our approval;

• the date an excess withdrawal reduces your policy value to zero; or

• termination of your policy.

Please note: This rider terminates upon annuitization and there is a maximum annuity commencement date at which time your policy will be annuitized according to its terms. However, if you have reached your maximum annuity commencement date, we will allow you to annuitize your policy and elect to receive lifetime annuity payments which are at least equal to your rider withdrawal amount. Please contact us for more information concerning your options.

The Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider and additional options may vary for certain policies, may not be available for all policies, and may not be available in all states. This disclosure explains the material features of the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider. The application and operation of the rider are governed by the terms and conditions of the rider itself.

OTHER INFORMATION

State Variations

The following section describes modifications to this prospectus required by one of more state insurance departments as of the date of this prospectus. Unless otherwise noted, variations apply to all forms of Contracts we issue. References to certain state’s variations do not imply that we actually offer Contracts in each such state. These variations are subject to change without notice and additional variations may be imposed as specific states approve new riders.

Arizona - The right to cancel period for owners that are age 65 and above is 30 days.

91

California - The right to cancel period for owners that are age 60 and above is 30 days. Unless the owners age 60 and above elect otherwise (i.e., elect immediate investment), the initial premium payment will be allocated to the money market subaccount for 35 calendar days and then invested in the investment options selected by the owner. The amount returned under the right to cancel provision if immediate investment is not elected is your premium payment amount.

Connecticut - If the policy is canceled prior to deliver, the amount of your premium payment is returned.

Florida - The right to cancel period for owners that are less than age 65 is 14 days. The right to cancel period for owners that are age 65 and above is 21 days. The unemployment waiver is not available. Notwithstanding any references to withdrawal order sections of the policy, the service charge will be deducted from the policy value’s earnings, if available.

Montana - The unemployment waiver is not available. There is no premium tax in the state of Montana. The premium enhancement recapture does not include unemployment. Only uni-sex factors are used in calculating annuity payments.

New York - The amount returned under the right to cancel provision is the premium payment allocated to the fixed account, if any, plus the policy value in the separate account, if any, including any fees and charges. If the policy is a replacement, the right to cancel period is extended to 60 days. The Unemployment Waiver, Additional Death Distribution, Additional Death Distribution+, telephone transactions and the Income Enhancement^SM option under the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 rider are not available. The issue requirements for the Retirement Income Max^SM Rider are that the annuitant is at least age 56 and not yet age 86 for Single Life and at least age 65 but not yet age 86 for Joint Life. The guaranteed minimum interest rate must be at least the nonforfeiture rate. There is no excess interest adjustment. Premium enhancement recapture does not include unemployment. A surrender charge is not applied at death. The amount of the death benefit payable during the accumulation phase is the greater of the policy value on the date we receive due proof of death and an election of method of settlement or the guaranteed minimum death benefit, if any, on the date of death, plus any additional premium payments received, less any gross withdrawals from the date of death to the date of payment of death proceeds.

Ownership

You, as owner of the policy, exercise all rights under the policy. You can change the owner at any time by notifying us in writing at our Administrative and Service Office. An ownership change may be a taxable event.

Beneficiary

The beneficiary designation will remain in effect until changed. The owner may change the designated beneficiary by sending us written notice. The beneficiary’s consent to such change is not required unless the beneficiary was irrevocably designated or law requires consent. (If an irrevocable beneficiary dies, the owner may then designate a new beneficiary.) The change will take effect as of the date the owner signs the written notice, whether or not the owner is living when the notice is received by us. We will not be liable for any payment made before the written notice is received in our Administrative and Service Office. If more than one beneficiary is designated, and the owner fails to specify their interests, they will share equally. If, upon the death of the annuitant, there is a surviving owner(s), then the surviving owner(s) automatically takes the place of any beneficiary designation.

92

Right to Cancel Period

You may return your policy for a refund, but only if you return it within a prescribed period, which is generally 10 days after you receive the policy, or whatever longer time may be required by state law. The amount of the refund will generally be the premiums paid plus or minus accumulated gains or losses in the separate account. You bear the risk of any decline in policy value during the right to cancel period. However, if state law requires, we will refund your original premium payment(s). We will pay the refund within seven days after we receive in good order within the applicable period at our Administrative and Service Office, written notice of cancellation and the returned policy. The policy will then be deemed void.

Assignment

You can also generally assign the policy any time during your lifetime. We will not be bound by the assignment until we receive written notice of the assignment in good order at our Administrative and Service Office and approve it. We reserve the right, except to the extent prohibited by applicable laws, regulations, or actions of the State insurance commissioner, to require that an assignment will be effective only upon acceptance by us, and to refuse assignments or transfers at any time on a non-discriminatory basis. We will not be liable for any payment or other action we take in accordance with the policy before we approve the assignment. There may be limitations on your ability to assign a qualified policy. An assignment may have tax consequences.

Sending Forms and Transaction Requests in Good Order

We cannot process your requests for transactions relating to the policy until they are received in good order. “Good order” means the actual receipt of the instructions relating to the requested transaction in writing (or, when appropriate, by telephone or electronically), along with all forms, information and supporting legal documentation necessary to effect the transaction. This information and documentation generally includes, to the extent applicable to the transaction: your completed application; the policy number; the transaction amount (in dollars or percentage terms); the names and allocations to and/or from the Subaccounts affected by the requested transaction; the signatures of all policy owners (exactly as registered on the Policy) if necessary; Social Security Number or Taxpayer I.D.; and any other information or supporting documentation that we may require, including any spousal or joint owner’s consents. With respect to purchase requests, “good order” also generally includes receipt of sufficient funds to effect the purchase. We may, in our sole discretion, determine whether any particular transaction request is in good order, and we reserve the right to change or waive any good order requirements at any time.

“Received” or receipt in good order generally means that everything necessary must be received by us, at our Administrative and Service Office specified in the Glossary of Terms. However, in certain cases where applications or transaction requests are transmitted electronically through or by a broker/dealer, “receipt” can mean the point in time when the application or transaction request is electronically transmitted by the broker/dealer (or other financial intermediary), provided that we actually receive the application or transaction request promptly and in good order. We reserve the right to reject electronic transactions that do not meet our requirements.

93

Regulatory Modifications to Policy

We reserve the right to amend the policy or any riders attached thereto as necessary to comply with specific direction provided by state or federal regulators, through change of law, rule, regulation, bulletin, regulatory directives or agreements.

Certain Offers

We may pay you more than your current cash value for your voluntary participation in certain offerings. We will notify you of the terms of any such offers.

Mixed and Shared Funding

Before making a decision concerning the allocation of premium payments to a particular subaccount, please read the prospectuses for the underlying fund portfolios. The underlying fund portfolios are not limited to selling their shares to this separate account and can accept investments from any insurance company separate account or qualified retirement plan. Since the underlying fund portfolios are available to registered separate accounts offering our variable annuity products, as well as variable annuity and variable life products of other insurance companies, and qualified retirement plans, there is a possibility that a material conflict may arise between the interests of this separate account and one or more of the other separate accounts of another participating insurance company. In the event of a material conflict, the affected insurance companies, including us, agree to take any necessary steps to resolve the matter. This may include removing their separate accounts from the underlying fund portfolios. See the underlying fund portfolios prospectuses for more details.

Exchanges and Reinstatements

You can generally exchange one annuity policy for another in a “tax-free exchange” under Section 1035 of the Code. Before making an exchange, you should compare both annuities carefully. Remember that if you exchange another annuity for the one described in this prospectus, then you may pay a surrender charge on the other annuity, and there will be a new surrender charge period under this annuity and other charges may be higher (or lower) and the benefits under this annuity may be different. You should not exchange another annuity for this one unless you determine, after knowing all the facts, that the exchange is in your best interest and not just better for the person trying to sell you this policy (that person will generally earn a commission if you buy this policy through an exchange or otherwise).

You may surrender your policy and transfer your money directly to another life insurance company (sometimes referred to as a 1035 Exchange or a trustee-to-trustee transfer). You may also ask us to reinstate your policy after such a transfer and in certain limited circumstances we will allow you to do so by returning the same total dollar amount of funds to the applicable investment options. The dollar amount will be used to purchase new accumulation units at the then current price. Because of changes in market value, your new accumulation units may be worth more or less than the units you previously owned. We recommend that you consult a tax professional to explain the possible tax consequences of exchanges and/or reinstatements.

94

Voting Rights

To the extent required by law, we will vote all shares of the underlying fund portfolios held in the separate account in accordance with instructions we receive from you and other owners that have voting interests in the portfolios. We will send you and other owners requests for instructions on how to vote those shares. When we receive those instructions, we will vote all of the shares in proportion to those instructions. Accordingly, it is possible for a small number of policy owners (assuming there is a quorum) to determine the outcome of a vote, especially if they have large policy values. If, however, we determine that we are permitted to vote the shares in our own right, we may do so.

Each person having a voting interest will receive proxy material, reports, and other materials relating to the appropriate portfolio.

Legal Proceedings

There are no legal proceedings to which the separate account is a party or to which the assets of the separate account are subject. We, like other life insurance companies, are involved in lawsuits, regulatory audits and examination activity. In some class action and other lawsuits, regulatory audits and examinations involving other insurers, substantial damages have been sought and/or material settlement payments have been made. Although the outcome of any litigation, regulatory audit or examination cannot be predicted with certainty, we believe that at the present time there are no pending or threatened lawsuits, regulatory audits or examinations that are reasonably likely to have a material adverse impact on the separate account, on the ability of Transamerica Capital, Inc., to perform under its principal underwriting agreement, or on our ability to meet our obligations under the policy.

Information About Us

We are engaged in the sale of life and health insurance and annuity policies. Transamerica Life Insurance Company was incorporated under the laws of the State of Iowa on April 19, 1961 as NN Investors Life Insurance Company Inc. and is licensed in all states and the District of Columbia, Guam, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company was incorporated under the laws of the State of New York on October 3, 1947 and is licensed in all states and the District of Columbia. We are a wholly-owned indirect subsidiary of Transamerica Corporation which conducts most of its operations through subsidiary companies engaged in the insurance business or in providing non-insurance financial services. All of the stock of Transamerica Corporation is indirectly owned by AEGON N.V. of The Netherlands, the securities of which are publicly traded. AEGON N.V., a holding company, conducts its business through subsidiary companies engaged primarily in the insurance business.

All obligations arising under the policies, including the promise to make annuity payments, are general corporate obligations of ours. Accordingly, no financial institution, brokerage firm or insurance agency is responsible for our financial obligations arising under the policies.

95

Financial Condition

We pay benefits under your policy from our general account assets and/or from your policy value held in the separate account. It is important that you understand that payments of the benefits depend upon certain factors discussed below.

Assets in the Separate Account. You assume all of the investment risk for your policy value that is allocated to the subaccounts of the separate account. Your policy value in those subaccounts constitutes a portion of the assets of the separate account. These assets are segregated and insulated from our general account, and may not be charged with liabilities arising from any other business that we may conduct.

Assets in the General Account. You also may be permitted to make allocations to guaranteed period options of the fixed account, which are supported by the assets in our general account. Any guarantees under a policy that exceed policy value, such as those associated with any lifetime withdrawal benefit riders and any optional death benefits, are paid from our general account (and not the separate account). Therefore, any amounts that we may be obligated to pay under the policy in excess of policy value are subject to our financial strength and claims-paying ability and our long-term ability to make such payments. The assets of the separate account, however, are also available to cover the liabilities of our general account, but only to the extent that the separate account assets exceed the separate account liabilities arising under the policies supported by it.

We issue other types of insurance policies and financial products as well, and we also pay our obligations under these products from our assets in the general account.

As an insurance company, we are required by state insurance regulation to hold a specified amount of reserves in order to meet all the contractual obligations of our general account. In order to meet our claims-paying obligation we monitor our reserves so that we hold sufficient amounts to cover actual or expected policy and claims payments. However, it is important to note that there are risks to purchasing any insurance product.

State insurance regulators also require insurance companies to maintain a minimum amount of capital, which acts as a cushion in the event that the insurer suffers a financial impairment, based on the inherent risks in the insurer’s operations. These risks include those associated with losses that we may incur as the result of defaults on the payment of interest or principal on our general account assets, which include bonds, mortgages, general real estate investments, and stocks, as well as the loss in market value of these investments.

How to Obtain More Information. We encourage both existing and prospective policy owners to read and understand our financial statements. We prepare our financial statements on a statutory basis. Our financial statements, which are presented in conformity with accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the Iowa Department of Commerce, Insurance Division as well as the financial statements of the separate account - are located in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI). For a free copy of the SAI, simply call or write us at the phone number or address of our Administrative and Service Office referenced in this prospectus. In addition, the SAI’s available on the SEC’s website at http://www.sec.gov. Our financial strength can be found on our website.

96

The Separate Account

Each separate account receives and invests the premium payments that are allocated to it for investment in shares of the underlying fund portfolios. Each separate account is registered with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the 1940 Act. However, the SEC does not supervise the management, the investment practices, or the policies of the separate account or us. Income, gains and losses (whether or not realized), from assets allocated to the separate account are, in accordance with the policies, credited to or charged against the separate account without regard to our other income, gains or losses.

The assets of each separate account are held in our name on behalf of the separate account and belong to us. However, those assets that underlie the policies are not chargeable with liabilities arising out of any other business we may conduct. The separate account may include other subaccounts that are not available under these policies. We do not guarantee the investment results of the Separate Account.

The Funds

At the time you purchase your policy, you may allocate your premium to subaccounts. These are subdivisions of our separate account, an account that keeps you policy assets separate from our company assets. The subaccounts then purchase shares of mutual funds set up exclusively for variable annuity or variable life insurance products. These are not the same mutual funds that you buy through your investment professional even though they may have similar investment strategies and the same portfolio managers. Each underlying fund portfolio has varying degrees of investment risk. Underlying fund portfolios are also subject to separate fees and expenses such as management fees and operating expenses. “Master-feeder” or “fund of funds” invest substantially all of their assets in other funds and will therefor bear a pro-rata share of fees and expenses incurred by both funds. This will reduce your investment return. Read the underlying fund portfolio prospectuses carefully before investing. We do not guarantee the investment results of any underlying fund portfolio. Certain underlying fund portfolios may not be available in all states and in all share classes. Please see “Appendix - Portfolios Associated with the Subaccounts” for additional information.

Distribution of the Policies

Distribution and Principal Underwriting Agreement. We have entered into a principal underwriting agreement with our affiliate, Transamerica Capital, Inc. (TCI), for the distribution and sale of the policies. We pay commissions to TCI which are passed through to selling firms. (See below). We also pay TCI an “override” that is a percentage of total commissions paid on sales of our policies which is not passed through to the selling firms and we may reimburse TCI for certain expenses it incurs in order to pay for the distribution of the policies. TCI markets the policies through bank affiliated firms, national brokerage firms, regional and independent broker-dealers and independent financial planners.

Compensation to Broker-Dealers Selling the Policies. The policies are offered to the public through broker-dealers (“selling firms”) that are licensed under the federal securities laws; the selling firm and/or its affiliates are also licensed under state insurance laws. The selling firms have entered into written selling agreements with us and with TCI as principal underwriter for the policies. We pay commissions through TCI to the selling firms for their sales of the policies.

97

A limited number of affiliated and unaffiliated broker-dealers may also be paid commissions and overrides to “wholesale” the policies, that is, to provide sales support and training to sales representatives at the selling firms. We also provide compensation to a limited number of broker-dealers for providing ongoing service in relation to the policies that have already been purchased.

The selling firms that have selling agreements with us and TCI are paid commissions for the promotion and sale of the policies according to one or more schedules. The amount and timing of commissions may vary depending on the selling agreement, but the maximum commission is 7.2% of premiums (additional amounts may be paid as overrides to wholesalers).

To the extent permitted by Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) rules, TCI may pay (or allow other broker-dealers to provide) promotional incentives or payments in the form of cash or non-cash compensation or reimbursement to some, but not all, selling firms and their sales representatives. These arrangements are sometimes referred to as “revenue sharing” arrangements and are described further below.

The sales representative who sells you the policy typically receives a portion of the compensation we (and our affiliates) pay to the selling firms, depending on the agreement between the selling firm and its registered representative and the firm’s internal compensation program. These programs may include other types of cash and non-cash compensation and other benefits. Ask your sales representative for further information about the compensation your sales representative, and the selling firm that employs your sales representative, may receive in connection with your purchase of a policy. Also inquire about any revenue sharing arrangements that we and our affiliates may have with the selling firm, including the conflicts of interests that such arrangements may create.

You should be aware that a selling firm or its sales representatives may receive different compensation or incentives for selling one product over another. In some cases, these differences may create an incentive for the selling firm or its sales representatives to recommend or sell this policy to you. You may wish to take such incentives into account when considering and evaluating any recommendation relating to the policies.

Special Compensation Paid to Affiliated Firms. We and/or our affiliates provide paid-in capital to TCI and pay the cost of TCI’s operating and other expenses, including costs for facilities, legal and accounting services, and other internal administrative functions. We and/or our affiliates also provide TCI with a percentage of total commissions paid on sales of our policies and provide TCI with capital payments that are not contingent on sales.

TCI’s registered representatives and supervisors may receive non-cash compensation, such as attendance at conferences, seminars and trips (such as travel, lodging and meals in connection therewith), entertainment, merchandise and other similar items, payments, loans, loan forgiveness or loan guaranties.

Additional Compensation That We, TCI and/or Our Affiliates Pay to Selected Selling Firms. TCI, in connection with the sales of the policies, may pay certain selling firms additional cash amounts for “preferred product” treatment of the policies in their marketing programs in order to receive enhanced marketing services and increased access to their sales representatives. In exchange for providing TCI with access to their distribution network, such selling firms may receive additional compensation or reimbursement for, among other things, the hiring and training of sales personnel, marketing, sponsoring of conferences, meetings, seminars, events, and/or other services they provide to us and our affiliates. To the extent permitted by applicable law, TCI and other parties may provide the

98

selling firms with occasional gifts, meals, tickets or other non-cash compensation as an incentive to sell the policies. These special compensation arrangements are not offered to all selling firms and the terms of such arrangements may differ among selling firms.

Special compensation arrangements are calculated in different ways by different selling firms and may be based on past or anticipated sales of the policies and other criteria. For instance, in 2012, TCI, in connection with the sales of our policies, made flat fee payments to several selling firms ranging from $15,000 to $500,000, and payments of between 0.10% and 1.16% on new sales. TCI also paid selling firms special fees based on new sales and/or assets under management.

During 2012, we and/or TCI had such “preferred product” arrangements with the following selling firms:

AXA Advisors LLC

Centarus Financial Inc.

CFD Investments

Citigroup Global Markets

Citizens Investment Services Corporation

BBVA Compass Investment Solutions, Inc.

Equity Services Inc.

Financial Network Invest Corp

FSC Securities

Genworth Financial Securities Corp.

Hantz Financial Services Inc.

Huntington Investment Company

ING Financial Partners

Invest Financial Corporation

Investment Centers Of America

Investacorp

Investors Capital Corp

James T. Borello

LPL Financial (IFP)

M&T Securities Inc.

Merrill Lynch

Morgan Stanley

Multi Financial Securities

Park Avenue Securities

Primevest Financial Services

ProEquities/Protech

Raymond James and Associates

Raymond James Financial Services

Royal Alliance

SagePoint Financial, Inc.

Securities America, Inc.

Sigma Financial Corporation

99

Signator Investors, Inc.

SII Investments Inc.

Smith Barney Div of Citigroup

Summit Equities

SunTrust Investment Services, Inc.

The Investment Center, Inc.

Transamerica Financial Advisors

UBS Financial Services, Inc.

US Bancorp Investments Inc.

Valmark Securities Inc.

Wells Fargo Advisors

Wells Fargo Wealth Brokerage

During 2012, in conjunction with TCI, we paid the following amounts (in addition to sales commissions) to the top 10 selling firms (in terms of amounts paid):

Name of Firm	Amount Paid in 2012
LPL Financial LLC	$1,422,696
Morgan Stanley Smith Barney	$1,395,442
Wells Fargo Wealth Brokerage	$1,204,432
Wells Fargo Advisors	$1,083,661
Transamerica Financial Advisors	$886,784
Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated	$847,433
UBS Financial	$499,696
Raymond James Financial Services	$471,327
National Planning Corporation	$451,124
CCO Investment Services Corp.	$390,414

No specific charge is assessed directly to policy owners or the separate account to cover commissions, non-cash compensation, and other incentives or payments described above. We do intend to recoup commissions and other sales expenses and incentives we pay, however, through fees and charges deducted under the policy and other corporate revenue.

TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Glossary of Terms

The Policy - General Provisions

Investment Experience

Performance

Historical Performance Data

Published Ratings

State Regulation of Us

Administration

Records and Reports

Distribution of the Policies

100

Voting Rights

Other Products

Custody of Assets

Legal Matters

Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

Other Information

Financial Statements

101

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

Accumulation Unit — An accounting unit of measure used in calculating the policy value in the separate account before the annuity commencement date.

Adjusted Policy Value — The policy value increased or decreased by any excess interest adjustment.

Administrative and Service Office — Transamerica Life Insurance Company and Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company, Attention: Customer Care Group, 4333 Edgewood Road NE, Cedar Rapids, IA 52499-0001, (800) 525-6205.

Annuitant — The person on whose life any annuity payments involving life contingencies will be based.

Annuitize (Annuitization) — When you switch from the accumulation phase to the income phase and we begin to make annuity payments to you (or your designee).

Annuity Commencement Date — The date we issue a supplementary contract. In no event can this date be earlier than the third policy anniversary, or later than the last day of the month following the month in which the annuitant attains age 99. You may elect an annuity commencement date at any time by giving us 30 days written notice. The annuity commencement date may have to be earlier for qualified policies and may be earlier if required by state law.

Annuity Payment Option — A method of receiving a stream of annuity payments selected by the owner.

Assumed Investment Return or AIR — The annual effective rate shown in the contract specifications section of the contract that is used in the calculation of each variable annuity payment.

Cash Value — The adjusted policy value less any applicable surrender charge and rider fees (imposed upon surrender).

Excess Interest Adjustment — A positive or negative adjustment to amounts surrendered (both partial or full surrenders and transfers) or applied to annuity payment options from the fixed account guaranteed period options prior to the end of the guaranteed period. The adjustment reflects changes in the interest rates declared by us since the date any payment was received by, or an amount was transferred to, the guaranteed period option. The excess interest adjustment can either decrease or increase the amount to be received by the owner upon full surrender or commencement of annuity payments, depending upon whether there has been an increase or decrease in interest rates, respectively. The excess interest adjustment does not apply to policies issued in New York by Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company.

Fixed Account — One or more investment options that may be available under the policy that are part of our general assets and are not in the separate account.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — Any optional benefit under the policy that provides a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit, including Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, the Income Link^SM Rider, the Retirement Income Max^SM Rider or the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider

102

Guaranteed Period Options — The various guaranteed interest rate periods of the fixed account which we may offer and into which premium payments may be paid or amounts transferred when available.

Owner (You, Your) — The person who may exercise all rights and privileges under the policy.

Policy Date — The date shown on the policy data page attached to the policy and the date on which the policy becomes effective.

Policy Value — On or before the annuity commencement date, the policy value is equal to the owner’s:

• premium payments; minus

• gross surrenders (surrenders plus the surrender charge on the portion of the requested partial surrender that is subject to the surrender charge plus or minus any excess interest adjustment); plus

• interest credited in the fixed account; plus

• accumulated gains in the separate account; minus

• accumulated losses in the separate account; minus

• service charges, rider fees, premium taxes, transfer fees, and other charges, if any.

Policy Year — A policy year begins on the policy date and on each anniversary thereof.

Separate Account — Separate Account VA B and Separate Account VA BNY, separate accounts established and registered as unit investment trusts under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”), to which premium payments under the policies may be allocated.

Separate Account Value — The portion of the policy value that is invested in the separate account.

Subaccount — A subdivision within the separate account, the assets of which are invested in a specified underlying fund portfolios.

Surrender Charge Free Amount — The amount that can be withdrawn each year without incurring any surrender charges.

Valuation Period — The period of time from one determination of accumulation unit values and annuity unit values to the next subsequent determination of those values. Such determination shall be made generally at the close of business on each market day.

Written Notice — Written notice, signed by the owner, that gives us the information we require and is received in good order at the Administrative and Service Office. For some transactions, we may accept an electronic notice such as telephone instructions. Such electronic notice must meet the requirements for good order that we establish for such notices.

You (Your) — The owner of the policy.

103

APPENDIX

PORTFOLIOS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SUBACCOUNTS

Please Note: We reserve the right to change investment choices made by purchasers of the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, including changing the PAM investment option, as we deem necessary to support the guarantees under these riders.

SUBACCOUNT(1)	PORTFOLIO	ADVISOR/SUBADVISOR
ALLIANCEBERNSTEIN VARIABLE PRODUCTS SERIES FUND, INC.
AllianceBernstein Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio - Class B	AllianceBernstein Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio - Class B	AllianceBernstein L.P.
Investment Objective: Maximize total return consistent with the Adviser’s determination of reasonable risk.
AMERICAN FUNDS INSURANCE SERIES ® TRUST
American Funds - Asset Allocation Fund - Class 2	American Funds - Asset Allocation Fund - Class 2	Capital Research and Management CompanySM
Investment Objective: High total return (including income and capital gains) consistent with preservation of capital over the long term.
American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2	American Funds - Bond Fund - Class 2	Capital Research and Management CompanySM
Investment Objective: To provide as high a level of current income as is consistent with the preservation of capital.
American Funds - Growth Fund - Class 2	American Funds - Growth Fund - Class 2	Capital Research and Management CompanySM
Investment Objective: Growth of capital.
American Funds - Growth-Income Fund - Class 2	American Funds - Growth-Income Fund - Class 2	Capital Research and Management CompanySM
Investment Objective: Long-term growth of capital and income.
FIDELITY ® VARIABLE INSURANCE PRODUCTS FUND
Fidelity VIP Balanced Portfolio - Service Class 2	Fidelity VIP Balanced Portfolio - Service Class 2	Fidelity Management & Research Company
Investment Objective: Income and capital growth consistent with reasonable risk.
TRANSAMERICA SERIES TRUST
TA AEGON High Yield Bond - Service Class	Transamerica AEGON High Yield Bond VP – Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: High level of current income by investing in high-yield debt securities.
TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class(2)	Transamerica AEGON Money Market VP – Service Class(2)	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Maximum current income from money market securities consistent with liquidity and preservation of principal.
TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Balanced - Service Class	Transamerica AEGON Active Asset Allocation - Moderate VP - Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation and current income.
TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Conservative - Service Class	Transamerica AEGON Active Asset Allocation - Conservative VP - Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Current income and preservation of capital.
TA AEGON Tactical Vanguard ETF - Growth - Service Class	Transamerica AEGON Active Asset Allocation - Moderate Growth VP - Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation with current income as a secondary objective.
TA AEGON U.S. Government Securities - Service Class	Transamerica AEGON U.S. Government Securities VP – Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: High level of total return as is consistent with prudent investment strategies.
TA AllianceBernstein Dynamic Allocation - Service Class	Transamerica AllianceBernstein Dynamic Allocation VP - Service Class	Alliance Bernstein L.P.
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation and current income.
TA BlackRock Global Allocation - Service Class	Transamerica BlackRock Global Allocation VP - Service Class	Transamerica Asset Management, Inc.
Investment Objective: High total investment return. Total investment return is the combination of capital appreciation and investment income.
TA BlackRock Large Cap Value - Service Class	Transamerica BlackRock Large Cap Value VP – Service Class	BlackRock Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Long-term capital growth.

104

PORTFOLIOS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SUBACCOUNTS — (Continued)

SUBACCOUNT(1)	PORTFOLIO	ADVISOR/SUBADVISOR
TA BlackRock Tactical Allocation - Service Class	Transamerica BlackRock Tactical Allocation VP - Service Class	BlackRock Financial Management, Inc.
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation with current income as secondary objective.
TA Clarion Global Real Estate Securities - Service Class	Transamerica Clarion Global Real Estate Securities VP – Service Class	CBRE Clarion Securities, LLC
Investment Objective: Long-term total return from investments primarily in equity securities of real estate companies. Total return consists of realized and unrealized capital gains and losses plus income.
TA Janus Balanced - Service Class	Transamerica Janus Balanced VP – Service Class	Janus Capital Management LLC
Investment Objective: Long-term capital growth, consistent with preservation of capital and balanced by current income.
TA Legg Mason Dynamic Allocation - Balanced - Service Class	Transamerica Legg Mason Dynamic Allocation - Balanced VP - Service Class	Legg Mason Global Asset Allocation, LLC
Investment Objective: Seeks capital appreciation and income.
TA Legg Mason Dynamic Allocation - Growth - Service Class	Transamerica Legg Mason Dynamic Allocation - Growth VP - Service Class	Legg Mason Global Asset Allocation, LLC
Investment Objective: Seeks capital appreciation and income.
TA Madison Balanced Allocation - Service Class	Transamerica Madison Balanced Allocation VP - Service Class	MEMBERS ® Asset Management
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation and current income.
TA Madison Conservative Allocation - Service Class	Transamerica Madison Conservative Allocation VP - Service Class	MEMBERS ® Asset Management
Investment Objective: Current income and preservation of capital.
TA Madison Diversified Income - Service Class	Transamerica Madison Diversified Income VP - Service Class	MEMBERS ® Asset Management
Investment Objective: High total return through the combination of income and capital appreciation.
TA MFS International Equity - Service Class	Transamerica MFS International Equity VP – Service Class	MFS ® Investment Management
Investment Objective: Capital growth.
TA Morgan Stanley Active International Allocation - Service Class	Transamerica Morgan Stanley Active International Allocation VP – Service Class	Morgan Stanley Investment Management Inc.
Investment Objective: Long-term capital appreciation.
TA Morgan Stanley Mid Cap Growth - Service Class	Transamerica Morgan Stanley Mid-Cap Growth VP – Service Class	Morgan Stanley Investment Management Inc.
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation.
TA PIMCO Real Return TIPS - Service Class	Transamerica PIMCO Real Return TIPS VP - Service Class	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Investment Objective: Maximum real return consistent with preservation of real capital and prudent investment management.
TA PIMCO Tactical - Balanced - Service Class	Transamerica PIMCO Tactical – Balanced VP – Service Class	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Investment Objective: Seeks combination of capital appreciation and income.
TA PIMCO Tactical - Conservative - Service Class	Transamerica PIMCO Tactical – Conservative VP – Service Class	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Investment Objective: Seeks combination of capital appreciation and income.
TA PIMCO Tactical - Growth - Service Class	Transamerica PIMCO Tactical – Growth VP – Service Class	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Investment Objective: Seeks combination of capital appreciation and income.
TA PIMCO Total Return - Service Class	Transamerica PIMCO Total Return VP – Service Class	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Investment Objective: Maximum total return consistent with preservation of capital and prudent investment management.
TA T. Rowe Price Small Cap - Service Class	Transamerica T. Rowe Price Small Cap VP – Service Class	T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc.
Investment Objective: Long-term growth of capital by investing primarily in common stocks of small growth companies.
TA Vanguard ETF Index - Aggressive Growth - Service Class	Transamerica Index 100 VP – Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC

105

PORTFOLIOS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SUBACCOUNTS — (Continued)

SUBACCOUNT(1)	PORTFOLIO	ADVISOR/SUBADVISOR
Investment Objective: Long-term capital appreciation.
TA Vanguard ETF Index - Balanced - Service Class	Transamerica Index 50 VP – Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Balance capital appreciation and income.
TA Vanguard ETF Index - Conservative - Service Class	Transamerica Index 35 VP – Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Current income and preservation of capital.
TA Vanguard ETF Index - Growth - Service Class	Transamerica Index 75 VP – Service Class	AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC
Investment Objective: Capital appreciation as a primary objective and income as a secondary objective.

⁽¹⁾ Some subaccounts may be available for certain policies and may not be available for all policies. You should work with your registered representative to decide which subaccount(s) may be appropriate for you based on a thorough analysis of your particular insurance needs, financial objective, investment goals, time horizons, and risk tolerance.

⁽²⁾  There can be no assurance that the Transamerica AEGON Money Market VP - Service Class portfolio will be able to maintain a stable net asset value per share. during extended periods of low interest rates, and partly as a result of policy charges, the yield on the TA AEGON Money Market - Service Class subaccount may become extremely low and possibly negative.

106

APPENDIX

EXCESS INTEREST ADJUSTMENT EXAMPLES

Money that you surrender from, transfer out of, or apply to an annuity payment option, from a guaranteed period option of the fixed account before the end of its guaranteed period (the number of years you specified the money would remain in the guaranteed period option) may be subject to an excess interest adjustment (“EIA”). At the time you request a surrender, if interest rates set by us have risen since the date of the initial guarantee, the excess interest adjustment will result in a lower cash value. However, if interest rates have fallen since the date of the initial guarantee, the excess interest adjustment will result in a higher cash value.

Excess interest adjustments will not reduce the adjusted policy value for a guaranteed period option below the premium payments and transfers to that guaranteed period option, less any prior partial surrenders and transfers from the guaranteed period option, plus interest at the policy’s minimum guaranteed effective annual interest rate. This is referred to as the excess interest adjustment floor.

The formula that will be used to determine the excess interest adjustment is:

S* (G-C)* (M/12)

S	=	Is the amount (before surrender charges, premium taxes and the application of any Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefits, if any) being surrendered, withdrawn, transferred, paid upon death, or applied to an income option that is subject to the excess interest adjustment.
G	=	Is the guaranteed interest rate for the guaranteed period applicable to “S”;
C	=	Is the current guaranteed interest rate then being offered on new premiums for the next longer option period than “M”. If this policy form or such an option period is no longer offered, “C” will be the U.S. Treasury rate for the next longer maturity (in whole years) than “M” on the 25th day of the previous calendar month, plus up to 0.25%; and.
M	=	Number of months remaining in the current option period for “S”, rounded up to the next higher whole number of months.
*	=	multiplication
^	=	exponentiation (as used in the following examples)

The following examples are for illustrative purposes only and are calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.

107

Excess Interest Adjustment Examples — (Continued)

Example 1 (Full Surrender, rates increase by 3%):

Single premium:	$50,000.00
Guarantee period:	5 Years
Guarantee rate:	5.50% per annum
Surrender:	Middle of policy year 2
Cumulative Earnings	= 54,181.21 – 50,000.00 = 4,181.21
Amount free of excess interest adjustment	= 4,181.21
Amount subject to excess interest adjustment	= 54,181.21 – 4,181.21 = 50,000.00
Excess interest adjustment floor	= 50,000.00 * (1.015) ^ 1.5 = 51,129.21
Excess interest adjustment
G = .055
C = .085
M = 42
Excess interest adjustment	= S* (G-C)* (M/12)
	= 50,000.00 * (.055-.085) * (42/12)
	= -5,250.00, but excess interest adjustment cannot cause the adjusted policy value to fall below the excess interest adjustment floor, so the adjustment is limited to 51,129.21 - 54,181.21 = -3,052.00
Adjusted policy value	= policy value + excess interest adjustment = 54,181.21 + (-3,052.00) = 51,129.21
Upon full surrender of the policy, the net surrender value (adjusted policy value less any surrender charge) will never be less than that required by the non-forfeiture laws of your state.

* This example is for illustrative purposes only. The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate how this feature is calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.

108

Excess Interest Adjustment Examples — (Continued)

Example 2 (Full Surrender, rates decrease by 1%):

Single premium:	$50,000.00
Guarantee period:	5 Years
Guarantee rate:	5.50% per annum
Surrender:	Middle of policy year 2
Policy value at middle of policy year 2	= 50,000.00 * (1.055) ^ 1.5 = 54,181.21
Cumulative Earnings	= 54,181.21 – 50,000.00 = 4,181.21
Amount free of excess interest adjustment	= 4,181.21
Amount subject to excess interest adjustment	= 54,181.21 – 4,181.21 = 50,000.00
Excess interest adjustment floor	= 50,000.00 * (1.015) ^ 1.5 = 51,129.21
Excess interest adjustment
G = .055
C = .045
M = 42
Excess interest adjustment	= S* (G-C)* (M/12)
	= 50,000.00 * (.055-.045) * (42/12) = 1,750.00
Adjusted policy value	= 54,181.21 + 1,750.00 = 55,931.21
Upon full surrender of the policy, the net surrender value will never by less than that required by the non-forfeiture laws of your state. For the purpose of these illustrations no surrender charges are assumed.

* This example is for illustrative purposes only. The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate how this feature is calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.

On a partial surrender, we will pay the policyholder the full amount of surrender requested (as long as the policy value is sufficient). Amounts surrendered will reduce the policy value by an amount equal to:

R - E + SC

R =  the requested partial surrender;

E =  the excess interest adjustment; and

SC =  the surrender charges on (EPW - E); where

EPW =  the excess partial withdrawal amount.

109

Excess Interest Adjustment Examples — (Continued)

Example 3 (Partial Surrender, rates increase by 1%):

Single premium:	$50,000.00
Guarantee period:	5 Years
Guarantee rate:	5.50% per annum
Partial surrender:	$20,000; middle of policy year 2
Policy value at middle of policy year 2	= 50,000.00 * (1.055) ^ 1.5 = 54,181.21
Cumulative Earnings	= 54,181.21 – 50,000.00 = 4,181.21
Amount free of excess interest adjustment	= 4,181.21
Excess interest adjustment
S = 20,000 – 4,181.21 = 15,818.79
G = .055
C = .065
M = 42
E = 15,818.79 * (.055 - .065) * (42/12) = -553.66	= 54,181.21 - (R - E + surrender charge)
Remaining policy value at middle of policy year 2	= 54,181.21 - (20,000.00 - (-553.66) + 0.00) = 33,627.55
* This example is for illustrative purposes only. The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate how this feature is calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.
Example 4 (Partial Surrender, rates decrease by 1%):
Single premium:	$50,000.00
Guarantee period:	5 Years
Guarantee rate:	5.50% per annum
Partial surrender:	$20,000; middle of policy year 2
Policy value at middle of policy year 2	= 50,000.00 * (1.055) ^ 1.5 = 54,181.21
Cumulative Earnings	= 54,181.21 – 50,000.00 = 4,181.21
Amount free of excess interest adjustment	= 4,181.21
Excess interest adjustment
S = 20,000 – 4,181.21 = 15,818.79
G = .055
C = .045
M = 42
E = 15,818.79 * (.055 - .045)* (42/12) = 553.66	= 54,181.21 - (R - E + surrender charge)
Remaining policy value at middle of policy year 2	= 54,181.21 - (20,000.00 – 553.66 + 0.00) = 34,734.87

* This example is for illustrative purposes only. The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate how this feature is calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.

110

APPENDIX

DEATH BENEFIT

Adjusted Partial Surrender. If you make a partial surrender (withdrawal), then your guaranteed minimum death benefit is reduced by an amount called the adjusted partial surrender. The amount of the reduction depends on the relationship between your death benefit and policy value. The adjusted partial surrender is equal to (1) multiplied by (2) divided by (3), where:

(1) is the amount of the gross partial surrender;

(2) is the value of the current death proceeds immediately prior to the gross partial surrender;

(3) is the policy value immediately prior to the gross partial surrender.

The following examples describe the effect of a surrender on the guaranteed minimum death benefit and policy value.

Example 1 (Assumed Facts for Example)

Current guaranteed minimum death benefit before surrender	$75,000
Current policy value before surrender	$50,000
Current death proceeds	$75,000
Total Gross Partial Surrender	$15,494
Adjusted partial surrender = 15,494 * 75,000 / 50,000	$23,241
New guaranteed minimum death benefit (after surrender) = 75,000 – 23,241	$51,759
New policy value (after surrender) = 50,000 - 15,494	$34,506

Summary:
Reduction in guaranteed minimum death benefit	= $	23,241
Reduction in policy value	= $	15,494

* This example is for illustrative purposes only. The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate how this feature is calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.

** The guaranteed minimum death benefit is reduced more than the policy value because the guaranteed minimum death benefit was greater than the policy value just prior to the surrender.

111

Death Benefit — (Continued)

Example 2 (Assumed Facts for Example)

Current guaranteed minimum death benefit before surrender	$50,000
Current policy value before surrender	$75,000
Current death proceeds	$75,000
Total Gross Partial Surrender	$15,556
Adjusted partial surrender = 15,556 * 75,000 / 75,000	$15,556
New guaranteed minimum death benefit (after surrender) = 50,000 - 15,556	$34,444
New policy value (after surrender) = 75,000 - 15,556	$59,444

Summary:
Reduction in guaranteed minimum death benefit	= $15,556
Reduction in policy value	= $15,556

* This example is for illustrative purposes only. The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate how this feature is calculated using hypothetical values. Your experience will vary based on circumstances at the time of withdrawal.

** The guaranteed minimum death benefit and policy value are reduced by the same amount because the policy value was higher than the guaranteed minimum death benefit just prior to the surrender.

112

Death Benefit — (Continued)

Hypothetical Example

In this example, certain death benefit values at various points in time are depicted based on hypothetical assumed rates of performance. This example is for illustrative purposes only and assumes a single $100,000 premium payment by a sole owner and annuitant who is age 50. It further assumes no subsequent premium payments or withdrawals. The difference between the two “Policy Value” columns is the fee for the guaranteed minimum death benefit.

End of Year	Net Rate of Return for Fund*	Policy Value   (No GMDB Elected)	Policy Value (Return of Premium GMDB  Elected)	Return of     Premium GMDB	Policy Value (Annual Step-up   GMDB Elected)	Annual Step-Up GMDB
Issue	N/A	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000
1	-4%	$95,550	$95,400	$100,000	$95,200	$100,000
2	18%	$112,319	$112,000	$100.000	$111,574	$111,574
3	15%	$128,661	$128,128	$100,000	$127,418	$127,418
4	-7%	$119,076	$118,390	$100,000	$117,479	$127,418
5	2%	$120,922	$120,047	$100,000	$118,889	$127,418
6	10%	$132,470	$131,332	$100,000	$129,827	$129,827
7	14%	$150,420	$148,930	$100,000	$146,964	$146,964
8	-3%	$145,230	$143,569	$100,000	$141,379	$146,964
9	17%	$169,266	$167,114	$100,000	$164,283	$164,283
10	6%	$178,660	$176,138	$100,000	$172,826	$172,826

* The assumed rate does reflect the deduction of a hypothetical fund fee but does not reflect the deduction of any other fees, charges or taxes. The death benefit values do reflect the deduction of hypothetical base policy fees and hypothetical death benefit fees. Different hypothetical returns and fees would produce different results.

113

APPENDIX

ADDITIONAL DEATH DISTRIBUTION RIDER

The following example illustrates the Additional Death Distribution additional death benefit payable by this rider as well as the effect of a partial surrender on the Additional Death Distribution benefit amount. The annuitant is less than age 71 on the Rider Date.

Example 1

Policy Value on the Rider Date:	$100,000
Premiums paid after the Rider Date before Surrender:	$25,000
Gross Partial Surrenders after the Rider Date:	$30,000
Policy Value on date of Surrender:	$150,000
Rider Earnings on Date of Surrender (Policy Value on date of surrender – Policy Value on Rider Date – Premiums paid after Rider Date + Surrenders since Rider Date that exceeded Rider Earnings = $150,000 - $100,000 - $25,000 + 0):	$25,000
Amount of Surrender that exceeds Rider Earnings ($30,000 - $25,000):	$5,000
Base Policy Death Benefit on the date of Death Benefit Calculation:	$200,000
Policy Value on the date of Death Benefit Calculations:	$175,000
Rider Earnings (= Policy Value on date of Death Benefit Calculations – policy value on Rider Date – Premiums since Rider Date + Surrenders since Rider Date that exceeded Rider Earnings = $175,000 - $100,000 - $25,000 + $5,000):	$55,000
Additional Death Benefit Amount (= Additional Death Benefit Factor * Rider Earnings = 40%* $55,000):	$22,000
Total Death Benefit paid (=Base policy death benefit plus Additional Death Benefit Amount):	$222,000
Example 2
Policy Value on the Rider Date:	$100,000
Premiums paid after the Rider Date before Surrender:	$0
Gross Partial Surrenders after the Rider Date:	$0
Base Policy Death Benefit on the date of Death Benefit Calculation:	$100,000
Policy Value on the date of Death Benefit Calculations:	$75,000
Rider Earnings (= Policy Value on date of death benefit calculations – policy value on Rider Date – Premiums since Rider Date + Surrenders since Rider Date that exceeded Rider Earnings = $75,000 - $100,000 - $0 + $0):	$0
Additional Death Benefit Amount (= Additional Death Benefit Factor * Rider Earnings = 40%* $0):	$0
Total Death Benefit paid (=Base policy death benefit plus Additional Death Benefit Amount):	$100,000

114

APPENDIX

ADDITIONAL DEATH DISTRIBUTION+ RIDER

Assume the Additional Death Distribution+ is added to a new policy opened with $100,000 initial premium. The annuitant is less than age 71 on the Rider Date. On the first and second Rider Anniversaries, the Policy Value is $110,000 and $95,000 respectively when the Rider Fees are deducted. The annuitant adds $25,000 premium in the 3rd Rider Year when the Policy Value is equal to $115,000 and then takes a withdrawal of $35,000 during the 4th Rider Year when the Policy Value is equal to $145,000. After 5 years, the Policy Value is equal to $130,000 and the death proceeds are equal to $145,000.

Example 1

Account Value on Rider Date (equals initial policy value since new policy)	$100,000
Additional Death Benefit during first Rider Year	$0
Rider Fee on first Rider Anniversary (= Rider Fee * Policy Value = 0.55% * $110,000)	$605
Additional Death Benefit during 2nd Rider Year (= sum of total Rider Fees paid)	$605
Rider Fee on second Rider Anniversary (= Rider Fee * Policy Value = 0.55% * $95,000)	$522.50
Additional Death Benefit during 3rd Rider Year (= sum of total Rider Fees paid = $605 + $522.50)	$1,127.50
Rider Benefit Base in 3rd Rider Year prior to Premium addition (= Account Value less premiums added since Rider Date = $115,000 – $0)	$115,000
Rider Benefit Base in 3rd Rider Year after Premium addition (= $140,000 - $25,000)	$115,000
Rider Benefit Base in 4th Rider Year prior to withdrawal (= Account Value less premiums added since Rider Date = $145,000 - $25,000)	$120,000
Rider Benefit Base in 4th Rider Year after withdrawal = (Account Value less premiums added since Rider Date =$110,000 - $25,000)	$85,000
Rider Benefit Base in 5th Rider Year (= $130,000 - $25,000)	$105,000
Additional Death Benefit = Rider Benefit Percentage * Rider Benefit Base = 30% * $105,000	$31,500
Total Death Proceeds in 5th Rider Year (= base policy Death Proceeds + Additional Death Benefit Amount = $145,000 + $31,500)	$176,500

115

APPENDIX

GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT COMPARISON TABLE

Important aspects of the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, the Income Link^SM Rider, the Retirement Income Max^SM Rider or the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider are summararized in the following chart.

Note: The Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, the Income Link^SM Rider, the Retirement Income Max^SM Rider or the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider and any additional options available under these riders, may vary for certain policies and may not be available for all policies; the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Riders may not be available in all states. You should consult with tax and financial professionals to determine which of these riders is appropriate for you.

Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM Rider	Income LinkSM Rider	Retirement Income MaxSM Rider	Retirement Income Choice 1.6SM Rider
Benefit: •   Provides: (1)Guaranteed Minimum Accumulation Benefit (“GMAB”)—Ten years after you elect the rider (“guaranteed future value date”), your policy value will equal your guaranteed future value (calculated as described below). After that date, the guaranteed future value equals zero. (2) Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit (“GMWB”)—a maximum annual withdrawal amount (calculated as described below) regardless of your policy value; we account for withdrawals you take under the rider by applying two different withdrawal guarantees, “principal back,” for withdrawals of up to 7% of your total withdrawal base, or “for life,” for withdrawals up to 5% of your total withdrawal base.	Benefit: •   Provides (1)Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (“GLWB”)—i.e., a level of cash withdrawals (and payments from us, if necessary), which are based on a withdrawal percentage that is higher for a defined period and lower thereafter, regardless of the Designated Investment Option that you select. (2) Automatic Step-Up—We will automatically step-up the withdrawal base on each rider anniversary. You can opt out of the automatic step-up if the automatic step-up would result in an increase in the rider fee percentage.	Benefit: •   Provides: (1) Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (“GLWB”)—i.e., a series of cash withdrawals (and payments from us, if necessary) regardless of the performance of the designated investment options that you select – if you invest in certain designated investment options. (2) Growth—On each of the first 10 rider anniversaries, we add an annual growth credit (5% of the withdrawal base immediately before the rider anniversary) to the withdrawal base if no withdrawals have occurred during the preceding rider year. (3) Automatic Step-Up—We will automatically step-up the withdrawal base on each rider anniversary. You can opt out of the automatic step-up if the automatic step-up would result in an increase in the rider fee percentage.	Benefit: •   Provides: (1) Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (“GLWB”)—i.e., a level of cash withdrawals (and payments from us, if necessary) regardless of the performance of the designated investment options that you select. (2) Growth—On each of the first 10 rider anniversaries, we add an annual growth credit (5% of the withdrawal base immediately before the rider anniversary) to the withdrawal base if no withdrawals have occurred during the preceding rider year. (3) Automatic Step-Up—We will automatically step-up the withdrawal base on each rider anniversary. You can opt out of the automatic step-up if the automatic step-up would result in an increase in the rider fee percentage.

116

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Comparison Table — (Continued)

Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM Rider	Income LinkSM Rider	Retirement Income MaxSM Rider	Retirement Income Choice 1.6SM Rider
•   Upgrades: (1) Before the annuitant’s 86th birthday, you can upgrade the total withdrawal base (for GMWB) and the guaranteed future value (for GMAB) by sending us written notice. (2) If you upgrade, the current rider terminates and a new rider is issued (which may have a higher rider fee).			•   Upgrades: You may request by sending us written notice. If you elect to manually reset, the current rider terminates and a new rider is issued (which may have a higher rider fee percentage and lower growth rate percentage.) If you have elected the joint life option under the rider, you cannot elect a manual reset if the annuitant or the annuitant’s spouse is 86 or older (unless state law requires a lower maximum age).

117

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Comparison Table — (Continued)

Guaranteed Principal     SolutionSM  Rider	Income LinkSM Rider	Retirement Income MaxSM Rider	Retirement Income Choice 1.6SM Rider
	•     Additional Options: (1) Joint Life Option—You may elect to postpone termination of the rider until the later of the death of the annuitant or the death of the annuitant’s spouse. The annuitant’s spouse must be either a joint owner (along with the annuitant) or the sole primary beneficiary (without a joint owner). (2) The use of joint life option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.	•     Additional Options: (1) Joint Life Option—You may elect to postpone termination of the rider until the later of the death of the annuitant or the death of the annuitant’s spouse. The annuitant’s spouse must be either a joint owner (along with the annuitant) or the sole primary beneficiary (without a joint owner). (2) The use of joint life option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners.	•     Additional Options: (1) Death Benefit Option— You may add an amount to the death benefit payable under the base policy. (2) Joint Life Option—You may elect to postpone termination of the rider until the later of the death of the annuitant or the death of the annuitant’s spouse. The annuitant’s spouse must be either a joint owner (along with the annuitant) or the sole primary beneficiary (without a joint owner). The use of joint life option may not be permitted in the case of certain non-natural owners. (3) Income EnhancementSM Option—If the rider has been in effect for at least 12 months, then you may elect to have your withdrawal percentage increase to 150% of the non-income enhanced withdrawal percentage if either the annuitant or the annuitant’s spouse, if the joint life option is elected, is confined in a hospital or nursing facility because of a medical necessity, and has been so confined for an “elimination period” (i.e., 180 days within the last 365 days). You cannot elect this option if the qualifying person(s) is/are already confined in a hospital or nursing facility when the rider is elected. In addition, the increase to the withdrawal percentage stops when the qualifying person(s) is/are no longer confined.

118

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Comparison Table — (Continued)

Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM  Rider	Income  LinkSM Rider	Retirement Income MaxSM Rider	Retirement Income Choice 1.6SM Rider
Availability: •   0 - 80 (unless state law requires a lower maximum issue age	Availability: •   At least 55 years old and not yet age 81 (unless state law requires a lower maximum issue age)	Availability: •   Younger than age 86 (unless state law requires a lower maximum issue age)	Availability: •   Younger than age 86 (unless state law requires a lower maximum issue age)
Charge: (1) 0.90% of total withdrawal base on each rider anniversary under the “principal back” withdrawal guarantee under the rider.	Charges: (1) 0.90% annually (single life and joint life) of withdrawal base deducted on each rider quarter.	Charges: (1) 1.25% annually (single life and joint life)of withdrawal base deducted on each rider quarter.	Charge: (1) for Base Benefit only—0.70% to 1.55% annually (single and joint life) of withdrawal base deducted on each rider quarter; (2) with Death Benefit Option— 0.40% (single life) or 0.35% (joint life) annually of withdrawal base deducted on each rider quarter, in addition to the base benefit fee; (3) with Income EnhancementSM Option—0.30% (single life) or 0.50% (joint life) annually of withdrawal base deducted on each rider quarter, in addition to the base benefit fee.
Investment Restrictions: •   Portfolio Allocation Method (“PAM”)—We monitor your policy value and, as we deem necessary to support the guarantees under the rider, may transfer amounts between investment options that we designate and the variable investment options that you select.	Investment Restrictions: •   Designated Investment option—You must allocate 100% of your policy value to one or more investment options that we designate.	Investment Restrictions: •   Designated Investment option—You must allocate 100% of your policy value to one or more investment options that we designate.	Investment Restrictions: •   You must allocate 100% of your policy value to one or more investment options that we designate.
Withdrawal Option: 5% For Life - Policyholder can withdraw up to 5% of the 5% For Life total withdrawal base each year starting with the rider anniversary following the annuitant’s 59th birthday until at least the later of the death of the annuitant or the time when the 5% For Life Minimum Remaining Withdrawal Amount has reached zero.	Withdrawal Percentages (Single Life): 7 yr option - 5% for 7 years and 4% thereafter 6 yr option - 6% for 6 years and 4% thereafter 5 yr option - 7% for 5 years and 4% thereafter 4 yr option - 8% for 4 years and 4% thereafter 3 yr option - 9% for 3 years and 4% thereafter 2 year option - 10% for 2 years and 4% thereafter	Withdrawal Percentages (Single Life): 0-58                                                  0.0% 59-64                                                4.3% 65-79                                                5.3% 80+                                                   6.3%	Withdrawal Percentages (Single Life): 0-58                                                  0.0% 59-64                                                4.0% 65-79                                                5.0% 80+                                                   6.0%

119

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Comparison Table — (Continued)

Guaranteed Principal SolutionSM  Rider	Income LinkSM Rider	Retirement Income MaxSM Rider	Retirement Income Choice 1.6SM Rider
Withdrawal Option: 7% Principal Back - Policyholder can withdraw up to 7% of the 7% Principal Back total withdrawal base per year until at least the time at which the 7% Principal Back minimum remaining withdrawal amount has reached zero.	Withdrawal Percentages (Joint Life): 7 yr option - 4.5% for 7 years and 3.5% thereafter 6 yr option - 5.5% for 6 years and 3.5% thereafter 5 yr option - 6.5% for 5 years and 3.5% thereafter 4 yr option - 7.5% for 4 years and 3.5% thereafter 3 yr option - 8.5% for 3 years and 3.5% thereafter 2 year option - 9.5% for 2 years and 3.5% thereafter	Withdrawal Percentages (Joint Life): 0-58                                                  0.0% 59-64                                                3.8% 65-79                                                4.8% 80+                                                   5.8%	Withdrawal Percentages (Joint Life): 0-58                                                  0.0% 59-64                                                3.5% 65-79                                                4.5% 80+                                                   5.5%

120

APPENDIX

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL

WITHDRAWALS

The following examples show the effect of withdrawals on the benefits under the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider.

GUARANTEED MINIMUM ACCUMULATION BENEFIT

Gross partial withdrawals will reduce the guaranteed future value by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the gross partial withdrawal amount; and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

A is the amount of gross partial withdrawal;

B is the policy value immediately prior to the gross partial withdrawal; and

C is the guaranteed future value immediately prior to the gross partial withdrawal.

The following demonstrates, on a purely hypothetical basis, the effects of partial withdrawals under the guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit.

EXAMPLE 1:

Assumptions:

Policy value prior to withdrawal (“PV”) = $90,000

Guaranteed future value prior to withdrawal (“GFV”) = $100,000

Gross withdrawal amount (“WD”) = $10,000

Step One. What is the pro rata value of the amount withdrawn?

1. Formula is (WD / PV) * GFV = pro rata amount

2. ($10,000 / $90,000) * $100,000 = $11,111.11

Step Two. Which is larger, the $10,000 withdrawal or the $11,111.11 pro rata amount?

$11,111.11 pro rata amount

Step Three. After the withdrawal is taken, what will be new guaranteed future value?

$100,000 - $11,111.11 = $88,888.89

Result. If no more withdrawals are taken, the guaranteed future value on the 10th rider anniversary is $88,888.89.

121

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS — (Continued)

EXAMPLE 2:

Assumptions:

PV = $120,000

GFV= $100,000

WD= $10,000

Step One. What is the pro rata value of the amount withdrawn?

1. Formula is (WD / PV) * GFV = pro rata amount

2. ($10,000 / $120,000) * $100,000 = $8,333.33

Step Two. Which is larger, the $10,000 withdrawal or the $8,333.33 pro rata amount?

$10,000 withdrawal

Step Three. After the withdrawal is taken, what will be new guaranteed future value?

$100,000 - $10,000 = $90,000

Result. If no more withdrawals are taken, the guaranteed future value on the 10th Rider Anniversary is $90,000.

GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT

Total Withdrawal Base. Gross partial withdrawals up to the maximum annual withdrawal amount will not reduce the total withdrawal base. Gross partial withdrawals in excess of the maximum annual withdrawal amount will reduce the total withdrawal base by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the excess gross partial withdrawal amount; and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

A is the excess gross partial withdrawal (the amount in excess of the guaranteed annual withdrawal amount remaining prior to the withdrawal);

B is the policy value after the maximum annual withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount; and

C is the total withdrawal base prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount.

Minimum Remaining Withdrawal Amount. Gross partial withdrawals up to the maximum annual withdrawal amount will reduce the minimum remaining withdrawal amount by the same amount (dollar-for-dollar). Gross partial withdrawals in excess of the maximum annual withdrawal amount will reduce the minimum remaining withdrawal amount by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the excess gross partial withdrawal amount; and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

122

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS — (Continued)

A is the excess gross partial withdrawal (the amount in excess of the guaranteed annual withdrawal amount remaining prior to the withdrawal);

B is the policy value after the maximum annual withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount; and

C is the minimum remaining withdrawal amount after the maximum annual withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount.

The following demonstrates, on a purely hypothetical basis, the effects of partial withdrawals under the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit.

When a withdrawal is taken, three parts of the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit can be affected:

1. Minimum remaining withdrawal amount (“MRWA”)

2. Total withdrawal base (“TWB”)

3. Maximum annual withdrawal amount (“MAWA”)

EXAMPLE 1 (7% “PRINCIPAL BACK”):

Assumptions:

TWB = $100,000

MRWA = $100,000

7% WD would be $7,000 (7% of the current $100,000 total withdrawal base)

WD = $7,000

Excess withdrawal (“EWD”) = None

PV = $100,000

You = Owner and Annuitant (Age 60)

Step One. Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the “principal back” maximum annual withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the “principal back” guarantee if no more than $7,000 is withdrawn.

Step Two. What is the minimum remaining withdrawal amount after the withdrawal has been taken?

1. Total to deduct from the minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $7,000 (there is no excess to deduct)

2. $100,000 - $7,000 = $93,000.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $7,000, the “principal back” total withdrawal base does not change and the “principal back” minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $93,000.00.

EXAMPLE 2 (7% “PRINCIPAL BACK”):

Assumptions:

TWB = $100,000

123

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS - (Continued)

MRWA = $100,000

7% WD would be $7,000 (7% of the current $100,000 total withdrawal base)

WD = $8,000

EWD = $1,000 ($8,000 - $7,000)

PV = $90,000

You = Owner and Annuitant (Age 60)

Step One. Is any portion of the total withdrawal greater than the maximum annual withdrawal amount?

Yes. $8,000 - $7,000 = $1,000 (the excess withdrawal amount)

Step Two. Calculate how much of the “principal back” minimum remaining withdrawal amount is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. Formula for pro rata amount is: (EWD / (PV - 7% WD)) * (MRWA - 7% WD)

2. ($1,000 / ($90,000 - $7,000)) * ($100,000 - $7,000) = $1,120.48

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $1,000 excess withdrawal amount or the $1,120.48 pro rata amount?

$1,120.48 pro rata amount

Step Four. What is the “principal back” minimum remaining withdrawal amount after the withdrawal has been taken?

1. Total to deduct from the minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $7,000 + $1,120.48 (pro rata excess) = $8,120.48

2. $100,000 - $8,120.48 = $91,879.52

Result. The “principal back” minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $91,879.52.

NOTE. For the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit, because there was an excess withdrawal amount, the total withdrawal base needs to be adjusted as well as a new lower maximum annual withdrawal amount. Had the withdrawal for this example not been more than $7,000, the “principal back” total withdrawal base would remain at $100,000 and the “principal back” maximum annual withdrawal amount would be $7,000. However, because an excess withdrawal has been taken, the total withdrawal base is also changed (this is the amount the 7% is based on).

New “principal back” total withdrawal base:

Step One. The total withdrawal base is only reduced by the excess withdrawal amount or the pro rata amount if greater.

Step Two. Calculate how much the total withdrawal base is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. The formula is (EWD / (PV - 7% WD)) * TWB before any adjustments

2. ($1,000 / ($90,000 - $7,000)) * $100,000 = $1,204.82

124

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS — (Continued)

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $1,000 excess withdrawal amount or the $1,204.82 pro rata amount?

$1,204.82 pro rata amount.

Step Four. What is the new total withdrawal base upon which the maximum annual withdrawal amount is based?

$100,000 - $1,204.82 = $98,795.18

Result. The new “principal back” total withdrawal base is $98,795.18

New “principal back” maximum annual withdrawal amount:

Because the “principal back” total withdrawal base was adjusted (due to the excess withdrawal) we have to calculate a new maximum annual withdrawal amount for the 7% “principal back” guarantee that will be available starting on the next rider anniversary. This calculation assumes no more activity prior to the next rider anniversary.

Step One. What is the new “principal back” maximum annual withdrawal amount?

$98,795.18 (the adjusted total withdrawal base) * 7% = $6,915.66

Result. Going forward, the maximum you can take out in a rider year is $6,915.66 without causing an excess withdrawal for the “principal back” guarantee and further reduction of the “principal back” total withdrawal base.

EXAMPLE 3 (5% “FOR LIFE”):

Assumptions:

TWB = $100,000

MRWA = $100,000

5% WD would be $5,000 (5% of the current $100,000 total withdrawal base)

WD = $5,000

Excess withdrawal (“EWD”) = None

PV = $100,000

You = Owner and Annuitant (Age 60)

Step One. Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the “for life” guarantee if no more than $5,000 is withdrawn.

Step Two. What is the minimum remaining withdrawal amount after the withdrawal has been taken?

1. Total to deduct from the minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $5,000 (there is no excess to deduct).

2. $100,000 - $5,000 = $95,000.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $5,000, the “for life” total withdrawal base does not change and the “for life” minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $95,000.00.

125

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS — (Continued)

EXAMPLE 4 (5% “FOR LIFE”):

Assumptions:

TWB = $100,000

MRWA = $100,000

5% WD would be $5,000 (5% of the current $100,000 total withdrawal base)

WD = $7,000

EWD = $2,000 ($7,000 - $5,000)

PV = $90,000

You = Owner and Annuitant (Age 60)

Step One. Is any portion of the total withdrawal greater than the maximum annual withdrawal amount?

Yes. $7,000 - $5,000 = $2,000 (the excess withdrawal amount)

Step Two. Calculate how much of the “for life” minimum remaining withdrawal amount is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. Formula for pro rata amount is: (EWD / (PV - 5% WD)) * (MRWA - 5% WD)

2. ($2,000 / ($90,000 - $5,000)) * ($100,000 - $5,000) = $2,235.29

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $2,000 excess withdrawal amount or the $2,235.29 pro rata amount?

$2,235.29 pro rata amount

Step Four. What is the “for life” minimum remaining withdrawal amount after the withdrawal has been taken?

1. Total to deduct from the minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $5,000 + $2,235.29 (pro rata excess) = $7,235.29

2. $100,000 - $7,235.29 = $92,764.71

Result. The “for life” minimum remaining withdrawal amount is $92,764.71.

NOTE. For the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit, because there was an excess withdrawal amount, the total withdrawal base needs to be adjusted as well as a new lower maximum annual withdrawal amount. Had the withdrawal for this example not been more than $5,000, the “for life” total withdrawal base would remain at $100,000 and the “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount would be $5,000. However, because an excess withdrawal has been taken, the total withdrawal base is also changed (this is the amount the 5% is based on).

New “for life” total withdrawal base:

Step One. The total withdrawal base is only reduced by the excess withdrawal amount or the pro rata amount if greater.

126

GUARANTEED PRINCIPAL SOLUTION^SM RIDER ADJUSTED PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS —(Continued)

Step Two. Calculate how much the total withdrawal base is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. The formula is (EWD / (PV - 5% WD)) * TWB before any adjustments

2. ($2,000 / ($90,000 - $5,000)) * $100,000 = $2,352.94

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $2,000 excess withdrawal amount or the $2,352.94 pro rata amount?

$2,352.94 pro rata amount.

Step Four. What is the new total withdrawal base upon which the maximum annual withdrawal amount is based?

$100,000 - $2,352.94 = $97,647.06

Result. The new “for life” total withdrawal base is $97,647.06

New “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount:

Because the “for life” total withdrawal base was adjusted (due to the excess withdrawal) we have to calculate a new maximum annual withdrawal amount for the 5% “for life” guarantee that will be available starting on the next rider anniversary. This calculation assumes no more activity prior to the next rider anniversary.

Step One. What is the new “for life” maximum annual withdrawal amount?

$97,647.06 (the adjusted total withdrawal base) * 5% = $4,882.35

Result. Going forward, the maximum you can take out in a rider year is $4,882.35 without causing an excess withdrawal for the “for life” guarantee and further reduction of the “for life” total withdrawal base.

127

APPENDIX

PAM METHOD TRANSFERS

To make the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider available, we monitor your policy value and guarantees under the rider daily and periodically transfer amounts between your selected investment options and the PAM Subaccount. We determine the amount and timing of PAM Method transfers between the investment options and the PAM Subaccount according to a mathematical model.

The mathematical model is designed to calculate how much of your policy value should be allocated to the PAM Subaccount. Based on this calculation, transfers into or out of the PAM Subaccount will occur. The formula is:

Percent of Policy Value required in PAM Subaccount (or X) = e^{-Dividend*Time} *(1- NormDist(d1))

where:

e = Base of the Natural Logarithm

NormDist = Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution

d1 = [ln(G)+(R – F +.5*V ^ 2)* T]/[V * T^.5]

In order to calculate the percent of policy value required in the PAM Subaccount, we must first calculate d1:

d1 = [ln(G)+(R – F +.5*V ^ 2)* T]/[V * T^.5]

where:

ln = Natural Logarithm Function

G = Guarantee Ratio

R = Rate

F = Fees

V = Volatility

T = Time

After calculating d1, the percent of policy value required in the PAM Subaccount can be calculated. Once calculated, appropriate transfers into or out of the PAM Subaccount will occur.

Following is a brief discussion of the values used in the formula.

The POLICY VALUE includes the value in both the investment options and in the PAM Subaccount.

The GUARANTEE RATIO is the policy value divided by 7% “Principal Back” Minimum Remaining Withdrawal Amount.

The RATE is the interest rate used for the PAM Method. It is based on a long-term expectation based on historical interest rates and may vary over time.

128

PAM METHOD TRANSFERS — (Continued)

The FEES is an approximation of average policy fees and charges associated with policies that have elected the Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider. This value may change over time.

The VOLATILITY represents the volatility of the returns of policy value for all in force policies and is based on the long-term expectation of the degree to which the policy values tend to fluctuate. This value may vary over time.

The TIME is an approximation based on actuarial calculations of historical average number of years (including any fraction) which we anticipate remain until any potential payments are made under the benefit. This value may vary over time.

The PERCENT OF POLICY VALUE TO BE ALLOCATED TO THE PAM SUBACCOUNT is computed for each policy. Ultimately the allocation for a policy takes into account the guarantees under the rider and the limit on allocations to the PAM Subaccount.

The CUMULATIVE STANDARD NORMAL DISTRIBUTION function assumes that random events are distributed according to the classic bell curve. For a given value it computes the percentage of such events which can be expected to be less than that value.

The NATURAL LOGARITHM function for a given value, computes the power to which e must be raised, in order to result in that value. Here, e is the base of the natural logarithms, or approximately 2.718282.

Example:

Day 1: Policy Value Declines by 10%

For purposes of this example we will assume that the policy value declines by 10% to $90,000 the day after the rider issue date from the initial premium amount of $100,000 producing a guarantee ratio of 90% ($90,000/$100,000). We will also assume:

Guarantee Ratio = 90%

Rate = 4.5%

Volatility = 10%

Fees = 3%

Time = 20

First we calculate d1.

d1=[ln(G)+(R – F +.5*V ^ 2)* T]/[V * T^.5]

d1=[ln(.90)+(.045 – .03 +.5*.10 ^ 2)* 20]/[.10 * 20^.5]

d1=.658832

Using the value we just calculated for d1 we can now calculate the percent of policy value required in the PAM Subaccount.

129

PAM METHOD TRANSFERS — (Continued)

Percent of Policy Value in PAM Subaccount (or X) = e^{-Dividend*Time} *(1-NormDist(d1))

X= (2.718282 ^ -.03 * 20) * (1 – NormDist(.658832))

X = 13.9948%

Therefore, 13.9948% of the policy value is transferred to the PAM Subaccount, resulting in a total transfer of $12,595.32.

Day 2: Policy Value Recovers to 105% of Initial Value after the 10% Decline

For purposes of this example we will assume that after the policy value declined to $90,000 it recovered the next day to $105,000 producing a guarantee ratio of 105% ($105,000/$100,000). We will also assume:

Guarantee Ratio = 105%

Rate = 4.5%

Volatility = 10%

Fees = 3%

Time = 20

First we calculate d1.

d1=[ln(G)+(R – F +.5*V ^ 2)* T]/[V * T^.5]

d1=[ln(1.05)+(.045 – .03 +.5*.10 ^ 2)* 20]/[.10 * 20^.5]

d1= 1.003524

Using the value we just calculated for d1 we can now calculate the percent of policy value required in the PAM Subaccount.

Percent of Policy Value in PAM Subaccount (or X) = e^{-Dividend*Time} *(1 - NormDist(d1))

X= (2.718282 ^ -.03 * 20) * (1 – NormDist(1.003524))

X = 8.6605%

While the mathematical model would suggest we transfer only a portion of the policy value in the PAM Subaccount into your investment options (leaving 8.6605% in the PAM Subaccount), all of the policy value in the PAM Subaccount will be transferred into your investment options. If the Guarantee Ratio equals or exceeds 100%, then your policy value is greater than or equal to the value of the guarantee and there is no current need for any policy value to be allocated to the PAM Subaccount.

130

APPENDIX

GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT

ADJUSTED PARTIAL SURRENDERS - INCOME LINK^SM RIDER

When a withdrawal is taken, three parts of the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit can be affected:

1. Withdrawal Base (“WB”)

2. Rider Withdrawal Amount (“RWA”)

3. Income Link^SM Rider Systematic Withdrawals (“ILSW”)

Withdrawal Base. Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals (and certain minimum required distributions) will not reduce the withdrawal base. Non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawals (and minimum required distributions calculated other than as provided for in the rider or not taken via a systematic withdrawal program) will reduce the withdrawal base by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the amount of the non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal (or non-qualifying minimum required distribution); and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

A is the amount in 1 above;

B is the policy value prior to the withdrawal; and

C is the withdrawal base prior to the withdrawal.

The following demonstrates, on a purely hypothetical basis, the effects of partial withdrawals under this guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit.

Assumptions:

WB = $100,000

RWA = 6% withdrawal would be $6,000 (6% of the current $100,000 withdrawal base)

ILSW = $500 per month

Non-ILSW = $10,000 (taken after the eighteenth monthly Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal)

PV = $90,000

Assumes single life withdrawal option of 6% for 6 years and 4% thereafter has been elected. Non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal occurs during the second Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year (which means the withdrawal percentage is 6%).

Result. For the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit, because there was a non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal, the withdrawal base needs to be adjusted and a new lower rider withdrawal amount and Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount calculated.

New withdrawal base:

Step One. The withdrawal base is reduced only by the amount of the amount of the non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal or the pro rata amount, if greater.

131

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — (Continued)

Step Two. Calculate how much the withdrawal base is affected by the non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal.

1. The formula is (Non-ILSW / (PV before withdrawal)) * WB before any adjustments

2. ($10,000 / ($90,000)) * $100,000 = $11,111

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $10,000 non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal or the $11,111 pro rata amount? $11,111 pro rata amount.

Step Four. What is the new withdrawal base upon which the rider withdrawal amount is based? $100,000 - $11,111 = $88,889

Result. The new withdrawal base is $88,889. Please note the percentage reduction in the withdrawal base is used in calculating the revised RWA and ILSW.

New rider withdrawal amount:

Because the withdrawal base was adjusted (due to the non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal) we have to calculate a new (remaining) rider withdrawal amount. This calculation assumes no more non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal activity prior to the next Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year.

Question: What is the new (remaining) rider withdrawal amount for the remainder of the Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year?

$3,000 (the remaining rider withdrawal amount) - ($3000*11.11%) = $2,667

Result. Going forward, the maximum you can take out in a benefit year without causing a negative withdrawal base adjustment and further reduction of the withdrawal base (assuming there are no future automatic step-ups) is $5,333.

New Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount:

Because the withdrawal base was adjusted (due to the non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal) we have to calculate a new Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount. This calculation assumes no more non-Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal activity prior to the next Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year.

Question: What is the new Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount?

$500 (the old Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount) - ($500*11.11%) = $444

Result. Going forward (until the seventh Income Link^SM rider withdrawal year), the Income Link^SM rider systematic withdrawal amount (assuming there are no future automatic step-ups) is $444

132

APPENDIX

GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT

ADJUSTED PARTIAL SURRENDERS - RETIREMENT INCOME MAX^SM RIDER

When a withdrawal is taken, the following parts of the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit can be affected:

1. Withdrawal Base (“WB”)

2. Rider Withdrawal Amount (“RWA”)

Withdrawal Base. Gross partial withdrawals in a rider year up to the rider withdrawal amount will not reduce the withdrawal base. Gross partial withdrawals in a rider year in excess of the rider withdrawal amount will reduce the withdrawal base by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the excess gross partial withdrawal amount; and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

A is the excess gross partial withdrawal (the amount in excess of the rider withdrawal amount remaining prior to the withdrawal);

B is the policy value after the rider withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount; and

C is the withdrawal base prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount.

The following demonstrates, on a purely hypothetical basis, the effects of partial withdrawals under this guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit.

Example 1 (Base):

Assumptions:

Withdrawal Base (“WB”) = $100,000

Rider Withdrawal Amount (“RWA”) = 5.3% withdrawal would be $5,300 (5.3% of the current $100,000 withdrawal base)

Gross partial withdrawal (“GPWD”) = $5,300

Excess withdrawal (“EWD”) = None

Policy Value (“PV”) = $100,000 (PV after GPWD = $94,700)

You = owner and annuitant, age 71 at time withdrawals begin, which means Withdrawal Percentage is 5.3%.

Question: Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the guarantee since no more than $5,300 is withdrawn.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $5,300, the withdrawal base does not change.

133

Example 2 (Excess Withdrawal):

Assumptions:

WB = $100,000

RWA = 5.3% withdrawal would be $5,300 (5.3% of the current $100,000 withdrawal base)

GPWD = $7,000

EWD = $1,700 ($7,000 - $5,300)

PV = $90,000

You = owner and annuitant, age 71 at time withdrawals begin, which means Withdrawal Percentage is 5.3%.

Result. For the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit, because there was an excess withdrawal amount, the withdrawal base needs to be adjusted and a new lower rider withdrawal amount calculated. Had the withdrawal for this example not been more than $5,300, the withdrawal base would remain at $100,000 and the rider withdrawal amount would be $5,300 starting on the next rider anniversary. However, because an excess withdrawal has been taken, the withdrawal base is also reduced (this is the amount the 5.3% is based on).

New withdrawal base:

Step One. The withdrawal base is reduced only by the amount of the excess withdrawal or the pro rata amount, if greater.

Step Two. Calculate how much the withdrawal base is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. The formula is (EWD / (PV - 5.3% withdrawal)) * WB before any adjustments

2. ($1,700 / ($90,000 - $5,300)) * $100,000 = $2,007.08

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $1,700 excess withdrawal or the $2,007.08 pro rata amount? $2,007.08 pro rata amount.

Step Four. What is the new withdrawal base upon which the rider withdrawal amount is based? $100,000 - $2,007.08 = $97,992.92

Result. The new withdrawal base is $97,992.92

New rider withdrawal amount:

Because the withdrawal base was adjusted (due to the excess withdrawal) we have to calculate a new rider withdrawal amount for the 5.3% guarantee that will be available starting on the next rider anniversary. This calculation assumes no more activity prior to the next rider anniversary.

Question: What is the new rider withdrawal amount?

$97,992.92 (the adjusted withdrawal base) * 5.3% = $5,193.62

Result. Going forward, the maximum you can take out in a year without causing an excess withdrawal and further reduction of the withdrawal base (assuming there are no future automatic step-ups) is $5,193.62.

134

Example 3 (Base demonstrating growth):

Assumptions:

WB = $100,000

Automatic step-up never occurs and no withdrawals are taken.

WB in 8 years (assuming an annual growth rate percentage of 5%) = $100,000 * (1 + .05) ^ 8 = $147,745.54 RWA = 5.3% withdrawal beginning 8 years from the rider date would be $7,830.51 (5.3% of the then-current $147,745.54 withdrawal base)

GPWD = $7,830.51

EWD = None

PV = $90,000 in 8 years

You = owner and annuitant, age 63 on rider issue; age 71 at time withdrawals begin, which means Withdrawal Percentage is 5.3%.

Question: Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the guarantee if no more than $7,830.51 is withdrawn in a rider year.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $7,830.51, the withdrawal base does not change.

Example 4 (Minimum Required Distribution “MRD”):

WB= $100,000

Automatic Step-up and growth never occur.

RWA for rider year beginning July 1, 2013 = 5.3% withdrawal would be $5,300 (5.3% of the current $100,000 withdrawal base).

MRD for 2013 = $6,000 (calculated as set forth in the rider)

MRD for 2014 = $6,500 (calculated as set forth in the rider)

GPWD on February 1, 2014 = $6,500 EWD = $500

Question: Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount or the minimum required withdrawal calculated pursuant to the terms of the rider?

Yes. Because more than $6,000 (the greater of the RWA ($5,500) or MRD for the tax year on that rider anniversary ($6,000) was withdrawn, there is an excess withdrawal of $500 (6,500 - 6,000 = 500). Please note, even though the withdrawal occurred in 2014, the MRD for 2014 does not become part of the RWA calculation until July 1, 2014 (the rider anniversary during that tax year).

Result: Because there was an excess withdrawal amount, the withdrawal base needs to be adjusted and a new lower withdrawal amount calculated. See Example 2 (Excess Withdrawal) for an example of how the new withdrawal base and new rider withdrawal amount are calculated.

135

APPENDIX

HYPOTHETICAL EXAMPLE OF THE WITHDRAWAL BASE CALCULATION -

RETIREMENT INCOME MAX^SM RIDER

The following table demonstrates, on a purely hypothetical basis, the withdrawal base calculation for the Retirement Income Max^SM rider using an initial premium payment of $100,000 for a Single Life Option rider at an issue age of 80. All values shown are post transaction values.

Rider Year	Hypothetical  Policy Value	Subsequent  Premium Payment	Withdrawal	Excess WB Adjustment	Growth Amount	High MonthiversarySM  Value	Withdrawal  Base	Rider Withdrawal  Amount
	$100,000	$	$	$	$	$100,000	$100,000	$6,300
1	$102,000	$	$	$	$	$102,000	$100,000	$6,300
1	$105,060	$	$	$	$	$105,060	$100,000	$6,300
1	$107,161	$	$	$	$	$107,161	$100,000	$6,300
1	$110,376	$	$	$	$	$110,376	$100,000	$6,300
1	$112,584	$	$	$	$	$112,584	$100,000	$6,300
1	$115,961	$	$	$	$	$115,961	$100,000	$6,300
1	$118,280	$	$	$	$	$118,280	$100,000	$6,300
1	$121,829	$	$	$	$	$121,829	$100,000	$6,300
1	$124,265	$	$	$	$	$124,265	$100,000	$6,300
1	$120,537	$	$	$	$	$124,265	$100,000	$6,300
1	$115,716	$	$	$	$	$124,265	$100,000	$6,300
1	$109,930	$	$	$	$105,000	$124,265	$124,2651	$7,829
2	$112,129	$	$	$	$	$112,129	$124,265	$7,829
2	$115,492	$	$	$	$	$115,492	$124,265	$7,829
2	$117,802	$	$	$	$	$117,802	$124,265	$7,829
2	$121,336	$	$	$	$	$121,336	$124,265	$7,829
2	$124,976	$	$	$	$	$124,976	$124,265	$7,829
2	$177,476	$50,000	$	$	$	$177,476	$174,265	$10,979
2	$175,701	$	$	$	$	$177,476	$174,265	$10,979
2	$172,187	$	$	$	$	$177,476	$174,265	$10,979
2	$167,022	$	$	$	$	$177,476	$174,265	$10,979
2	$163,681	$	$	$	$	$177,476	$174,265	$10,979
2	$166,955	$	$	$	$	$177,476	$174,265	$10,979
2	$170,294	$	$	$	$182,979	$177,476	$182,9792	$11,528
3	$166,888	$	$	$	$	$166,888	$182,979	$11,528
3	$171,895	$	$	$	$	$171,895	$182,979	$11,528
3	$173,614	$	$	$	$	$173,614	$182,979	$11,528
3	$178,822	$	$	$	$	$178,822	$182,979	$11,528
3	$175,246	$	$	$	$	$178,822	$182,979	$11,528
3	$151,741	$	$20,000	$9,676	$	$	$173,303	$
3	$154,775	$	$	$	$	$	$173,303	$
3	$159,419	$	$	$	$	$	$173,303	$

136

Rider Year	Hypothetical  Policy Value	Subsequent  Premium Payment	Withdrawal	Excess WB Adjustment	Growth Amount	High MonthiversarySM  Value	Withdrawal  Base	Rider Withdrawal  Amount
3	$161,013	$	$	$	$	$	$173,303	$
3	$165,843	$	$	$	$	$	$173,303	$
3	$174,135	$	$	$	$	$	$173,303	$
3	$181,101	$	$	$	$	$	$181,1011	$11,409

⁽¹⁾  Automatic Step Up Applied

⁽²⁾  Growth Applied

137

APPENDIX

GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT

ADJUSTED PARTIAL SURRENDERS - RETIREMENT INCOME CHOICE^SM 1.6 RIDER

When a withdrawal is taken, three parts of the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit can be affected:

1. Withdrawal Base (“WB”)(also referred to as Total Withdrawal Base (“TWB”) for some riders)

2. Rider Withdrawal Amount (“RWA”)(also referred to as Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (“MAWA”) for some riders)

3. Rider Death Benefit (“RDB”)(also referred to as Minimum Remaining Withdrawal Amount (“MRWA”) for some rider (if applicable))

Withdrawal Base. Gross partial withdrawals in a rider year up to the rider withdrawal amount will not reduce the withdrawal base. Gross partial withdrawals in a rider year in excess of the rider withdrawal amount will reduce the withdrawal base by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the excess gross partial withdrawal amount; and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

A is the excess gross partial withdrawal (the amount in excess of the rider withdrawal amount remaining prior to the withdrawal);

B is the policy value after the rider withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount; and

C is the withdrawal base prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount.

Rider Death Benefit. Gross partial withdrawals in a rider year up to the rider withdrawal amount will reduce the rider death benefit by the amount withdrawn (dollar-for-dollar). Gross partial withdrawals in a rider year in excess of the rider withdrawal amount will reduce the rider death benefit by an amount equal to the greater of:

1) the excess gross partial withdrawal amount; and

2) a pro rata amount, the result of (A / B) * C, where:

A is the excess gross partial withdrawal (the amount in excess of the rider withdrawal amount remaining prior to the withdrawal);

B is the policy value after the rider withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount; and

C is the rider death benefit after the rider withdrawal amount has been withdrawn, but prior to the withdrawal of the excess amount.

The following demonstrates, on a purely hypothetical basis, the effects of partial withdrawals under a guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit. The withdrawal percentages shown may not be available on all riders. Certain features (growth and rider death benefits) may not be available on all riders. For information regarding a specific rider, please refer to that rider section of this prospectus.

138

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — (Continued)

EXAMPLE 1 (BASE):

Assumptions:

WB = $100,000

Withdrawal Percentage = 5%

RWA = 5% withdrawal would be $5,000 (5% of the current $100,000 withdrawal base)

Gross partial withdrawal (“GPWD”) = $5,000

Excess withdrawal (“EWD”) = None

Policy Value (“PV”) = $100,000

Question: Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the guarantee since no more than $5,000 is withdrawn.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $5,000, the withdrawal base does not change.

EXAMPLE 2 (EXCESS WITHDRAWAL):

Assumptions:

WB = $100,000

Withdrawal Percentage = 5%

RWA = 5% withdrawal would be $5,000 (5% of the current $100,000 withdrawal base)

GPWD = $7,000

EWD = $2,000 ($7,000 - $5,000)

PV = $90,000

NOTE. For the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit, because there was an excess withdrawal amount, the withdrawal base needs to be adjusted and a new lower rider withdrawal amount calculated. Had the withdrawal for this example not been more than $5,000, the withdrawal base would remain at $100,000 and the rider withdrawal amount would be $5,000. However, because an excess withdrawal has been taken, the withdrawal base is also reduced (this is the amount the 5% is based on).

New withdrawal base:

Step One. The withdrawal base is reduced only by the amount of the excess withdrawal or the pro rata amount, if greater.

Step Two. Calculate how much the withdrawal base is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. The formula is (EWD / (PV - 5% withdrawal)) * WB before any adjustments

2. ($2,000 / ($90,000 - $5,000)) * $100,000 = $2,352.94

139

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — (Continued)

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $2,000 excess withdrawal or the $2,352.94 pro rata amount? $2,352.94 pro rata amount.

Step Four. What is the new withdrawal base upon which the rider withdrawal amount is based? $100,000 - $2,352.94 = $97,647.06

Result. The new withdrawal base is $97,647.06

New rider withdrawal amount:

Because the withdrawal base was adjusted (due to the excess withdrawal) we have to calculate a new rider withdrawal amount for the 5% guarantee that will be available starting on the next calendar anniversary. This calculation assumes no more activity prior to the next calendar anniversary.

Question: What is the new rider withdrawal amount?

$97,647 (the adjusted withdrawal base) * 5% = $4,882.35

Result. Going forward, the maximum you can take out in a year is $4,882.35 without causing excess withdrawal for the guarantee and further reduction of the withdrawal base (assuming there are no future automatic step-ups).

EXAMPLE 3 (BASE DEMONSTRATING GROWTH):

Assumptions:

WB = $100,000

Withdrawal Percentage = 5%

WB in 10 years (assuming an annual growth rate percentage of 5.0%) = $100,000 * (1 + .05) ^ 10 = $162,889

RWA = 5% withdrawal beginning 10 years from the rider date would be $8,144 (5% of the then-current $162,889 withdrawal base)

Please note that withdrawals under this rider can begin prior to the 10th rider anniversary, but the WB growth will not occur during the rider years when a withdrawal is taken and the growth stops on the 10th rider anniversary.

GPWD = $8,144

EWD = None

PV = $90,000 in 10 years

Question: Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the guarantee if no more than $8,144 is withdrawn.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $8,144, the withdrawal base does not change.

140

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — (Continued)

EXAMPLE 4 (BASE DEMONSTRATING WB GROWTH WITH ADDITIONAL DEATH PAYMENT OPTION):

Assumptions:

Withdrawal Percentage = 5%.

WB at rider issue = $100,000

WB in 10 years (assuming an annual growth rate percentage of 5.0%) = $100,000 * (1 + .05) ^ 10 = $162,889

RDB (optional additional death benefit for additional cost) = $100,000

RWA = 5% withdrawal beginning 10 years from the rider date would be $8,144 (5% of the then-current $162,889 withdrawal base)

Please note that withdrawals under this rider can begin prior to the 10th rider anniversary, but the WB growth will not occur during the rider years when a withdrawal is taken, and the annual growth credit stops on the 10th rider anniversary.

GPWD = $8,144

EWD = None

PV = $90,000 in 10 years

Step One. Is any portion of the withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount?

No. There is no excess withdrawal under the guarantee if no more than $8,144 is withdrawn.

Step Two. What is the rider death benefit after the withdrawal has been taken?

1. Total to deduct from the rider death benefit is $8,144 (there is no excess to deduct)

2. $100,000 - $8,144 = $91,856.

Result. In this example, because no portion of the withdrawal was in excess of $8,144, the total withdrawal base does not change and the rider death benefit reduces to $91,856.

EXAMPLE 5 (BASE WITH WB GROWTH WITH ADDITIONAL DEATH PAYMENT OPTION ILLUSTRATING EXCESS WITHDRAWAL):

Assumptions:

Withdrawal Percentage = 5%.

WB at rider issue = $100,000

Automatic step-up never occurs and no withdrawals are taken in the first 10 rider years.

WB in 10 years (assuming an annual growth rate percentage of 5.0%) = $100,000 * (1 + .05) ^ 10 = $162,889

RDB (optional additional death benefit for additional cost) = $100,000

RWA = 5% withdrawal beginning 10 years from the rider date would be $8,144 (5% of the then-current $162,889 withdrawal base)

Please note that withdrawals under this rider can begin prior to the 10th rider anniversary, but the WB growth will not occur during the rider years when a withdrawal is taken, and the annual growth credit stops on the 10th rider anniversary.

141

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — (Continued)

GPWD = $10,000

EWD = $1,856 ($10,000 - $8,144)

PV = $90,000 in 10 years

Step One. Is any portion of the total withdrawal greater than the rider withdrawal amount?

Yes. $10,000 - $8,144 = $1,856 (the excess withdrawal amount)

Step Two. Calculate how much of the rider death benefit is affected by the excess withdrawal.

1. Formula for pro rata amount is: (EWD / (PV - 5% withdrawal)) * (RDB - 5% withdrawal)

2. ($1,856 / ($90,000 - $8,144)) * ($100,000 - $8,144) = $2,082.74

Step Three. Which is larger, the actual $1,856 excess withdrawal amount or the $2,082.74 pro rata amount?

$2,082.74 pro rata amount

Step Four. What is the rider death benefit after the withdrawal has been taken?

1. Total to deduct from the rider death benefit is $8,144 (RWA) + $2,082.74 (pro rata excess) = $10,226.74

2. $100,000 - $10,226.74= $89,773.26

Result. The rider benefit is $89,773.26.

NOTE. Because there was an excess withdrawal amount in this example, the withdrawal base needs to be adjusted and a new lower rider withdrawal amount calculated. Had the withdrawal for this example not been more than $8,144, the withdrawal base would remain at $162,889 and the rider withdrawal amount would be $8,144. However, because an excess withdrawal has been taken, the withdrawal base is also reduced (this is the amount the 5% is based on).

142

The information in this statement of additional information is not complete and may be changed. This Statement of Additional Information is contained in a registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and we may not sell these securities until that registration statement is effective. This statement of additional information is not an offer to sell these securities and is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any state where the offer or sale is not permitted.

STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (Subject to Completion             , 2013)

STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

TRANSAMERICA VARIABLE ANNUITY SERIES

Issued through

Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company
Separate Account B (EST. 1/19/1990)	Separate Account BNY (EST. 9/27/1994)
4333 Edgewood Road NE	4333 Edgewood Road NE
Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001	Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001
(800)525-6205	(800)525-6205
www.transamericaannuities.com	www.transamericaannuities.com

This Statement of Additional Information expands upon subjects discussed in the current prospectus for the Transamerica Variable Annuity Series variable annuity offered by Transamerica Life Insurance Company and Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company (“us,” “we”, “our” or “Company”). You may obtain a copy of the current prospectus, dated May 1, 2013, by calling (800) 525-6205, or write us at the addresses listed above. The prospectus sets forth information that a prospective investor should know before investing in a policy. Terms used in the current prospectus for the policy are incorporated in this Statement of Additional Information.

This Statement of Additional Information (SAI) is not a prospectus and should be read only in conjunction with the prospectuses for the policy and the underlying fund portfolios.

Dated: May 1, 2013

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GLOSSARY OF TERMS	3
THE POLICY — GENERAL PROVISIONS	6
Owner	6
Entire Contract	6
Misstatement of Age or Sex	7
Reallocation of Annuity Units After the Annuity Commencement Date	7
Annuity Payment Options	7
Death Benefit	8
Death of Owner	9
Assignment	9
Evidence of Survival	9
Non-Participating	9
Amendments	9
Employee and Agent Purchases	10
INVESTMENT EXPERIENCE	10
Accumulation Units	10
Annuity Unit Value and Annuity Payment Rates	12
PERFORMANCE	14
HISTORICAL PERFORMANCE DATA	14
Money Market Yields	14
Total Returns	16
Other Performance Data	16
Adjusted Historical Performance Data	17
PUBLISHED RATINGS	17
STATE REGULATION OF US	17
ADMINISTRATION	17
RECORDS AND REPORTS	17
DISTRIBUTION OF THE POLICIES	18
VOTING RIGHTS	18
OTHER PRODUCTS	19
CUSTODY OF ASSETS	19
LEGAL MATTERS	19
INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM	19
OTHER INFORMATION	20
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS	20

2

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

Accumulation Unit — An accounting unit of measure used in calculating the policy value in the separate account before the annuity commencement date.

Adjusted Policy Value — The policy value increased or decreased by any excess interest adjustment.

Administrative and Service Office — Transamerica Life Insurance Company and Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company, Attention: Customer Care Group, 4333 Edgewood Road NE, Cedar Rapids, IA 52499-0001, (800)525-6205.

Annuitant — The person on whose life any annuity payments involving life contingencies will be based.

Annuity Commencement Date — The date upon which annuity payments are to commence. This date may be any date after the policy date and may not be later than the last day of the policy month following the month after the annuitant attains age 99 (earlier if required by state law). In no event can this date be earlier than the third policy anniversary. The annuity commencement date may have to be earlier for qualified policies and may be earlier if required by state law.

Annuity Payment Option — A method of receiving a stream of annuity payments selected by the owner.

Annuity Unit — An accounting unit of measure used in the calculation of the amount of the second and each subsequent variable annuity payment.

Assumed Investment Return or AIR — The annual effective rate shown in the contract specifications section of the contract that is used in the calculation of each variable annuity payment.

Beneficiary — The person who has the right to the death benefit as set forth in the policy.

Cash Value — The adjusted policy value less any applicable surrender charge and rider fees (imposed upon surrender).

Code — The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Enrollment form — A written application, order form, or any other information received electronically or otherwise upon which the policy is issued and/or is reflected on the data or specifications page.

Excess Interest Adjustment — A positive or negative adjustment to amounts surrendered (both partial or full surrenders and transfers) or applied to annuity payment options from the fixed account guaranteed period options prior to the end of the guaranteed period. The adjustment reflects changes in the interest rates declared by us since the date any payment was received by, or an amount was transferred to, the guaranteed period option. The excess interest adjustment can either decrease or increase the amount to be received by the owner upon full surrender or commencement of annuity payments, depending upon whether there has been an increase or decrease in interest rates, respectively. The excess interest adjustment does not apply to policies issued in New York by Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company.

Excess Partial Surrender — The portion of a partial surrender (surrender) that exceeds the free amount.

3

Fixed Account — One or more investment choices under the policy that are part of our general assets and are not in the separate account.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — Any optional benefit under the policy that provides a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit, including Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, the Income Link^SM Rider, the Retirement Income Max^SM Rider or the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider

Guaranteed Period Options — The various guaranteed interest rate periods of the fixed account which we may offer and into which premium payments may be paid or amounts transferred when available.

Market Day — A day when the New York Stock Exchange is open for business.

Nonqualified Policy — A policy other than a qualified policy.

Owner (You, Your) — The person who may exercise all rights and privileges under the policy.

Policy Date — The date shown on the policy data page attached to the policy and the date on which the policy becomes effective.

Policy Value — On or before the annuity commencement date, the policy value is equal to the owner’s:

• premium payments; minus

• gross surrenders (surrenders plus the surrender charge on the portion of the requested partial surrender that is subject to the surrender charge plus or minus any excess interest adjustment); plus

• interest credited in the fixed account; plus

• accumulated gains in the separate account; minus

• accumulated losses in the separate account; minus

• service charges, rider fees, premium taxes, transfer fees, and other charges, if any.

Policy Year — A policy year begins on the policy date and on each anniversary thereof.

Premium Payment — An amount paid to us by the owner or on the owner’s behalf as consideration for the benefits provided by the policy.

Qualified Policy — A policy issued in connection with retirement plans that qualify for special federal income tax treatment under the Code.

Separate Account — Separate Account VA B and Separate Account VA BNY, separate accounts established and registered as unit investment trusts under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”), to which premium payments under the policies may be allocated.

Separate Account Value — The portion of the policy value that is invested in the separate account.

4

Service Charge — An annual charge on each policy anniversary (and a charge at the time of surrender during any policy year) for policy maintenance and related administrative expenses.

Subaccount — A subdivision within the separate account, the assets of which are invested in a specified underlying fund portfolios.

Supportable Payment — The amount equal to the sum of the variable annuity unit values multiplied by the number of variable annuity units in each of the selected subaccounts.

Surrender Charge — A percentage of each premium payment that depends upon the length of time from the date of each premium payment. The surrender charge is assessed on full or partial surrenders from the policy. A surrender charge may also be referred to as a “contingent deferred sales charge” or a “contingent deferred sales load.”

Surrender Charge Free Amount — The amount that can be withdrawn each year without incurring any surrender charges.

Valuation Period — The period of time from one determination of accumulation unit values and annuity unit values to the next subsequent determination of those values. Such determination shall be made generally at the close of business on each market day.

Variable Annuity Payments — Payments made pursuant to an annuity payment option which fluctuate as to dollar amount or payment term in relation to the investment performance of the specified subaccounts within the separate account.

Written Notice — Written notice, signed by the owner, that gives us the information we require and is received in good order at the Administrative and Service Office. For some transactions, we may accept an electronic notice such as telephone instructions. Such electronic notice must meet the requirements for good order that we establish for such notices.

5

In order to supplement the description in the prospectus, the following provides additional information about us and the policy, which may be of interest to a prospective purchaser.

THE POLICY — GENERAL PROVISIONS

Owner

The policy shall belong to the owner upon issuance of the policy after completion of an enrollment form and delivery of the initial premium payment. While the annuitant is living, the owner may: (1) assign the policy; (2) surrender the policy; (3) amend or modify the policy with our consent; (4) receive annuity payments or name a payee to receive the payments; and (5) exercise, receive and enjoy every other right and benefit contained in the policy. The exercise of these rights may be subject to the consent of any assignee or irrevocable beneficiary; and of your spouse in a community or marital property state.

Unless we have been notified of a community or marital property interest in the policy, we will rely on our good faith belief that no such interest exists and will assume no responsibility for inquiry.

Note carefully. If the owner predeceases the annuitant and no joint owner, primary beneficiary, or contingent beneficiary is alive or in existence on the date of death, the owner’s estate will become the new owner. If no probate estate is opened because the owner has precluded the opening of a probate estate by means of a trust or other instrument, that trust may not exercise ownership rights to the policy. It may be necessary to open a probate estate in order to exercise ownership rights to the policy.

The owner may change the ownership of the policy in a written notice. When this change takes effect, all rights of ownership in the policy will pass to the new owner. A change of ownership may have tax consequences.

When there is a change of owner, the change will not be effective until it is recorded in our records. Once recorded, it will take effect as of the date the owner signs the written notice, subject to any payment we have made or action we have taken before recording the change. Changing the owner does not change the designation of the beneficiary or the annuitant.

If ownership is transferred to a new owner (except to the owner’s spouse) because the owner dies before the annuitant, then (a) the cash value generally must be distributed to the new owner within five years of the owner’s death, or (b) annuity payments must be made for a period certain or for the new owner’s lifetime so long as any period certain does not exceed that new owner’s life expectancy, if the first payment begins within one year of your death.

Entire Contract

The entire contract consists of the policy and any application, endorsements and riders. If any portion of the policy or rider attached thereto shall be found to be invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the remainder shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby, but shall have the same force and effect as if the invalid, unenforceable or illegal portion had not been inserted.

6

Misstatement of Age or Sex

If the age or sex of the annuitant or owner has been misstated, we will change the annuity benefit payable to that which the premium payments would have purchased for the correct age or sex. The dollar amount of any underpayment made by us shall be paid in full with the next payment due such person or the beneficiary. The dollar amount of any overpayment made by us due to any misstatement shall be deducted from payments subsequently accruing to such person or beneficiary. Any underpayment or overpayment will include interest at 5% per year, from the date of the wrong payment to the date of the adjustment. The age of the annuitant or owner may be established at any time by the submission of proof satisfactory to us.

Reallocation of Annuity Units After the Annuity Commencement Date

After the annuity commencement date, you may reallocate the value of a designated number of annuity units of a subaccount then credited to a policy into an equal value of annuity units of one or more other subaccounts or the fixed account. The reallocation shall be based on the relative value of the annuity units of the account(s) or subaccount(s) at the end of the market day on the next payment date. The minimum amount which may be reallocated is the lesser of (1) $10 of monthly income or (2) the entire monthly income of the annuity units in the account or subaccount from which the transfer is being made. If the monthly income of the annuity units remaining in an account or subaccount after a reallocation is less than $10, we reserve the right to include the value of those annuity units as part of the transfer. The request must be in writing to our administrative and service office. There is no charge assessed in connection with such reallocation. A reallocation of annuity units may be made up to four times in any given policy year.

After the annuity commencement date, no transfers may be made from the fixed account to the separate account.

Annuity Payment Options

During the lifetime of the annuitant and before the annuity commencement date, the owner may choose an annuity payment option or change the election, but notice of any election or change of election must be received by us in good order at least thirty (30) days before the annuity commencement date (elections less than 30 days require prior approval). If no election is made before the annuity commencement date, annuity payments will be made under (1) life income with level (fixed) payments for 10 years certain, using the existing adjusted policy value of the fixed account, or (2) life income with variable payments for 10 years certain using the existing policy value of the separate account, or (3) in a combination of (1) and (2).

The person who elects an annuity payment option can also name one or more successor payees to receive any unpaid, guaranteed amount at the death of a payee. Naming these payees cancels any prior choice of a successor payee.

A payee who did not elect the annuity payment option does not have the right to advance or assign payments, take the payments in one sum, or make any other change. However, the payee may be given the right to do one or more of these things if the person who elects the option tells us in writing and we agree.

Variable Payment Options. The dollar amount of the first variable annuity payment will be determined in accordance with the annuity payment rates set forth in the applicable table contained in the policy. For annuity payments the tables are based on a 3% effective annual AIR and the “2000 Table”, using an assumed annuity commencement date of 2024 (static projection to this point) with dynamic projection using scale G from that point (100% of G for male, 50% of G for females). The dollar amount of additional variable annuity payments will vary based on the investment performance of the subaccount(s) of the separate account selected by the annuitant or beneficiary.

7

Determination of the First Variable Payment. The amount of the first variable payment depends upon the sex (if consideration of sex is allowed under state law) and adjusted age of the annuitant. For regular annuity payments, the adjusted age is the annuitant’s actual age nearest birthday, on the annuity commencement date, adjusted as described in your policy. This adjustment assumes an increase in life expectancy, and therefore it results in lower payments than without such an adjustment.

Determination of Additional Variable Payments. All variable annuity payments other than the first are calculated using annuity units which are credited to the policy. The number of annuity units to be credited in respect of a particular subaccount is determined by dividing that portion of the first variable annuity payment attributable to that subaccount by the annuity unit value of that subaccount on the annuity commencement date. The number of annuity units of each particular subaccount credited to the policy then remains fixed, assuming no transfers to or from that subaccount occur. The dollar value of variable annuity units in the chosen subaccount will increase or decrease reflecting the investment experience of the chosen subaccount. The dollar amount of each variable annuity payment after the first may increase, decrease or remain constant. This amount is equal to the sum of the amounts determined by multiplying the number of annuity units of each particular subaccount credited to the policy by the annuity unit value for the particular subaccount on the date the payment is made.

Death Benefit

Due proof of death of the annuitant is proof that the annuitant died prior to the commencement of annuity payments. A certified copy of a death certificate, a certified copy of a decree of a court of competent jurisdiction as to the finding of death, a written statement by the attending physician, or any other proof satisfactory to us will constitute due proof of death.

Upon receipt in good order of this proof and an election of a method of settlement and return of the policy, the death benefit generally will be paid within seven days, or as soon thereafter as we have sufficient information about the beneficiary(ies) to make the payment. The beneficiary may receive the amount payable in a lump sum cash benefit, or, subject to any limitation under any state or federal law, rule, or regulation, under one of the annuity payment options described above, unless a settlement agreement is effective at the death of the owner preventing such election.

If an owner is not an annuitant, and dies prior to the annuity commencement date, the new owner may surrender the policy at any time for the amount of the adjusted policy value. If the new owner is not the deceased owner’s spouse, however, (1) the adjusted policy value must be distributed within five years after the date of the deceased owner’s death, or (2) payments under an annuity payment option must begin no later than one year after the deceased owner’s death and must be made for the new owner’s lifetime or for a period certain (so long as the period certain does not exceed the new owner’s life expectancy). If the sole new owner is the deceased owner’s surviving spouse, such spouse may elect to continue the policy as the new owner instead of receiving the death benefit.

Beneficiary. The beneficiary designation in the enrollment form will remain in effect until changed. The owner may change the designated beneficiary by sending us written notice. The beneficiary’s consent to such change is not required unless the beneficiary was irrevocably designated or law requires consent. If an irrevocable beneficiary dies, the owner may then designate a new beneficiary. The change will take effect as of the date the owner signs the written notice, whether or not the owner is living when we receive the notice. We will not be liable for any payment made before the

8

written notice is received. If more than one beneficiary is designated, and the owner fails to specify their interests, they will share equally. If upon the death of the annuitant there is a surviving owner(s), the surviving owner(s) automatically takes the place of any beneficiary designation.

Death of Owner

Federal tax law requires that if any owner (including any joint owner who has become a current owner) dies before the annuity commencement date, then the entire value of the policy must generally be distributed within five years of the date of death of such owner. Certain rules apply where (1) the spouse of the deceased owner is the sole beneficiary, (2) the owner is not a natural person and the primary annuitant dies or is changed, or (3) any owner dies after the annuity commencement date. See the TAX INFORMATION section in the prospectus for more information about these rules. Other rules may apply to qualified policies.

Assignment

During the lifetime of the annuitant you may assign any rights or benefits provided by the policy if your policy is a nonqualified policy. An assignment will not be binding on us until a copy has been filed at our administrative and service office. Your rights and benefits and those of the beneficiary are subject to the rights of the assignee. We assume no responsibility for the validity or effect of any assignment. Any claim made under an assignment shall be subject to proof of interest and the extent of the assignment. An assignment may have tax consequences.

Unless you so direct by filing written notice with us, no beneficiary may assign any payments under the policy before they are due. To the extent permitted by law, no payments will be subject to the claims of any beneficiary’s creditors.

Ownership under qualified policies is restricted to comply with the Code.

Evidence of Survival

We reserve the right to require satisfactory evidence that a person is alive if a payment is based on that person being alive. No payment will be made until we receive such evidence.

Non-Participating

The policy will not share in our surplus earnings; no dividends will be paid.

Amendments

No change in the policy is valid unless made in writing by us and approved by one of our officers. No registered representative has authority to change or waive any provision of the policy.

We reserve the right to amend the policies to meet the requirements of the Code, regulations or published rulings. You can refuse such a change by giving written notice, but a refusal may result in adverse tax consequences.

9

Employee and Agent Purchases

The policy may be acquired by an employee or registered representative of any broker/dealer authorized to sell the policy or their immediate family, or by an officer, director, trustee or bona-fide full-time employee of ours or our affiliated companies or their immediate family. In such a case, we may, at our sole discretion, credit an amount equal to a percentage of each premium payment to the policy due to lower acquisition costs we experience on those purchases. We may offer certain employer sponsored savings plans, reduced fees and charges including, but not limited to, the annual service charge, the surrender charges, the mortality and expense risk fee and the administrative charge for certain sales under circumstances which may result in savings of certain costs and expenses. In addition, there may be other circumstances of which we are not presently aware which could result in reduced sales or distribution expenses. Credits to the policy or reductions in these fees and charges will not be unfairly discriminatory against any owner.

INVESTMENT EXPERIENCE

A “net investment factor” is used to determine the value of accumulation units and annuity units, and to determine annuity payment rates.

Accumulation Units

Allocations of a premium payment directed to a subaccount are credited in the form of accumulation units. Each subaccount has a distinct accumulation unit value. The number of units credited is determined by dividing the premium payment or amount transferred to the subaccount by the accumulation unit value of the subaccount as of the end of the valuation period during which the allocation is made. For each subaccount, the accumulation unit value for a given market day is based on the net asset value of a share of the corresponding portfolio of the underlying fund portfolios less any applicable charges or fees. The investment performance of the portfolio, expenses, and deductions of certain charges affect the value of an accumulation unit.

Upon allocation to the selected subaccount, premium payments are converted into accumulation units of the subaccount. The number of accumulation units to be credited is determined by dividing the dollar amount allocated to each subaccount by the value of an accumulation unit for that subaccount as next determined after the premium payment is received at the administrative and service office or, in the case of the initial premium payment, when the enrollment form is completed, whichever is later. The value of an accumulation unit for each subaccount was arbitrarily established at $1 at the inception of each subaccount. Thereafter, the value of an accumulation unit is determined as of the close of trading on each day the New York Stock Exchange is open for business.

An index (the “net investment factor”) which measures the investment performance of a subaccount during a valuation period, is used to determine the value of an accumulation unit for the next subsequent valuation period. The net investment factor may be greater or less than or equal to one; therefore, the value of an accumulation unit may increase, decrease, or remain the same from one valuation period to the next. You bear this investment risk. The net investment performance of a subaccount and deduction of certain charges affect the accumulation unit value.

The net investment factor for any subaccount for any valuation period is determined by dividing (a) by (b) and subtracting (c) from the result, where:

(a) is the net result of:

10

(1) the net asset value per share of the shares held in the subaccount determined at the end of the current valuation period, plus

(2) the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distribution made with respect to the shares held in the subaccount if the ex-dividend date occurs during the current valuation period, plus or minus

(3) a per share credit or charge for any taxes determined by the Company to have resulted during the valuation period from the investment operations of the subaccount;

(b) is the net asset value per share of the shares held in the subaccount determined as of the end of the immediately preceding valuation period; and

(c) is an amount representing the separate account charge and any optional benefit fees, if applicable.

Illustration of Separate Account Accumulation Unit Value Calculations

Formula and Illustration for Determining the Net Investment Factor

Net Investment Factor =	(A + B - C) - E
	D

Where:

A= The net asset value of an underlying fund portfolio share at of the end of the current valuation period.

Assume A = $11.57

B= The per share amount of any dividend or capital gains distribution since the end of the immediately preceding valuation period.

Assume B = 0

C= The per share charge or credit for any taxes reserved for at the end of the current valuation period.

Assume C = 0

D= The net asset value of an underlying fund portfolio share at of the end of the immediately preceding valuation period.

Assume D = $11.40

E= The daily deduction for the mortality and expense risk fee and the administrative charge, and any optional benefit fees, if applicable. Assume E total 1.50% on an annual basis; On a daily basis, this equals 0.000041096.

Then, the net investment factor =	(11.57 + 0 – 0) - 0.000041096 = Z = 1.014871185
	(11.40)

11

Formula and Illustration for Determining Accumulation Unit Value

Accumulation Unit Value = A * B

Where:

A= The accumulation unit value for the immediately preceding valuation period.

Assume = $X

B= The net investment factor for the current valuation period.

Assume = Y

Then, the accumulation unit value = $X * Y = $Z

Annuity Unit Value and Annuity Payment Rates

The amount of variable annuity payments will vary with annuity unit values. Annuity unit values rise if the net investment performance of the subaccount exceeds the assumed investment return of 3% annually. Conversely, annuity unit values fall if the net investment performance of the subaccount is less than the annual assumed investment return. The value of a variable annuity unit in each subaccount was established at $1 on the date operations began for that subaccount. The value of a variable annuity unit on any subsequent business day is equal to (a) multiplied by (b) multiplied by (c), where:

(a) is the variable annuity unit value for the subaccount on the immediately preceding market day;

(b) is the net investment factor for that subaccount for the valuation period; and

(c) is the assumed investment return adjustment factor for the valuation period.

The assumed investment return adjustment factor for the valuation period is the product of discount factors of .99986634 per day to recognize the 3% effective annual AIR. The valuation period is the period from the close of the immediately preceding market day to the close of the current market day.

The net investment factor for the policy used to calculate the value of a variable annuity unit in each subaccount for the valuation period is determined by dividing (i) by (ii) and subtracting (iii) from the result, where:

(i) is the result of:

(1) the net asset value of a fund share held in that subaccount determined at the end of the current valuation period; plus

(2) the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by the fund for shares held in that subaccount if the ex-dividend date occurs during the valuation period; plus or minus

(3) a per share charge or credit for any taxes reserved for, which we determine to have resulted from the investment operations of the subaccount.

(ii) is the net asset value of a fund share held in that subaccount determined as of the end of the immediately preceding valuation period.

(iii) is a factor representing the mortality and expense risk fee and administrative charge. This factor is equal, on an annual basis, to 1.25% of the daily net asset value of shares held in that subaccount.

The dollar amount of subsequent variable annuity payments will depend upon changes in applicable annuity unit values.

12

The annuity payment rates generally vary according to the annuity option elected and the gender and adjusted age of the annuitant at the annuity commencement date. The policy contains a table for determining the adjusted age of the annuitant.

Illustration of Calculations for Annuity Unit

Value and Variable Annuity Payments

Formula and Illustration for Determining Annuity Unit Value

Annuity Unit Value = A * B * C

Where:

A= Annuity unit value for the immediately preceding valuation period.

Assume = $X

B= Net investment factor for the valuation period for which the annuity value is being calculated.

Assume = Y

C= A factor to neutralize the annual assumed investment return of 3% built into the Annuity Tables used.

Assume = Z

Then, the annuity unit value is:

$X * Y * Z = $Q

Formula and Illustration for Determining Amount of

First Monthly Variable Annuity Payment

First monthly variable annuity payment =	A * B
	$1,000

Where:

A= The adjusted policy value as of the annuity commencement date.

Assume = $X

B= The annuity purchase rate per $1,000 of adjusted policy value based upon the option selected, the sex and adjusted age of the annuitant according to the tables contained in the policy.

Assume = $Y

Then, the first monthly variable annuity payment =	$X * $Y = $Z
	1,000

13

Formula and Illustration for Determining the Number of Annuity Units

Represented by Each Monthly Variable Annuity Payment

Number of annuity units =	A
	B

Where:

A= The dollar amount of the first monthly variable annuity payment.

Assume = $X

B= The annuity unit value for the valuation date on which the first monthly payment is due.

Assume = $Y

Then, the number of annuity units =	$X = Z
	$Y

PERFORMANCE

We periodically advertise performance of the various subaccounts. Performance figures might not reflect charges for options, riders, or endorsements. We may disclose at least three different kinds of non-standard performance. First, we may calculate performance by determining the percentage change in the value of an accumulation unit by dividing the increase (decrease) for that unit by the value of the accumulation unit at the beginning of the period. This performance number reflects the deduction of the mortality and expense risk fees and administrative charges. It does not reflect the deduction of any applicable premium taxes, surrender charges, or fees for any optional riders or endorsements. Any such deduction would reduce the percentage increase or make greater any percentage decrease.

Second, advertisements may also include total return figures, which reflect the deduction of the mortality and expense risk fees and administrative charges. These figures may also include or exclude surrender charges. These figures may also reflect any applicable premium enhancement.

Third, for certain investment portfolios, performance may be shown for the period commencing from the inception date of the investment portfolio (i.e., before commencement of subaccount operations). These figures should not be interpreted to reflect actual historical performance of the subaccounts.

Not all types of performance data presented reflect all of the fees and charges that may be deducted (such as fees for optional benefits); performance figures would be lower if these charges were included.

HISTORICAL PERFORMANCE DATA

Money Market Yields

We may from time to time disclose the current annualized yield of the money market subaccount, which invests in the corresponding money market portfolio, for a 7-day period in a manner which does not take into consideration any

14

realized or unrealized gains or losses on shares of the corresponding money market portfolio or on its portfolio securities. This current annualized yield is computed by determining the net change (exclusive of realized gains and losses on the sale of securities and unrealized appreciation and depreciation and income other than investment income) at the end of the 7-day period in the value of a hypothetical account having a balance of 1 unit of the money market subaccount at the beginning of the 7-day period, dividing such net change in account value by the value of the account at the beginning of the period to determine the base period return, and annualizing this quotient on a 365-day basis. The net change in account value reflects (i) net income from the portfolio attributable to the hypothetical account; and (ii) charges and deductions imposed under a policy that are attributable to the hypothetical account. The charges and deductions include the per unit charges for the hypothetical account for (i) the administrative charges and (ii) the mortality and expense risk fee. Current yield will be calculated according to the following formula:

Current Yield = ((NCS * ES)/UV) * (365/7)

Where:

NCS	=	The net change in the value of the portfolio (exclusive of realized gains and losses on the sale of securities and unrealized appreciation and depreciation and income other than investment income) for the 7-day period attributable to a hypothetical account having a balance of 1 subaccount unit.
ES	=	Per unit expenses of the subaccount for the 7-day period.
UV	=	The unit value on the first day of the 7-day period.

Because of the charges and deductions imposed under a policy, the yield for the money market subaccount will be lower than the yield for the corresponding money market portfolio. The yield calculations do not reflect the effect of any premium taxes. The yield calculations also do not reflect surrender charges that may be applicable to a particular policy. Surrender charges range from 9% to 0% (depending on which share class you select) of the amount of premium payments surrendered based on the number of years since the premium payment was made.

We may also disclose the effective yield of the money market subaccount for the same 7-day period, determined on a compounded basis. The effective yield is calculated by compounding the base period return according to the following formula:

Effective Yield = (1 + ((NCS - ES)/UV))^365/7 - 1

Where:

NCS	=	The net change in the value of the portfolio (exclusive of realized gains and losses on the sale of securities and unrealized appreciation and depreciation and income other than investment income) for the 7-day period attributable to a hypothetical account having a balance of one subaccount unit.
ES	=	Per unit expenses of the subaccount for the 7-day period.
UV	=	The unit value on the first day of the 7-day period.

The yield on amounts held in the money market subaccount normally will fluctuate on a daily basis. Therefore, the disclosed yield for any given past period is not an indication or representation of future yields or rates of return. The money market subaccount’s actual yield is affected by changes in interest rates on money market securities, average portfolio maturity of the corresponding money market portfolio, the types and quality of portfolio securities held by the corresponding money market portfolio and its operating expenses.

15

Total Returns

We may from time to time also advertise or disclose total returns for one or more of the subaccounts for various periods of time. One of the periods of time will include the period measured from the date the subaccount commenced operations. When a subaccount has been in operation for 1, 5 and 10 years, respectively, the total return for these periods will be provided. Total returns for other periods of time may from time to time also be disclosed. Total returns represent the average annual compounded rates of return that would equate an initial investment of $1,000 to the redemption value of that investment as of the last day of each of the periods. The ending date for each period for which total return quotations are provided will be for the most recent month end practicable, considering the type and media of the communication and will be stated in the communication.

Total returns will be calculated using subaccount unit values which we calculate on each market day based on the performance of the separate account’s underlying fund portfolio and the deductions for the mortality and expense risk fee and the administrative charges. Total return calculations will reflect the effect of surrender charges that may be applicable to a particular period. The total return will then be calculated according to the following formula:

P (1 + T)^N = ERV

Where:

T	=	The average annual total return net of subaccount recurring charges.
ERV	=	The ending redeemable value of the hypothetical account at the end of the period.
P	=	A hypothetical initial payment of $1,000.
N	=	The number of years in the period.

Other Performance Data

We may from time to time also disclose average annual total returns in a non-standard format in conjunction with the standard format described above. The non-standard format will be identical to the standard format except that the surrender charge percentage will be assumed to be 0%.

We may from time to time also disclose cumulative total returns in conjunction with the standard format described above. The cumulative returns will be calculated using the following formula except that the surrender charge percentage will be assumed to be 0%:

CTR = (ERV / P)-1

Where:

CTR	=	The cumulative total return net of subaccount recurring charges for the period.
ERV	=	The ending redeemable value of the hypothetical investment at the end of the period.
P	=	A hypothetical initial payment of $1,000.

All non-standard performance data will only be advertised if the standard performance data is also disclosed.

16

Adjusted Historical Performance Data

From time to time, sales literature or advertisements may quote average annual total returns for periods prior to the date a particular subaccount commenced operations. Such performance information for the subaccounts will be calculated based on the performance of the various portfolios and the assumption that the subaccounts were in existence for the same periods as those indicated for the portfolios, with the level of policy charges that are currently in effect.

PUBLISHED RATINGS

We may from time to time publish in advertisements, sales literature and reports to owners, the ratings and other information assigned to us by one or more independent rating organizations such as A.M. Best Company, Standard & Poor’s Insurance Ratings Services, Moody’s Investors Service and Fitch Financial Ratings. The purpose of the ratings is to reflect our financial strength. The ratings should not be considered as bearing on the investment performance of assets held in the separate account or of the safety or riskiness of an investment in the separate account. Each year the A.M. Best Company reviews the financial status of thousands of insurers, culminating in the assignment of Best’s Ratings. These ratings reflect their current opinion of the relative financial strength and operating performance of an insurance company in comparison to the norms of the life/health insurance industry. In addition, these ratings may be referred to in advertisements or sales literature or in reports to owners. These ratings are opinions of an operating insurance company’s financial capacity to meet the obligations of its insurance policies in accordance with their terms.

STATE REGULATION OF US

We are subject to the laws of jurisdiction governing insurance companies and to regulation by the jurisdiction Department of Insurance. An annual statement in a prescribed form is filed with the Department of Insurance each year covering our operations for the preceding year and our financial condition as of the end of such year. Regulation by the Department of Insurance includes periodic examination to determine our contract liabilities and reserves so that the Department may determine the items are correct. Our books and accounts are subject to review by the Department of Insurance at all times, and a full examination of our operations are conducted periodically by the National Association of Insurance Commissioners. In addition, we are subject to regulation under the insurance laws of other jurisdictions in which it may operate.

ADMINISTRATION

We perform administrative services for the policies. These services include issuance of the policies, maintenance of records concerning the policies, and certain valuation services.

RECORDS AND REPORTS

We will maintain all records and accounts relating to the separate account. As presently required by the 1940 Act, as amended, and regulations promulgated thereunder, we will mail to all owners at their last known address of record, at least annually, reports containing such information as may be required under that Act or by any other applicable law or regulation. Owners will also receive confirmation of each financial transaction and any other reports required by law or regulation. However, for certain routine transactions (for example, regular monthly premiums deducted from your checking account, or regular annuity payments we send to you) you may only receive quarterly confirmations.

17

DISTRIBUTION OF THE POLICIES

We have entered into a principal underwriting agreement with our affiliate, Transamerica Capital, Inc. (“TCI”), for the distribution and sale of the policies. We may reimburse TCI for certain expenses it incurs in order to pay for the distribution of the policies (e.g., commissions payable to selling firms selling the Policies, as described below.)

TCI’s home office is located at 4600 S Syracuse St. Suite 1100 Denver, Colorado 80237-2719. TCI is an indirect, wholly owned subsidiary of AEGON USA. TCI is registered as a broker-dealer with the Securities and Exchange Commission under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, and is a member of Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”). TCI is not a member of the Securities Investor Protection Corporation.

We currently offer the policies on a continuous basis. We anticipate continuing to offer the policies, but reserve the right to discontinue the offering. The policies are offered to the public through sales representatives of broker-dealers (“selling firms”) that have entered into selling agreements with us and with TCI. TCI compensates these selling firms for their services. Sales representatives with these selling firms are appointed as our insurance agents.

We and our affiliates provide paid-in capital to TCI and pay for TCI’s operating and other expenses, including overhead, legal and accounting fees. We also pay TCI and “override” payment based on the pricing of the product which becomes part of TCI’s assets. As of December 31, 2012, no amount was paid to TCI in connection with all policies sold through the separate account because the separate account had not commenced operations.

We and/or TCI or another affiliate may pay certain selling firms additional cash amounts for: (1) “preferred product” treatment of the policies in their marketing programs, which may include marketing services and increased access to their sales representatives; (2) sales promotions relating to the policies; (3) costs associated with sales conferences and educational seminars for their sales representatives; and (4) other sales expenses of the selling firms. We and/or TCI may make bonus payments to certain selling firms based on aggregate sales or persistency standards. These additional payments are not offered to all selling firms, and the terms of any particular agreement governing the payments may vary among selling firms.

VOTING RIGHTS

To the extent required by law, we will vote the underlying fund portfolios’ shares held by the separate account at regular and special shareholder meetings of the underlying fund portfolios in accordance with instructions received from persons having voting interests in the portfolios, although none of the underlying fund portfolios hold regular annual shareholder meetings. If, however, the 1940 Act or any regulation thereunder should be amended or if the present interpretation thereof should change, and as a result the Company determines that it is permitted to vote the underlying fund portfolios shares in its own right, it may elect to do so.

Before the annuity commencement date, you hold the voting interest in the selected portfolios. The number of votes that you have the right to instruct will be calculated separately for each subaccount. The number of votes that you have the right to instruct for a particular subaccount will be determined by dividing your policy value in the subaccount by the net asset value per share of the corresponding portfolio in which the subaccount invests. Fractional shares will be counted.

18

After the annuity commencement date, the person receiving annuity payments has the voting interest, and the number of votes decreases as annuity payments are made and as the reserves for the policy decrease. The person’s number of votes will be determined by dividing the reserve for the policy allocated to the applicable subaccount by the net asset value per share of the corresponding portfolio. Fractional shares will be counted.

The number of votes that you or the person receiving income payments has the right to instruct will be determined as of the date established by the underlying fund portfolio for determining shareholders eligible to vote at the meeting of the underlying fund portfolio. We will solicit voting instructions by sending you, or other persons entitled to vote, requests for instructions prior to that meeting in accordance with procedures established by the underlying fund portfolio. Portfolio shares as to which no timely instructions are received, and shares held by us in which you, or other persons entitled to vote have no beneficial interest, will be voted in proportion to the voting instructions that are received with respect to all policies participating in the same subaccount.

Each person having a voting interest in a subaccount will receive proxy material, reports, and other materials relating to the appropriate portfolio.

OTHER PRODUCTS

We make other variable annuity policies available that may also be funded through the separate account. These variable annuity policies may have different features, such as different investment choices or charges.

CUSTODY OF ASSETS

We hold assets of each of the subaccounts. The assets of each of the subaccounts are segregated and held separate and apart from the assets of the other subaccounts and from our general account assets. We maintain records of all purchases and redemptions of shares of the underlying fund portfolios held by each of the subaccounts. Additional protection for the assets of the separate account is afforded by our fidelity bond, presently in the amount of $5,000,000, covering the acts of our officers and employees.

LEGAL MATTERS

Sutherland Asbill & Brennan LLP, of Washington D.C. has provided legal advice to the Company regarding to certain matters under the federal securities laws that relate to the policies.

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

Our statutory-basis financial statements and schedules at December 31, 2012 and 2011, and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2012, appearing herein, have been audited by Ernst & Young LLP, Suite 3000, 801 Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa 50309, Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm, as set forth in their report thereon appearing elsewhere herein, and are included in reliance upon their report given on their authority as experts in accounting and auditing. There are no financial statements for the subaccounts because they had not commenced operations as of December 31, 2012.

19

OTHER INFORMATION

A registration statement has been filed with the SEC, under the Securities Act of 1933 as amended, with respect to the policies discussed in this SAI. Not all of the information set forth in the registration statement and the amendments and exhibits thereto has been included in the prospectus or this SAI. Statements contained in the prospectus and this SAI concerning the content of the policies and other legal instruments are intended to be summaries. For a complete statement of the terms of these documents, reference should be made to the instruments filed with the SEC.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The values of your interest in the separate account will be affected solely by the investment results of the selected subaccount(s). Our statutory-basis financial statements and schedules, which are included in this SAI, should be considered only as bearing on our ability to meet our obligations under the policies. They should not be considered as bearing on the investment performance of the assets held in the separate account.

20

The information in this statement of additional information is not complete and may be changed. This Statement of Additional Information is contained in a registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and we may not sell these securities until that registration statement is effective. This statement of additional information is not an offer to sell these securities and is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any state where the offer or sale is not permitted.

STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (Subject to Completion             , 2013)

STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

MEMBERS^® VARIABLE ANNUITY SERIES

Issued through

Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company
Separate Account B (EST. 1/19/1990)	Separate Account BNY (EST. 9/27/1994)
4333 Edgewood Road NE	4333 Edgewood Road NE
Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001	Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001
(800)525-6205	(800)525-6205
www.transamericaannuities.com	www.transamericaannuities.com

This Statement of Additional Information expands upon subjects discussed in the current prospectus for the MEMBERS^® Variable Annuity Series variable annuity offered by Transamerica Life Insurance Company and Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company (“us,” “we”, “our” or “Company”). You may obtain a copy of the current prospectus, dated May 1, 2013, by calling (800) 525-6205, or write us at the addresses listed above. The prospectus sets forth information that a prospective investor should know before investing in a policy. Terms used in the current prospectus for the policy are incorporated in this Statement of Additional Information.

This Statement of Additional Information (SAI) is not a prospectus and should be read only in conjunction with the prospectuses for the policy and the underlying fund portfolios.

Dated: May 1, 2013

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GLOSSARY OF TERMS	3
THE POLICY — GENERAL PROVISIONS	6
Owner	6
Entire Contract	6
Misstatement of Age or Sex	7
Reallocation of Annuity Units After the Annuity Commencement Date	7
Annuity Payment Options	7
Death Benefit	8
Death of Owner	9
Assignment	9
Evidence of Survival	9
Non-Participating	9
Amendments	9
Employee and Agent Purchases	10
INVESTMENT EXPERIENCE	10
Accumulation Units	10
Annuity Unit Value and Annuity Payment Rates	12
PERFORMANCE	14
HISTORICAL PERFORMANCE DATA	14
Money Market Yields	14
Total Returns	16
Other Performance Data	16
Adjusted Historical Performance Data	17
PUBLISHED RATINGS	17
STATE REGULATION OF US	17
ADMINISTRATION	17
RECORDS AND REPORTS	17
DISTRIBUTION OF THE POLICIES	18
VOTING RIGHTS	18
OTHER PRODUCTS	19
CUSTODY OF ASSETS	19
LEGAL MATTERS	19
INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM	19
OTHER INFORMATION	20
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS	20

2

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

Accumulation Unit — An accounting unit of measure used in calculating the policy value in the separate account before the annuity commencement date.

Adjusted Policy Value — The policy value increased or decreased by any excess interest adjustment.

Administrative and Service Office — Transamerica Life Insurance Company and Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company, Attention: Customer Care Group, 4333 Edgewood Road NE, Cedar Rapids, IA 52499-0001, (800)525-6205.

Annuitant — The person on whose life any annuity payments involving life contingencies will be based.

Annuity Commencement Date — The date upon which annuity payments are to commence. This date may be any date after the policy date and may not be later than the last day of the policy month following the month after the annuitant attains age 99 (earlier if required by state law). In no event can this date be earlier than the third policy anniversary. The annuity commencement date may have to be earlier for qualified policies and may be earlier if required by state law.

Annuity Payment Option — A method of receiving a stream of annuity payments selected by the owner.

Annuity Unit — An accounting unit of measure used in the calculation of the amount of the second and each subsequent variable annuity payment.

Assumed Investment Return or AIR — The annual effective rate shown in the contract specifications section of the contract that is used in the calculation of each variable annuity payment.

Beneficiary — The person who has the right to the death benefit as set forth in the policy.

Cash Value — The adjusted policy value less any applicable surrender charge and rider fees (imposed upon surrender).

Code — The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Enrollment form — A written application, order form, or any other information received electronically or otherwise upon which the policy is issued and/or is reflected on the data or specifications page.

Excess Interest Adjustment — A positive or negative adjustment to amounts surrendered (both partial or full surrenders and transfers) or applied to annuity payment options from the fixed account guaranteed period options prior to the end of the guaranteed period. The adjustment reflects changes in the interest rates declared by us since the date any payment was received by, or an amount was transferred to, the guaranteed period option. The excess interest adjustment can either decrease or increase the amount to be received by the owner upon full surrender or commencement of annuity payments, depending upon whether there has been an increase or decrease in interest rates, respectively. The excess interest adjustment does not apply to policies issued in New York by Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company.

Excess Partial Surrender — The portion of a partial surrender (surrender) that exceeds the free amount.

3

Fixed Account — One or more investment choices under the policy that are part of our general assets and are not in the separate account.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit — Any optional benefit under the policy that provides a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit, including Guaranteed Principal Solution^SM Rider, the Income Link^SM Rider, the Retirement Income Max^SM Rider or the Retirement Income Choice^SM 1.6 Rider

Guaranteed Period Options — The various guaranteed interest rate periods of the fixed account which we may offer and into which premium payments may be paid or amounts transferred when available.

Market Day — A day when the New York Stock Exchange is open for business.

Nonqualified Policy — A policy other than a qualified policy.

Owner (You, Your) — The person who may exercise all rights and privileges under the policy.

Policy Date — The date shown on the policy data page attached to the policy and the date on which the policy becomes effective.

Policy Value — On or before the annuity commencement date, the policy value is equal to the owner’s:

• premium payments; minus

• gross surrenders (surrenders plus the surrender charge on the portion of the requested partial surrender that is subject to the surrender charge plus or minus any excess interest adjustment); plus

• interest credited in the fixed account; plus

• accumulated gains in the separate account; minus

• accumulated losses in the separate account; minus

• service charges, rider fees, premium taxes, transfer fees, and other charges, if any.

Policy Year — A policy year begins on the policy date and on each anniversary thereof.

Premium Payment — An amount paid to us by the owner or on the owner’s behalf as consideration for the benefits provided by the policy.

Qualified Policy — A policy issued in connection with retirement plans that qualify for special federal income tax treatment under the Code.

Separate Account — Separate Account VA B and Separate Account VA BNY, separate accounts established and registered as unit investment trusts under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”), to which premium payments under the policies may be allocated.

Separate Account Value — The portion of the policy value that is invested in the separate account.

4

Service Charge — An annual charge on each policy anniversary (and a charge at the time of surrender during any policy year) for policy maintenance and related administrative expenses.

Subaccount — A subdivision within the separate account, the assets of which are invested in a specified underlying fund portfolios.

Supportable Payment — The amount equal to the sum of the variable annuity unit values multiplied by the number of variable annuity units in each of the selected subaccounts.

Surrender Charge — A percentage of each premium payment that depends upon the length of time from the date of each premium payment. The surrender charge is assessed on full or partial surrenders from the policy. A surrender charge may also be referred to as a “contingent deferred sales charge” or a “contingent deferred sales load.”

Surrender Charge Free Amount — The amount that can be withdrawn each year without incurring any surrender charges.

Valuation Period — The period of time from one determination of accumulation unit values and annuity unit values to the next subsequent determination of those values. Such determination shall be made generally at the close of business on each market day.

Variable Annuity Payments — Payments made pursuant to an annuity payment option which fluctuate as to dollar amount or payment term in relation to the investment performance of the specified subaccounts within the separate account.

Written Notice — Written notice, signed by the owner, that gives us the information we require and is received in good order at the Administrative and Service Office. For some transactions, we may accept an electronic notice such as telephone instructions. Such electronic notice must meet the requirements for good order that we establish for such notices.

5

In order to supplement the description in the prospectus, the following provides additional information about us and the policy, which may be of interest to a prospective purchaser.

THE POLICY — GENERAL PROVISIONS

Owner

The policy shall belong to the owner upon issuance of the policy after completion of an enrollment form and delivery of the initial premium payment. While the annuitant is living, the owner may: (1) assign the policy; (2) surrender the policy; (3) amend or modify the policy with our consent; (4) receive annuity payments or name a payee to receive the payments; and (5) exercise, receive and enjoy every other right and benefit contained in the policy. The exercise of these rights may be subject to the consent of any assignee or irrevocable beneficiary; and of your spouse in a community or marital property state.

Unless we have been notified of a community or marital property interest in the policy, we will rely on our good faith belief that no such interest exists and will assume no responsibility for inquiry.

Note carefully. If the owner predeceases the annuitant and no joint owner, primary beneficiary, or contingent beneficiary is alive or in existence on the date of death, the owner’s estate will become the new owner. If no probate estate is opened because the owner has precluded the opening of a probate estate by means of a trust or other instrument, that trust may not exercise ownership rights to the policy. It may be necessary to open a probate estate in order to exercise ownership rights to the policy.

The owner may change the ownership of the policy in a written notice. When this change takes effect, all rights of ownership in the policy will pass to the new owner. A change of ownership may have tax consequences.

When there is a change of owner, the change will not be effective until it is recorded in our records. Once recorded, it will take effect as of the date the owner signs the written notice, subject to any payment we have made or action we have taken before recording the change. Changing the owner does not change the designation of the beneficiary or the annuitant.

If ownership is transferred to a new owner (except to the owner’s spouse) because the owner dies before the annuitant, then (a) the cash value generally must be distributed to the new owner within five years of the owner’s death, or (b) annuity payments must be made for a period certain or for the new owner’s lifetime so long as any period certain does not exceed that new owner’s life expectancy, if the first payment begins within one year of your death.

Entire Contract

The entire contract consists of the policy and any application, endorsements and riders. If any portion of the policy or rider attached thereto shall be found to be invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the remainder shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby, but shall have the same force and effect as if the invalid, unenforceable or illegal portion had not been inserted.

6

Misstatement of Age or Sex

If the age or sex of the annuitant or owner has been misstated, we will change the annuity benefit payable to that which the premium payments would have purchased for the correct age or sex. The dollar amount of any underpayment made by us shall be paid in full with the next payment due such person or the beneficiary. The dollar amount of any overpayment made by us due to any misstatement shall be deducted from payments subsequently accruing to such person or beneficiary. Any underpayment or overpayment will include interest at 5% per year, from the date of the wrong payment to the date of the adjustment. The age of the annuitant or owner may be established at any time by the submission of proof satisfactory to us.

Reallocation of Annuity Units After the Annuity Commencement Date

After the annuity commencement date, you may reallocate the value of a designated number of annuity units of a subaccount then credited to a policy into an equal value of annuity units of one or more other subaccounts or the fixed account. The reallocation shall be based on the relative value of the annuity units of the account(s) or subaccount(s) at the end of the market day on the next payment date. The minimum amount which may be reallocated is the lesser of (1) $10 of monthly income or (2) the entire monthly income of the annuity units in the account or subaccount from which the transfer is being made. If the monthly income of the annuity units remaining in an account or subaccount after a reallocation is less than $10, we reserve the right to include the value of those annuity units as part of the transfer. The request must be in writing to our administrative and service office. There is no charge assessed in connection with such reallocation. A reallocation of annuity units may be made up to four times in any given policy year.

After the annuity commencement date, no transfers may be made from the fixed account to the separate account.

Annuity Payment Options

During the lifetime of the annuitant and before the annuity commencement date, the owner may choose an annuity payment option or change the election, but notice of any election or change of election must be received by us in good order at least thirty (30) days before the annuity commencement date (elections less than 30 days require prior approval). If no election is made before the annuity commencement date, annuity payments will be made under (1) life income with level (fixed) payments for 10 years certain, using the existing adjusted policy value of the fixed account, or (2) life income with variable payments for 10 years certain using the existing policy value of the separate account, or (3) in a combination of (1) and (2).

The person who elects an annuity payment option can also name one or more successor payees to receive any unpaid, guaranteed amount at the death of a payee. Naming these payees cancels any prior choice of a successor payee.

A payee who did not elect the annuity payment option does not have the right to advance or assign payments, take the payments in one sum, or make any other change. However, the payee may be given the right to do one or more of these things if the person who elects the option tells us in writing and we agree.

Variable Payment Options. The dollar amount of the first variable annuity payment will be determined in accordance with the annuity payment rates set forth in the applicable table contained in the policy. For annuity payments the tables are based on a 3% effective annual AIR and the “2000 Table”, using an assumed annuity commencement date of 2024 (static projection to this point) with dynamic projection using scale G from that point (100% of G for male, 50% of G for females). The dollar amount of additional variable annuity payments will vary based on the investment performance of the subaccount(s) of the separate account selected by the annuitant or beneficiary.

7

Determination of the First Variable Payment. The amount of the first variable payment depends upon the sex (if consideration of sex is allowed under state law) and adjusted age of the annuitant. For regular annuity payments, the adjusted age is the annuitant’s actual age nearest birthday, on the annuity commencement date, adjusted as described in your policy. This adjustment assumes an increase in life expectancy, and therefore it results in lower payments than without such an adjustment.

Determination of Additional Variable Payments. All variable annuity payments other than the first are calculated using annuity units which are credited to the policy. The number of annuity units to be credited in respect of a particular subaccount is determined by dividing that portion of the first variable annuity payment attributable to that subaccount by the annuity unit value of that subaccount on the annuity commencement date. The number of annuity units of each particular subaccount credited to the policy then remains fixed, assuming no transfers to or from that subaccount occur. The dollar value of variable annuity units in the chosen subaccount will increase or decrease reflecting the investment experience of the chosen subaccount. The dollar amount of each variable annuity payment after the first may increase, decrease or remain constant. This amount is equal to the sum of the amounts determined by multiplying the number of annuity units of each particular subaccount credited to the policy by the annuity unit value for the particular subaccount on the date the payment is made.

Death Benefit

Due proof of death of the annuitant is proof that the annuitant died prior to the commencement of annuity payments. A certified copy of a death certificate, a certified copy of a decree of a court of competent jurisdiction as to the finding of death, a written statement by the attending physician, or any other proof satisfactory to us will constitute due proof of death.

Upon receipt in good order of this proof and an election of a method of settlement and return of the policy, the death benefit generally will be paid within seven days, or as soon thereafter as we have sufficient information about the beneficiary(ies) to make the payment. The beneficiary may receive the amount payable in a lump sum cash benefit, or, subject to any limitation under any state or federal law, rule, or regulation, under one of the annuity payment options described above, unless a settlement agreement is effective at the death of the owner preventing such election.

If an owner is not an annuitant, and dies prior to the annuity commencement date, the new owner may surrender the policy at any time for the amount of the adjusted policy value. If the new owner is not the deceased owner’s spouse, however, (1) the adjusted policy value must be distributed within five years after the date of the deceased owner’s death, or (2) payments under an annuity payment option must begin no later than one year after the deceased owner’s death and must be made for the new owner’s lifetime or for a period certain (so long as the period certain does not exceed the new owner’s life expectancy). If the sole new owner is the deceased owner’s surviving spouse, such spouse may elect to continue the policy as the new owner instead of receiving the death benefit.

Beneficiary. The beneficiary designation in the enrollment form will remain in effect until changed. The owner may change the designated beneficiary by sending us written notice. The beneficiary’s consent to such change is not required unless the beneficiary was irrevocably designated or law requires consent. If an irrevocable beneficiary dies, the owner may then designate a new beneficiary. The change will take effect as of the date the owner signs the written notice, whether or not the owner is living when we receive the notice. We will not be liable for any payment made before the

8

written notice is received. If more than one beneficiary is designated, and the owner fails to specify their interests, they will share equally. If upon the death of the annuitant there is a surviving owner(s), the surviving owner(s) automatically takes the place of any beneficiary designation.

Death of Owner

Federal tax law requires that if any owner (including any joint owner who has become a current owner) dies before the annuity commencement date, then the entire value of the policy must generally be distributed within five years of the date of death of such owner. Certain rules apply where (1) the spouse of the deceased owner is the sole beneficiary, (2) the owner is not a natural person and the primary annuitant dies or is changed, or (3) any owner dies after the annuity commencement date. See the TAX INFORMATION section in the prospectus for more information about these rules. Other rules may apply to qualified policies.

Assignment

During the lifetime of the annuitant you may assign any rights or benefits provided by the policy if your policy is a nonqualified policy. An assignment will not be binding on us until a copy has been filed at our administrative and service office. Your rights and benefits and those of the beneficiary are subject to the rights of the assignee. We assume no responsibility for the validity or effect of any assignment. Any claim made under an assignment shall be subject to proof of interest and the extent of the assignment. An assignment may have tax consequences.

Unless you so direct by filing written notice with us, no beneficiary may assign any payments under the policy before they are due. To the extent permitted by law, no payments will be subject to the claims of any beneficiary’s creditors.

Ownership under qualified policies is restricted to comply with the Code.

Evidence of Survival

We reserve the right to require satisfactory evidence that a person is alive if a payment is based on that person being alive. No payment will be made until we receive such evidence.

Non-Participating

The policy will not share in our surplus earnings; no dividends will be paid.

Amendments

No change in the policy is valid unless made in writing by us and approved by one of our officers. No registered representative has authority to change or waive any provision of the policy.

We reserve the right to amend the policies to meet the requirements of the Code, regulations or published rulings. You can refuse such a change by giving written notice, but a refusal may result in adverse tax consequences.

9

Employee and Agent Purchases

The policy may be acquired by an employee or registered representative of any broker/dealer authorized to sell the policy or their immediate family, or by an officer, director, trustee or bona-fide full-time employee of ours or our affiliated companies or their immediate family. In such a case, we may, at our sole discretion, credit an amount equal to a percentage of each premium payment to the policy due to lower acquisition costs we experience on those purchases. We may offer certain employer sponsored savings plans, reduced fees and charges including, but not limited to, the annual service charge, the surrender charges, the mortality and expense risk fee and the administrative charge for certain sales under circumstances which may result in savings of certain costs and expenses. In addition, there may be other circumstances of which we are not presently aware which could result in reduced sales or distribution expenses. Credits to the policy or reductions in these fees and charges will not be unfairly discriminatory against any owner.

INVESTMENT EXPERIENCE

A “net investment factor” is used to determine the value of accumulation units and annuity units, and to determine annuity payment rates.

Accumulation Units

Allocations of a premium payment directed to a subaccount are credited in the form of accumulation units. Each subaccount has a distinct accumulation unit value. The number of units credited is determined by dividing the premium payment or amount transferred to the subaccount by the accumulation unit value of the subaccount as of the end of the valuation period during which the allocation is made. For each subaccount, the accumulation unit value for a given market day is based on the net asset value of a share of the corresponding portfolio of the underlying fund portfolios less any applicable charges or fees. The investment performance of the portfolio, expenses, and deductions of certain charges affect the value of an accumulation unit.

Upon allocation to the selected subaccount, premium payments are converted into accumulation units of the subaccount. The number of accumulation units to be credited is determined by dividing the dollar amount allocated to each subaccount by the value of an accumulation unit for that subaccount as next determined after the premium payment is received at the administrative and service office or, in the case of the initial premium payment, when the enrollment form is completed, whichever is later. The value of an accumulation unit for each subaccount was arbitrarily established at $1 at the inception of each subaccount. Thereafter, the value of an accumulation unit is determined as of the close of trading on each day the New York Stock Exchange is open for business.

An index (the “net investment factor”) which measures the investment performance of a subaccount during a valuation period, is used to determine the value of an accumulation unit for the next subsequent valuation period. The net investment factor may be greater or less than or equal to one; therefore, the value of an accumulation unit may increase, decrease, or remain the same from one valuation period to the next. You bear this investment risk. The net investment performance of a subaccount and deduction of certain charges affect the accumulation unit value.

The net investment factor for any subaccount for any valuation period is determined by dividing (a) by (b) and subtracting (c) from the result, where:

(a) is the net result of:

10

(1) the net asset value per share of the shares held in the subaccount determined at the end of the current valuation period, plus

(2) the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distribution made with respect to the shares held in the subaccount if the ex-dividend date occurs during the current valuation period, plus or minus

(3) a per share credit or charge for any taxes determined by the Company to have resulted during the valuation period from the investment operations of the subaccount;

(b) is the net asset value per share of the shares held in the subaccount determined as of the end of the immediately preceding valuation period; and

(c) is an amount representing the separate account charge and any optional benefit fees, if applicable.

Illustration of Separate Account Accumulation Unit Value Calculations

Formula and Illustration for Determining the Net Investment Factor

Net Investment Factor =	(A + B - C) - E
	D

Where:

A= The net asset value of an underlying fund portfolio share at of the end of the current valuation period.

Assume A = $11.57

B= The per share amount of any dividend or capital gains distribution since the end of the immediately preceding valuation period.

Assume B = 0

C= The per share charge or credit for any taxes reserved for at the end of the current valuation period.

Assume C = 0

D= The net asset value of an underlying fund portfolio share at of the end of the immediately preceding valuation period.

Assume D = $11.40

E= The daily deduction for the mortality and expense risk fee and the administrative charge, and any optional benefit fees, if applicable. Assume E total 1.50% on an annual basis; On a daily basis, this equals 0.000041096.

Then, the net investment factor =	(11.57 + 0 – 0) - 0.000041096 = Z = 1.014871185
	(11.40)

11

Formula and Illustration for Determining Accumulation Unit Value

Accumulation Unit Value = A * B

Where:

A= The accumulation unit value for the immediately preceding valuation period.

Assume = $X

B= The net investment factor for the current valuation period.

Assume = Y

Then, the accumulation unit value = $X * Y = $Z

Annuity Unit Value and Annuity Payment Rates

The amount of variable annuity payments will vary with annuity unit values. Annuity unit values rise if the net investment performance of the subaccount exceeds the assumed investment return of 3% annually. Conversely, annuity unit values fall if the net investment performance of the subaccount is less than the annual assumed investment return. The value of a variable annuity unit in each subaccount was established at $1 on the date operations began for that subaccount. The value of a variable annuity unit on any subsequent business day is equal to (a) multiplied by (b) multiplied by (c), where:

(a) is the variable annuity unit value for the subaccount on the immediately preceding market day;

(b) is the net investment factor for that subaccount for the valuation period; and

(c) is the assumed investment return adjustment factor for the valuation period.

The assumed investment return adjustment factor for the valuation period is the product of discount factors of .99986634 per day to recognize the 3% effective annual AIR. The valuation period is the period from the close of the immediately preceding market day to the close of the current market day.

The net investment factor for the policy used to calculate the value of a variable annuity unit in each subaccount for the valuation period is determined by dividing (i) by (ii) and subtracting (iii) from the result, where:

(i) is the result of:

(1) the net asset value of a fund share held in that subaccount determined at the end of the current valuation period; plus

(2) the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by the fund for shares held in that subaccount if the ex-dividend date occurs during the valuation period; plus or minus

(3) a per share charge or credit for any taxes reserved for, which we determine to have resulted from the investment operations of the subaccount.

(ii) is the net asset value of a fund share held in that subaccount determined as of the end of the immediately preceding valuation period.

(iii) is a factor representing the mortality and expense risk fee and administrative charge. This factor is equal, on an annual basis, to 1.25% of the daily net asset value of shares held in that subaccount.

The dollar amount of subsequent variable annuity payments will depend upon changes in applicable annuity unit values.

12

The annuity payment rates generally vary according to the annuity option elected and the gender and adjusted age of the annuitant at the annuity commencement date. The policy contains a table for determining the adjusted age of the annuitant.

Illustration of Calculations for Annuity Unit

Value and Variable Annuity Payments

Formula and Illustration for Determining Annuity Unit Value

Annuity Unit Value = A * B * C

Where:

A= Annuity unit value for the immediately preceding valuation period.

Assume = $X

B= Net investment factor for the valuation period for which the annuity value is being calculated.

Assume = Y

C= A factor to neutralize the annual assumed investment return of 3% built into the Annuity Tables used.

Assume = Z

Then, the annuity unit value is:

$X * Y * Z = $Q

Formula and Illustration for Determining Amount of

First Monthly Variable Annuity Payment

First monthly variable annuity payment =	A * B
	$1,000

Where:

A= The adjusted policy value as of the annuity commencement date.

Assume = $X

B= The annuity purchase rate per $1,000 of adjusted policy value based upon the option selected, the sex and adjusted age of the annuitant according to the tables contained in the policy.

Assume = $Y

Then, the first monthly variable annuity payment =	$X * $Y = $Z
	1,000

13

Formula and Illustration for Determining the Number of Annuity Units

Represented by Each Monthly Variable Annuity Payment

Number of annuity units =	A
	B

Where:

A= The dollar amount of the first monthly variable annuity payment.

Assume = $X

B= The annuity unit value for the valuation date on which the first monthly payment is due.

Assume = $Y

Then, the number of annuity units =	$X = Z
	$Y

PERFORMANCE

We periodically advertise performance of the various subaccounts. Performance figures might not reflect charges for options, riders, or endorsements. We may disclose at least three different kinds of non-standard performance. First, we may calculate performance by determining the percentage change in the value of an accumulation unit by dividing the increase (decrease) for that unit by the value of the accumulation unit at the beginning of the period. This performance number reflects the deduction of the mortality and expense risk fees and administrative charges. It does not reflect the deduction of any applicable premium taxes, surrender charges, or fees for any optional riders or endorsements. Any such deduction would reduce the percentage increase or make greater any percentage decrease.

Second, advertisements may also include total return figures, which reflect the deduction of the mortality and expense risk fees and administrative charges. These figures may also include or exclude surrender charges. These figures may also reflect any applicable premium enhancement.

Third, for certain investment portfolios, performance may be shown for the period commencing from the inception date of the investment portfolio (i.e., before commencement of subaccount operations). These figures should not be interpreted to reflect actual historical performance of the subaccounts.

Not all types of performance data presented reflect all of the fees and charges that may be deducted (such as fees for optional benefits); performance figures would be lower if these charges were included.

HISTORICAL PERFORMANCE DATA

Money Market Yields

We may from time to time disclose the current annualized yield of the money market subaccount, which invests in the corresponding money market portfolio, for a 7-day period in a manner which does not take into consideration any

14

realized or unrealized gains or losses on shares of the corresponding money market portfolio or on its portfolio securities. This current annualized yield is computed by determining the net change (exclusive of realized gains and losses on the sale of securities and unrealized appreciation and depreciation and income other than investment income) at the end of the 7-day period in the value of a hypothetical account having a balance of 1 unit of the money market subaccount at the beginning of the 7-day period, dividing such net change in account value by the value of the account at the beginning of the period to determine the base period return, and annualizing this quotient on a 365-day basis. The net change in account value reflects (i) net income from the portfolio attributable to the hypothetical account; and (ii) charges and deductions imposed under a policy that are attributable to the hypothetical account. The charges and deductions include the per unit charges for the hypothetical account for (i) the administrative charges and (ii) the mortality and expense risk fee. Current yield will be calculated according to the following formula:

Current Yield = ((NCS * ES)/UV) * (365/7)

Where:

NCS	=	The net change in the value of the portfolio (exclusive of realized gains and losses on the sale of securities and unrealized appreciation and depreciation and income other than investment income) for the 7-day period attributable to a hypothetical account having a balance of 1 subaccount unit.
ES	=	Per unit expenses of the subaccount for the 7-day period.
UV	=	The unit value on the first day of the 7-day period.

Because of the charges and deductions imposed under a policy, the yield for the money market subaccount will be lower than the yield for the corresponding money market portfolio. The yield calculations do not reflect the effect of any premium taxes. The yield calculations also do not reflect surrender charges that may be applicable to a particular policy. Surrender charges range from 9% to 0% (depending on which share class you select) of the amount of premium payments surrendered based on the number of years since the premium payment was made.

We may also disclose the effective yield of the money market subaccount for the same 7-day period, determined on a compounded basis. The effective yield is calculated by compounding the base period return according to the following formula:

Effective Yield = (1 + ((NCS - ES)/UV))^365/7 - 1

Where:

NCS	=	The net change in the value of the portfolio (exclusive of realized gains and losses on the sale of securities and unrealized appreciation and depreciation and income other than investment income) for the 7-day period attributable to a hypothetical account having a balance of one subaccount unit.
ES	=	Per unit expenses of the subaccount for the 7-day period.
UV	=	The unit value on the first day of the 7-day period.

The yield on amounts held in the money market subaccount normally will fluctuate on a daily basis. Therefore, the disclosed yield for any given past period is not an indication or representation of future yields or rates of return. The money market subaccount’s actual yield is affected by changes in interest rates on money market securities, average portfolio maturity of the corresponding money market portfolio, the types and quality of portfolio securities held by the corresponding money market portfolio and its operating expenses.

15

Total Returns

We may from time to time also advertise or disclose total returns for one or more of the subaccounts for various periods of time. One of the periods of time will include the period measured from the date the subaccount commenced operations. When a subaccount has been in operation for 1, 5 and 10 years, respectively, the total return for these periods will be provided. Total returns for other periods of time may from time to time also be disclosed. Total returns represent the average annual compounded rates of return that would equate an initial investment of $1,000 to the redemption value of that investment as of the last day of each of the periods. The ending date for each period for which total return quotations are provided will be for the most recent month end practicable, considering the type and media of the communication and will be stated in the communication.

Total returns will be calculated using subaccount unit values which we calculate on each market day based on the performance of the separate account’s underlying fund portfolio and the deductions for the mortality and expense risk fee and the administrative charges. Total return calculations will reflect the effect of surrender charges that may be applicable to a particular period. The total return will then be calculated according to the following formula:

P (1 + T)^N = ERV

Where:

T	=	The average annual total return net of subaccount recurring charges.
ERV	=	The ending redeemable value of the hypothetical account at the end of the period.
P	=	A hypothetical initial payment of $1,000.
N	=	The number of years in the period.

Other Performance Data

We may from time to time also disclose average annual total returns in a non-standard format in conjunction with the standard format described above. The non-standard format will be identical to the standard format except that the surrender charge percentage will be assumed to be 0%.

We may from time to time also disclose cumulative total returns in conjunction with the standard format described above. The cumulative returns will be calculated using the following formula except that the surrender charge percentage will be assumed to be 0%:

CTR = (ERV / P)-1

Where:

CTR	=	The cumulative total return net of subaccount recurring charges for the period.
ERV	=	The ending redeemable value of the hypothetical investment at the end of the period.
P	=	A hypothetical initial payment of $1,000.

All non-standard performance data will only be advertised if the standard performance data is also disclosed.

16

Adjusted Historical Performance Data

From time to time, sales literature or advertisements may quote average annual total returns for periods prior to the date a particular subaccount commenced operations. Such performance information for the subaccounts will be calculated based on the performance of the various portfolios and the assumption that the subaccounts were in existence for the same periods as those indicated for the portfolios, with the level of policy charges that are currently in effect.

PUBLISHED RATINGS

We may from time to time publish in advertisements, sales literature and reports to owners, the ratings and other information assigned to us by one or more independent rating organizations such as A.M. Best Company, Standard & Poor’s Insurance Ratings Services, Moody’s Investors Service and Fitch Financial Ratings. The purpose of the ratings is to reflect our financial strength. The ratings should not be considered as bearing on the investment performance of assets held in the separate account or of the safety or riskiness of an investment in the separate account. Each year the A.M. Best Company reviews the financial status of thousands of insurers, culminating in the assignment of Best’s Ratings. These ratings reflect their current opinion of the relative financial strength and operating performance of an insurance company in comparison to the norms of the life/health insurance industry. In addition, these ratings may be referred to in advertisements or sales literature or in reports to owners. These ratings are opinions of an operating insurance company’s financial capacity to meet the obligations of its insurance policies in accordance with their terms.

STATE REGULATION OF US

We are subject to the laws of jurisdiction governing insurance companies and to regulation by the jurisdiction Department of Insurance. An annual statement in a prescribed form is filed with the Department of Insurance each year covering our operations for the preceding year and our financial condition as of the end of such year. Regulation by the Department of Insurance includes periodic examination to determine our contract liabilities and reserves so that the Department may determine the items are correct. Our books and accounts are subject to review by the Department of Insurance at all times, and a full examination of our operations are conducted periodically by the National Association of Insurance Commissioners. In addition, we are subject to regulation under the insurance laws of other jurisdictions in which it may operate.

ADMINISTRATION

We perform administrative services for the policies. These services include issuance of the policies, maintenance of records concerning the policies, and certain valuation services.

RECORDS AND REPORTS

We will maintain all records and accounts relating to the separate account. As presently required by the 1940 Act, as amended, and regulations promulgated thereunder, we will mail to all owners at their last known address of record, at least annually, reports containing such information as may be required under that Act or by any other applicable law or regulation. Owners will also receive confirmation of each financial transaction and any other reports required by law or regulation. However, for certain routine transactions (for example, regular monthly premiums deducted from your checking account, or regular annuity payments we send to you) you may only receive quarterly confirmations.

17

DISTRIBUTION OF THE POLICIES

We have entered into a principal underwriting agreement with our affiliate, Transamerica Capital, Inc. (“TCI”), for the distribution and sale of the policies. We may reimburse TCI for certain expenses it incurs in order to pay for the distribution of the policies (e.g., commissions payable to selling firms selling the Policies, as described below.)

TCI’s home office is located at 4600 S Syracuse St. Suite 1100 Denver, Colorado 80237-2719. TCI is an indirect, wholly owned subsidiary of AEGON USA. TCI is registered as a broker-dealer with the Securities and Exchange Commission under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, and is a member of Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”). TCI is not a member of the Securities Investor Protection Corporation.

We currently offer the policies on a continuous basis. We anticipate continuing to offer the policies, but reserve the right to discontinue the offering. The policies are offered to the public through sales representatives of broker-dealers (“selling firms”) that have entered into selling agreements with us and with TCI. TCI compensates these selling firms for their services. Sales representatives with these selling firms are appointed as our insurance agents.

We and our affiliates provide paid-in capital to TCI and pay for TCI’s operating and other expenses, including overhead, legal and accounting fees. We also pay TCI and “override” payment based on the pricing of the product which becomes part of TCI’s assets. As of December 31, 2012, no amount was paid to TCI in connection with all policies sold through the separate account because the separate account had not commenced operations.

We and/or TCI or another affiliate may pay certain selling firms additional cash amounts for: (1) “preferred product” treatment of the policies in their marketing programs, which may include marketing services and increased access to their sales representatives; (2) sales promotions relating to the policies; (3) costs associated with sales conferences and educational seminars for their sales representatives; and (4) other sales expenses of the selling firms. We and/or TCI may make bonus payments to certain selling firms based on aggregate sales or persistency standards. These additional payments are not offered to all selling firms, and the terms of any particular agreement governing the payments may vary among selling firms.

VOTING RIGHTS

To the extent required by law, we will vote the underlying fund portfolios’ shares held by the separate account at regular and special shareholder meetings of the underlying fund portfolios in accordance with instructions received from persons having voting interests in the portfolios, although none of the underlying fund portfolios hold regular annual shareholder meetings. If, however, the 1940 Act or any regulation thereunder should be amended or if the present interpretation thereof should change, and as a result the Company determines that it is permitted to vote the underlying fund portfolios shares in its own right, it may elect to do so.

Before the annuity commencement date, you hold the voting interest in the selected portfolios. The number of votes that you have the right to instruct will be calculated separately for each subaccount. The number of votes that you have the right to instruct for a particular subaccount will be determined by dividing your policy value in the subaccount by the net asset value per share of the corresponding portfolio in which the subaccount invests. Fractional shares will be counted.

18

After the annuity commencement date, the person receiving annuity payments has the voting interest, and the number of votes decreases as annuity payments are made and as the reserves for the policy decrease. The person’s number of votes will be determined by dividing the reserve for the policy allocated to the applicable subaccount by the net asset value per share of the corresponding portfolio. Fractional shares will be counted.

The number of votes that you or the person receiving income payments has the right to instruct will be determined as of the date established by the underlying fund portfolio for determining shareholders eligible to vote at the meeting of the underlying fund portfolio. We will solicit voting instructions by sending you, or other persons entitled to vote, requests for instructions prior to that meeting in accordance with procedures established by the underlying fund portfolio. Portfolio shares as to which no timely instructions are received, and shares held by us in which you, or other persons entitled to vote have no beneficial interest, will be voted in proportion to the voting instructions that are received with respect to all policies participating in the same subaccount.

Each person having a voting interest in a subaccount will receive proxy material, reports, and other materials relating to the appropriate portfolio.

OTHER PRODUCTS

We make other variable annuity policies available that may also be funded through the separate account. These variable annuity policies may have different features, such as different investment choices or charges.

CUSTODY OF ASSETS

We hold assets of each of the subaccounts. The assets of each of the subaccounts are segregated and held separate and apart from the assets of the other subaccounts and from our general account assets. We maintain records of all purchases and redemptions of shares of the underlying fund portfolios held by each of the subaccounts. Additional protection for the assets of the separate account is afforded by our fidelity bond, presently in the amount of $5,000,000, covering the acts of our officers and employees.

LEGAL MATTERS

Sutherland Asbill & Brennan LLP, of Washington D.C. has provided legal advice to the Company regarding to certain matters under the federal securities laws that relate to the policies.

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

Our statutory-basis financial statements and schedules at December 31, 2012 and 2011, and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2012, appearing herein, have been audited by Ernst & Young LLP, Suite 3000, 801 Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa 50309, Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm, as set forth in their report thereon appearing elsewhere herein, and are included in reliance upon their report given on their authority as experts in accounting and auditing. There are no financial statements for the subaccounts because they had not commenced operations as of December 31, 2012.

19

OTHER INFORMATION

A registration statement has been filed with the SEC, under the Securities Act of 1933 as amended, with respect to the policies discussed in this SAI. Not all of the information set forth in the registration statement and the amendments and exhibits thereto has been included in the prospectus or this SAI. Statements contained in the prospectus and this SAI concerning the content of the policies and other legal instruments are intended to be summaries. For a complete statement of the terms of these documents, reference should be made to the instruments filed with the SEC.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The values of your interest in the separate account will be affected solely by the investment results of the selected subaccount(s). Our statutory-basis financial statements and schedules, which are included in this SAI, should be considered only as bearing on our ability to meet our obligations under the policies. They should not be considered as bearing on the investment performance of the assets held in the separate account.

20

PART C OTHER INFORMATION

Item 24. Financial Statements and Exhibits

(a) Financial Statements

All required financial statements are included in Part B of this Registration Statement.

(b) Exhibits:

(1)		Resolution of the Board of Directors of Transamerica Life Insurance Company authorizing establishment of the Separate Account. Note 11
(2)		Not Applicable.
(3)	(a)	Amended and restated Principal Underwriting Agreement by and between Transamerica Life Insurance Company, on its own behalf and on the behalf of the Separate Account, and Transamerica Capital, Inc. Note 1
	(b)	Form of Broker/Dealer and Sales Agreement. Note 11
(4)	(a)	Form of Policy. Note 12
(5)	(a)	Form of Application. Note 12
(6)	(a)	Articles of Incorporation of Transamerica Life Insurance Company. Note 2
	(b)	By-Laws of Transamerica Life Insurance Company. Note 2
(7)		Reinsurance Agreements. Not Applicable
(8)	(a)	Participation Agreement (AllianceBernstein). Note 3
	(a)(1)	Amendment No. 1 to Participation Agreement (AllianceBernstein). Note 4
	(a)(2)	Amendment No. 5 to Participation Agreement (AllianceBernstein). Note 5
	(a)(3)	Amendment No. 11 to Participation Agreement (AllianceBernstein). Note 6
(8)	(b)	Participation Agreement (American Funds). Note 7
	(b)(1)	Amendment No. 2 to Participation Agreement (American Funds). Note 7
	(b)(2)	Amendment No. 6 to Participation Agreement (American Funds). Note 11
(8)	(c)	Participation Agreement (Fidelity). Note 8
	(c)(1)	Amendment No. 7 to Participation Agreement (Fidelity). Note 9
	(c)(2)	Summary Prospectus Agreement (Fidelity). Note 11
(8)	(d)	Participation Agreement (GE). Note 7
	(d)(1)	Amendment No. 1 to Participation Agreement (GE). Note 6
(8)	(e)	Participation Agreement (TST). Note 12

(9)	(a)	Opinion and Consent of Counsel. Note 12
(10)	(a)	Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm. Note 12
(11)		Not applicable.
(12)		Not applicable.
(13)		Powers of Attorney. ( Brenda K. Clancy, Craig D. Vermie, C. Michiel van Katwijk, Eric J. Martin, Mark W. Mullin) Note 11

Note 1. Incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 50 to form N-4 Registration Statement (File No.

33-33085) filed on February 15, 2011.

Note 2. Incorporated herein by reference to Initial Filing to form N-4 Registration Statement (File No.

333-169445) filed on September 17, 2010.

Note 3. Incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 3 to form N-4 Registration Statement (File No.

333-26209) filed on April 28, 2000.

Note 4. Incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 11 to form N-4 Registration Statement (File No.

333-7509) filed on January 18, 2002.

Note 5. Incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to form N-4 Registration Statement (File No.

333-125817) filed on August 29, 2005.

Note 6. Incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 21 to Form N-4 Registration Statement (File No.

333-125817) filed on October 7, 2011.

Note 7. Incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 47 to Form N-4 Registration Statement (File No.

33-33085) filed on November 19, 2009.

Note 8. Incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 to form N-4 Registration Statement (File No.

333-125817) filed on April 27, 2006.

Note 9. Incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 26 to form N-4 Registration Statement (File No.

333-125817) filed on September 10, 2012.

Note 10. Incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 57 to form N-4 Registration Statement (File No.

033-33085) filed on September 10. 2012.

Note 11. Filed herewith.

Note 12. To be filed by Amendment.

Item 25. Directors and Officers of the Depositor (Transamerica Life Insurance Company)

Name and Business Address	Principal Positions and Offices with Depositor
Brenda K. Clancy 4333 Edgewood Road, N.E. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001	Director and President
Mark W. Mullin 4333 Edgewood Road, N.E. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001	Director and Chairman of the Board
Darryl D. Button 4333 Edgewood Road, N.E. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001	Director, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
Craig D. Vermie 4333 Edgewood Road, N.E. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001	Director, Senior Vice President, Secretary and General Counsel
Arthur C. Schneider 4333 Edgewood Road, N.E. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001	Director, Senior Vice President and Chief Tax Officer
Eric J. Martin 4333 Edgewood Road, N.E. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001	Senior Vice President and Corporate Controller

Item 26. Persons Controlled by or under Common Control with the Depositor or Registrant.

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
25 East 38th Street, LLC	Delaware	AEGON USA Realty Advisors, LLC is the non-owner Manager	Real estate investments
239 West 20th Street, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - AEGON USA Realty Advisors, LLC	Real estate investments
313 East 95th Street, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - AEGON USA Realty Advisors, LLC	Real estate investments
319 East 95th Street, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - AEGON USA Realty Advisors, LLC	Real estate investments
AEGON Alliances, Inc.	Virginia	100% Commonwealth General Corporation	Insurance company marketing support
AEGON Asset Management Services, Inc.	Delaware	100% AUSA Holding Co.	Registered investment advisor
AEGON Assignment Corporation	Illinois	100% AEGON Financial Services Group, Inc.	Administrator of structured settlements
AEGON Assignment Corporation of Kentucky	Kentucky	100% AEGON Financial Services Group, Inc.	Administrator of structured settlements
AEGON Canada ULC	Canada	AEGON Canada Holding B.V. owns 168,250,001 shares of Common Stock; 1,500 shares of Series III Preferred stock; 2 shares of Series II Preferred stock. TIHI Canada Holding, LLC owns 1,441,941.26 shares of Class B - Series I Preferred stock.	Holding company
AEGON Capital Management Inc.	Canada	100% AEGON Asset Management (Canada) B.V.	Portfolio management company/investment advisor
AEGON-CMF GP, LLC	Delaware	Transamerica Realty Services, Inc. is sole Member	Investment in commercial mortgage loans
AEGON Core Mortgage Fund, LP	Delaware	General Partner - AEGON-CMF GP, LLC	Investment in mortgages
AEGON Direct & Affinity Marketing Services Limited	Hong Kong	100% AEGON DMS Holding B.V.	Provide consulting services ancillary to the marketing of insurance products overseas.
AEGON Direct Marketing Services, Inc.	Maryland	Monumental Life Insurance Company owns 103,324 shares; Commonwealth General Corporation owns 37,161 shares	Marketing company
AEGON Direct Marketing Services Australia Pty Ltd.	Australia	100% Transamerica Direct Marketing Asia Pacific Pty Ltd.	Marketing/operations company
AEGON Direct Marketing Services Europe Ltd.	United Kingdom	100% Cornerstone International Holdings, Ltd.	Marketing
AEGON Direct Marketing Services Insurance Broker (HK) Limited	Hong Kong	100% AEGON Direct Marketing Services Hong Kong Limited	Brokerage company
AEGON Direct Marketing Services International, Inc.	Maryland	100% AUSA Holding Company	Marketing arm for sale of mass marketed insurance coverage
AEGON Direct Marketing Services Japan K.K.	Japan	100% AEGON DMS Holding B.V.	Marketing company
AEGON Direct Marketing Services Korea Co., Ltd.	Korea	100% AEGON DMS Holding B.V.	Provide consulting services ancillary to the marketing of insurance products overseas.
AEGON Direct Marketing Services Mexico, S.A. de C.V.	Mexico	100% AEGON DMS Holding B.V.	Provide management advisory and technical consultancy services.
AEGON Direct Marketing Services Mexico Servicios, S.A. de C.V.	Mexico	100% AEGON DMS Holding B.V.	Provide marketing, trading, telemarketing and advertising services in favor of any third party, particularly in favor of insurance and reinsurance companies.

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
AEGON Direct Marketing Services, Inc.	Taiwan	100% AEGON DMS Holding B.V.	Authorized business: Enterprise management consultancy, credit investigation services, to engage in business not prohibited or restricted under any law of R.O.C., except business requiring special permission of government
AEGON Direct Marketing Services (Thailand) Ltd.	Thailand	97% Transamerica International Direct Marketing Consultants, LLC; remaining 3% held by various AEGON employees	Marketing of insurance products in Thailand
AEGON Financial Services Group, Inc.	Minnesota	100% Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Marketing
AEGON Fund Management Inc.	Canada	100% AEGON Asset Management (Canada) B.V.	Mutual fund manager
AEGON Funding Company, LLC.	Delaware	100% AEGON USA, LLC	Issue debt securities-net proceeds used to make loans to affiliates
AEGON Institutional Markets, Inc.	Delaware	100% Commonwealth General Corporation	Provider of investment, marketing and administrative services to insurance companies
AEGON Life Insurance Agency Inc.	Taiwan	100% AEGON Direct Marketing Services, Inc. (Taiwan Domiciled)	Life insurance
AEGON Managed Enhanced Cash, LLC	Delaware	Members: Transamerica Life Insurance Company (91.4675%) ; Monumental Life Insurance Company (8.5325%)	Investment vehicle for securities lending cash collateral
AEGON Management Company	Indiana	100% AEGON U.S. Holding Corporation	Holding company
AEGON N.V.	Netherlands	22.446% of Vereniging AEGON Netherlands Membership Association	Holding company
AEGON Stable Value Solutions Inc.	Delaware	100% Commonwealth General Corporation	Principle Business: Provides management services to the stable value division of AEGON insurers who issue synthetic GIC contracts.
AEGON Structured Settlements, Inc.	Kentucky	100% Commonwealth General Corporation	Administers structured settlements of plaintiff’s physical injury claims against property and casualty insurance companies
AEGON U.S. Holding Corporation	Delaware	100% Transamerica Corporation	Holding company
AEGON USA Asset Management Holding, LLC	Iowa	100% AUSA Holding Company	Holding company
AEGON USA Investment Management, LLC	Iowa	100% AEGON USA Asset Management Holding, LLC	Investment advisor
AEGON USA Real Estate Services, Inc.	Delaware	100% AEGON USA Realty Advisors, Inc.	Real estate and mortgage holding company
AEGON USA Realty Advisors, LLC	Iowa	Sole Member - AEGON USA Asset Management Holding, LLC	Administrative and investment services
AEGON USA Realty Advisors of California, Inc.	Iowa	100% AEGON USA Realty Advisors, Inc.	Investments
AEGON USA Travel and Conference Services LLC	Iowa	100% Money Services, Inc.	Travel and conference services
AEGON USA, LLC	Iowa	100% AEGON U.S. Holding Corporation	Holding company
AFSG Securities Corporation	Pennsylvania	100% Commonwealth General Corporation	Inactive
ALH Properties Eight LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
ALH Properties Eleven LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
ALH Properties Four LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
ALH Properties Nine LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
ALH Properties Seven LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
ALH Properties Seventeen LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
ALH Properties Sixteen LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
ALH Properties Ten LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
ALH Properties Twelve LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
ALH Properties Two LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
American Bond Services LLC	Iowa	100% Transamerica Life Insurance Company (sole member)	Limited liability company
ARC Reinsurance Corporation	Hawaii	100% Transamerica Corporation	Property & Casualty Insurance
ARV Pacific Villas, A California Limited Partnership	California	General Partners - Transamerica Affordable Housing, Inc. (0.5%); Non-Affiliate of AEGON, Jamboree Housing Corp. (0.5%). Limited Partner: Transamerica Life Insurance Company (99%)	Property
Asia Business Consulting Company	China	100% Asia Investments Holdings, Limited	Provide various services upon request from Beijing Dafu Insurance Agency.
Asia Investments Holdings, Limited	Hong Kong	99% Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Holding company
AUSA Holding Company	Maryland	100% AEGON USA, LLC	Holding company
AUSA Properties, Inc.	Iowa	100% AUSA Holding Company	Own, operate and manage real estate
AUSACAN LP	Canada	General Partner - AUSA Holding Co. (1%); Limited Partner - AEGON USA, LLC (99%)	Inter-company lending and general business
AXA Equitable AgriFinance, LLC	Delaware	Members: AEGON USA Realty Advisors, LLC (50%); AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, a non-affiliate of AEGON (50%)	Agriculturally-based real estate advisory services
Bay Area Community Investments I, LLC	California	70%Transamerica Life Insurance Company; 30% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Investments in low income housing tax credit properties
Bay State Community Investments I, LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Investments in low income housing tax credit properties
Bay State Community Investments II, LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Investments in low income housing tax credit properties
Beijing Dafu Insurance Agency Co. Ltd.	Peoples Republic of China	10% owned by WFG China Holdings, Inc.; 90% owned by private individual (non-AEGON associated)	Insurance Agency
Canadian Premier Holdings Ltd.	Canada	100% AEGON DMS Holding B.V.	Holding company
Canadian Premier Life Insurance Company	Canada	100% Canadian Premier Holdings Ltd.	Insurance company
CBC Insurance Revenue Securitization, LLC	Delaware	100% Clark Consulting, LLC	Special purpose
Chicago Community Housing Fund I, LLC	Delaware	100% Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Investments
Clark/Bardes (Bermuda) Ltd.	Bermuda	100% Clark Consulting, LLC	Insurance agency
Clark, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - Diverisified Investment Advisors, Inc.	Holding company
Clark Consulting, LLC	Delaware	100% Clark, LLC	Financial consulting firm
Clark Investment Strategies, inc.	Delaware	100% Clark Consulting, LLC	Registered investment advisor
Clark Securities, Inc.	California	100% Clark Consulting, LLC	Broker-Dealer
Commonwealth General Corporation	Delaware	100% AEGONUSA, LLC	Holding company
Consumer Membership Services Canada Inc.	Canada	100% Canadian Premier Holdings Ltd.	Marketing of credit card protection membership services in Canada
Cornerstone International Holdings Ltd.	UK	100% AEGON DMS Holding B.V.	Holding company
CRG Insurance Agency, Inc.	California	100% Clark Consulting, Inc.	Insurance agency
Creditor Resources, Inc.	Michigan	100% AUSA Holding Co.	Credit insurance
CRI Canada Inc.	Canada	100% Creditor Resources, Inc.	Holding company
CRI Solutions Inc.	Maryland	100% Creditor Resources, Inc.	Sales of reinsurance and credit insurance
Cupples State LIHTC Investors, LLC	Delaware	100% Garnet LIHTC Fund VIII, LLC	Investments

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
Diversified Actuarial Services, Inc.	Massachusetts	100% Diversified Investment Advisors, Inc.	Employee benefit and actuarial consulting
Diversified Investors Securities Corp.	Delaware	100% Diversified Investment Advisors, Inc.	Broker-Dealer
Diversified Retirement Corporation	Delaware	100% AUSA Holding Company	Registered investment advisor
Erfahrungsschatz GmbH	Germany	100% Cornerstone International Holdings, Ltd.	Marketing/membership
FD TLIC, LLC	New York	100% Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Broadway production
FD TLIC Ltd.	United Kingdom	100% FD TLIC, LLC	Theatre production
FGH Realty Credit LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA, LLC	Real estate
FGH USA LLC	Delaware	100% RCC North America LLC	Real estate
FGP 90 West Street LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
FGP West Mezzanine LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
FGP West Street LLC	Delaware	100% FGP West Mezzanine LLC	Real estate
FGP West Street Two LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
Fifth FGP LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
Financial Planning Services, Inc.	District of Columbia	100% Commonwealth General Corporation	Special-purpose subsidiary
First FGP LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
Fourth & Market Funding, LLC	Delaware	Commonwealth General Corporation owns 0% participating percentage, but is Managing Member. Ownership: 99% Monumental Life Insurance Company and 1% Garnet Assurance Corporation II	Inactive
Fourth FGP LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
Garnet Assurance Corporation	Kentucky	100%Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Assurance Corporation II	Iowa	100% Commonwealth General Corporation	Business investments
Garnet Assurance Corporation III	Iowa	100% Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Business investments
Garnet Community Investments, LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments II, LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Securities
Garnet Community Investments III, LLC	Delaware	100%Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Business investments
Garnet Community Investments IV, LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments V, LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments VI, LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments VII, LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments VIII, LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments IX, LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments X, LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments XI, LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments XII, LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments XVIII, LLC	Delaware	100% Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Investments

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
Garnet Community Investments XX, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments XXIV, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Real estate investments
Garnet Community Investments XXV, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investment XXVI, LLC	Delaware	100% Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments XXVII, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investment XXVIII, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments XXIX, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments XXX, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet Community Investments XXXI, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund II, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments II, LLC (0.01%); Metropolitan Life Insurance Company, a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund III, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments III, LLC (0.01%); Jefferson-Pilot Life Insurance Company, a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund IV, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments IV, LLC (0.01%); Goldenrod Asset Management, Inc., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund V, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments V, LLC (0.01%); Lease Plan North America, Inc., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund VI, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments VI, LLC (0.01%); Pydna Corporation, a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund VII, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments VII, LLC (0.01%); J.P. Morgan Chase Bank, N.A., a non-AEGON affiliate(99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund VIII, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments VIII, LLC (0.01%); J.P. Morgan Chase Bank, N.A., a non-AEGON affiliate(99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund IX, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments IX, LLC (0.01%); Bank of America, N.A., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund X, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments X, LLC (0.01%); Goldenrod Asset Management, a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XI, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments XI, LLC (0.01%); NorLease, Inc., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
Garnet LIHTC Fund XII, LLC	Delaware	Garnet Community Investments XII, LLC (.01%); and the following non-AEGON affiliates: Bank of America, N.A.( 73.39%); J.P. Morgan Chase Bank, N.A. (13.30%); NorLease, Inc. (13.30%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XII-A, LLC	Delaware	Garnet Community Investments XII, LLC (0.01%); Bank of America, N.A., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XII-B, LLC	Delaware	Garnet Community Investments XII, LLC (0.01%); J.P. Morgan Chase Bank, N.A., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XII-C, LLC	Delaware	Garnet Community Investments XII, LLC (.01%); NorLease, Inc., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XIII, LLC	Delaware	Garnet Community Investments XII, LLC (.01%); and the following non-AEGON affiliates: Bank of America, N.A.( 73.39%); J.P. Morgan Chase Bank, N.A. (13.30%); NorLease, Inc. (13.30%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XIII-A, LLC	Delaware	Garnet Community Investments XII, LLC (.01%); J.P. Morgan Chase Bank, N.A., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XIII-B, LLC	Delaware	Garnet Community Investments XII, LLC (.01%); Norlease, Inc., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XIV, LLC	Delaware	0.01% Garnet Community Investments, LLC; 49.995% Wells Fargo Bank, N.A.; and 49.995% Goldenrod Asset Management, Inc.	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XV, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments, LLC (0.01%); Bank of America, N.A., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XVI, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments, LLC (0.01%); FNBC Leasing Corporation, a non-AEGON entity (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XVII, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments, LLC (0.01%); ING USA Annuity and Life Insurance company, a non-affiliate of AEGON (12.999%), and ReliaStar Life Insurance Company, a non-affiliate of AEGON (86.991%).	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XVIII, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments XVIII, LLC (0.01%); Verizon Capital Corp., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XIX, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments, LLC (0.01%); Bank of America, N.A., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XX, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - Garnet Community Investments XX, LLC	Investments

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
Garnet LIHTC Fund XXI, LLC	Delaware	100% Garnet Community Investments, LLC	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XXII, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments, LLC (0.01%); Norlease, Inc., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XXIII, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments, LLC (0.01%); Idacorp Financial Services, Inc., a non-AEGON affiliate (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XXIV, LLC	Delaware	100% Garnet Community Investments XXVI, LLC	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XXV, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investment XXV, LLC (0.01%); Garnet LIHTC Fund XXVIII LLC (1%); non-affiliates of AEGON: Mt. Hamilton Fund, LLC (97.99%); Google Affordable Housing I LLC (1%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XXVI, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments XXVI, LLC (0.01%); American Income Life Insurance Company, a non-affiliate of AEGON (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XXVII, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments XXVII, LLC (0.01%); Transamerica Life Insurance Company (16.7045%); non-affiliates of AEGON: Aetna Life Insurance Company (30.2856%); New York Life Insurance Company (22.7142%); ProAssurance Casualty Company (3.6343%); ProAssurance Indemnity Company (8.4800%); State Street Brank and Trust Company (18.1714%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XXVIII, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments XXVIII LLC (0.01%); non-affiliates of AEGON: USAA Casualty Insurance Company (17.998%); USAA General Indemnity Company (19.998%); USAA Life Insurance Company (3.999%); United Services Automobile Association (57.994%)	Real estate investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XXIX, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments XXIX, LLC (.01%); non-affiliate of AEGON: Bank of America, N.A. (99.99%)	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XXX, LLC	Delaware	Managing Member - Garnet Community Investments XXX, LLC	Investments
Garnet LIHTC Fund XXXI, LLC	Delaware	Members: Garnet Community Investments XXXI, LLC (0.1%); non-affiliates of AEGON: Thunderbolt Peak Fund, LLC (98.99%); Google Affordable Housing I, LLC (1%)	Investments
Global Preferred Re Limited	Bermuda	100% AEGON USA, LLC	Reinsurance
Horizons Acquisition 5, LLC	Florida	Sole Member - PSL Acquisitions Operating, LLC	Development company
Horizons St. Lucie Development, LLC	Florida	Sole Member - PSL Acquisitions Operating, LLC	Development company

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
Innergy Lending, LLC	Delaware	50% World Financial Group, Inc.; 50% ComUnity Lending, Inc.(non-AEGON entity)	In the process of being dissolved
Intersecurities Insurance Agency, Inc.	California	100% Western Reserve Life Assurance Co. of Ohio	Insurance agency
Investment Advisors International, Inc.	Delaware	100% AUSA Holding Company	Investments
Investors Warranty of America, Inc.	Iowa	100% AUSA Holding Co.	Leases business equipment
IWA Commercial Venture, LLC	Georgia	Sole Member - Investors Waranty of America, Inc.	Maintain property tax abatement
Legacy General Insurance Company	Canada	100% Canadian Premier Holdings Ltd.	Insurance company
Life Investors Alliance, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Purchase, own, and hold the equity interest of other entities
LIICA Holdings, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member: Transamerica Life Insurance Company	To form and capitalize LIICA Re I, Inc.
LIICA Re I, Inc.	Vermont	100% LIICA Holdings, LLC	Captive insurance company
LIICA Re II, Inc.	Vermont	100%Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Captive insurance company
Massachusetts Fidelity Trust Company	Iowa	100% AUSA Holding Co.	Trust company
MLIC Re I, Inc.	Vermont	100% Stonebridge Life Insurance Company	Captive insurance company
Money Services, Inc.	Delaware	100% AUSA Holding Co.	Provides financial counseling for employees and agents of affiliated companies
Monumental Financial Services, Inc.	Maryland	100% AEGON USA, LLC	DBA in the State of West Viriginia for United Financial Services, Inc.
Monumental General Administrators, Inc.	Maryland	100% AUSA Holding Company	Provides management services to unaffiliated third party administrator
Monumental Life Insurance Company	Iowa	87.72% Commonwealth General Corporation; 12.28% AEGON USA, LLC	Insurance Company
nVISION Financial, Inc.	Iowa	100% AUSA Holding Company	Special-purpose subsidiary
NEF Investment Company	California	100% Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Real estate development
New Markets Community Investment Fund, LLC	Iowa	50% AEGON Institutional Markets, Inc.; 50% AEGON USA Realty Advisors, Inc.	Community development entity
Oncor Insurance Services, LLC	Iowa	Sole Member - Life Investors Financial Group, Inc.	Direct sales of term life insurance
Peoples Benefit Services, LLC	Pennsylvania	Sole Member - Stonebridge Life Insurance Company	Special-purpose subsidiary
Pine Falls Re, Inc.	Vermont	100% Stonebridge Life Insurance Company	Captive insurance company
Primus Guaranty, Ltd.	Bermuda	Partners are: Transamerica Life Insurance Company (13.1%) and non-affiliates of AEGON: XL Capital, Ltd. (34.7%); CalPERS/PCO Corporate Partners Fund, LLC (13.0%); Radian Group (11.1%). The remaining 28.1% of stock is publicly owned.	Provides protection from default risk of investment grade corporate and sovereign issues of financial obligations.
Prisma Holdings, Inc. I	Delaware	100% AEGON USA Asset Management Holding, LLC	Holding company
Prisma Holdings, Inc. II	Delaware	100% AEGON USA Asset Management Holding, LLC	Holding company
PSL Acquisitions, LLC	Iowa	Sole Member: Investors Warranty of America, Inc.	Aquirer of Core Florida mortgage loans from Investors Warranty and holder of foreclosed read estate.
PSL Acquisitions Operating, LLC	Iowa	Sole Member: Investors Warranty of America, Inc.	Owner of Core subsidiary entities

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
Pyramid Insurance Company, Ltd.	Hawaii	100% Transamerica Corporation	Property & Casualty Insurance
RCC North America LLC	Delaware	100% AEGON USA, LLC	Real estate
Real Estate Alternatives Portfolio 1 LLC	Delaware	Members: Transamerica Life Insurance Company (90.96%); Monumental Life Insurance Company (6.30%); Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company (2.74%). Manager: AEGON USA Realty Advisors, Inc.	Real estate alternatives investment
Real Estate Alternatives Portfolio 2 LLC	Delaware	Members are: Transamerica Life Insurance Company (90.25%); Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company (7.5%); Stonebridge Life Insurance Company (2.25%). Manager: AEGON USA Realty Advisors, Inc.	Real estate alternatives investment
Real Estate Alternatives Portfolio 3 LLC	Delaware	Members are: Transamerica Life Insurance Company (73.4%); Monumental Life Insurance Company (25.6%); Stonebridge Life Insurance Company (1%). Manager: AEGON USA Realty Advisors, Inc.	Real estate alternatives investment
Real Estate Alternatives Portfolio 3A, Inc.	Delaware	Members: Monumental Life Insurance Company (37%); Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company (9.4%); Transamerica Life Insurance Company (52.6%); Stonebridge Life Insurance Company (1%)	Real estate alternatives investment
Real Estate Alternatives Portfolio 4 HR, LLC	Delaware	Members are: Transamerica Life Insurance Company (64%); Monumental Life Insurance Company (32%); Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company (4%). Manager: AEGON USA Realty Advisors, Inc.	Investment vehicle for alternative real estate investments that are established annually for our affiliated companies common investment
Real Estate Alternatives Portfolio 4 MR, LLC	Delaware	Members are: Transamerica Life Insurance Company (64%); Monumental Life Insurance Company (32%); Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company (4%). Manager: AEGON USA Realty Advisors, Inc.	Investment vehicle for alternative real estate investments that are established annually for our affiliated companies common investment
Realty Information Systems, Inc.	Iowa	100% Transamerica Realty Services, LLC	Information Systems for real estate investment management
Retirement Project Oakmont	California	General Partner: Transamerica Oakmont Retirement Associates, a CA limited partnership; Transamerica Life Insurance Company (limited partner); and Oakmont Gardens, a CA limited partnership (non-AEGON entity limited partner). General Partner of Transamerica Oakmont Retirement Associates is Transamerica Oakmont Corporation. 100 units of limited partnership interests widely held by individual investors.	Senior living apartment complex
River Ridge Insurance Company	Vermont	100% AEGON Management Company	Captive insurance company
Second FGP LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
Selient Inc.	Canada	100% Canadian Premier Holdings Ltd.	Application service provider providing loan origination platforms to Canadian credit unions.
Seventh FGP LLC	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
Short Hills Management Company	New Jersey	100% AEGON U.S. Holding Corporation	Holding company
Southwest Equity Life Insurance Company	Arizona	Voting common stock is allocated 75% of total cumulative vote - AEGON USA, LLC. Participating Common stock (100% owned by non-AEGON shareholders) is allocated 25% of total cumulative vote.	Insurance
St. Lucie West Development Company, LLC	Florida	Sole Member - PSL Acquisitions Operating, LLC	Development company
Stonebridge Benefit Services, Inc.	Delaware	100% Commonwealth General Corporation	Health discount plan
Stonebridge Casualty Insurance Company	Ohio	100% AEGON USA, LLC	Insurance company
Stonebridge Group, Inc.	Delaware	100% Commonwealth General Corporation	General purpose corporation
Stonebridge International Insurance Ltd.	UK	100% Cornerstone International Holdings Ltd.	General insurance company
Stonebridge Life Insurance Company	Vermont	100% Commonwealth General Corporation	Insurance company
Stonebridge Reinsurance Company	Vermont	100% Stonebridge Life Insurance Company	Captive insurance company
TAH-MCD IV, LLC	Iowa	Sole Member - Transamerica Affordable Housing, Inc.	Serve as the general partner for McDonald Corporate Tax Credit Fund IV Limited Partnership
TAH Pentagon Funds, LLC	Iowa	Sole Member - Transamerica Affordable Housing, Inc.	Serve as a general partner in a lower-tier tax credit entity
TAHP Fund 1, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - Monumental Life Insurance Company	Real estate investments
TAHP Fund 2, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - Garnet LIHTC Fund VIII, LLC	Low incoming housing tax credit
TAHP Fund VII, LLC	Delaware	Investor Member: Garnet LIHTC Fund XIX, LLC	Real estatement investments
TCF Asset Management Corporation	Colorado	100% TCFC Asset Holdings, Inc.	A depository for foreclosed real and personal property
TCFC Air Holdings, Inc.	Delaware	100% Transamerica Commercial Finance Corporation, I	Holding company
TCFC Asset Holdings, Inc.	Delaware	100% Transamerica Commercial Finance Corporation, I	Holding company
The AEGON Trust Advisory Board: Mark W. Mullin, Alexander R. Wynaendts, and Craig D. Vermie	Delaware	AEGON International B.V.	Voting Trust
The RCC Group, Inc.	Delaware	100% FGH USA LLC	Real estate
THH Acquisitions, LLC	Iowa	Sole Member - Investors Waranty of America, Inc.	Acquirer of Core South Carolina mortgage loans from Investors Warranty of America, Inc. and holder of foreclosed real estate.
TIHI Canada Holding, LLC	Iowa	Sole Member - Transamerica International Holdings, Inc.	Holding company

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
TIHI Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.	Mexico	95% Transamerica International Holdings, Inc.; 5% Transamerica Life Insurance Company	To render and receive all kind of administrative, accountant, mercantile and financial counsel and assistance to and from any other Mexican or foreign corporation, whether or not this company is a shareholder of them
TLIC Riverwood Reinsurance, Inc.	Iowa	100% Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Limited purpose subsidiary life insurance company
Tradition Development Company, LLC	Florida	Sole Member – PSL Acquisitions Operating, LLC	Development company
Tradition Irrigation Company, LLC	Florida	Sole Member – PSL Acquisitions Operating, LLC	Irrigation company
Transamerica Accounts Holding Corporation	Delaware	100% TCFC Asset Holdings, Inc.	Holding company
Transamerica Advisors Life Insurance Company	Arkansas	100% AEGON USA, LLC	Insurance company
Transamerica Advisors Life Insurance Company of New York	New York	100% AEGON USA, LLC	Insurance company
Transamerica Affinity Marketing Corretora de Seguros Ltda.	Brazil	749,000 quota shares owned by AEGON DMS Holding B.V.; 1 quota share owned by AEGON International B.V.	Brokerage company
Transamerica Affinity Services, Inc.	Maryland	100% AEGON Direct Marketing Services, Inc.	Marketing company
Transamerica Affordable Housing, Inc.	California	100% Transamerica Realty Services, LLC	General partner LHTC Partnership
Transamerica Agency Network, Inc.	Iowa	100% AUSA Holding Company	Special purpose subsidiary
Transamerica Annuity Service Corporation	New Mexico	100% Transamerica International Holdings, Inc.	Performs services required for structured settlements
Transamerica Asset Management, Inc.	Florida	Western Reserve Life Assurance Co. of Ohio owns 77%; AUSA Holding Co. owns 23%.	Fund advisor
Transamerica Aviation LLC	Delaware	100% TCFC Air Holdings, Inc.	Special purpose corporation
Transamerica Capital, Inc.	California	100% AUSA Holding Co.	Broker/Dealer
Transamerica Commercial Finance Corporation, I	Delaware	100% Transamerica Finance Corporation	Holding company
Transamerica Consultora Y Servicios Limitada	Chile	95% Transamerica Life Insurance Company; 5% Transamerica International Holdings, Inc.	Special purpose limited liability corporation
Transamerica Consumer Finance Holding Company	Delaware	100% TCFC Asset Holdings, Inc.	Consumer finance holding company
Transamerica Corporation	Delaware	100% The AEGON Trust	Major interest in insurance and finance
Transamerica Corporation	Oregon	100% Transamerica Corporation	Holding company
Transamerica Direct Marketing Asia Pacific Pty Ltd.	Australia	100% AEGON DMS Holding B.V.	Holding company
Transamerica Direct Marketing Consultants, LLC	Maryland	51% Hugh J. McAdorey; 49% AEGON Direct Marketing Services, Inc.	Provide consulting services ancillary to the marketing of insurance products overseas.
Transamerica Direct Marketing Consultants Private Limited	India	100% AEGON DMS Holding B.V.	Marketing consultant
Transamerica Distribution Finance – Overseas, Inc.	Delaware	100% TCFC Asset Holdings, Inc.	Commercial Finance
Transamerica Finance Corporation	Delaware	100% Transamerica Corporation	Commercial & Consumer Lending & equipment leasing

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
Transamerica Financial Advisors, Inc.	Delaware	1,00 shares owned by AUSA Holding Company; 209 shares owned by Transamerica International Holdings, Inc.	Broker/Dealer
Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company	New York	87.40% AEGON USA, LLC; 12.60% Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Insurance
Transamerica Fund Services, Inc.	Florida	Western Reserve Life Assurance Co. of Ohio owns 44%; AUSA Holding Company owns 56%	Mutual fund
Transamerica Funding LP	U.K.	99% Transamerica Leasing Holdings, Inc.; 1% Transamerica Commercial Finance Corporation, I	Intermodal leasing
Transamerica Home Loan	California	100% Transamerica Consumer Finance Holding Company	Consumer mortgages
Transamerica Insurance Marketing Asia Pacific Pty Ltd.	Australia	100% Transamerica Direct Marketing Asia Pacific Pty Ltd.	Insurance intermediary
Transamerica International Direct Marketing Consultants, LLC	Maryland	51% Hugh J. McAdorey; 49% AEGON Direct Marketing Services, Inc.	Provide consulting services ancillary to the marketing of insurance products overseas.
Transamerica International Holdings, Inc.	Delaware	100% AEGON USA, LLC	Holding company
Transamerica International RE (Bermuda) Ltd.	Bermuda	100% AEGON USA, LLC	Reinsurance
Transamerica International Re Escritório de Representação no Brasil Ltd	Brazil	95% Transamerica International Re(Bermuda) Ltd.; 5% Transamerica International Holdings, Inc.	Insurance and reinsurance consulting
Transamerica Investment Management, LLC	Delaware	Sole Member - AEGON USA Asset Management Holding, LLC	Investment advisor
Transamerica Leasing Holdings, Inc.	Delaware	100% Transamerica Finance Corporation	Holding company
Transamerica Life (Bermuda) Ltd.	Bermuda	100% Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Long-term life insurer in Bermuda - - will primarily write fixed universal life and term insurance
Transamerica Life Canada	Canada	100% AEGON Canada ULC	Life insurance company
Transamerica Life Insurance Company	Iowa	676,190 shares Common Stock owned by Transamerica International Holdings, Inc.; 86,590 shares of Preferred Stock owned by Transamerica Corporation; 30,564 shares of Preferred Stock owned by AEGON USA, LLC	Insurance
Transamerica Minerals Company	California	100% Transamerica Realty Services, LLC	Owner and lessor of oil and gas properties
Transamerica Oakmont Corporation	California	100% Transamerica International Holdings, Inc.	General partner retirement properties

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
Transamerica Oakmont Retirement Associates	California	General Partner is Transamerica Oakmont Corporation. 100 units of limited partnership interests widely held by individual investors.	Senior living apartments
Transamerica Pacific Insurance Company, Ltd.	Hawaii	26,000 shares common stock owned by Commonwealth General Corporation; 1,000 shares of common stock owned by Transamerica International Holdings, Inc.	Life insurance
Transamerica Pyramid Properties LLC	Iowa	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Realty limited liability company
Transamerica Realty Investment Properties LLC	Delaware	100% Monumental Life Insurance Company	Realty limited liability company
Transamerica Realty Services, LLC	Delaware	AUSA Holding Company - sole Member	Real estate investments
Transamerica Resources, Inc.	Maryland	100% Monumental General Administrators, Inc.	Provides actuarial consulting services
Transamerica Retirement Management, Inc.	Minnesota	100% AEGON Financial Services Group, Inc.	Life Insurance and underwriting services
Transamerica Retirement Services Corp.	Ohio	100% AUSA Holding Company	Record keeping
Transamerica Small Business Capital, Inc.	Delaware	100% TCFC Asset Holdings, Inc.	Holding company
Transamerica Trailer Leasing Sp. Z.O.O.	Poland	100% Transamerica Leasing Holdings, Inc.	Leasing
Transamerica Vendor Financial Services Corporation	Delaware	100% TCFC Asset Holdings, Inc.	Provides commercial leasing
United Financial Services, Inc.	Maryland	100% AEGON USA, LLC	General agency
Universal Benefits, LLC	Iowa	100% AUSA Holding Co.	Third party administrator
Western Reserve Life Assurance Co. of Ohio	Ohio	100% AEGON USA, LLC	Insurance
WFG China Holdings, Inc.	Delaware	100% World Financial Group, Inc.	Hold interest in Insurance Agency located in Peoples Republic of China
WFG Insurance Agency of Puerto Rico, Inc.	Puerto Rico	100% World Financial Group Insurance Agency, Inc.	Insurance agency
WFG Properties Holdings, LLC	Georgia	100% World Financial Group, Inc.	Marketing
WFG Property & Casualty Insurance Agency of Nevada, Inc.	Nevada	100% WFG Property & Casualty Insurance Agency, Inc.	Insurance agency
WFG Property & Casualty Insurance Agency, Inc.	Georgia	100% World Financial Group Insurance Agency, Inc.	Insurance agency
WFG Reinsurance Limited	Bermuda	51% owned by World Financial Group, Inc; remaining 49% is annually offered to independent contractors associated with WFG Reinsurance Ltd.	Reinsurance
WFG Securities of Canada, Inc.	Canada	100% World Financial Group Holding Company of Canada, Inc.	Mutual fund dealer
World Financial Group Holding Company of Canada Inc.	Canada	100% Transamerica International Holdings, Inc.	Holding company
World Financial Group, Inc.	Delaware	100% AEGON Asset Management Services, Inc.	Marketing
World Financial Group Insurance Agency of Canada Inc.	Ontario	50% World Financial Group Holding Co. of Canada Inc.; 50% World Financial Group Subholding Co. of Canada Inc.	Insurance agency
World Financial Group Insurance Agency of Hawaii, Inc.	Hawaii	100% World Financial Group Insurance Agency, Inc.	Insurance agency
World Financial Group Insurance Agency of Massachusetts, Inc.	Massachusetts	100% World Financial Group Insurance Agency, Inc.	Insurance agency
World Financial Group Insurance Agency of Wyoming, Inc.	Wyoming	100% World Financial Group Insurance Agency, Inc.	Insurance agency

Name	Jurisdiction of Incorporation	Percent of Voting Securities Owned	Business
World Financial Group Insurance Agency, Inc.	California	100% Western Reserve Life Assurance Co. of Ohio	Insurance agency
World Financial Group Subholding Company of Canada Inc.	Canada	100% World Financial Group Holding Company of Canada, Inc.	Holding company
World Group Securities, Inc.	Delaware	100% AEGON Asset Management Services, Inc.	Broker-dealer
Yarra Rapids, LLC	Delaware	Yarra Rapids Management, LLC is the non-owner Manager	Real estate investments
Yarra Rapids Management, LLC	Delaware	AEGON USA Realty Advisors, LLC is non-owner Manager; no ownership interests at this time.	Company organized for the intention of real estate investments but no business at this time
Zahorik Company, Inc.	California	100% AUSA Holding Co.	Inactive
Zero Beta Fund, LLC	Delaware	Members are: Transamerica Life Insurance Company (74.0181%); Monumental Life Insurance Company (23.6720%); Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company (2.3097%). Manager: AEGON USA Investment Management LLC	Aggregating vehicle formed to hold various fund investments.

Item 27. Number of Contract Owners

As of October 31, 2012, there were no Contract owners.

Item 28. Indemnification

The Iowa Code (Sections 490.850 et. seq.) provides for permissive indemnification in certain situations, mandatory indemnification in other situations, and prohibits indemnification in certain situations. The Code also specifies producers for determining when indemnification payments can be made.

Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the Depositor pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the Depositor has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the Depositor of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered), the Depositor will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

Item 29. Principal Underwriters—

(a) Transamerica Capital, Inc. serves as the principal underwriter for:

Transamerica Capital, Inc. serves as the principal underwriter for the Retirement Builder Variable Annuity Account, Separate Account VA A, Separate Account VA B, Separate Account VA C, Separate Account VA D, Separate Account VA E, Separate Account VA F, Separate Account VA I, Separate Account VA J, Separate Account VA K, Separate Account VA L, Separate Account VA M, Separate Account VA P, Separate Account VA Q, Separate Account VA R, Separate Account VA S, Separate Account VA W, Separate Account VA X, Separate Account VA Y; Separate Account VA EE, Separate Account VA FF, Separate Account VA HH, Separate Account VA-1, Separate Account VA-2L, Separate Account VA-5, Separate Account VA-6, Separate Account VA-7, Separate Account VA-8, Separate Account Fund B, Separate Account Fund C, Transamerica Corporate Separate Account Sixteen, Transamerica Separate Account R3, Separate Account VL, Separate Account VUL-1; Separate Account VUL-2, Separate Account VUL-3, Separate Account VUL-4, Separate Account VUL-5, Separate Account VUL-6, Separate Account VUL A, and Variable Life Account A. These accounts are separate accounts of Transamerica Life Insurance Company.

Transamerica Capital, Inc. serves as principal underwriter for Separate Account VA N, Separate Account VA BNY, Separate Account VA HNY, Separate Account VA PP, Separate Account VA QNY, Separate Account VA QQ, Separate Account VA WNY, Separate Account VA YNY, TFLIC Separate Account VNY, Separate Account VA-2LNY, TFLIC Separate Account C, Separate Account VA-5NLNY, Separate Account VA-6NY, TFLIC Series Annuity Account and TFLIC Series Life Account. These accounts are separate accounts of Transamerica Financial Life Insurance Company.

Transamerica Capital, Inc. serves as principal underwriter for Separate Account VA U, Separate Account VA V, Separate Account VA AA, WRL Series Life Account, WRL Series Life Account G, WRL Series Life Corporate Account, WRL Series Annuity Account and WRL Series Annuity Account B. These accounts are separate accounts of Western Reserve Life Assurance Co. of Ohio.

Transamerica Capital, Inc. also serves as principal underwriter for Separate Account VA BB, Separate Account VA CC and Separate Account VL E. This account is a separate account of Monumental Life Insurance Company.

Transamerica Capital, Inc. also serves as principal underwriter for Merrill Lynch Life Variable Annuity Separate Account, Merrill Lynch Life Variable Annuity Separate Account A, Merrill Lynch Life Variable Annuity Separate Account B, Merrill Lynch Life Variable Annuity Separate Account C, Merrill Lynch Life Variable Annuity Separate Account D, Merrill Lynch Variable Life Separate Account, and Merrill Lynch Life Variable Life Separate Account II. These accounts are separate accounts of Transamerica Advisors Life Insurance Company.

Transamerica Capital, Inc. also serves as principal underwriter for ML of New York Variable Annuity Separate Account, ML of New York Variable Annuity Separate Account A, ML of New York Variable Annuity Separate Account B, ML of New York Variable Annuity Separate Account C, ML of New York Variable Annuity Separate Account D, ML of New York Variable Life Separate Account, and ML of New York Variable Life Separate Account II. These accounts are separate accounts of Transamerica Advisors Life Insurance Company of New York.

Transamerica Capital, Inc. also serves as principal underwriter for Transamerica Series Trust, Transamerica Funds and Transamerica Investors, Inc.

(b) Directors and Officers of Transamerica Capital, Inc.:

Name	Principal Business Address	Position and Offices with Underwriter
Thomas A. Swank	(1)	Director
Michael W. Brandsma	(2)	Director, President and Chief Financial Officer
David W. Hopewell	(1)	Director
David R. Paulsen	(2)	Director, Chief Executive Officer and Chief Sales Officer
Blake S. Bostwick	(2)	Chief Marketing Officer and Chief Operations Officer
Courtney John	(2)	Chief Compliance Officer and Vice President
Erin K. Burke	(1)	Assistant Secretary
Amy Angle	(3)	Assistant Vice President
Elizabeth Belanger	(4)	Assistant Vice President
Margaret A. Cullem-Fiore	(5)	Assistant Vice President
Dennis P. Gallagher	(5)	Assistant Vice President
Christy Post-Rissin	(5)	Assistant Vice President
Brenda L. Smith	(5)	Assistant Vice President
Darin D. Smith	(1)	Assistant Vice President
Lisa Wachendorf	(1)	Assistant Vice President
Arthur D. Woods	(5)	Assistant Vice President
Carrie N. Powicki	(2)	Secretary
Karen R. Wright	(3)	Treasurer
Karen D. Heburn	(5)	Vice President
Wesley J. Hodgson	(2)	Vice President

(1) 4333 Edgewood Road N.E., Cedar Rapids, IA 52499-0001

(2) 4600 S Syracuse St, Suite 1100, Denver, CO 80237-2719

(3) 100 Light Street, Floor B1, Baltimore, MD 21202

(4) 440 Mamaroneck Avenue, Harrison, NY 10528

(5) 570 Carillon Parkway, St. Petersburg, FL 33716

(c) Compensation to Principal Underwriter:

Name of Principal Underwriter	Net Underwriting Discounts and Commissions(1)		Compensation on Redemption		Brokerage Commissions		Compensation
Transamerica Capital, Inc.		0		0		0		0

⁽¹⁾  Fiscal Year 2011

Item 30. Location of Accounts and Records

The records required to be maintained by Section 31(a) of the Investment Company Act of 1940 and Rules 31a-1 to 31a-3 promulgated thereunder, are maintained by Manager Regulatory Filing Unit, Transamerica Life Insurance Company at 4333 Edgewood Road, N.E., Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52499-0001.

Item 31. Management Services.

All management Contracts are discussed in Part A or Part B.

Item 32. Undertakings

(a) Registrant undertakes that it will file a post-effective amendment to this registration statement as frequently as necessary to ensure that the audited financial statements in the registration statement are never more than 16 months old for so long as Premiums under the Contract may be accepted.

(b) Registrant undertakes that it will include either (i) a postcard or similar written communication affixed to or included in the Prospectus that the applicant can remove to send for a Statement of Additional Information or (ii) a space in the Policy application that an applicant can check to request a Statement of Additional Information.

(c) Registrant undertakes to deliver any Statement of Additional Information and any financial statements required to be made available under this Form promptly upon written or oral request to Transamerica Life Insurance Company at the address or phone number listed in the Prospectus.

(d) Transamerica Life Insurance Company hereby represents that the fees and charges deducted under the contracts, in the aggregate, are reasonable in relation to the services rendered, the expenses expected to be incurred, and the risks assumed by Transamerica Life Insurance Company.

SECTION 403(B) REPRESENTATIONS

Transamerica Life Insurance Company represents that it is relying on a no-action letter dated November 28, 1988, to the American Council of Life Insurance (Ref. No. IP-6-88), regarding Sections 22(e), 27(c)(1), and 27(d) of the Investment Company Act of 1940, in connection with redeemability restrictions on Section 403(b) Policies, and that paragraphs numbered (1) through (4) of that letter will be complied with.

TEXAS ORP REPRESENTATION

The Registrant intends to offer policies to participants in the Texas Option Retirement Program. In connection with that offering, the Registrant is relying on Rule 6c-7 under the Investment Company Act of 1940 and is complying with, or shall comply with, paragraphs (a) – (d) of that Rule.

SIGNATURES

As required by the Securities Act of 1933 and the Investment Company Act of 1940, the Registrant has caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf, in the City of Cedar Rapids and State of Iowa, on this 19^th day of December, 2012.

SEPARATE ACCOUNT VA B

TRANSAMERICA LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY

Depositor

Brenda K. Clancy*

President

As required by the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signatures	Title	Date
	Director and Chairman of the Board	, 2012
Mark W. Mullin*
	Director, Senior Vice President, Secretary and General Counsel	, 2012
Craig D. Vermie*
	Senior Vice President and Corporate Controller	, 2012
Eric J. Martin*
	Director and President	, 2012
Brenda K. Clancy*
	Director, Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer	, 2012
C. Michiel van Katwijk*
/s/ Darin D. Smith	Assistant Secretary, and Managing Assistant General Counsel	December 19, 2012
Darin D. Smith

*By: Darin D. Smith – Attorney-in-Fact pursuant to Powers of Attorney filed previously and herewith.

Registration No.

333 -                    

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549

EXHIBITS

TO

FORM N-4

REGISTRATION STATEMENT

UNDER

THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933

FOR

TRANSAMERICA VARIABLE ANNUITY SERIES

EXHIBIT INDEX

Exhibit No.	Description of Exhibit	Page No.*
1	Resolution of the Board of Directors
3(b)	Form of Broker/Dealer Sales Agreement
8(b)(2)	Amendment No. 6 to Participation Agreement (American Funds)
8(c)(2)	Summary Prospectus Agreement (Fidelity)
13	Powers of Attorney

* Page numbers included only in manually executed original.